DCP250 User`s Manual 57-77-25-18

DCP250
Controller Programmer
User’s Manual
57-77-25-18
Revision 1
October 2014
Honeywell Process Solutions
Copyrights, Notices and Trademarks
© Copyright 2014 by Honeywell, Inc.
Revision 1, October 2014
While the information in this document is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate,
Honeywell disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose
and makes no express warranties except as may be stated in the written agreement with and for its
customers. In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any indirect, special, or consequential
damages. The information and specifications in this document are subject to change without notice.
Honeywell, TDC 3000, SFC, SmartLine, PlantScape, Experion PKS, and TotalPlant are registered
trademarks of Honeywell International Inc. Other brand or product names are trademarks of their
respective owners. While the information in this document is presented in good faith and believed to
be accurate, Honeywell disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a
particular purpose and makes no express warranties except as may be stated in the written agreement
with and for its customers. In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any indirect, special, or
consequential damages. The information and specifications in this document are subject to change
without notice.
Honeywell, TDC 3000, SFC, SmartLine, PlantScape, Experion PKS, and TotalPlant are registered
trademarks of Honeywell International Inc. Other brand or product names are trademarks of their
respective owners.
Honeywell Process Solutions
1250 W Sam Houston Pkwy S
Houston, TX 77042
Warning: The international hazard symbol is inscribed adjacent to the rear connection terminals.
It is important to read this manual before installing or commissioning the unit.
Warning: This symbol means the equipment is protected throughout by double insulation.
Warning: Products covered by this manual are suitable for Indoor use, Installation Category II,
Pollution category 2 environments.
Note: It is strongly recommended that applications incorporate a high or low limit protective
device, which will shut down the equipment at a pre-set process condition in order to prevent
possible damage to property or products.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
iii
Support and Contact Information
For Europe, Asia Pacific, North and South America
contact details, refer to the back page of this manual
or the appropriate Honeywell Solution Support web site:
Honeywell Corporate
www.honeywellprocess.com
Honeywell Process Solutions
https://www.honeywellprocess.com/enUS/explore/products/instrumentation/panel-mounted-controllers-andprogrammers
Training Classes
http://www.automationccollege.com
Telephone and Email Contacts
Area
iv
Organization
United States and
Canada
Honeywell Inc.
Global Email Support
Honeywell Process Solutions
Phone Number
1-800-343-0228 Customer Service
1-800-423-9883 Global Technical Support
[email protected]
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Table of Contents
1
Introduction.............................................................................................................................1
2
Installation ..............................................................................................................................2
3
2.1
Unpacking .......................................................................................................................................... 2
2.2
Installation .......................................................................................................................................... 2
2.3
Panel-Mounting .................................................................................................................................. 2
2.4
Cleaning ............................................................................................................................................. 3
Field Upgrade Options ...........................................................................................................4
3.1
Plug-Modules and Upgradeable Functions........................................................................................ 4
3.1.1
3.2
Preparing to Install or Remove Plug-in Modules ............................................................................... 5
3.2.1
4
Main Board Connectors ............................................................................................................. 6
3.3
Removing/Replacing Option Modules ............................................................................................... 7
3.4
Replacing the Instrument in its Housing ............................................................................................ 7
3.5
Auto Detection of Plug-in Modules .................................................................................................... 7
3.6
Data Recorder Board ......................................................................................................................... 8
3.7
Profiler Enabling ................................................................................................................................. 8
Electrical Installation ..............................................................................................................9
4.1
5
Board Positions ......................................................................................................................... 5
Avoiding EMC Problems .................................................................................................................... 9
4.1.1
Cable Isolation & Protection ...................................................................................................... 9
4.1.2
Noise Suppression at Source .................................................................................................. 10
4.2
Sensor Placement (Thermocouple or RTD) .................................................................................... 11
4.3
Thermocouple Wire Identification .................................................................................................... 11
4.4
Pre-wiring – Cautions, Warnings & Information ............................................................................... 12
4.5
Connections and Wiring ................................................................................................................... 13
4.5.1
Central Terminal Connections ................................................................................................. 13
4.5.2
Outer Terminal Connections ................................................................................................... 14
4.5.3
Power Connections ................................................................................................................. 14
4.5.4
Universal Input 1 Connections ................................................................................................ 16
4.5.5
Universal / Auxiliary Input 2 Connections ................................................................................ 17
4.5.6
Base Option 1 .......................................................................................................................... 19
4.5.7
Base Option 2 .......................................................................................................................... 19
4.5.8
Plug-in Module Slot 1 Connections ......................................................................................... 20
4.5.9
Plug-in module slot 2 Connections .......................................................................................... 21
4.5.10
Plug-in Slot 3 Connections .................................................................................................... 23
4.5.11
Plug-in Slot A Connections .................................................................................................... 25
4.5.12
Option C Connections ........................................................................................................... 27
Powering Up..........................................................................................................................29
5.1
Powering Up Procedure ................................................................................................................... 29
5.2 Front Panel Overview ...................................................................................................................... 29
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
v
6
7
5.3
Display ............................................................................................................................................. 29
5.4
LED Functions .................................................................................................................................. 29
5.5
Keypad Functions & Navigation ....................................................................................................... 30
Messages & Error Indications ............................................................................................. 31
6.1
Plug-in Module Problems ................................................................................................................. 31
6.2
Sensor Break Detection ................................................................................................................... 31
6.3
Un-Calibrated Input Detection .......................................................................................................... 31
6.4
PV Over-range or Under-range Indication ....................................................................................... 31
6.5
Auxiliary Input Over-range or Under-range Indication ..................................................................... 31
6.6
Cascade-Open ................................................................................................................................. 32
6.7
Profile Not Valid ............................................................................................................................... 32
6.8
USB Data Transfer Failure message ............................................................................................... 32
6.9
Getting Help ..................................................................................................................................... 32
Application Setup................................................................................................................. 33
7.1
8
Pre-commissioning Considerations ................................................................................................. 33
Operation and Configuration Menus................................................................................... 36
8.1
Operation Mode ............................................................................................................................... 36
8.1.1
Navigating and Adjusting Values in Operator Mode............................................................... 36
8.1.2
Operation Mode Screen Sequence ........................................................................................ 37
8.2
Main Menu ....................................................................................................................................... 41
8.2.1
Entry into the Main Menu ........................................................................................................ 41
8.2.2
Unlock Codes ......................................................................................................................... 42
8.3
Setup Wizard .................................................................................................................................... 42
8.3.1
8.4
Supervisor Mode .............................................................................................................................. 43
8.4.1
8.5
8.6
Entry into the Configuration Menu .......................................................................................... 45
The USB Menu................................................................................................................................. 63
8.6.1
8.7
Entry into the USB Menu ........................................................................................................ 63
Recorder Control Menu .................................................................................................................... 65
8.7.1
8.8
Entry into the Recorder Control Menu .................................................................................... 65
Profiler Setup Menu ......................................................................................................................... 66
8.8.1
8.9
Entry into the Profiler Setup Menu.......................................................................................... 66
Profiler Control Menu ....................................................................................................................... 69
8.10
Service & Product Information Mode............................................................................................ 70
8.10.1
8.11
8.12
Entry into Service & Product Information Mode ................................................................... 70
Automatic Tuning Menu ............................................................................................................... 70
8.11.1
vi
Entry into Supervisor Mode .................................................................................................... 43
Configuration Menu .......................................................................................................................... 45
8.5.1
9
Manual entry to the Setup Wizard .......................................................................................... 43
Entry into the Automatic Tuning Menu ................................................................................. 71
Lost Lock Codes ........................................................................................................................... 72
Input Calibration & Multi-point Scaling............................................................................... 73
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
9.1
User Calibration ............................................................................................................................... 73
9.1.1
Calibration Reminder ............................................................................................................... 73
9.1.2
Single Point Calibration ........................................................................................................... 73
9.1.3
Two Point Calibration .............................................................................................................. 74
9.1.4
Multi-point Scaling ................................................................................................................... 74
9.2
10
Base Calibration Adjustment ........................................................................................................... 75
9.2.1
Required Equipment ................................................................................................................ 75
9.2.2
Performing a Calibration Check .............................................................................................. 75
9.2.3
Recalibration Procedure .......................................................................................................... 76
Digital Inputs .........................................................................................................................77
10.1
Digital Signal Type ....................................................................................................................... 77
10.1.1
11
12
Inverting Digital Inputs ........................................................................................................... 77
10.2
Soft Digital Inputs ......................................................................................................................... 78
10.3
Digital Input Functions .................................................................................................................. 78
Cascade Control ...................................................................................................................80
11.1
Example Cascade Application ..................................................................................................... 80
11.2
Normal Cascade Operation .......................................................................................................... 81
11.3
Cascade-Open ............................................................................................................................. 81
11.4
Manual Mode ................................................................................................................................ 81
11.5
Cascade Tuning ........................................................................................................................... 81
11.5.1
To automatically pre-tune a cascade: ................................................................................... 81
11.5.2
To manually tune a cascade: ................................................................................................ 82
Ratio Control .........................................................................................................................83
12.1
Stoichiometric Combustion........................................................................................................... 83
13
Redundant Input ...................................................................................................................85
14
Valve Motor Drive / 3-Point Stepping Control .....................................................................86
14.1
Special Wiring Considerations for Valve Motor Control ............................................................... 86
14.2
Position Feedback ........................................................................................................................ 87
14.2.1
15
Setpoint Sources ..................................................................................................................88
15.1
Loop 1 Setpoint Sources .............................................................................................................. 88
15.1.1
15.2
Loop 1 Profile Setpoint .......................................................................................................... 88
Loop 2 Setpoint Sources .............................................................................................................. 88
15.2.1
16
Valve Limiting ........................................................................................................................ 87
Loop 2 Profile Setpoint .......................................................................................................... 88
Profiler ...................................................................................................................................89
16.1
Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 89
16.2
Profiler Enabling ........................................................................................................................... 89
16.3
Profile Components ...................................................................................................................... 89
16.3.1
Profile Header & Segment Information.................................................................................. 89
16.3.2
Profile Starting & Standard Segments................................................................................... 90
16.3.3
Two Loop Profiles .................................................................................................................. 90
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
vii
16.3.4
16.4
Profile Running / Holding vs. Hold Segments .............................................................................. 92
16.5
The Auto-Hold Feature ................................................................................................................. 92
16.5.1
17
Profile Cycles & Repeat Sequences ............................................................................................ 94
16.7
Power/Signal Lost Recovery Actions ........................................................................................... 95
16.8
Profile End Actions ....................................................................................................................... 96
16.9
Profile Abort Actions ..................................................................................................................... 97
USB Interface........................................................................................................................ 98
Using the USB Port ...................................................................................................................... 98
17.1.1
Recordable Values ....................................................................................................................... 99
18.1.1
Recorder Control and Status ................................................................................................ 99
18.1.2
Uploading Data ..................................................................................................................... 99
18.2
20
Additional Features & Benefits from the Recorder ..................................................................... 100
Controller Tuning ............................................................................................................... 101
19.1
PID Sets & Gain Scheduling ...................................................................................................... 101
19.2
Automatic Tuning........................................................................................................................ 102
19.3
Manually Tuning ......................................................................................................................... 104
19.3.1
Tuning Control Loops - PID with Primary Output only........................................................ 104
19.3.2
Tuning Control Loops - PID with Primary & Secondary Outputs ........................................ 104
19.3.3
Valve, Damper & Speed Controller Tuning ........................................................................ 106
19.3.4
Fine Tuning ......................................................................................................................... 108
Serial Communications ..................................................................................................... 111
20.1
Supported Protocols ................................................................................................................... 111
20.1.1
RS485 Configuration .......................................................................................................... 111
20.1.2
Ethernet Configuration ........................................................................................................ 111
20.2
Supported Modbus Functions .................................................................................................... 113
20.2.1
Function Descriptions ......................................................................................................... 113
20.2.2
Exception Responses ......................................................................................................... 114
20.3
Modbus Parameters ................................................................................................................... 115
20.3.1
20.4
viii
USB Memory Stick Folders & Files ...................................................................................... 98
Data Recorder....................................................................................................................... 99
18.1
19
Auto Hold Examples ............................................................................................................. 93
16.6
17.1
18
Loop-back Segments ............................................................................................................ 91
Data Formats ...................................................................................................................... 115
Parameter Register Address Listings ......................................................................................... 115
20.4.1
Calibration Reminder Parameters ...................................................................................... 116
20.4.2
Universal Process Input 1 Parameters ............................................................................... 116
20.4.3
Universal Process Input 2 Parameters ............................................................................... 120
20.4.4
Digital Input Setup Parameters........................................................................................... 124
20.4.5
Plug-in Module Slot A Parameters ..................................................................................... 137
20.4.6
Plug-in Module Slot 1 Parameters ..................................................................................... 138
20.4.7
Plug-in Module Slot 2 Parameters ...................................................................................... 141
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
21
20.4.8
Plug-in Module Slot 3 Parameters....................................................................................... 144
20.4.9
Output 4 Parameters ........................................................................................................... 146
20.4.10
Output 5 Parameters ......................................................................................................... 148
20.4.11
Linear Output 6 Parameters .............................................................................................. 149
20.4.12
Linear Output 7 Parameters .............................................................................................. 150
20.4.13
Loop 1 Setpoint Parameters .............................................................................................. 151
20.4.14
Loop 2 Setpoint Parameters .............................................................................................. 152
20.4.15
Aux A Input Parameters .................................................................................................... 153
20.4.16
Loop 1 Control Parameters ............................................................................................... 153
20.4.17
Loop 2 Control Parameters ............................................................................................... 159
20.4.18
Alarm Parameters.............................................................................................................. 165
20.4.19
Recorder & Clock Parameters ........................................................................................... 173
20.4.20
Display & Security ............................................................................................................. 178
20.4.21
Instrument Data Parameters ............................................................................................. 185
20.4.22
Profiler Control & Status Parameters ................................................................................ 187
20.4.23
Profile Setup via Modbus .................................................................................................. 189
Glossary ..............................................................................................................................206
21.1
Active Setpoint ........................................................................................................................... 206
21.2
Actual Setpoint ........................................................................................................................... 206
21.3
Alarm Activation Inhibit ............................................................................................................... 206
21.4
Alarm Configuration.................................................................................................................... 206
21.5
Alarm Duration Inhibit ................................................................................................................. 206
21.6
Alarm Operation ......................................................................................................................... 208
21.7
Alarm Types ............................................................................................................................... 208
21.8
Alternate Setpoint ....................................................................................................................... 209
21.9
Auto Pre-Tune ............................................................................................................................ 209
21.10
Automatic Reset ......................................................................................................................... 209
21.11
Auxiliary Input ............................................................................................................................ 209
21.12
Auxiliary Input Lower Limit ......................................................................................................... 209
21.13
Auxiliary Input Offset .................................................................................................................. 209
21.14
Auxiliary Input Type ................................................................................................................... 209
21.15
Auxiliary Input Upper Limit ......................................................................................................... 209
21.16
Band Alarm Value ...................................................................................................................... 210
21.17
Bar Graphs ................................................................................................................................. 210
21.18
Bias ............................................................................................................................................ 210
21.19
Bumpless Transfer ..................................................................................................................... 210
21.20
Calibration .................................................................................................................................. 210
21.21
Cascade Control ........................................................................................................................ 210
21.22
Clock Configuration .................................................................................................................... 210
21.23
Communications Write Enable .................................................................................................. 211
21.24
Configuration Menu .................................................................................................................... 211
21.25
Contactor.................................................................................................................................... 211
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
ix
x
21.26
Continuous Control .................................................................................................................... 211
21.27
Control Configuration ................................................................................................................. 211
21.28
Control Deviation........................................................................................................................ 211
21.29
Control Action ............................................................................................................................. 211
21.30
Control Enable/Disable .............................................................................................................. 211
21.31
Control Power Alarm .................................................................................................................. 212
21.32
Control Type ............................................................................................................................... 212
21.33
Controller .................................................................................................................................... 213
21.34
Controller Mode.......................................................................................................................... 213
21.35
Correcting Variable .................................................................................................................... 213
21.36
CPU ............................................................................................................................................ 213
21.37
Custom Display Mode ................................................................................................................ 213
21.38
Cycle Time ................................................................................................................................. 213
21.39
Data Recorder ............................................................................................................................ 213
21.40
Deadband ................................................................................................................................... 213
21.41
Derivative Action ........................................................................................................................ 213
21.42
Deviation Alarm .......................................................................................................................... 214
21.43
Digital Input ................................................................................................................................ 214
21.44
Direct Acting Control .................................................................................................................. 214
21.45
Display Configuration ................................................................................................................. 214
21.46
Display Languages..................................................................................................................... 215
21.47
Display Resolution ..................................................................................................................... 215
21.48
Effective Setpoint ....................................................................................................................... 215
21.49
Engineering Units ....................................................................................................................... 215
21.50
Ethernet ...................................................................................................................................... 215
21.51
Gain Scheduling ......................................................................................................................... 215
21.52
Indicator ..................................................................................................................................... 215
21.53
Input Configuration ..................................................................................................................... 215
21.54
Input Filter Time Constant .......................................................................................................... 215
21.55
Input Range ................................................................................................................................ 216
21.56
Input Span .................................................................................................................................. 216
21.57
Integral Action ............................................................................................................................ 216
21.58
Invert Digital Input ...................................................................................................................... 216
21.59
Latching Output .......................................................................................................................... 216
21.60
LED ............................................................................................................................................ 216
21.61
Linear Input ................................................................................................................................ 216
21.62
Linear Output ............................................................................................................................. 217
21.63
Limit Controller ........................................................................................................................... 217
21.64
Local Setpoints ........................................................................................................................... 217
21.65
Lock Codes ................................................................................................................................ 217
21.66
Logical Output Combinations ..................................................................................................... 218
21.67
Loop Alarm ................................................................................................................................. 218
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
21.68
LSD ............................................................................................................................................ 218
21.69
mADC......................................................................................................................................... 219
21.70
Main Menu ................................................................................................................................. 219
21.71
Main Setpoint ............................................................................................................................. 219
21.72
Manual Loop Alarm Time ........................................................................................................... 219
21.73
Manual Mode ............................................................................................................................. 219
21.74
Manual Reset ............................................................................................................................. 219
21.75
Master & Slave Controllers ........................................................................................................ 220
21.76
Modbus RTU .............................................................................................................................. 220
21.77
Modbus TCP .............................................................................................................................. 220
21.78
Minimum Motor On Time ........................................................................................................... 220
21.79
Modulating Valve ....................................................................................................................... 221
21.80
Motor Travel Time ...................................................................................................................... 221
21.81
Multi-Point Scaling ..................................................................................................................... 221
21.82
mVDC......................................................................................................................................... 221
21.83
On-Off Control ............................................................................................................................ 221
21.84
On-Off Differential ...................................................................................................................... 222
21.85
On-Off Hysteresis ...................................................................................................................... 222
21.86
Operation Mode ......................................................................................................................... 222
21.87
Output Configuration .................................................................................................................. 222
21.88
Overlap/Deadband ..................................................................................................................... 222
21.89
PC Software ............................................................................................................................... 223
21.90
PD Control ................................................................................................................................. 224
21.91
PI Control ................................................................................................................................... 224
21.92
PID Control ................................................................................................................................ 224
21.93
PID Gain Sets ............................................................................................................................ 224
21.94
PLC ............................................................................................................................................ 224
21.95
Pre-Tune .................................................................................................................................... 224
21.96
Power Output Limits................................................................................................................... 225
21.97
Primary Proportional Band ......................................................................................................... 225
21.98
Process High Alarm ................................................................................................................... 225
21.99
Process Inputs ........................................................................................................................... 225
21.100
Process Low Alarm n Value ..................................................................................................... 225
21.101
Process Variable (PV).............................................................................................................. 225
21.102
Process Variable Offset ........................................................................................................... 225
21.103
Profile Control Menu ................................................................................................................ 226
21.104
Profile Events ........................................................................................................................... 226
21.105
Profile Header .......................................................................................................................... 226
21.106
Profile Segments ...................................................................................................................... 226
21.107
Profile Setup Menu .................................................................................................................. 226
21.108
Profiler ...................................................................................................................................... 226
21.109
Profiler Mode ............................................................................................................................ 226
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
xi
xii
21.110
Proportional Control ................................................................................................................. 227
21.111
Rate .......................................................................................................................................... 227
21.112
Rate of Change Alarm ............................................................................................................. 227
21.113
Ratio Control ............................................................................................................................ 227
21.114
Recorder Configuration ............................................................................................................ 227
21.115
Recorder Option ....................................................................................................................... 227
21.116
Recorder Menu ........................................................................................................................ 227
21.117
Relay ........................................................................................................................................ 227
21.118
Remote Setpoint (RSP) ........................................................................................................... 228
21.119
Retransmit Output .................................................................................................................... 228
21.120
Retransmit Output Scale Maximum ......................................................................................... 228
21.121
Retransmit Output Scale Minimum .......................................................................................... 228
21.122
Reset To Defaults .................................................................................................................... 228
21.123
Reverse Acting Control ............................................................................................................ 228
21.124
RS485 ...................................................................................................................................... 228
21.125
RTD .......................................................................................................................................... 229
21.126
Scaled Input Upper Limit .......................................................................................................... 229
21.127
Scaled Input Lower Limit .......................................................................................................... 229
21.128
Secondary Proportional Band .................................................................................................. 229
21.129
Self-Tune .................................................................................................................................. 230
21.130
Sensor Break Pre-Set Power ................................................................................................... 230
21.131
Serial Communications Configuration...................................................................................... 230
21.132
Serial Communications Option ................................................................................................ 230
21.133
Set Valve Closed Position ........................................................................................................ 230
21.134
Set Valve Opened Position ...................................................................................................... 230
21.135
Setpoint .................................................................................................................................... 231
21.136
Setpoint Upper Limit................................................................................................................. 231
21.137
Setpoint Lower Limit................................................................................................................. 231
21.138
Setpoint Ramp Rate ................................................................................................................. 231
21.139
Setpoint Selection .................................................................................................................... 231
21.140
Setup Wizard ............................................................................................................................ 231
21.141
Solid State Relay (SSR) ........................................................................................................... 231
21.142
Solenoid Valve ......................................................................................................................... 232
21.143
Supervisor Mode ...................................................................................................................... 232
21.144
Thermocouple .......................................................................................................................... 232
21.145
Three Point Stepping Control ................................................................................................... 232
21.146
Time Proportioning Control ...................................................................................................... 232
21.147
Trend Displays ......................................................................................................................... 233
21.148
Tuning ...................................................................................................................................... 233
21.149
Tuning Menu ............................................................................................................................ 233
21.150
Triac ......................................................................................................................................... 233
21.151
USB Menu ................................................................................................................................ 233
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
22
21.152
Valve Motor Drive Control (VMD) ............................................................................................ 234
21.153
Valve Position or Flow Indication ............................................................................................. 234
21.154
Valve Open & Closed Limits .................................................................................................... 234
PC Software ........................................................................................................................235
22.1
Using the PC Software ............................................................................................................... 235
22.2
Instrument Simulation................................................................................................................. 236
22.3
Configuring the Connection ........................................................................................................ 236
22.3.1
Connection from PC to Bottom Configuration Socket .........................................................237
22.3.2
Connection from PC to Rear RS485 Communications Option ...........................................237
22.3.3
Connection from PC/Network to Ethernet Port ................................................................... 238
22.3.4
Changing the IP Address .................................................................................................... 238
22.3.5
USB Memory Stick Folders & Files ..................................................................................... 239
22.4
23
22.4.1
Main Parameter Adjustment ................................................................................................ 239
22.4.2
Extending Functionality via Software .................................................................................. 240
22.5
Profile Creation and Editing ....................................................................................................... 242
22.6
Data Recorder Trend Upload & Analysis ................................................................................... 243
Specifications .....................................................................................................................245
23.2
24
Instrument Configuration ............................................................................................................ 239
Universal Process Inputs............................................................................................................ 245
23.2.1
General Input 1 and 2 Specifications .................................................................................. 245
23.2.2
Thermocouple Input............................................................................................................. 245
23.2.3
Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) Input .................................................................. 246
23.2.4
DC Linear Input ................................................................................................................... 246
23.2.5
Input Functions .................................................................................................................... 247
23.3
Auxiliary Input ............................................................................................................................. 247
23.4
Digital Inputs ............................................................................................................................... 248
23.5
Output Specifications ................................................................................................................. 249
23.6
Communications ......................................................................................................................... 251
23.7
Control Loop(s) ........................................................................................................................... 252
23.8
Alarms ........................................................................................................................................ 253
23.9
Profiler Option ............................................................................................................................ 253
23.10
Data Recorder Option ................................................................................................................ 254
23.11
Display ....................................................................................................................................... 254
23.12
Operating Conditions ................................................................................................................. 254
23.13
Conformance Norms .................................................................................................................. 254
23.14
Dimensions ................................................................................................................................ 254
Model Selection Guide .......................................................................................................255
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
xiii
xiv
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
1 Introduction
This product is a 1/4 DIN size (96 x 96mm front) microprocessor based graphical controller programmer,
featuring a 160 x 80 pixel, monochrome LCD with dual color (red/green) backlight. It operates from 100-240V
at 50/60 Hz or 24V-48V AC/DC, depending on the model purchased. It can measure and control up to two
process variables from a variety of sources such as temperature, pressure, flow and level. Primary and
secondary control outputs are possible for each loop.
Optional features include a second process input, USB interface, remote setpoint inputs RS485 or Ethernet
communications, profile control and data recording. Control options include cascade, ratio and 3-point stepping
valve control. Automatic tuning or 5 stage gain-scheduling are also available.
The USB Interface option allows uploading or downloading instrument configuration settings to/from a USB
memory stick, for easy configuration of multiple instruments or transfer to/from the PC configuration software.
If the data recorder or profiler options are fitted, recordings and profile information can be transferred via the
memory stick.
The data recorder option allows the user to make recordings of the processes over time. Recordings can be
transferred to a memory stick using the USB interface or downloaded via one of the communications options.
The Profiler option allows the user to predefine up 255 segments, shared amongst up to 64 Setpoint Profiles.
These control the setpoint levels for the control loop(s) over time, increasing, decreasing or holding their values
as required. When combined with the real-time clock (part of the Data Recorder option) the profiling
capabilities are expanded to allow automatic program start at a defined time and day.
Inputs are user configurable for thermocouple and RTD probes, as well as linear process signal types such as
mVDC, VDC or mADC. Two-point calibration or multipoint scaling can compensate for errors or non-linear
signals. Output options include single or dual relays, single or dual SSR drivers, triacs or linear mA/V DC.
These can be used for process control, alarms/events or retransmission of the process variable or setpoint to
external devices. Transmitter power supply options can provide an unregulated 24V DC (22mA) auxiliary
output voltage, or a 0 to 10VDC stabilised excitation for external signal transmitters.
Up to 7 alarms can be defined as process high or low, deviation (active above or below controller setpoint),
band (active both above and below setpoint), rate of input change, control loop, PID power or signal break
types. Alarm status can be indicated by lighting an LED, changing the display backlight color or viewing the
active alarm status screen. These alarms can be linked to any suitable output.
Configuration for basic applications is possible using the easy Setup Wizard run automatically at first power-up
or manually later. Access to the full range of parameters is via a simple menu driven front panel interface, or the
PC based configuration software.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
1
2 Installation
2.1 Unpacking
1. Remove the product from its packing. Retain the packing for future use, in case it is necessary to transport
the instrument to a different site or to return it to the supplier for servicing.
2. The instrument is supplied with a panel gasket and push-fit mounting clamp. A multi-page concise manual is
supplied with the instrument, in one or more languages. Examine the delivered items for damage or defects.
If any are found, contact your supplier immediately.
2.2 Installation
CAUTION: Installation should be only performed by technically competent
personnel. It is the responsibility of the installing engineer to ensure that the
configuration is safe. Local Regulations regarding electrical installation & safety
must be observed (e.g. US National Electrical Code (NEC) or Canadian Electrical
Code).
Figure 1. Main dimensions
2.3 Panel-Mounting
The controller should be mounted in a properly earthed metal cabinet. The mounting panel must be rigid and
may be up to 6.0mm (0.25 inches) thick. The cut-out size is:
92mm x 92mm (+0.5mm / -0.0mm).
2
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Instruments may be mounted side-by-side in a multiple installation, but instrument to panel moisture and dust
sealing will be compromised. Allow a 20mm gap above, below and behind the instrument for ventilation. The
cut-out width (for n instruments) is:
(96n - 4) mm or (3.78n - 0.16) inches
If panel sealing must be maintained, mount each instrument into an individual cut-out with 10mm or more
clearance between the edges of the holes.
Note: The mounting clamp tongues may engage the ratchets either on the sides or the top/bottom
faces of the Instrument housing. When installing several Instruments side-by-side in one cut-out,
use the ratchets on the top/bottom faces.
CAUTION: Ensure the inside of the panel remains within the instrument operating
temperature and that there is adequate airflow to prevent overheating.
Gasket
Mounting Panel
Clamp
Ratchets
Instrument
Housing
1. Insert instrument into the
panel cut-out.
2. Hold front bezel firmly
(without pressing on the
display area), and re-fit
mounting clamp. Push the
clamp forward, using a tool if
necessary, until gasket
compresses and instrument
is held firmly in position.
Note: For an effective IP66 seal against dust and moisture, ensure gasket is well compressed
against the panel, with the 4 tongues located in the same ratchet slot.
Figure 2. Panel-Mounting the instrument
CAUTION: Do not remove the panel gasket, as this may result in inadequate
clamping and sealing of the instrument to the panel.
Once the instrument is installed in its mounting panel, it may be subsequently removed from its housing if
necessary, as described in the Fitting and Removing Plug-in Modules section.
2.4 Cleaning
Clean the front panel by washing with warm soapy water and dry immediately. If the USB option is fitted, close
the USB port cover before cleaning.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
3
3 Field Upgrade Options
3.1 Plug-Modules and Upgradeable Functions
Plug-Modules can be either pre-installed at the time of manufacture, or retrofitted in the field to expand the
capabilities of the controller. Contact your supplier to purchase these items. Part numbers and circuit board
identification numbers for the plug-in modules and accessories are shown below.
Upgrade Kits/PC Software
Relay Module (Slot 1)
Relay Module (Slot 2 & 3)
10Vdc SSR Driver Module (Slot 1)
10Vdc SSR Driver Module (Slot 2 & 3)
Dual SSR Driver Module (Slot 2 & 3)
TRIAC Module (Slot 1)
TRIAC Module (Slot 2 & 3)
Linear (mA, Vdc) Module (Slot 1)
Dual Relay Module (Slot 2 & 3)
Dual SSR Output Module (Slot 2 & 3)
24V Transmitter Power Supply Module (slot 2 & 3)
RS485 Communication (Slot A)
Ethernet Communication (Slot A)
Digital Input Module (Slot A)
Basic Aux Input Module (RSP/Position) (Slot A)
Program Configuration/Profile Editing Software
Reference
51453391-517
51453391-518
51453391-502
51453391-507
51453391-519
51453391-503
51453391-508
51453391-504
51453391-510
51453391-519
51453391-511
51453391-512
51453391-521
51453391-513
51453391-515
51453391-522
CAUTION: Plastic pegs prevent fitting of older non-reinforced single relay modules
(board identification numbers 637/01 and 638/01). Fitting the older relay modules
reduces the isolation rating to Basic 240V isolation and is therefore not
recommended.
Remove this peg when fitting Dual Relay Modules.
Note: All dual relay modules have reinforced isolation.
4
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
3.1.1 Board Positions
Board Mounting Struts (x4)
Front Panel Removal Latch (x1)
Plug-in Module A
Plug-in Module 3
Power Supply Board
2nd Universal Input & Base Option 2
Board
1st Universal Input & Base Option 1
Board
Plug-in Module 1
Plug-in Module 2
USB/Digital Input C Option Board
Figure 3. Rear view (uncased) & board positions
3.2 Preparing to Install or Remove Plug-in Modules
CAUTION: Before removing the instrument from its housing, ensure that all power
has been removed from the rear terminals. Modules / boards should be replaced
by a technically competent technician.
1. Grip the edges of the front panel (there is a finger grip on each edge) and pull it forwards approximately
10mm, until the Front Panel Removal Latch prevents further movement. The purpose of the latch is to
prevent removal of the instrument without the use of a tool.
2. The Front Panel Removal Latch must be pushed down to allow removal of the instrument. Using a tool (e.g.
screwdriver or pen tip), press down it down through the front central ventilation hole. This will release the
instrument from the case.
3. The internal boards can now be accessed. Take note of the orientation of the instrument and boards for
subsequent replacement into the housing. The positions of the boards, their mountings and the Front Panel
Removal Latch are shown above.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
5
3.2.1 Main Board Connectors
POWER SUPPLY
BOARD
Transformer Color
Code
Module Slot 3
Connector PL4B
Module Slot A
Connectors PL5, & PL6
100-240V (Yellow)
24-48V(Blue)
Module Slot 1
Connectors PL7 & PL8
PC Configurator
Socket SK1
Display Board Connections
Module Slot 2
Connector PL4A
1st UNIVERSAL
INPUT / BASE
OPTION 1 BOARD
Figure 4. Main board connectors
This product is designed to allow the user to reconfigure some hardware options in the field by changing the
plug-in modules in slots 1, 2, 3, & A located on the power supply and 1st universal input boards. The main
boards (display/CPU, power supply, inputs 1 & 2 and digital input/USB) are factory fitted, but may be removed
while reconfiguring the plug-in modules. Take care when re-fitting these boards. Observe the power supply
board transformer color, and case labelling to check the supply voltage, otherwise irreparable damage may
occur.
CAUTION: Replacement of boards must be carried out by a technically competent
technician. If the Power Supply board does not match the labelling, users may
apply incorrect voltage resulting in irreparable damage.
6
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
3.3 Removing/Replacing Option Modules
1. To remove or replace Plug-in Modules 1, 2, 3 or A it is necessary to detach the power supply and input
boards from the front panel by lifting first the upper and then lower mounting struts.
2. Remove or fit the modules to the connectors on the power supply and input boards. The location of the
connectors is shown below. Plastic pegs prevent fitting of older non-reinforced single relay modules –
Remove the peg to fit dual relay modules
3. Assemble the Power Supply and Input boards together. Tongues on each option module locate into slots cut
into the main boards, opposite each of the connectors. Hold the Power and Input boards together and
relocate them back on their mounting struts.
4. Push the boards forward to ensure correct connection to the front Display/CPU board and re-check the
installation of the Option C and/or 2nd Input / Base Option 2 boards if present.
CAUTION: Check for correct orientation of the modules and that all pins are
located correctly.
3.4 Replacing the Instrument in its Housing
CAUTION: Before replacing the instrument in its housing, ensure that all power
has been removed from the rear terminals.
With the required option modules correctly located into their respective positions the instrument can be replaced
into its housing as follows:
1. Hold the Power Supply and Input boards together.
2. Align the boards with the guides in the housing.
3. Slowly and firmly, push the instrument into position in its case.
CAUTION: Ensure that the instrument is correctly orientated. A mechanical stop
will operate if an attempt is made to insert the instrument in the wrong orientation,
this stop MUST NOT be over-ridden.
3.5 Auto Detection of Plug-in Modules
The instrument automatically detects which plug-in modules have been fitted into each slot.
The menus and screens change to reflect the options compatible with the hardware. The modules fitted can be
viewed in the product information menu, as detailed in the Product & Service Information Mode section of this
manual.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
7
3.6 Data Recorder Board
If installed, the Data Recorder memory and Real Time Clock (RTC) components are located on a plug-in
daughter board attached to the front Display/CPU board.
CAUTION: Servicing of the Data Recorder/RTC circuit and replacement of the
lithium battery should only be carried out by a technically competent technician.
3.7 Profiler Enabling
If you purchased a controller with the Profiler option installed, these features will be enabled during
manufacture.
Controllers supplied without the Profiler option installed can be upgraded in the field by purchasing a licence
code number from your supplier. A unique code must be purchased to enable profiling on each controller that
requires it.
3.7.1.1 Entering the Profiler Enable Code
Hold down the
and
keys during the power-up “splash screen”.
Using the
or
keys, enter the 16-character licence code in the displayed screen. Press
move on to the next character. Press
to move back to the previous character.
Press
to
after entering the final character.
To confirm if profiling is installed in your instrument, check the Controller Feature Information in Product &
Service Information Mode.
8
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
4 Electrical Installation
CAUTION: Installation should be only performed by technically competent
personnel. It is the responsibility of the installing engineer to ensure that the
configuration is safe. Local Regulations regarding electrical installation & safety
must be observed (e.g. US National Electrical Code (NEC) or Canadian Electrical
Code).
4.1 Avoiding EMC Problems
This controller has passed EMC compliance tests to EN61326. There should be no difficulty achieving this
level of compliance in use, but it should be borne in mind that the wiring of the installation can significantly
reduce the efficiency of instrumentation immunity due to the ease with which high frequency RF can enter via
unprotected cables.
The following general recommendations can reduce the possibility of EMC problems.
1. If the instrument is being installed in existing equipment, wiring in the area should be checked to ensure
that good wiring practices have been followed.
2. The controller should be mounted in a properly earthed metal cabinet. All round metal shielding is
important, so the cabinet door may require a conductive sealing strip.
3. It is good practice to ensure that the AC neutral is at or near ground (earth) potential. A proper neutral
will help ensure maximum performance from the instrument.
4. Consider using a separate isolation transformer to feed only the instrumentation. A transformer can
protect instruments from noise found on the AC power supply.
4.1.1 Cable Isolation & Protection
Four voltage levels of input and output wiring may be used with the unit:
1. Analog inputs or outputs (for example thermocouple, RTD, VDC, mVDC or mADC)
2. Relays & Triac outputs
3. Digital Inputs & SSR Driver outputs
4. AC power
CAUTION: The only wires that should run together are those of the same category.
If any wires need to run parallel with any from another category, maintain a minimum space of 150mm between
them. If wires MUST cross each other, ensure they do so at 90 degrees to minimise interference.
Keep signal cables as short as possible. If an earthed thermocouple is used or if the sensor has a screened cable,
it should be earthed at one point only, preferably at the sensor location or cabinet entry point, by means of a
metal gland. Ideally all analog and digital signals should be shielded like this, but for unscreened cables, large
diameter ferrite sleeves at the cabinet entry point are an effective method of reducing RF interference. Looping
cables through the ferrite sleeves a number of times improves the efficiency of the filtering.
For mains input cables the fitting a suitable mains filter can provide good results.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
9
4.1.2 Noise Suppression at Source
If possible, eliminate mechanical contact relays and replace with solid-state relays.
Noise-generating devices such as Ignition transformers, arc welders, motor drives, relays and solenoids should
be mounted in a separate enclosure. If this is not possible, separate them from the instrumentation, by the largest
distance possible.
Many manufacturers of relays, contactors etc supply 'surge suppressors' to reduce noise at its source. For those
devices that do not have surge suppressors supplied, Resistance-Capacitance (RC) networks and/or Metal Oxide
Varistors (MOV) may be added.
Inductive coils:- MOVs are recommended for transient suppression in inductive coils. Connect as close as
possible, in parallel to the coil. Additional protection may be provided by adding an RC network across the
MOV.
Figure 5. Transient suppression with inductive coils
Contacts:- Arcing may occur across contacts when they open and close. This results in electrical noise as well
as damage to the contacts. Connecting a properly sized RC network can eliminate this arc.
For circuits up to 3 amps, a combination of a 47 ohm resistor and 0.1 microfarad capacitor (1000 volts) is
recommended. For circuits from 3 to 5 amps, connect two of these in parallel.
Figure 6. Contact noise suppression
10
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
4.2 Sensor Placement (Thermocouple or RTD)
If a temperature probe is to be subjected to corrosive or abrasive conditions, it must be protected by an
appropriate thermowell.
Probes must be positioned to reflect the true process temperature:
1. In a liquid media - the most agitated area
2. In air - the best circulated area
CAUTION: The placement of probes into pipe work some distance from the heating
vessel leads to transport delay, which results in poor control.
For a two wire RTD, a wire link should be used in place of the third wire (see the wiring section for details).
Two wire RTDs should only be used with lead lengths less than 3 metres. Use of three wire RTDs is strongly
recommended to reduce errors do to lead resistance.
4.3 Thermocouple Wire Identification
The different thermocouple types are identified by their wires color, and where possible, the outer insulation as
well. There are several standards in use throughout the world, but most regions now use the International
IEC584-3 standard.
The table below shows the wire and sheath colors used for most common
thermocouple types. The format used in this table is:
+ Wire
- Wire
Sheath
THERMOCOUPLE WIRE COLOR CHART
Type
J
T
K
N
B
R&S
C (W5)
International
IEC584-3
+*
+
+
-*
+
+
+
+
-
Black
White
Black
Brown
USA ANSI
MC 96.1
White
Red
Blue
Brown
White
Green
White
Green
Yellow
Red
Yellow
French
NFC 42-324
Yellow
Black
Brown
Blue
Black
Yellow
Blue
Yellow
Purple
Red
Yellow
Brown
Red
Green
Orange
Red
Grey
Red
White
Green
Blue
Grey
Red
Black
Blue
Brown
Grey
Orange
Red
Blue
Blue
Blue
Red
German
DIN 43710
Orange
Orange
Grey
White
White
Black
Blue
Red
Grey
Blue
White
Orange
Pink
White
Yellow
Blue
Red
Pink
Orange
Black
British
BS1843
Grey
Green
White
Blue
Green
Yellow
Green
Green
Red
White
White
White
Red
Note: * = Wire is magnetic – a magnet can be used to assist with correctly identifying the type
and polarity of the conductors
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
11
4.4 Pre-wiring – Cautions, Warnings & Information
CAUTION: Installation should be only performed by technically competent
personnel. It is the responsibility of the installing engineer to ensure that the
configuration is safe. Local Regulations regarding electrical installation & safety
must be observed (e.g. US National Electrical Code (NEC) or Canadian Electrical
Code).
CAUTION: This equipment is designed for installation in an enclosure that
provides adequate protection against electric shock. The isolation switch should
be located in close proximity to the unit, in easy reach of the operator and
appropriately marked.
WARNING: This symbol means the equipment is protected throughout by double
insulation. All external circuits connected must provide double insulation. Failure
to comply with the installation instructions may impact the protection provided by
the unit.
WARNING:
TO AVOID ELECTRICAL SHOCK, AC POWER WIRING MUST NOT BE CONNECTED TO THE
SOURCE DISTRIBUTION PANEL UNTIL ALL WIRING PROCEDURES ARE COMPLETED.
CHECK THE INFORMATION LABEL ON THE CASE TO DETERMINE THE CORRECT
VOLTAGE BEFORE CONNECTING TO A LIVE SUPPLY.
12
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
4.5 Connections and Wiring
4.5.1 Central Terminal Connections
Note: The wiring diagram below shows all possible combinations to the main connections
(numbered 1 to 24) in the centre of the case rear. The actual connections required depends upon
the features and modules fitted.
.
Figure 7. Central Terminals 1 to 24
WARNING:
CHECK THE INFORMATION LABEL ON THE CASE TO DETERMINE THE CORRECT VOLTAGE
BEFORE CONNECTING TO A LIVE SUPPLY.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
13
4.5.2 Outer Terminal Connections
Note: The wiring diagram below shows the Central Terminals (numbered 25 to 42) at the sides of
nd
the case rear. Connections for the 2 Input, Base Option 2 and Digital Input C are shown. The
actual connections required depends upon the features and modules fitted.
Figure 8. Outer Terminals 25 to 42
4.5.3 Power Connections
WARNING:
CHECK THE INFORMATION LABEL ON THE CASE TO DETERMINE THE CORRECT VOLTAGE
BEFORE CONNECTING TO A LIVE SUPPLY.
CAUTION: This equipment is designed for installation in an enclosure that
provides adequate protection against electric shock. An isolation switch should be
located in close proximity to the unit, in easy reach of the operator and
appropriately marked.
14
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
4.5.3.1 Power Connections - Mains Powered Instruments
Mains powered instruments operate from a 100 to 240V (±10%) 50/60Hz supply. Power consumption is 20VA.
Connect the line and neutral as illustrated via a UL listed fuse type: 250V AC 1Amp anti-surge and a two-pole
IEC60947-1 & IEC60947-3 compliant isolation switch / circuit breaker located within easy reach of the
operator and appropriately marked.
If relays switch mains voltage this should be separate from the instruments mains supply.
Figure 9. Mains Power Connections
4.5.3.2 Power Connections - 24/48V AC/DC Powered Instruments
24/48V AD/DC powered instruments will operate from a 20 to 48V AC or 22 to 55V DC supply. AC power
consumption is 15VA max, DC power consumption is 12 watts max. Connection should be via a UL listed fuse
type: 65v dc 350mAamp anti-surge and a two-pole IEC60947-1 & IEC60947-3 compliant isolation switch /
circuit breaker located within easy reach of the operator and appropriately marked.
Figure 10. 24/48V AC/DC Power Connections
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
15
4.5.4 Universal Input 1 Connections
Universal Input 1 is present on all models. This input is normally used for the measured variable signal from a
process to be controlled. It can be connected to thermocouples; resistance temperature detectors; analog mA;
mV or V DC signals. The input settings are in the Input 1 Configuration sub-menu. Connections for the various
types are shown below. Ensure that the signal is correctly connected, paying particular attention to the polarity.
4.5.4.1 Universal Input 1 Connections - Thermocouple (T/C)
Supported thermocouple types & ranges are listed in the input specifications section on page 245. Only use the
correct thermocouple wire or compensating cable from the sensor to the instrument terminals avoiding joints in
the cable if possible. Where joints are made, special thermocouple connectors must be used. Failure to use the
correct wire type and connectors will lead to inaccurate readings. Ensure correct polarity of the wires by crossreferencing the colors with the thermocouple reference table above.
Figure 11. Input 1 - Thermocouple Connections
4.5.4.2 Universal Input 1 Connections – PT100 / NI120 (RTD) input
The inputs supports two types of RTD. PT100 (platinum sensor, 100 Ω at 0°C). For three wire RTDs, connect
the resistive leg and the common legs of the RTD as illustrated. For a two wire RTD a wire link should be fitted
across terminals 2 & 3 (in place of the third wire). Two wire RTDs should only be used when the leads are less
than 3 metres long. Avoid cable joints.
Figure 12. Input 1 - RTD Connections
Four wire RTDs can be used, provided that the fourth wire is left unconnected. This wire should be cut short or
tied back so that it cannot contact any of the terminals on the rear of the instrument.
16
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
4.5.4.3 Universal Input 1 Connections - Linear Volt, mV or mA input
The input supports the following linear/analog signals: 0 to 50mV; 10 to 50mV; 0 to 5V; 1 to 5V; 0 to 10V; 2 to
10V; 0 to 20mV; 4 to 20mA from any suitable source. Voltage & millivolt signals are connected to terminals 2
& 3, milliamp signals are connected to 1 & 3. Carefully observe the position & polarity of the connections.
Figure 13. Input 1 - DC Volt, mV & mA Connections
4.5.5 Universal / Auxiliary Input 2 Connections
An Auxiliary Input 2 option is fitted to some models. This can connect to a potentiometer; analog mA; mV or V
DC signal for a remote setpoint input signal, or for flow/valve position feedback information.
Alternatively, a second Universal Input 2 option may be fitted. In addition to the remote setpoint input signal or
feedback information possible with the auxiliary input, the 2nd Universal Input can be used as a second process
control loop for two control loops, or used in conjunction with input one in more complex single control loops.
Universal Input 2 can be connected to thermocouples; resistance temperature detectors; potentiometers; analog
mA; mV or V DC signals.
The settings are in the Input 2 Configuration sub-menu. Connections for the various types are shown below.
Ensure that the signal is correctly connected, paying particular attention to the polarity.
4.5.5.1 Universal Input 2 Connections - Thermocouple (T/C)
The optional 2nd universal input, supports various thermocouple types. Supported types & ranges are listed in
the input specifications section on page 245.
Only use the correct thermocouple wire or compensating cable from the sensor to the instrument terminals
avoiding joints in the cable if possible. Where joints are made, special thermocouple connectors must be used.
Failure to use the correct wire type and connectors will lead to inaccurate readings. Ensure correct polarity of
the wires by cross-referencing the colors with a thermocouple reference table.
Figure 14. Input 2 - Thermocouple Connections
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
17
4.5.5.2 Universal Input 2 Connections – PT100 / NI120 (RTD) input
The optional 2nd universal input, supports two types of RTD. PT100 (platinum sensor, 100Ω at 0°C). For three
wire RTDs, connect the resistive leg and the common legs of the RTD as illustrated. For a two wire RTD a wire
link should be fitted across terminals 35 & 36 (in place of the third wire). Two wire RTDs should only be used
when the leads are less than 3 metres long. If possible, avoid cable joints.
Figure 15. Input 2 - RTD Connections
Four wire RTDs can be used, provided that the fourth wire is left unconnected. This wire should be cut short or
tied back so that it cannot contact any of the terminals on the rear of the instrument.
4.5.5.3 Universal / Auxiliary Input 2 Connections - Linear Volt, mV or mA input
The optional auxiliary or 2nd universal input supports the following linear/analog signals: 0 to 50mV; 10 to
50mV; 0 to 5V; 1 to 5V; 0 to 10V; 2 to 10V; 0 to 20mV; 4 to 20mA from any suitable source. Voltage &
millivolt signals are connected to terminals 2 & 3, milliamp signals are connected to 1 & 3. Carefully observe
the polarity of the connections.
Figure 16. Input 2 - DC Volt, mV & mA Connections
4.5.5.4 Universal / Auxiliary Input 2 Connections – Potentiometer
The optional auxiliary or 2nd universal input, the terminals detailed below can be used to connect a feedback
potentiometer. Minimum potentiometer resistance is ≥100Ω.
Figure 17. Input 2 - Potentiometer Connections
18
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
4.5.6 Base Option 1
Base Option 1 provides one or two factory fitted outputs. A relay designated as Output 4 is fitted on all models,
and an optional linear mA/V DC designated as Output 6. Base options cannot be added after manufacture. The
functions of outputs 4 & 6 are set in the Output Configuration sub-menu. Connect as illustrated below.
4.5.6.1 Base Option 1 Relay Output 4
Present on all instruments, Output 4 is a SPST relay, rated at 2 amps at 240 VAC resistive. If it is used to switch
mains voltages, the supply should be separate from the instrument supply and should be correctly switched and
fused.
Figure 18. Relay Output 4 Connections
4.5.6.2 Base Option 1 Linear Output 6
Part of base option 1, Output 6 is an optional linear mV/V DC analog output. The type & range are selectable
from 0 to 5, 0 to 10, 2 to 10V & 0 to 20 or 4 to 20mA.
Figure 19. Linear Output 6 Connections
4.5.7 Base Option 2
Base Option 2 provides one or two factory fitted outputs. An optional relay designated as Output 5, and an
optional linear mA/V DC designated as Output 7. Base options cannot be added after manufacture. The
functions of outputs 5 & 7 are set in the Output Configuration sub-menu. Connect as illustrated below.
4.5.7.1 Base Option 2 Relay Output 5
Part of base option 2, Output 5 is a SPST relay, rated at 2 amps at 240 VAC resistive. If it is used to switch
mains voltages, the supply should be separate from the instrument supply and should be correctly switched and
fused.
Figure 20. Relay Output 5 Connections
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
19
4.5.7.2 Base Option 2 Linear Output 7
Part of base option 2, Output 7 is an optional linear mV/V DC analog output. The type & range are selectable
from 0 to 5, 0 to 10, 2 to 10V & 0 to 20 or 4 to 20mA.
.
Figure 21. Linear Output 7 Connections
4.5.8 Plug-in Module Slot 1 Connections
A selection of plug-in modules are available for Module Slot 1. They can be fitted during manufacture, or
purchased and fitted later by the user. Modules in slot 1 are designated Output 1. They are not interchangeable
with those in slot 2 or 3. Their function is set in the Output Configuration sub-menu. Connect as illustrated
below.
4.5.8.1 Plug-in Module Slot 1 – Single Relay Output Module
If fitted with a single relay output module, connect as shown. The relay contacts are SPDT and rated at 2 amps
resistive, 240 VAC. If it is used to switch mains voltages, the supply should be separate from the instrument
supply and should be correctly switched and fused.
Figure 22. Plug-in Module Slot 1 – Single Relay Module
4.5.8.2 Plug-in Module Slot 1 – Single SSR Driver Output Module
If fitted with a single SSR Driver output module, connect as shown. The 10V DC pulse signal (load resistance
≥500 ohms) is isolated from all inputs/outputs except other SSR drivers.
Figure 23. Plug-in Module Slot 1 – Single SSR Driver Module
20
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
4.5.8.3 Plug-in Module Slot 1 - Triac Output Module
If fitted with a triac output module, connect as shown. This output is rated at 0.01 to 1 amp @ 280V AC
50/60Hz. Isolated from all other inputs and outputs. A snubber should be fitted across inductive loads to ensure
reliable switch off of the Triac.
Figure 24. Plug-in Module Slot 1 - Triac Module
4.5.8.4 Plug-in Module Slot 1 - Linear Voltage or mADC Output module
If fitted with a DC linear output module, connect as shown. Output type & range are selectable from 0 to 5, 0 to
10, 2 to 10V & 0 to 20 or 4 to 20mA. Isolated from all other inputs and outputs.
Figure 25. Plug-in Module Slot 1 - Linear Voltage & mADC Module
4.5.9 Plug-in module slot 2 Connections
A selection of plug-in modules are available for Module Slot 2. They are interchangeable with slot 3, but not
slot 1.They can be fitted during manufacture, or purchased and fitted later by the user. Modules in slot 2 are
designated Output 2, and for dual modules Output 2A and 2B. Their functions are set in the Output
Configuration sub-menu. Connect as illustrated below.
4.5.9.1 Plug-in Module Slot 2 – Single Relay Output Module
If fitted with a single relay output module, connect as shown. The relay contacts are SPDT and rated at 2 amps
resistive, 240 VAC. If it is used to switch mains voltages, the supply should be separate from the instrument
supply and should be correctly switched and fused.
Figure 26. Plug-in Module Slot 2 – Single Relay Module
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
21
4.5.9.2 Plug-in Module Slot 2 - Dual Relay Output Module
If fitted with a dual relay output module, connect as shown. This module has two independent SPST relays for
outputs 2A and 2B, with a shared common terminal. The contacts are rated at 2 amp resistive 240 VAC. If used
to switch mains voltages, the supply should be separate from the instruments mains supply and the contacts
should be correctly switched and fused.
Figure 27. Plug-in Module Slot 2 - Dual Relay Module
4.5.9.3 Plug-in Module Slot 2 – Single SSR Driver Output Module
If fitted with a single SSR Driver output module, connect as shown. The 10V DC pulse signal (load resistance
≥500 ohms) is isolated from all inputs/outputs except other SSR drivers.
Figure 28. Plug-in Module Slot 2 – Single SSR Driver Module
4.5.9.4 Plug-in Module Slot 2 – Dual SSR Driver Output Module
If fitted with a dual SSR Driver output module, the two solid-state relay driver outputs are designated as Output
2A and 2B. The outputs are 10V DC pulse signals, (load resistance ≥500 ohms). They are isolated from all
inputs/output except other SSR driver outputs. Connect as shown making note of the shared positive common
terminal.
Figure 29. Plug-in Module Slot 2 – Dual SSR Driver Module
22
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
4.5.9.5 Plug-in Module Slot 2 - Triac Output Module
If fitted with a Triac output module, connect as shown. This output is rated at 0.01 to 1 amp @ 280V AC
50/60Hz. Isolated from all other inputs and outputs. A snubber should be fitted across inductive loads to ensure
reliable switch off of the Triac.
Figure 30. Plug-in Module Slot 2 - Triac Module
4.5.9.6 Plug-in Module Slot 2 - Transmitter Power Supply Module
If fitted with a transmitter power supply module (TxPSU), connect as shown. The output is a 24V nominal
(unregulated, 19 to 28V DC), supply at 22mA max. Only one TxPSU is supported, do not fit in slot 2 if one is
already fitted in slot 3.
Figure 31. Plug-in Module Slot 2 - Transmitter Power Supply Module
4.5.10 Plug-in Slot 3 Connections
A selection of plug-in modules are available for Module Slot 3. They are interchangeable with slot 2, but not
slot 1.They can be fitted during manufacture, or purchased and fitted later by the user. Modules in slot 3 are
designated Output 3, and for dual modules Output 3A and 3B. Their functions are set in the Output
Configuration sub-menu. Connect as illustrated below.
4.5.10.1 Plug-in Module Slot 3 – Single Relay Output Module
If fitted with a single relay output module, connect as shown. The relay contacts are SPDT and rated at 2 amps
resistive, 240 VAC. If it is used to switch mains voltages, the supply should be separate from the instrument
supply and should be correctly switched and fused.
Figure 32. Plug-in Module Slot 3 – Single Relay Module
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
23
4.5.10.2 Plug-in Module Slot 3 - Dual Relay Output Module
If fitted with a dual relay output module, connect as shown. This module has two independent SPST relays for
outputs 3A and 3B, with a shared common terminal. The contacts are rated at 2 amp resistive 240 VAC. If used
to switch mains voltages, the supply should be separate from the instruments mains supply and the contacts
should be correctly switched and fused.
Figure 33. Plug-in Module Slot 3 - Dual Relay Module
4.5.10.3 Plug-in Module Slot 3 – Single SSR Driver Output Module
If fitted with a single SSR Driver output module, connect as shown. The 10V DC pulse signal (load resistance
≥500 ohms) is isolated from all inputs/outputs except other SSR drivers.
Figure 34. Plug-in Module Slot 3 – Single SSR Driver Module
4.5.10.4 Plug-in Module Slot 3 – Dual SSR Driver Output Module
If fitted with a dual SSR Driver output module, the two solid-state relay driver outputs are designated as Output
3A and 3B. The outputs are 10V DC pulse signals, (load resistance ≥500 ohms). They are isolated from all
inputs/output except other SSR driver outputs. Connect as shown making note of the shared positive common
terminal.
Figure 35. Plug-in Module Slot 3 – Dual SSR Driver Module
24
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
4.5.10.5 Plug-in Module Slot 3 - Triac Output Module
If fitted with a Triac output module, connect as shown. This output is rated at 0.01 to 1 amp @ 280V AC
50/60Hz. Isolated from all other inputs and outputs. A snubber should be fitted across inductive loads to ensure
reliable switch off of the Triac.
Figure 36. Plug-in Module Slot 3 - Triac Module
4.5.10.6 Plug-in Module Slot 3 - Transmitter Power Supply Module
If fitted with a transmitter power supply module (TxPSU), connect as shown. The output is a 24V nominal
(unregulated, 19 to 28V DC), supply at 22mA max. Only one TxPSU is supported, do not fit in slot 3 if one is
already fitted in slot 2.
.
Figure 37. Plug-in Module Slot 3 - Transmitter Power Supply Module
4.5.11 Plug-in Slot A Connections
A selection of plug-in modules are available for Module Slot A. They can be fitted during manufacture, or
purchased and fitted later by the user. Depending on their functions, they are setup Input or Communications
configuration sub-menus. Connect as illustrated below.
4.5.11.1 Plug-in Module Slot A – Basic Auxiliary Input Module
If fitted with a basic auxiliary mA/V DC analog input module, connect as shown. Isolated from all
inputs/outputs. Consider using the 2nd auxiliary input (if available) instead, as this has additional features and
leaves plug-in module slot A free for other modules.
Figure 38. Plug-in Module Slot A – Basic Auxiliary Input Module
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
25
4.5.11.2 Plug-in Module Slot A - Ethernet Communications Module
If fitted with the Ethernet communication module, the communications protocol available is Modbus TCP.
Isolated from all inputs/outputs. If necessary, cut out the removable panel to access the RJ45 connector through
the top of the case. No rear connections are required.
4.5.11.3 Plug-in Module Slot A - RS485 Serial Communications Module
If fitted with the RS485 serial communication module, the protocol used is Modbus RTU. Isolated from all
inputs/outputs. Carefully observe the polarity of the A (Rx/Tx +ve) and B (Rx/Tx -ve) connections.
Figure 39. Plug-in Module Slot A – RS485 Serial Communications Module
CAUTION: External computing devices connected to the communications port
should comply with the standard, UL 60950.
4.5.11.4 Plug-in Module Slot A – Single Digital Input Module
If a digital input module is fitted, it provides a fully isolated input that is held high via a pull-up resistor. The
input can be connected to either to voltage free contacts (e.g. from a switch), or a TTL compatible signal.
Logic High = Open contacts (>5000Ω) or 2 to 24VDC signal.
Logic Low = Closed contacts (<50Ω) or -0.6 to +0.8VDC signal.. Connect as shown.
Figure 40. Plug-in Module Slot A – Digital Input A Module
26
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
4.5.12 Option C Connections
Option C offers a factory fitted multiple digital input option. The board also accommodates the USB port if that
is option is fitted. The USB port does not have connections on the rear terminal, it is accessed via the front
panel.
4.5.12.1 Option C Connections – Multiple Digital Input Module
If the Multiple Digital Input option is fitted, the connections are as illustrated. The 8 opto-isolated inputs each
have a positive input terminal and share a common negative terminal.
The inputs are held high with internal pull-up resistors, so may be connected to either voltage free contacts (e.g.
from a switch), or TTL compatible signals:
Logic High = Open contacts (>5000Ω) or 2 to 24VDC signal.
Logic Low = Closed contacts (<50Ω) or -0.6 to +0.8VDC signal.
Figure 41. Option C - Multiple Digital Inputs C1 to C8
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
27
4.5.12.2 Special Wiring Considerations for Valve Motor Control
Valve Motor Drive (VMD) controllers require two identical outputs to be assigned to position the valve. One to
open and one to close the valve. These outputs can be two single relays, two triacs, two SSR drivers or one dual
relay, but it is recommended to use two single relays (SPDT change-over contacts), and to interlock the relay
wiring as shown. This prevents both motor windings from being driven at the same time, even under fault
conditions.
Switching actuators directly connected to the valve motor must only be used up to half of their rated voltage
(see CAUTION below). The internal relay and triac outputs are rated at 240VAC, so the maximum motor
voltage when using them in this way is therefore 120V unless interposing relays are used. Interposing relays or
other devices used to control the valve must themselves be rated for twice the motor supply voltage.
“OPEN” RELAY
Open Valve Winding
N/O
2 x 120V = 240V
Valve Common
C
120V
Close Valve Winding
N/C
N/O
C
N/C
“CLOSE” RELAY
120VAC SUPPLY
Figure 42. Interlocking of Valve Motor Drive Relays
CAUTION: The windings of a valve motor effectively form an autotransformer. This
has a voltage doubling effect when power is applied to either the Open or Close
terminal, causing twice the supplied voltage at the other terminal. For this reason,
switching devices directly connected to the valve motor must only be used up to
half of their rated voltage. The maximum motor voltage when using the internal
relays/triacs is therefore 120V unless interposing relays are used. Interposing
relays or other devices used to control the valve must themselves be rated for
twice the motor supply voltage.
28
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
5 Powering Up
CAUTION: Ensure safe wiring practices have been followed. When powering up for
the first time, disconnect the output connections. The instrument must be powered
from a supply according to the wiring label on the side of the unit. The supply will
be either 100 to 240V AC, or 24/48V AC/DC powered. Check carefully the supply
voltage and connections before applying power
5.1 Powering Up Procedure
At power up, a self-test procedure is automatically started, during which a splash screen is displayed and the
LED indicators are lit. At the first power up from new, a Setup Wizard runs to assist configuration of basic
applications (refer to the Setup Wizard section on page 42). At all other times, the instrument returns to the
normal operation mode once the self-test procedure is complete.
5.2 Front Panel Overview
The illustration below shows an instrument fitted with the optional USB socket located to the right of the four
keypad buttons. Clean the front panel by washing with warm soapy water and dry immediately. If the USB
option is fitted, close the port cover before cleaning.
Figure 43. A Typical Front Panel
5.3 Display
The instrument has a 160 x 80 pixel monochrome graphical display with dual color (red/green) backlight. The
main display typically shows the process variables, setpoints, power / deviation bar graphs or graphical trends
during normal operation. There are recorder and profile status screen. The top line of the display has labels for
the 4 LED indicators. If desired, the backlight color can be changed to indicate the presence of an active alarm
or latched output. Refer to the Display Configuration section - page 62
5.4 LED Functions
There are four red LEDs that by default indicate the status of the primary & secondary outputs, automatic
tuning and alarm status. The top line of the graphical display has four labels for LED indicators. The function of
these LEDs and their display labels can be changed using the PC configuration software. The information in this
manual assumes standard functions for these LEDs.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
29
5.5 Keypad Functions & Navigation
Each instrument has four keypad switches, which are used to navigate through the user menus and adjust the
parameter values. In configuration screens, a context sensitive scrolling help text is displayed that guides the
user about the function of the keys.
Keypad Button Functions
Button
Function
Moves backwards to the previous parameter or screen in the current
mode. Holding this key down for more than 1 second skips
immediately to the previous screen accepting ALL values as shown.
CAUTION: If editing a parameter, ensure that the current
(highlighted) parameter value is correct before pressing the key as
this action will update and store the value displayed.
In menus and configuration choice screens, this key moves to the
next item on the list.
Editable values can be decreased by pressing this key. Holding the
key down speeds up the change.
In Trend views this key moves the Cursor Line back through the
stored data points
In menus and configuration choice screens, this key moves to the
previous item on the list.
Editable values can be increased by pressing this key. Holding the
key down speeds up the change.
In Trend views this key moves the Cursor Line forward through the
stored data points
Moves forwards to the next parameter or screen in the current
mode. Holding this key down for more than 1 second skips
immediately to the next screen accepting ALL values as shown.
CAUTION: If editing a parameter, ensure that the current
(highlighted) parameter value is correct before pressing the key as
this action will update and store the value displayed.
Pressing the
key while holding down the
key causes the
instrument to move up one menu level. From Operation Mode and
in most menus, this will result in entry to the Main Menu.
From sub-menus, it is necessary to carry out this sequence more
than once to reach the main menu.
CAUTION: If editing a parameter, ensure that the current
(highlighted) parameter value is correct before pressing the key as
this action will update and store the value displayed.
30
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
6 Messages & Error Indications
6.1 Plug-in Module Problems
If an invalid or unknown module is detected in one of the plug-in module slots during the power-up self-test, the
message “Fault Found, Press
, for details” is shown. This is followed by “Replace faulty module in
Module Slot n, Press
,” (where n is the faulty slot location). The Service Contact information is displayed
next showing details of who to contact if a fault persists
Replace the module in slot “n”. If this does not solve the problem, return the instrument for investigation.
CAUTION: Do not continue using the product until the the error is resolved.
6.2 Sensor Break Detection
Whenever a problem is detected with a process variable or auxiliary input connection, the displayed value for
that input is replaced with the word “OPEN”; except in Ratio control where an open input 1 or 2 is shown as
“x1-Open” or “x2-Open”. See Redundant Input (page 85) to protect critical processes from sensor faults.
This may be the result of a failed sensor, a broken connection or an input circuit fault.
In this condition, the control outputs go to the pre-set power value (see Control Configuration – page 49).
CAUTION: Correct the signal/wiring problem to continue normal operation.
6.3 Un-Calibrated Input Detection
The instrument is fully calibrated during manufacture. If a fault occurs and calibration data is lost, the process
input displays are replaced with the word “ERROR” and error is shown instead of “Calibrated” for effected
inputs in Service & Product Information mode.
In this condition, the control outputs go to the pre-set power value (see Control Configuration – page 49).
CAUTION: Perform a full base calibration of the input before continuing normal
operation (see page 75). If the problem persists, return the instrument for
servicing.
6.4 PV Over-range or Under-range Indication
If a measured process input value is more than 5% above than the Scaled Input Upper Limit, its value is replace
by the word “HIGH” to indicate that it is out of range.
If a measured process input value is more than 5% below than the Scaled Input Lower Limit, its value is
replaced by the word “LOW” to indicate that it is out of range.
6.5 Auxiliary Input Over-range or Under-range Indication
If the auxiliary Remote Setpoint input is more than 5% above than the Auxiliary Input Upper Limit, its value is
replaced by the word “HIGH” to indicate that it is out of range.
If the auxiliary Remote Setpoint input is more than 5% below than the Auxiliary Input Lower Limit, its value is
replace by the word “LOW” to indicate that it is out of range.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
31
6.6 Cascade-Open
“Cascade Open” is shown on the main screen if the internal link has be severed between cascaded master and
slave control loops. This mode should only be used for diagnostics and slave tuning. Close the cascade for
proper operation. Refer to the Cascade Control section (page 80) for more information.
6.7 Profile Not Valid
If the user attempts to run a profile that would take the setpoint beyond the current setpoint limits, the profile
will not run and the message “Profile Not Valid” is displayed at the bottom of the profile status screen.
6.8 USB Data Transfer Failure message
If the instrument cannot successfully write to the USB memory stick, the message “Data Transfer Failure”
will be displayed. Check that there is adequate disk space on the memory stick, then retry.
If the instrument cannot successfully read data from the USB memory stick, the message “Data Transfer
Failure” will also appear. Check that this operation would not cause the maximum number of profiles and/or
segments to be exceeded then retry.
6.9 Getting Help
6.9.1.1 First Level Support
If the errors persist or other problems are encountered, refer your supplier for first level support. This includes
help with configuration, tuning, servicing and replacement modules.
6.9.1.2 Second Level Support
If your supplier is unable to assist or cannot be contacted, check the Service & Product Information screen on
the main menu for details of who to contact.
6.9.1.3 Third Level Support
If further assistance is required, contact the nearest company from those listed on the back page of this manual.
6.9.1.4 Servicing
If you need to return your instrument for servicing, contact your supplier or check the Service & Product
Information screen on the main menu for instructions for its return.
32
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
7 Application Setup
Before beginning configuration, consider how the controller will be used in your application. For instance, how
many control loops are needed, is cascade or ratio control required, will the unit control a valve motor, do you
need setpoint profiling etc. Consideration should also be given to the output types, alarms and tuning method.
This section is intended to help with this process, guiding you through the major configuration settings.
Additional information can be found in the relevant sections of this manual, including the glossary,
configuration menus, and dedicated sections for major features. These are listed in the table of contents.
7.1 Pre-commissioning Considerations
An easy Setup Wizard is available for basic applications (see page 42) where the most commonly required
parameters are present for adjustment in turn. The wizard has a sub-set of the full configuration menu options.
For more complex applications where the wizard is not sufficient, consideration must be given to the following
fundamental questions:
If fitted, how will the 2nd input be used?
•
One loop only (if the 2nd input not fitted or not used in this application)
•
Two independent control loops (see page 49).
•
Valve feedback for loop 1 (see page 87).
•
A “redundant” backup for the 1st input (see page 85).
•
Cascaded with the first control loop (see page 80).
•
A reference input for ratio control (see page 83).
How will the instrument physically control the process?
•
Primary only or primary & secondary control outputs (see page 212).
•
Direct valve motor drive outputs (see page 86).
The table below shows the main input and control configuration settings for these application types
(see page 45 for the configuration menus).
Process Type*
Loop 1 / Master
Loop 2 / Slave
Control
Control
Control
Control
(only if 2nd
Configuration:
Configuration:
Configuration:
Configuration:
input fitted)
Control Select
Control Type
Control Select
Control Type
One Loop*
Standard PID
Primary Only
Control Select
Input 2
Control Type
Configuration | = Control Standard = Single
Input 2 Usage
Primary / Secondary
= Not Used
Control Type
= Dual
Valve Motor Drive
Control Select
= VMD (TPSC)
Control
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
33
Process Type*
Loop 1 / Master
Control
Control
(only if 2nd
Configuration:
Configuration:
input fitted)
Control Select
Control Type
Two Loops*
Standard PID
Primary Only
Control Select
Input 2
Control Type
Configuration | = Control Standard = Single
Input 2 Usage
Primary / Secondary
= Standard
Control Type
= Dual
Valve Motor Drive
Control Select
= VMD (TPSC)
Control
+Feedback*
Valve Motor Drive
Input 2
Control Select
Configuration | = VMD (TPSC)
Input 2 Usage Control
= Feedback
Redundant*
Standard PID
Primary Only
Control Select
Input 2
Control Type
Configuration | = Control Standard = Single
Input 2 Usage
Primary / Secondary
= Redundant
Control Type
Input
= Dual
Valve Motor Drive
Control Select
= VMD (TPSC)
Control
Cascade*
Input 2
Configuration |
Input 2 Usage
= Standard
AND
Loop 1 / Master
Configuration |
Control Mode
= Cascade
Ratio*
Standard PID
Input 2
Control Select
Configuration | = Control Standard
Input 2 Usage Valve Motor Drive
= Standard
Control Select
AND
= VMD (TPSC)
Loop 1 / Master Control
Configuration |
Control Mode
= Ratio
Loop 2 / Slave
Control
Control
Configuration:
Configuration:
Control Select
Control Type
Standard PID
Primary Only
Control Select
Control Type
= Control Standard = Single
Primary / Secondary
Control Type
= Dual
Valve Motor Drive
Control Select
= VMD (TPSC)
Control
Standard PID
Primary Only
Control Select
Control Type
= Control Standard = Single
Primary / Secondary
Control Type
= Dual
Valve Motor Drive
Control Select
= VMD (TPSC)
Control
Which outputs will be used for control, and are alarms or event outputs needed?
34
•
Output configuration (see page 56).
•
Alarms & Profile Events (see page Alarm Types 208 & 226).
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
What are the sources for the setpoints?
•
Local setpoint(s) only, or a remote setpoint input (see page 217 & 228).
•
Profile Control (see page 89).
Is Input re-configuration required?
•
Analog input calibration & scaling (see page 73).
•
Digital input functions (see page 77).
Which other features are to be used?
•
Data Recorder (see page 99).
•
Serial Communications (see page 111).
•
USB Interface (see page 98).
Once you have an understanding of your application and how the controller will be used, continue on to the
configuration and use section below.
CAUTION: Configuration & commissioning must be completed before proceeding
to Operation Mode. It is the responsibility of the installing engineer to ensure that
the configuration is safe.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
35
8 Operation and Configuration Menus
This section contains information on all of the controller’s modes and the configuration menus.
8.1 Operation Mode
This is the mode used during normal operation of the instrument. It can be accessed from the Main Menu, and
is the usual mode entered at power-up. The available displays are dependent upon the features/options fitted and
the way in which it has been configured.
The Base screen is the usual screen displayed during operation. It provides “at a glance” information about the
process. The Profile Status screen shows similar information when using profiles.
Subsequent screens allow the display and selection/adjustment* of the setpoints. From display configuration, a
selection of other parameter screens can be made available for operator selection/adjustment*. These include:
profile control; cascade open/close; auto/manual control; setpoint ramp rate; setpoint source; control enable;
clear latched outputs; data recording & status trend views. Optional operator mode screens are marked ◘ in the
screen lists.
Some screens will persist until the user navigates away, others will ‘time-out’ back to the base screen.
* If required, all Operation Mode parameters can be made read only (see Display Configuration on page 62).
Otherwise parameters such as setpoints can be adjusted within their configured limits.
WARNING:
DURING NORMAL USE, THE USER MUST NOT REMOVE THE CONTROLLER FROM ITS
HOUSING OR HAVE UNRESTRICTED ACCESS TO THE REAR TERMINALS, AS THIS WOULD
PROVIDE POTENTIAL CONTACT WITH HAZARDOUS LIVE PARTS.
CAUTION: Set all Configuration parameters as required before starting normal
operations. It is the responsibility of the installing engineer to ensure that the
configuration is safe for the intended application.
8.1.1 Navigating and Adjusting Values in Operator Mode
Press
to move forward or
to move backwards through the available screens.
When a displayed value can be adjusted, use
or
to change its value.
The next/previous screen follows the last parameter. If no further changes are needed, hold down
for >1sec to skip straight to the next/previous screen accepting ALL values shown.
In Trend Views, pressing
points.
36
or
or
moves the cursor line back and forward through the last 240 data
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
8.1.2 Operation Mode Screen Sequence
All possible screens are listed below. The sequence shown depends on the configuration and status.
E.g. settings for “Loop 2” only apply if 2nd input is fitted and configured for 2-loop control.
◘ Some screens are only shown if set to do so in Display Configuration.
After 2 minutes without key activity, the most screens revert to the Base Operating Screen. Screens
marked  do not revert automatically. They remain displayed until the user navigates away.
Calibration Check Due Warning
If a Calibration Reminder is set and the due date has passed this will be shown at every power up,
and repeated once per day. Press
to acknowledge and continue using the instrument temporarily
without recalibration. Change the due date or disable the reminder to cancel the warning.
This feature is only possible if the recorder is fitted. It is enabled in Input Configuration.
 Single Control Loop: Normal Operation
LED Indicators
LED Function Labels
Process Variable Value
Effective Actual Setpoint
Value
Control Deviation Graph
(scaled ±5% of input span)
Engineering Units
Power Graph (0-100% primary,
±100% primary & secondary)
1-LOOP OPERATION
Default LED indicator functions are PRI, SEC, TUNE & ALARM - the functions and their labels can be
altered only with the PC configuration software.
In valve motor drive mode, the power bar-graph is replaced by valve Open / Stop / Close unless the
2nd input is used for position feedback, where it shows 0 to 100% valve position.
In manual mode the effective setpoint is replaced by the %Manual Power and the label “MAN”.
In manual mode with valve motor drive the setpoint is replaced by valve Open / Stop / Close.
If control is disabled the effective setpoint value is replaced by “OFF”.
 Two Control Loops: Normal Operation
LED Indicators
LED Function Labels
Process Variable* & Actual
Indicators for Alarm and
Setpoint Values*
Remote Setpoint active*
Loop Description*
Engineering Units*
* = in loop 1 & 2 screen area
Control Deviation (±5% of
span) & Power Graphs*
2-LOOP OPERATION
Default LED indicator functions are PRI 1, PRI 2, TUNE & ALARM - the functions and their labels can
be altered only with the PC configuration software.
In valve motor drive mode, the power bar-graph is replaced by valve Open / Stop / Close.
In manual mode the effective setpoints are replaced by the %Manual Power and the label “MAN”.
In manual mode with valve motor drive the setpoint is replaced by valve Open / Stop / Close.
If control is disabled the effective setpoint value of that loop is replaced by “OFF”.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
37
 Cascade Control: Normal Operation
LED Indicators
LED Function Labels
Master Process Value
Cascade Status
Master Setpoint (Slave SP if
Cascade Open)
Slave Process Value
Control Deviation (±5% of
span) & Power Graphs
CASCADE CONTROL
Default LED indicator functions are PRI, SEC, TUNE & ALARM - the functions and their labels can be
altered only with the PC configuration software.
Cascade Status shows “Cascade” when cascade is operating normally and “Cascade Open” when
the master / slave link has been disconnected. Master & Slave Process Values.
In valve motor drive mode, the power bar-graph is replaced by valve Open / Stop / Close.
In manual mode the slave setpoint is replaced by the %Manual Power and the label “MAN”.
In manual mode with valve motor drive the slave setpoint is replaced by valve Open / Stop / Close.
If control is disabled the effective master setpoint value is replaced by “OFF”.
 Ratio Control: Normal Operation
LED Indicators
LED Function Labels
Relative Process Value
Ratio & Setpoint Labels
Relative Setpoint
Control Deviation (±5% of
span) & Power Graphs
RATIO CONTROL
Default LED indicator functions are PRI, SEC, TUNE & ALARM - the functions and their labels can be
altered only with the PC configuration software.
In manual mode the ratio setpoint value is replaced by the %Manual Power and the label “MAN”.
If control is disabled the effective setpoint value is replaced by “OFF”.
Operator Profile
Allows the operator to control the defined profiles.
Control
If a profile is running, the choices are: Do Nothing; Abort Profile (end
immediately); Jump to Next Segment; Hold Profile or Release Hold.
If no profile is running, the choices are: Do Nothing; Run Profile; End Profile
Control (returns to standard controller operation) or Select Profile.
◘ only shown if set to do so in Display Configuration.
 Single Control Loop: Profiler Status
LED Indicators
LED Function Labels
Process Value & Setpoint
Engineering Units
Profile Name & Progress
Segment No, Type &
Progress (or Delayed Start
Time)
Profile Status Indicator:
► Run, ▌▌ Held, ■ Stopped
1-LOOP PROFILE STATUS
Default LED indicator functions are as shown in the initial base screen.
In manual mode the effective setpoint is replaced by the %Manual Power and the label “MAN”.
In manual mode with valve motor drive the setpoint is replaced by valve Open / Stop / Close.
If control is disabled the effective setpoint value is replaced by “OFF”.
Note: If power is lost when a profile is running and recovery is set to continue, the bar-graph restarts from the beginning but the overall time remains correct.
38
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
 Two Control Loops: Profiler Status
LED Indicators
LED Function Labels
Engineering Units*
Profile Status Indicators*:
Process Variable Values &
► Run, ▌▌ Held, ■
Setpoints*
Stopped
Loop Descriptions*
Profile Name & Progress
Segment No. Type & Progress
2-LOOP PROFILE STATUS
* = in loop 1 & 2 screen area
(or Delayed Start Time)
Default LED indicator functions are as shown in the initial base screen.
In manual mode the effective setpoints are replaced by the %Manual Power and the label “MAN”.
In manual mode with valve motor drive the setpoints are replaced by valve Open / Stop / Close.
Note: If power is lost when a profile is running and recovery is set to continue, the bar-graph restarts from the beginning but the overall time remains correct.
Event Status
Lists all configured profile events with their current status (Active or Inactive) –
Shown only when the instrument is in profiler mode.
Cascade Mode
Allows the user to open the cascade, breaking the master-slave link for
commissioning & tuning.
CAUTION: Return to Cascade-CLOSE when finished!
◘ only shown if set to do so in Display Configuration.
Auto/Manual Control Switches loop 1 (or the cascade slave loop) between automatic and manual
Selection – Loop 1 control modes. Switching between these modes uses “Bumpless Transfer”.
(or Cascade Slave) ◘ only shown if set to do so in Display Configuration.
When using standard PID control, Manual mode replaces the Setpoint display
with a -100 to 100% power output level value, labelled “Man”.
The
or
keys are used to adjust the manual power value.
When using VMD control, Manual mode replaces the Setpoint display with the
valve movement status (Opening, Closing or Stopped), labelled “Man”.
The
key opens the valve and the
key closes the valve.
If Manual control is selected when in Cascade mode, the slave loops % power
value shown. This is the power output fed directly to the control actuator (e.g.
power to the heater elements).
CAUTION: Manual mode overrides the automatic control loop. It also
ignores any output power limits, valve open/close limits and the control
enable/disable setting. The operator is responsible for maintaining the
process within safe limits.
Note: In Manual mode a running profile will hold until automatic control is
reselected.
Setpoint Value
View and adjust the main and alternate setpoints for loop 1 (or the master
Display &
loop in cascade mode). The setpoints can be set to any value within the
Adjustment – Loop 1 setpoint limits set in Control Configuration. View and adjust local (internal)
setpoints for the loop. The currently selected setpoint is marked as “active”.
If the alternate setpoint is remote it cannot be adjusted from the keypad.
Setpoint Ramp Rate The setpoint ramp rate adjustment for loop 1. Adjustable between 0.1 and
– Loop 1
9999.0 display units per hour. When set to “OFF”, setpoint changes will step
immediately to the new value - ◘ only shown if set to do so in Display.
Note: If the setpoint ramp feature is used, it disables pre-tune completely, and
if self-tune is used, it will only calculate new terms after the ramp has
completed and the setpoint is constant.
Select Active
Setpoint – Loop 1
October 2014
Select if the main or alternate setpoint is to be the “active” setpoint for loop 1
(or the master loop in cascade mode). ◘ only shown if set to do so in Display.
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
39
Control Enable
– Loop 1
Enables or disables loop 1 control outputs. When disabled, the primary and
secondary control outputs of loop 1 are set to zero 0% (unless manual mode
has been selected) and the setpoint value is replaced by “OFF”.
◘ only shown if set to do so in Display.
CAUTION: The instrument cannot control the process when disabled.
Auto/Manual Control Switches loop 2 between automatic and manual control modes. Switching
Selection – Loop 2 between these modes uses “Bumpless Transfer”.
◘ only shown if set to do so in Display Configuration.
When using standard PID control, Manual mode replaces the Setpoint display
with a -100 to 100% power output level value, labelled “Man”.
The
or
keys are used to adjust the manual power value.
When using VMD control, Manual mode replaces the Setpoint display with the
valve movement status (Opening, Closing or Stopped), labelled “Man”.
The
key opens the valve and the
key closes the valve.
CAUTION: Manual mode overrides the automatic control loop. It also
ignores any output power limits, valve open/close limits and the control
enable/disable setting. The operator is responsible for maintaining the
process within safe limits.
Note: In manual mode a running profile will hold if it is controlling the setpoint
of loop 2, until automatic control is reselected.
Setpoint Value
View and adjust the main and alternate setpoints for loop 2. The setpoints can
Display &
be set to any value within the setpoint limits set in Control Configuration. View
Adjustment – Loop 2 and adjust local (internal) setpoints for the loop. The currently selected
setpoint is marked as “active”.
If the alternate setpoint is remote it cannot be adjusted from the keypad.
Setpoint Ramp Rate The setpoint ramp rate adjustment for loop 2. Adjustable between 0.1 and
– Loop 2
9999.0 display units per hour. When set to “OFF”, setpoint changes will step
immediately to the new value - ◘ only shown if set to do so in Display.
Note: If the setpoint ramp feature is used, it disables pre-tune completely, and
if self-tune is used, it will only calculate new terms after the ramp has
completed and the setpoint is constant.
Select Active
Setpoint – Loop 2
Control Enable
– Loop 2
Select if the main or alternate setpoint is to be the “active” setpoint for loop 2
(or the master loop in cascade mode). ◘ only shown if set to do so in Display.
Enables or disables loop 2 control outputs. When disabled, the primary and
secondary control outputs of loop 2 are set to zero 0% (unless manual mode
has been selected) and the setpoint value is replaced by “OFF”.
◘ only shown if set to do so in Display Configuration.
Alarm Status
Clear Latched
Outputs
CAUTION: The instrument cannot control the process when disabled.
Lists the status of the alarms. Shown if any of the 7 alarms is active.
The titles “Alarm n” can be replaced with the PC configuration software to a
user defined 8 character name for each alarm.
Hold down
or
for 3 seconds to clear the selected latched output – An
output will only reset if the condition that caused it to latch on is no-longer
present.
◘ only shown if set to do so in Display Configuration.
Recorder Memory
Full Warning
Manual Recording
Trigger
40
Indicates that the Data Recorder memory is full and that recording has either
stopped or is overwriting older data if in FIFO recording mode.
Set the manual recording trigger on or off.
◘ only shown if set to do so in Display Configuration.
Note: Setting the manual trigger to off may not stop the recording. Data
recording will still take place if another recording trigger is active.
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Recorder Status
Information
Shows the recording status (“Stopped” or “Recording”); icons for any active
recording triggers; the recording mode (FIFO or Record Until Memory Is
Used); the approximate recording time remaining* and a memory usage bargraph. In FIFO mode, the time remaining is replaced with “FIFO” when full.
*If the status of alarms is recorded, extra samples are taken when the alarms
change state reducing the available recording time. Take this into account
when determining if there is sufficient memory available.
Icons for Active Recorder Triggers
Manual
Record ON
Digital Input
Record ON
Profile
Record ON
Alarm
Record ON
 Trend Views: One per Control Loop
Active Alarm(s)
Trend Upper Scale Value
Cursor Line
Process Variable Trend
PV Value At Cursor Line
Setpoint Trend (dotted)
Trend Lower Scale Value
Loop No, & Time Markers
(10 samples per marker)
Sample Interval (or time at
cursor line)
TREND VIEW
Trend views can be shown of each loop. They are auto-scaling graphs with alarm indication and other
process information. The trend can be set to show the process variable only; the process variable &
setpoint (dotted line), or the minimum and maximum value of the process variable measured since
the last sample. Any active alarm(s) are indicated above the graph.
Graph types and data sample intervals 1 sec to 30 mins) are set in Display Configuration.
Trend scale values adjust automatically to visible data (between 2 to 100% of the input span).
120 data points are visible. Pressing
or
moves the cursor line back through the graph to
examine up to 240 data points. The process variable value of that data point is shown to the right of
the cursor line and the sample rate value is replaced by the time represented by the cursor position.
◘ only shown if set to do so in Display Configuration.
Note: Trend data is not retained at power down or if the sample interval is changed.
- Custom Display
Screens
You can copy up to 50 configuration menu parameters into normal operation
mode using the PC software. These extended operator mode screens appear
at the end of the normal sequence. If the parameter is normally displayed on
screen with another parameter, both parameters will appear.
Note: In this mode screens are not pass-code protected, they can be freely
adjust. It is possible to make operation mode “read only”, including any
custom screens from Display Configuration.
8.2 Main Menu
This menu is used to access the various features and configuration settings. The available menus are dependent
upon the features and options fitted and how it has been configured.
8.2.1 Entry into the Main Menu
Holding down
and pressing
from Operation Mode and most other screens will cause the unit to
enter the Main Menu. Each time this key press sequence is made, the instrument moves to the next
menu level above. Sub-menu levels will require this sequence to be pressed more than once in order to
reach the Main Menu.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
41
8.2.1.1 Navigating the Main Menu
Once in the Main Menu, press
Press
or
to select the required option
to enter the chosen menu.
Scrolling “Help Text” is shown at the bottom of the screens to aid navigation.
8.2.2 Unlock Codes
To prevent unauthorised entry, most menus require a pass-code (1 to 9999) to gain entry. These menus are
indicated by the symbol. The codes can be viewed and changed from the Lock Code Configuration sub-menu
of Configuration Mode. The factory default unlock code is 10 for all modes but for security, these should be
changed to new values. If the Configuration Mode lock code is lost, refer to Lost Lock Codes on page 72.
MAIN MENU OPTIONS
Operation Mode
The normal operation screens, displaying the process and setpoint values;
selection/adjustment of the setpoints; auto/manual control; alarm/event
status; trend views; data recorder and profile information.
 An easy, step-by-step parameter setup for simple applications.
Setup Wizard
 If configured from the PC software, a sub-set of up to 50 Configuration
Supervisor Mode
screens can be accessed.
Configuration Menu  Accesses the sub-menus for Inputs; Control Loops; Outputs; Alarms;
Communications; Recorder; Clock; Display and Lock Codes. There is an
option to Reset to Defaults wiping all user settings from the instrument.
 Selection of Pre-tune, Self-tune and Auto Pre-tune for the control loops.
Automatic Tuning
 Uploading/downloading instrument configuration, profile information and
USB Menu
data recordings.
 Manually starting, stopping and deleting recordings.
Recorder Control
 Setting global parameters for all profiles; plus profile creation, editing and
Profile Setup
deletion.
 Selection of profiles. Running, holding or aborting the selected profile.
Profile Control
Service & Product
Contact information for service/support, followed by instrument information,
Information
including features and plug-in modules installed, serial number, firmware
version etc.
8.3 Setup Wizard
An easy Setup Wizard runs automatically at first ever power-up. Follow the Wizard to setup parameters
required for basic applications. The parameters covered by the Setup Wizard are marked with a w in the
following sections covering the configuration mode sub-menus. Once completed, the Setup Wizard exits to
Operation Mode.
The Wizard can be run again at any time from the Main Menu. An option to reset all parameters to default
(recommended) is offered when manually running the wizard.
CAUTION: Resetting defaults all parameters, not just those covered by the quick
setup wizard. For more complex applications the user may have to reconfigure
other Configuration Menu settings before using the instrument.
Experts or users with more complex applications can select the parameters they wish to set-up directly from the
Configuration Menus bypassing the Wizard.
42
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
8.3.1 Manual entry to the Setup Wizard
To select the Setup Wizard from the Main Menu.
Hold down
Press
and press
or
to enter the Main Menu.
to select Setup Wizard.
Note: With the exception of the first ever power-up, entry into this mode is security-protected by
the Setup Wizard Lock Code. Refer to the Lock Code Configuration sub-menu.
Press
to enter the Setup Wizard.
8.3.1.1 Navigating in the Setup Wizard
Press
to move forward, or
to move backwards through the screens.
Press
or
to change the value as required.
Holding down
or
for more than 1 second skips immediately to the next/previous screen
accepting ALL values as shown.
Hold down
and press
to return to the Main Menu
Scrolling “Help Text” is shown at the bottom of the screens to aid navigation.
Setup Wizard
Unlocking
- key screens from
Configuration Menu
(those marked w)
Setup Wizard
Completed
 SETUP WIZARD SCREENS
w Enter correct code number to access Setup Wizard.
Factory Default value is 10.
w Press
to select each major configuration parameter in turn. Follow onscreen prompts to alter the values.
w Confirms completion of the Setup Wizard. Exits to Operation Mode.
8.4 Supervisor Mode
This mode is only available if it has been configured from the PC software. Its purpose is to allow selected
operators access to a lock-code protected sub-set of the configuration parameters, without providing them with
the higher level configuration menu unlock code.
The PC software can copy up to 50 parameters from configuration menus for inclusion in the supervisor mode
screen sequence. If the parameter is normally displayed on screen with another parameter, both parameters will
appear. It is not possible to configure supervisor mode screens without using the software.
8.4.1 Entry into Supervisor Mode
CAUTION: Adjustments to these parameters should only be performed by
personnel competent and authorised to do so.
Supervisor Mode is entered from the Main Menu
Hold down
and press
to enter the Main Menu.
Press
or
Press
to enter the Supervisor Mode.
October 2014
to select Supervisor Mode
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
43
Note: Entry into this mode is security-protected by the Supervisor Mode Lock Code. Refer to
the Lock Code Configuration sub-menu.
8.4.1.1 Navigating in Supervisor Mode
Press
to move forward, or
Press
or
to move backwards through the screens.
to change the value as required.
The next/previous screen follows the last parameter. If no further changes are required, hold down
or
>1sec to skip straight to next/previous screen accepting ALL values shown.
Hold down
and press
to return to the Main Menu
Scrolling “Help Text” is shown at the bottom of the screens to aid navigation.
Supervisor Mode
Unlocking
- Supervisor Mode
Screens …
44
 SUPERVISOR MODE SCREENS
If Supervisor Mode is configured, enter correct code number to continue.
Factory Default value is 10.
Press
to select each selected parameter in turn. Follow on-screen
prompts to alter the values.
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
8.5 Configuration Menu
This menu can be used as an alternative to the more limited Setup Wizard when the instrument is configured for
the first time in more complex applications, or when further changes are required to the instruments settings.
The configuration menu contains a number of sub-menus that allow access to all of the available parameters.
The correct settings must be made before attempting to use the instrument in an application. Screens marked w
are also shown in the Setup Wizard.
8.5.1 Entry into the Configuration Menu
CAUTION: Adjustments to these parameters should only be performed by
personnel competent and authorised to do so.
Configuration is entered from the Main Menu
Hold down
Press
or
and press
to enter the Main Menu.
to select Configuration Menu
Note: Entry into this mode is security-protected by the Configuration Menu Lock Code. Refer to
the Unlock Code section for more details.
Press
to enter the Configuration Menu.
8.5.1.1 Navigating the Configuration Menu
Configuration contains sub-menus to set-up the Inputs; Control; Outputs; Alarms; Communications; Recorder;
Clock; Display and Lock Codes.
There is also an option to reset the instrument to its factory default settings.
The Input and Control sub-menus contain further sub-menus with configuration and calibration settings for each
process input; control loops 1 & 2 and the digital inputs. Only parameters that are applicable to the hardware
and options fitted will be displayed.
From the Configuration Menu, press
Press
or
to select the required sub-menu.
to enter the sub-menu.
If required, press
Hold down
or
and press
to select the next level sub-menu, then press
to enter.
to return to next higher menu level.
Scrolling “Help Text” is shown at the bottom of the screens to aid navigation.
Configuration Mode
Unlocking
Configuration
Options
October 2014
 CONFIGURATION MENU SCREENS:
Enter correct code number to access Configuration Mode.
Factory Default value is 10.
Select the required Configuration Sub-Menu Option from: Inputs; Control;
Outputs; Alarm; Communications; Recorder; Clock; Display; Lock Code or
Reset To Defaults.
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
45
INPUT CONFIGURATION SUB-MENU SCREENS
Input 1 Setup - Sub-menu to setup Input 1. Press
+
to return to Input Menu
Input Type
w Select from various Thermocouple, RTD and Linear mA, mV or VDC
inputs. - see specifications section on page 245, for available input types.
Note: Recheck the units and decimal point settings if you change the input
type.
Engineering Units
Decimal Point
Position
Scaled Input Lower
Limit
Scaled Input Upper
Limit
Multi-Point Scaling
Enable
Scaling Point n
Display Value n
w Select display units from: °C; °F; °K; bar; %; %RH; pH; psi or none.
Temperature sensor inputs are limited to °C; °F
w Sets the maximum display resolution to 0; 1; 2 or 3 decimal places.
Numbers >99.999 never display more than 2 dec places, >999.99 never
display more than 1 dec place and >99999 always display without a
decimal place. Temperature inputs are limited to 0 or 1 decimal place.
For temperature inputs, upper & lower limits set the usable span. The
minimum span = 100 units, maximum span = range limits for the sensor
type selected - see specs on page 245.
For DC linear inputs, the limits define the values shown (-9999 to 9999.9)
when input is at minimum and maximum values. Min span = 100 units.
Enables or disables multi-point scaling. This allows up to 15 point input
linearization for DC signals - not possible with temperature sensor inputs
If multi-point scaling is enabled, up to 15 breakpoints* can scale input vs.
displayed values between the scaled input limits. Each breakpoint has a %
value for the input signal, and the value to display when the input is at that
value. *A Scaling Point set to 100% input ends the scaling sequence.
CJC Enable/Disable
Enables/disables internal thermocouple Cold Junction Compensation. If
disabled, external compensation will be required for thermocouples.
The default value is Enabled.
Input Filter Time
Removes unwanted signal noise. Adjustable from 0.1 to 100.0 seconds or
OFF (default = 2s). Use the smallest value that gives acceptable results.
Caution: Large values slow the response to changes in the process.
Input 1 Calibration - Sub-menu to calibrate Input 1. Press
+
to return to Input Menu
Calibration Type
Select the calibration type from base; single or 2-point calibration. Select
single to apply a calibration offset across the entire measured range. Use
2-point to enter calibration offsets at both low and high points of the usable
range – refer to the User Calibration details on page 73.
Caution: The default is Base Calibration. For single or 2-point
calibration, the user must enter values to adjust the displayed value
to match a known standard or accurate external reading.
Calibration Offset
The single point calibration offset. Limited by the input span, +Ve values
add to, –Ve values subtract from, the measured input across entire range.
Calibration Low
The displayed value for the 1st (low) adjustment of 2-point calibration.
Value
Choose a value close to the lowest level used in the application.
Calibration Low
The adjustment value for the 1st (low) point when using 2-point calibration.
Offset
+Ve values add to, –Ve values subtract from measured input at this point.
Calibration High
The displayed value for the 2nd (high) adjustment of 2 point calibration.
Value
Choose a value close to the highest level used in the application.
Calibration High
The adjustment value for the 2nd (high) point when using 2-point calibration.
Offset
+Ve values add to, –Ve values subtract from measured input at this point.
46
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Input 2 Setup - Sub-menu to setup Input 2. Press
+
to return to Input Menu
Input 2 Usage
w Input 2 can be used as a standard process input for a second control loop
(including its use as part of a cascade), a redundant input or a feedback
signal input from a valve or flow meter. Redundant or Feedback disables
the input as an independent control loop.
Input Type
w If input 2 is selected as a standard process input, select from various
Thermocouple, RTD and Linear mA, mV or VDC inputs. - see specifications
section on page 245, for available input types.
If input 2 is selected as feedback possible types are limited to Linear mA,
mV, VDC or Potentiometer.
Redundant inputs automatically assume the same input type as input 1.
Note: Recheck the units and decimal point settings if you change the input
type.
Engineering Units
Decimal Point
Position
Scaled Input Lower
Limit
Scaled Input Upper
Limit
Multi-Point Scaling
Enable
Scaling Point n
Display Value n
CJC Enable/Disable
Input Filter Time
Set Valve Lower
Position
Set Valve Upper
Position
October 2014
w Select display units from: °C; °F; °K; bar; %; %RH; pH; psi or none.
Temperature sensor inputs are limited to °C; °F
w Sets the maximum display resolution to 0; 1; 2 or 3 decimal places.
Numbers >99.999 never display more than 2 dec places, >999.99 never
display more than 1 dec place and >99999 always display without a
decimal place. Temperature inputs are limited to 0 or 1 decimal place.
For temperature inputs, upper & lower limits set the usable span. The
minimum span = 100 units, maximum span = range limits for the sensor
type selected - see specs on page 245.
For DC linear inputs, the limits define the values shown (-9999 to 9999.9)
when input is at minimum and maximum values. Min span = 100 units.
Enables or disables multi-point scaling. This allows up to 15 point input
linearization for DC signals - not possible with temperature sensor inputs
If multi-point scaling is enabled, up to 15 breakpoints* can scale input vs.
displayed values between the scaled input limits. Each breakpoint has a %
value for the input signal, and the value to display when the input is at that
value. *A Scaling Point set to 100% input ends the scaling sequence.
Enables/disables internal thermocouple Cold Junction Compensation. If
disabled, external compensation will be required for thermocouples.
The default value is Enabled.
Removes unwanted signal noise. Adjustable from 0.1 to 100.0 seconds or
OFF (default = 2s). Use the smallest value that gives acceptable results.
Caution: Large values slow the response to changes in the process.
If input 2 is selected as feedback indication, this stores the feedback value
equal to the minimum valve travel. The procedure below moves the valve
to the fully closed position to find the feedback value:
Press
and
simultaneously to begin feedback limit adjustment.
Press
until the valve is closed to its limit of its travel.
Press
and
simultaneously to store the feedback level.
If input 2 is selected as feedback indication, this stores the feedback value
equal to the maximum valve travel. The procedure below moves the valve
to the fully open position to find the feedback value:
Press
and
simultaneously to begin feedback limit adjustment.
Press
until the valve is opened to its limit of its travel.
Press
and
simultaneously to store the feedback level.
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
47
Input 2 Calibration - Sub-menu to calibrate Input 2. Press
+
to return to Input Menu
Calibration Type
If input 2 is selected as a standard process input, the user can select the
calibration type from base; single or 2-point calibration. Select single to
apply a calibration offset across the entire measured range. Use 2-point to
enter calibration offsets at both low and high points of the usable range –
refer to the User Calibration details on page 73.
Caution: The default is Base Calibration. For single or 2-point
calibration, the user must enter values to adjust the displayed value
to match a known standard or accurate external reading.
Calibration Offset
The single point calibration offset. Limited by the input span, +Ve values
add to, –Ve values subtract from measured input across the range.
Calibration Low
The displayed value for the 1st (low) adjustment of 2-point calibration.
Value
Choose a value close to the lowest level used in the application.
Calibration Low
The adjustment value for the 1st (low) point when using 2-point calibration.
Offset
+Ve values add to, –Ve values subtract from measured input at this point.
Calibration High
The displayed value for the 2nd (high) adjustment of 2 point calibration.
Value
Choose a value close to the highest level used in the application.
Calibration High
The adjustment value for the 2nd (high) point when using 2-point calibration.
Offset
+Ve values add to, –Ve values subtract from measured input at this point.
Calibration Reminder - Calibration reminder Sub-menu. Press
+
to return to Input Menu
Calibration Reminder Enables/disables the Calibration Reminder shown at start-up (and daily
Enable/Disable
thereafter), if the due date has passed - Recorder version only
Calibration Reminder Sets the due date for Calibration Reminder - Recorder version only
Date
Auxiliary Input A Setup - Sub-menu to setup auxiliary A input. Press
+
to return to Input
Menu
Auxiliary Input A
The analog input type/range to be applied to auxiliary input A. Select the
Type
type from 0-20 or 4-20mA; 0-5, 1-5, 0-10 or 2-10VDC.
Aux A Input Lower
These scale values relate to when auxiliary input A is at the range
Limit
minimum & maximum values. They are adjustable between ±0.001 &
±10000. When auxiliary input A provides a remote setpoint, the scaled
input becomes the effective setpoint (although always constrained within
Aux A Input Upper
setpoint limits).
Limit
Caution: Take care to scale correctly especially if being used as the
remote setpoint source for both loops.
Auxiliary Input A
An offset applied to the scaled auxiliary input A value. Adjustable, from +/Offset
0.001 to 20000 units or OFF, with. +Ve values add, –Ve values subtracted.
Useful in multi-zone setpoint slave applications. Default = OFF.
48
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Digital Input Setup - Sub-menu to setup the Digital Inputs. Press
+
to return to Input Menu
Digital Input Status
A diagnostic status ( = OFF,  = ON, Ø = not available) for digital inputs
A; C1 to C8 and “Soft “digital inputs S1 to S4. If used for profile selection, it
also shows bit pattern type (binary or BCD) and selected profile number.
Tick Digital Inputs To Select digitals input with  to invert their operation (making them appear
Invert
OFF when their actual state is ON). Inputs shown as Ø are not available.
Profile Selection
Select the bit pattern to be used for profile selection. Binary or BCD (Binary
Type
Coded Decimal). Select None if profile selection not is required.
Choose Profile
For profiler versions, the Multi-Digital Input option can be used to select the
Selection
profile to run with a standard binary bit pattern or binary coded decimal
from BCD switches. C1 is the least significant bit (LSB) of the bit pattern.
Profiles are numbered from 0 to 63.
Use the table to choose inputs C1 to Cn for the number of profiles to select:
C1
C1 to C2 C1 to C3 C1 to C4 C1 to C5 C1 to C6 C1 to C7
Binary 0 to 1
0 to 3
0 to 7
0 to 15 0 to 31 0 to 63
BCD
0 to 1
0 to 3
0 to 7
0 to 9
0 to 19 0 to 39 0 to 63
Any inputs chosen for profile selection are not available for other uses.
– refer to the Digital Inputs on page 77.
Configure Digital
Select any available digital input or soft digital input to be configured for
Inputs
use. The current status of each is shown as Assigned or Unused.
Soft Digital Input n
Set up a “Soft” digital input n that is the result of the Boolean AND
Digital Input Logic
selections of physical inputs, globally OR’d with the OR selections.
Press
or
to select  / deselect  the options. Inputs shown as Ø
are not available – refer to the Digital Inputs on page 77.
Soft Digital Input n
Further set up of “Soft” digital input n that adds the Boolean OR of Alarms
Alarm-Event
& Events to the physical digital inputs already selected.
Press
or
to select  / deselect  the options. Inputs shown as Ø
are not available – refer to the Digital Inputs on page 77.
Digital Input n
Select the function to be operated from digital input n. – The possible
Function
functions are:
Loop 1 or 2 Setpoint Select; Loop 1 or 2 Auto/Manual Select; Loop 1 or 2
Control Select; Loop 1 or 2 Pre-Tune Select; Loop 1 or 2 Self-Tune Select
Clear All Latched Outputs; Output n Clear Latch; Output n Forcing On or
Off; Profile Run/Hold; Profile Hold Segment Release; Profile Abort; Data
Recorder Trigger or Key n Mimic (replicating pressing
or
).
CONTROL CONFIGURATION SUB-MENU SCREENS
Control Loop 1 - Sub-menu to setup Control Loop 1. Press
+
to return to Input Menu
These settings apply to the master loop if the controller has been setup for cascade control.
Control Mode
Select the fundamental application type, from: Standard; Cascade or Ratio.
Refer to the Application Setup section on page 33.
Note: Choosing Cascade or Ratio disables the use of the 2nd input as a
fully independent control loop.
Cascade Mode
Control Select
October 2014
Opens or closes the cascade link. Cascade-Open breaks the master-slave
connection. This allows slave loop to be tuned & adjusted independently.
Caution: Return to Cascade when finished!
Select from Control Standard or Control VMD (TPSC).
Use Control VMD to directly drive the windings of a motorised valve. This
uses a 3-point stepping algorithm giving “open” and “close” outputs.
Use Standard for all other applications (including solenoid valves or
modulating valves with positioning circuitry requiring mA or VDC signals).
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
49
Control
Enable/Disable
Auto/Manual Control
Selection
Control Type
Primary Control
Action
Control Status
Power Output Levels
Gain Schedule PID
Set in use
PID Set Selection
Set n – Primary Pb
Set n – Secondary Pb
50
Used to temporarily disable the control outputs. Select control Enabled
(normal) or Disabled – when disabled, control output(s) for this loop are
turned off (unless manual mode has been selected), and the setpoint value
is replaced by “OFF”.
Caution: The instrument is not able to control the process when
control is disabled and the Output Power Limits are ignored.
Switches the control loop between Automatic and Manual Control. The
operator monitors and alters power to correctly control the process (0 to
100% or -100 to +100% for dual control).
Caution: Manual mode overrides the automatic control loop. It also
ignores any output power limits, valve open/close limits and the
control enable/disable setting. The operator is responsible for
maintaining the process within safe limits.
Select Single Control for primary control only (e.g. heating only or cooling
only) or Dual for primary and secondary control outputs (e.g. heating and
cooling) - Dual is not possible with Ratio or VMD Control.
Set the primary control output for Reverse or Direct Action.
Reverse action applies additional primary power as the process falls
further below setpoint (e.g. heating applications).
Direct action applies additional primary power as the process rises higher
above setpoint (e.g. cooling applications).
In dual control, secondary output action is opposite to primary action.
A “read-only” diagnostic status display of the current loop 1 process
variable and effective setpoint values to assist with manual tuning.
A “read-only” diagnostic status display of the current loop 1 primary and
secondary % output power levels to assist with manual tuning – Not shown
with VMD Control. Does not apply if control is disabled or in manual mode.
A “read-only” diagnostic status display showing the PID set in use. The set
used may vary based on the current setpoint or process variable value. –
Only shown if Gain Scheduling is in use.
Choose to use one of five PID Sets; or choose Gain Schedule on SP or
PV. – This selects a fixed PID set to be “Active”; or automatically switch
sets based changes in SP or PV values.
The primary proportional band for PID Set n (n = up to 5). Set as On-Off
control, or a proportional band from 1 to 9999 display units – Only the
set(s) in use are shown.
The secondary proportional band for PID Set n (n = up to 5) if dual control
is used. Set as On-Off control, or a proportional band from 1 to 9999
display units – Only the set(s) in use are shown.
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Set n – Integral
Set n – Derivative
Set n – Overlap
Set n – On/Off Diff
Set n - Breakpoint
Manual Reset (Bias)
Anti Wind-Up Limit
Ratio SFAC
Ratio NO
Primary Cycle Time
Secondary Cycle
Time
Primary Power Lower
Limit
Primary Power Upper
Limit
October 2014
The integral time value (Automatic Reset) for PID Set n (n = up to 5).
Adjustable from 1s to 99min 59s or OFF – Only the set(s) in use shown.
The derivative time value (Rate) for PID Set n (n = up to 5). Adjustable
from 1s to 99 min 59s or OFF – Only the set(s) in use are shown.
The overlap (+ve) or deadband (-ve) between primary & secondary
proportional bands for PID Set n (n = up to 5). In display units - limited to
20% of the combined primary & secondary prop band width.
The on-off control hysteresis (deadband) for PID Set n (n = up to 5).
Adjustable from 1 to 300 display units, centred about the setpoint – Only
the set(s) in use are shown.
The SP or PV value where the PID Set n (n = up to 5) if gain scheduling is
used. Set 1 is used from Scaled Input Lower Limit to the Set 2 Breakpoint,
then Set 2 used to the Set 3 Breakpoint etc. If a breakpoint is set to OFF
subsequent PID sets are not used. The final PID set runs to the Scaled
Input Upper Limit.
The Manual Reset value to bias the control working point within the
proportional band(s). Adjustable from 0 to 100% for single control or 100 to
+100% for dual control. Typically set to 80% of typical power needed for
setpoint, but lower values can help inhibit start-up overshoot.
Adjusts the value at which the “reset wind-up inhibit” is applied. Above this
power level further integral action is suspended. Adjustable from 10 to
100% of PID power. Lower values inhibit overshoot.
Caution: If set too low control deviation can occur (the process
settles, but is offset above or below the setpoint). It this is observed,
increase the value until the deviation error is removed.
The nominal ratio scaling factor used for Stoichiometric Ratio Control in
burner fuel/air control applications. Adjustable from 0.010 to 99.999.
– refer to the Ratio Control section on page 83
A constant between 0.0 & 9999.0, added to the x1 (input 1) value in
Stoichiometric Ratio Control mode to allow for atomizing air when
calculating the process value. The total air flow is therefore x1 + NO.
The primary power cycle time. Adjustable from 0.5 to 512 seconds. Applied
for time proportioned primary relay, SSR driver or triac control outputs –
Not used for VMD Control modes.
The secondary power cycle time when dual control is used. Adjustable
from 0.5 to 512 seconds. Applied for time proportioned primary relay, SSR
driver or triac control outputs – Not used for VMD Control modes.
The minimum primary output power limit. The control algorithm will not
allow the power output fall below this level. Adjustable from 0 to 90% but is
always at least 10% below the primary power upper limit.
Caution: The instrument will not be able to control the process
correctly if the lower limit is above the level required to maintain
setpoint.
The maximum primary output power limit. The control algorithm will not
allow the power output rise above this level. Adjustable from 10 to 100%
but is always at least 10% above the primary power lower limit.
Caution: The instrument will not be able to control the process
correctly if the upper limit is below the level required to maintain
setpoint.
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
51
Secondary Power
Lower Limit
Secondary Power
Upper Limit
Sensor Break Pre-set
Power Output
Motor Travel Time
Minimum Motor On
Time
Valve Open Limit
The minimum secondary output power limit. The control algorithm will not
allow the power output fall below this level. Adjustable from 0 to 90% but is
always at least 10% below the secondary power upper limit.
Caution: The instrument will not be able to control the process
correctly if the lower limit is above the level required to maintain
setpoint.
The maximum secondary output power limit. The control algorithm will not
allow the power output rise above this level. Adjustable from 10 to 100%
but is always at least 10% above the secondary power lower limit.
Caution: The instrument will not be able to control the process
correctly if the upper limit is below the level required to maintain
setpoint.
Set the power level to be applied if the process input signal or an active
remote setpoint input is lost. Adjustable from 0 to 100% for single control or
-100 to +100% for dual control. The default value is OFF (0% power). Does
not apply if control is disabled or in manual mode.
Caution: Ensure the value set will maintain safe process conditions.
The motor travel time (valve movement time from fully open to fully closed
in mm:ss). Adjustable from 5s to 5 mins - In VMD Control Mode only.
The minimum drive effort (in seconds) to begin moving the motorised valve
1
in VMD Control Mode. Adjustable from 0.02 to of the Motor Travel Time.
10
Alternate Setpoint
Value
The maximum position the controller will attempt to drive the valve to in
VMD Control Mode. Adjustable from the valve close limit+1% to 100.0%
(fully open) - Only possible if the 2nd input is used for valve feedback.
The minimum position the controller will attempt to drive the valve to in
VMD Control Mode. Adjustable from 0.0% (fully closed) to the valve open
limit-1% - Only possible if the 2nd input is used for valve feedback.
The direction to drive the valve if the process input signal or an active
remote setpoint input is lost. The default action is to drive the valve closed.
– Applies to VMD Control Mode only. Does not apply if control is disabled
or in manual mode.
Caution: Set to safe values for the process!
The minimum allowable setpoint value. Adjustable within the scaled input
limits, but cannot be above the setpoint upper limit. Applies to local, remote
and profile setpoints.
Caution: Set to safe values for the process. Operators can adjust
local setpoints to any value between the limits set.
The maximum allowable setpoint value. Adjustable within the scaled input
limits, but cannot be below the setpoint lower limit. Applies to local, remote
and profile setpoints.
Caution: Set to safe values for the process. Operators can adjust
local setpoints to any value between the limits set.
Setpoint Ramp Rate value, adjustable from 1 to 9999 display units per
hour, or OFF. The ramp is applied at power-up (from current PV to SP) and
whenever the setpoint value or source is changed. If set to OFF, the
setpoint steps immediately to the new setpoint value.
Select the source of the main setpoint. This can only be a “Local” setpoint
set from the keypad, or Not used.
Select the source of the alternate setpoint. This can be a “Local” setpoint,
not used, or an analog remote setpoint (RSP) signal applied to input 2 or
auxiliary input A – depending on available hardware.
Sets the current value of the main setpoint between the setpoint upper and
lower limits.
Sets the current value of the alternate setpoint between the setpoint upper
and lower limits – is read-only if alternate setpoint source is RSP.
52
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
Valve Close Limit
Valve Sensor Break
Action
Setpoint Lower Limit
Setpoint Upper Limit
Setpoint Ramp Rate
Main Setpoint Source
Alternate Setpoint
Source
Main Setpoint Value
October 2014
Select Active
Setpoint
Main Setpoint Offset
Alternate Setpoint
Offset
Select if the main or alternate setpoint is to be the current “active” setpoint
for this loop.
An offset that can be added to the main setpoint (+ve values) or subtracted
from it (-ve values) when the instrument is a comms slave in a multi-zone
application. This changes the effective setpoint used for control.
Caution: It should be set to zero if an offset is not required.
An offset that can be added to the alternate setpoint (+ve values) or
subtracted from it (-ve values) when the instrument is a comms slave in a
multi-zone application. This changes the effective setpoint used for control.
Caution: It should be set to zero if an offset is not required.
Control Loop 2 - Sub-menu to setup Control Loop 1. Press
+
to return to Input Menu
These settings apply to the slave loop if the controller has been setup for cascade control.
Control Select
Select from Control Standard or Control VMD (TPSC).
Use Control VMD to directly drive the windings of a motorised valve. This
uses a 3-point stepping algorithm giving “open” and “close” outputs.
Use Standard for all other applications (including solenoid valves or
modulating valves with positioning circuitry requiring mA or VDC signals).
Control
Used to temporarily disable the control outputs. Select control Enabled
Enable/Disable
(normal) or Disabled – when disabled, control output(s) for this loop are
turned off (unless manual mode has been selected) and the setpoint value
is replaced by “OFF”.
Caution: The instrument is not able to control the process when
control is disabled and the Output Power Limits are ignored.
Auto/Manual Control
Switches the control loop between Automatic and Manual Control.
Selection
Caution: Manual mode overrides the automatic control loop. It also
ignores any output power limits, valve open/close limits and the
control enable/disable setting. The operator is responsible for
maintaining the process within safe limits.
Control Type
Select Single Control for primary control only (e.g. heating only or cooling
only) or Dual for primary and secondary control outputs (e.g. heating and
cooling) - Dual is not possible with Ratio or VMD Control.
Primary Control
Set the primary control output for Reverse or Direct Action.
Action
Reverse action applies additional primary power as the process falls
further below setpoint (e.g. heating applications).
Direct action applies additional primary power as the process rises higher
above setpoint (e.g. cooling applications).
In dual control, secondary output action is opposite to primary action.
Control Status
A “read-only” diagnostic status display of the current loop 2 process
variable and effective setpoint values to assist with manual tuning.
Power Output Levels
A “read-only” diagnostic status display of the current loop 2 primary and
secondary % output power levels to assist with manual tuning – Not shown
with VMD Control. Does not apply if control is disabled or in manual mode.
Gain Schedule PID
A “read-only” diagnostic status display showing the PID set in use. The set
Set in use
use may vary based on the current setpoint or process variable value. –
Only shown if Gain Scheduling is in use.
PID Set Selection
Choose to use one of five PID Sets; or choose Gain Schedule on SP or
PV. – This selects a fixed PID set to be “Active”; or automatically switch
sets based changes in SP or PV values.
Set n – Primary Pb
The primary proportional band for PID Set n (n = up to 5). Set as On-Off
control, or a proportional band from 1 to 9999 display units – Only the
set(s) in use are shown.
Set n – Secondary Pb The secondary proportional band for PID Set n (n = up to 5) if dual control
is used. Set as On-Off control, or a proportional band from 1 to 9999
display units – Only the set(s) in use are shown.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
53
Set n – Integral
Set n – Derivative
Set n – Overlap
Set n – On/Off Diff
Set n - Breakpoint
Manual Reset (Bias)
Anti Wind-Up Limit
Primary Cycle Time
Secondary Cycle
Time
Primary Power Lower
Limit
Primary Power Upper
Limit
Secondary Power
Lower Limit
Secondary Power
Upper Limit
54
The integral time value (Automatic Reset) for PID Set n (n = up to 5).
Adjustable from 1s to 99min 59s or OFF – Only the set(s) in use shown.
The derivative time value (Rate) for PID Set n (n = up to 5). Adjustable
from 1s to 99 min 59s or OFF – Only the set(s) in use are shown.
The overlap (+ve) or deadband (-ve) between primary & secondary
proportional bands for PID Set n (n = up to 5). In display units - limited to
20% of the combined primary & secondary prop band width.
The on-off control hysteresis (deadband) for PID Set n (n = up to 5).
Adjustable from 1 to 300 display units, centred about the setpoint – Only
the set(s) in use are shown.
The SP or PV value where the PID Set n (n = up to 5) if gain scheduling is
used. Set 1 is used from Scaled Input Lower Limit to the Set 2 Breakpoint,
then Set 2 used to the Set 3 Breakpoint etc. If a breakpoint is set to OFF
subsequent PID sets are not used. The final PID set runs to the Scaled
Input Upper Limit.
The Manual Reset value to bias the control working point within the
proportional band(s). Adjustable from 0 to 100% for single control or 100 to
+100% for dual control. Typically set to 80% of typical power needed for
setpoint, but lower values can help inhibit start-up overshoot.
Adjusts the value at which the “reset wind-up inhibit” is applied. Above this
power level further integral action is suspended. Adjustable from 10 to
100% of PID power. Lower values inhibit overshoot.
Caution: If set too low control deviation can occur (the process
settles, but is offset above or below the setpoint). It this is observed,
increase the value until the deviation error is removed.
The primary power cycle time. Adjustable from 0.5 to 512 seconds. Applied
for time proportioned primary relay, SSR driver or triac control outputs –
Not used for VMD Control modes.
The secondary power cycle time when dual control is used. Adjustable
from 0.5 to 512 seconds. Applied for time proportioned primary relay, SSR
driver or triac control outputs – Not used for VMD Control modes.
The minimum primary output power limit. The control algorithm will not
allow the power output fall below this level. Adjustable from 0 to 90% but is
always at least 10% below the primary power upper limit.
Caution: The instrument will not be able to control the process
correctly if the lower limit is above the level required to maintain
setpoint.
The maximum primary output power limit. The control algorithm will not
allow the power output rise above this level. Adjustable from 10 to 100%
but is always at least 10% above the primary power lower limit.
Caution: The instrument will not be able to control the process
correctly if the upper limit is below the level required to maintain
setpoint.
The minimum secondary output power limit. The control algorithm will not
allow the power output fall below this level. Adjustable from 0 to 90% but is
always at least 10% below the secondary power upper limit.
Caution: The instrument will not be able to control the process
correctly if the lower limit is above the level required to maintain
setpoint.
The maximum secondary output power limit. The control algorithm will not
allow the power output rise above this level. Adjustable from 10 to 100%
but is always at least 10% above the secondary power lower limit.
Caution: The instrument will not be able to control the process
correctly if the upper limit is below the level required to maintain
setpoint.
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Sensor Break Pre-set
Power Output
Motor Travel Time
Minimum Motor On
Time
Slave SP Scale Min
Slave SP Scale Max
Valve Sensor Break
Action
Setpoint Lower Limit
Setpoint Upper Limit
Setpoint Ramp Rate
Main Setpoint Source
Alternate Setpoint
Source
Main Setpoint Value
Alternate Setpoint
Value
Select Active
Setpoint
Main Setpoint Offset
Alternate Setpoint
Offset
October 2014
Set the power level to be applied if the process input signal or an active
remote setpoint input is lost. Adjustable from 0 to 100% for single control or
-100 to +100% for dual control. The default value is OFF (0% power). Does
not apply if control is disabled or in manual mode.
Caution: Ensure the value set will maintain safe process conditions.
The motor travel time (valve movement time from fully open to fully closed
in mm:ss). Adjustable from 5s to 5 mins - In VMD Control Mode only.
The minimum drive effort (in seconds) to begin moving the motorised valve
1
in VMD Control Mode. Adjustable from 0.02 to 10 of the Motor Travel Time.
The effective cascade slave setpoint value equating to 0% power demand
from the master controller - Limited by the slave input scaling.
Caution: Set to safe values for the process!
The effective cascade slave setpoint value equating to 100% power
demand from the master controller - Limited by the slave input scaling.
Caution: Set to safe values for the process!
The direction to drive the valve if the process input signal or an active
remote setpoint input is lost. The default action is to drive the valve closed.
– Applies to VMD Control Mode only. Does not apply if control is disabled
or in manual mode.
Caution: Set to safe values for the process!
The minimum allowable setpoint value. Adjustable within the scaled input
limits, but cannot be above the setpoint upper limit. Applies to local, remote
and profile setpoints.
Caution: Set to safe values for the process. Operators can adjust
local setpoints to any value between the limits set.
The maximum allowable setpoint value. Adjustable within the scaled input
limits, but cannot be below the setpoint lower limit. Applies to local, remote
and profile setpoints.
Caution: Set to safe values for the process. Operators can adjust
local setpoints to any value between the limits set.
Setpoint Ramp Rate value, adjustable from 1 to 9999 display units per
hour, or OFF. The ramp is applied at power-up (from current PV to SP) and
whenever the setpoint value or source is changed. If set to OFF, the
setpoint steps immediately to the new setpoint value.
Select the source of the main setpoint. This can only be a “Local” setpoint
set from the keypad, or Not used.
Select the source of the alternate setpoint. This can be a “Local” setpoint,
not used, or an analog remote setpoint signal applied to input 2 or auxiliary
input A – depending on available hardware.
Sets the current value of the main setpoint between the setpoint upper and
lower limits.
Sets the current value of the alternate setpoint between the setpoint upper
and lower limits.
Select if the main or alternate setpoint is to be the “active” setpoint for this
loop.
An offset that can be added to the main setpoint (+ve values) or subtracted
from it (-ve values) when the instrument is a comms slave in a multi-zone
application. This changes the effective setpoint used for control.
Caution: It should be set to zero if an offset is not required.
An offset that can be added to the alternate setpoint (+ve values) or
subtracted from it (-ve values) when the instrument is a comms slave in a
multi-zone application. This changes the effective setpoint used for control.
Caution: It should be set to zero if an offset is not required.
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
55
OUTPUTS CONFIGURATION SUB-MENU SCREENS
Output n Configuration - Up to 9 outputs listed. Any already used show as “Assigned” but can be
changed. If “Digital” is shown, the output is driven directly via a digital input (see input configuration).
Relevant screen sequences repeat for outputs fitted. Press
+
to return to Configuration Menu
Linear Output n Type w Set the desired type for any linear outputs fitted. From: 0-5, 0-10,
1-5, 2-10V & 0-20, 4-20mA or 0-10VDC adjustable transmitter PSU.
Adjustable 0-10V
w Sets the voltage required if linear output n type is 0-10VDC adjustable
Transmitter PSU n
transmitter PSU.
Output n Usage
w Sets the use for the output. From: Loop 1 or 2 Primary / Secondary Power;
Logical OR or AND of Alarms & Profile Events (direct or reverse acting);
Retransmission (of loop 1 or 2 effective setpoint, Input 1 or 2 process
values). Choices offered are appropriate for the output type fitted (e.g. only
linear outputs can retransmit).
OPn OR Selection
w When an output usage is set for logical OR of alarms & profile events, this
selects the alarms or events to be OR’d. Press
or
to select ☑ or
deselect ☐ Alarms 1 to 7; Events 1 to 5; PR (Profile running); PE (Profile
Ended). Direct outputs turn on, & reverse outputs turn off according to the
selected logical OR combination.
OPn AND Selection w When an output usage is set for logical AND of alarms & profile events, this
selects the alarms or events to be AND’d. Press
or
to select ☑ or
deselect ☐ Alarms 1 to 7; Events 1 to 5; PR (Profile running); PE (Profile
Ended). Direct outputs turn on, & reverse outputs turn off according to the
selected logical AND combination.
Output n Latch
w If enabled, an output will remain latched ON even if the condition that
Enable
caused it to be on is no-longer present, and remains latched even if the
instrument is powered off-on. The output latch must be reset to turn it off.
Note: An output cannot reset if the condition that caused it to turn on is still
present.
Output n Lower
Retransmit Limit
Output n Upper
Retransmit Limit
56
The displayed value at which the retransmission output reaches its
minimum level (e.g the display value when a 4 to 20mA retransmission
output is at 4mA). Adjustable from -9999 to 9999.9. The output is at its
minimum below this value. Above this value, it rises linearly in line with the
displayed value to reach its maximum at the Upper Retransmit Limit display
value.
w
The displayed value at which a retransmission output will be at its
maximum level (e.g. the display value when a 4 to 20mA retransmission
output is at 20mA). Adjustable from -9999 to 9999.9. The output is at its
maximum above this display value. Below this value, it falls linearly in line
with the displayed value to reach its minimum at the Lower Retransmit
Limit display value.
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
ALARM CONFIGURATION SUB-MENU SCREENS
Alarm n Configuration - 7 alarms listed with any already used shown as “Assigned”. Relevant
screen sequences repeat for each alarm (n = 1 to 7). Press
+
to return to Configuration Menu
Alarm n Type
w Sets the function of alarm n from: Unused; Process High; Process Low;
PV-SP Deviation; Band; Control Loop; Rate Of Signal Change per minute;
Input Signal Break; % of Recorder Memory Used, Control Power High,
Control Power Low.
Alarm n Source
w The signal source of Alarm n from: Input 1, Input 2 & Auxiliary Input A;
Control Loop 1; Control Loop 2; Loop 1 Primary or Secondary Power; Loop
2 Primary or Secondary Power – auxiliary input A is only possible if fitted
and the alarm type can only be input signal break.
Alarm n Value
The Alarm n activation point – The value is limited by the scaled input limits
for Process High; Process Low; PV-SP Deviation (+ve above, -ve below
setpoint), Band (above or below setpoint) type alarms.
Rate of Signal Change is a rate of 0.0 to 99999 (rate in units per minute).
w Memory used, Control Power High, Control Power Low are 0.0 to 100.0%
– not required for Control Loop or Input Signal Break alarm types.
Alarm n Hysteresis
The deadband on the “safe” side of alarm n, through which signal must
pass before alarm deactivates - not for Rate of Change, Control Loop,
Input Break or Percentage of Memory used alarms.
Alarm n Minimum
w The minimum time that alarm n must be passed its threshold before
Duration
activating (deactivation is not affected by this parameter). Adjustable from
0.0 to 9999.0 secs. – not used for signal break, memory or loop alarms.
Caution: If the duration is less than the time set, the alarm will not
become active.
Alarm n Inhibit
w If the inhibit is enabled, it prevents the initial alarm activation if the alarm
condition is true at power up. Activation only occurs once the alarm
condition has passed and then reoccurred.
Control n Loop
w Sets the loop alarm time source, from: Manual Loop Alarm Time (as set in
Alarm Type
the loop alarm n time screen) or Automatic (twice the integral time constant
setting). If configured, a Loop Alarm activates if no response is seen in loop
n after this time following the saturation of its power output. – Only seen if
an alarm is set for control loop type.
Control n Loop
w The time (max 99:59 mm:ss) for loop n to begin responding after PID
Alarm Time
power output reaches saturation, if a manual loop alarm type is configured.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
57
No Communications
Warning
Modbus Parity
Modbus Data Rate
Master Mode, or
Slave Address
Target Register In
Slave
Master Mode Format
Serial
Communications
Write Enable
58
COMMUNICATIONS CONFIGURATION SUB-MENU SCREENS
If Communications Configuration menu is entered without a
communications module fitted.
The setting for Modbus comms parity bit checking, from: Odd; Even or
None. Set the same parity for all devices on the network – Only seen if
RS485 or Ethernet communications option is fitted.
The setting for the Modbus comms data speed. From: 4800; 9600; 19200;
38400; 57600 or 115200 bps. Set the same speed for all devices on the
network – Only seen if RS485 or Ethernet communications option is fitted.
Slave address (1 to 255), or multi-zone Setpoint Master Mode – Only seen
if RS485 or Ethernet communications option is fitted, but Master mode is
not available over Ethernet.
Target memory register for the setpoint value in attached slave controllers.
All slaves must have the same setpoint register address as set here Appears only if unit is in Master mode.
The data format required by the attached setpoint slaves. From: Integer;
integer with 1 decimal place or float - Appears only if unit is in Master
mode.
Enables/disables writing via RS485 or Ethernet communications.
When disabled, parameters can be read, but attempts to change their
values over comms are blocked.
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
No Recorder
Warning
Recording In
Progress Warning
Pause (Override
Trigger)
Recorder Status
Information
DATA RECORDER CONFIGURATION SUB-MENU SCREENS:
If the Recorder Configuration menu is entered on an instrument without this
option fitted.
A warning if recording when attempting to enter recorder configuration. Access to the configuration is denied unless the recording is paused.
Select No to continue recording or Yes to enter recorder configuration.
Note: Recording is paused until recorder configuration is completed. It
restarts automatically on exit from this menu.
Current information about the data recorder feature, including if a recording
is in progress (Recording or Stopped); the recording mode (FIFO or Record
Until Memory Is Used); a % memory use bar-graph and the estimated
available time remaining based on the data selected and memory left.
If the alarm status is recorded and is likely to change often, take this into
account when determining if there is sufficient memory available.
Icons are displayed for active recording triggers. If any trigger is active, the
selected data will be recorded.
Manual Record
Recorder Mode
Recording Sample
Interval
Digital Input
Profile Record
Alarm Record
- see the Data Recorder in section on page 99
Choose Record Until Memory Used (stops recording when full) or
Continuous FIFO (First In - First Out).
Caution: A FIFO recording will overwrite previous recordings in
memory, starting with the oldest data first. Download the previous
data before selecting this option.
Recording of the selected data will happen once every sample interval.
From every: 1; 2; 5; 10; 15; 30 Seconds, or 1; 2; 5; 10; 15; 30 Minutes.
- The recording interval does not affect Trend View sample rates.
Note: Shorter intervals reduce the possible recording duration.
Recorder Auto
Trigger
Trigger On Alarms
Automatic recording triggers. From: None; On Alarm; During Profile and
Alarm or Profile. Data is recorded if any trigger is active (including a digital
input or manual recording start).
Any combination of alarms 1 to 7 can be set to trigger a recording (TRG) or
not (OFF). If any alarm set to TRG becomes active, the alarm recording
trigger activates.
Note: 10 samples at 1s intervals are stored and added to the recording prior
to and after the data that is stored at the normal sample rate while the alarm is
on.
Loop 1 Values To
Record
Any combination of loop 1 values can be recorded from: Process Variable;
Maximum or Minimum PV (since the previous sample was taken); Setpoint;
Primary Power, Secondary Power. Set to Record (REC) or not (OFF).
Note: Recording more parameters reduces the possible recording duration.
Loop 2 Values To
Record
Any combination of loop 2 values can be recorded from: Process Variable;
Maximum or Minimum PV (since the previous sample was taken); Setpoint;
Primary Power, Secondary Power. Set to Record (REC) or not (OFF).
Note: Recording more parameters reduces the possible recording duration.
Other Values To
Record
October 2014
If required, select to record the value of auxiliary input A.
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
59
Activities To Record
Multiple process events can be recorded from: Alarm n Status (n = 1 to 7)
or Unit turned Off/On.
Note: If an alarm changes state an extra sample is recorded using extra
memory. The remaining recording time is reduced accordingly.
Profiler Events To
Record
60
The Profiler Event n Status can be recorded (n = 1 to 5).
Note: If a profile event changes state an extra sample is recorded using extra
memory. The remaining recording time is reduced accordingly.
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Date Format
Set Date
Set Time
CLOCK CONFIGURATION SUB-MENU SCREENS
w The format used for all displayed dates: dd/mm/yyyy (Day / Month / Year)
or mm/dd/yyyy (Month / Day / Year). – Recorder versions only.
w Set the internal clock Date – Entered in the format defined by Date Format
screen. – Recorder versions only.
w Set the internal clock Time. - In hh:mm:ss (Hours : Minutes : Seconds)
format. – Recorder versions only.
Note: Clock settings cannot be changed when the data recorder is active.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
61
Language
Enable Custom
Display Mode
Read Only Operation
Mode?
Display Color
Invert Display
Display Contrast
Loop 1 Trend
Sample Interval
Loop 1 Trend View
Mode
Loop 2 Trend
Sample Interval
Loop 2 Trend View
Mode
Operator Visibility
DISPLAY CONFIGURATION SUB-MENU SCREENS
Select English or the alternate local language. The alternate language is
selected at time of order, but can be changed later using the PC software.
Enables/disables the Custom Operation Mode, if configured. The screens
seen in this mode are configured using the PC configuration software.
Allows Operation Mode to be Read/Write or Read-Only where screens can
be seen but the values cannot be changed.
From: Red only; Green only; Red to Green on Alarm or Green to Red on
Alarm; Red to Green if Output Latched or Green to Red if Output Latched.
Standard or Inverted display image.
Screen contrast (10 and 100) to improve clarity. 100 = maximum contrast.
The Interval between the displayed values on the loop 1 trend graph.
From: Every 1; 2; 5; 10; 15; 30 Seconds, or 1; 2; 5; 10; 15; 30 Minutes.
- Independent from the loop 2 trend graph and data recorder sample rates.
The data to display on the loop 1 trend graph. From: Process Value only,
PV (solid) & SP (dotted) at sample time, or the Max & Min PV between
samples (candle-stick graph). Alarm active indication is always shown at
the top of graph.
The Interval between the displayed values on the loop 2 trend graph.
From: Every 1; 2; 5; 10; 15; 30 Seconds, or 1; 2; 5; 10; 15; 30 Minutes.
- Independent from the loop 1 trend graph and data recorder sample rates.
The data to display on the loop 1 trend graph. From: Process Value only,
PV (solid) & SP (dotted) at sample time, or the Max & Min PV between
samples (candle-stick graph). Alarm active indication is always shown at
the top of graph.
Extra parameters can be made visible/adjustable in Operation Mode from:
Profile Control; Recorder Start/Stop; Recorder Status; Loop 1 & 2 Setpoint
Select; Loop 1 & 2 Auto/Manual Select; Loop 1 & 2 Control Select; Loop 1
& 2 Trend View; Loop 1 & 2 Setpoint Ramp Rate.
See ◘ in Operator Mode lists.
62
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
LOCK CODE CONFIGURATION SUB-MENU SCREEN
Set Lock Codes (passwords) for the following configuration and control
menus: Setup Wizard; Configuration Mode; Tuning Menu; Supervisor
Mode; USB Menu; Recorder Menu, Profiler Setup and Profiler Menu.
Independently adjustable from 1-9999 or OFF.
Lock Code
Configuration
Note: The factory default value is 10 for all lock codes.
For security, users are recommended to change these codes.
RESET TO DEFAULTS SUB-MENU SCREEN
The user can set all parameters back to their factory default values before
preparing the instrument for installation in a new application.
Caution: The user must reconfigure all of the required settings before
using the instrument.
Reset To Defaults
8.6 The USB Menu
A notification is shown if a USB memory stick is inserted or removed from the USB port. The USB Menu will
automatically be offered after insertion. The USB menu can also be accessed from the Main Menu.
8.6.1 Entry into the USB Menu
CAUTION: Do not remove the memory stick from the USB port whilst a Data
Transfer to or from the USB stick is in progress. Data loss or corruption may
result.
The USB Menu is entered from the Main Menu
Hold down
Press
or
and press
to enter the Main Menu.
to select the USB Menu
Note: Entry into this mode is security-protected by the USB Menu Lock Code. Refer to the Lock
Code Configuration sub-menu.
Press
to enter the USB Menu.
8.6.1.1 Navigating in the USB Menu
Press
to move forward, or
Press
or
to move backwards through the screens.
to change the value as required.
The next/previous screen follows the last parameter. If no further changes are required, hold down
or
>1sec to skip straight to next/previous screen accepting ALL values shown.
Hold down
and press
to return to the Main Menu
Scrolling “Help Text” is shown at the bottom of the screens to aid navigation.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
63
Note: During Data Transfer, normal operation carries on in the background, but operator access
to other screens is not possible. The transfer of a full memory can take up to 20 minutes. Only
begin a transfer when you are certain that access (e.g. setpoint changes) will not be required.
USB Mode Unlocking
Read/Write To USB
Device
 USB MENU SCREENS
Enter correct code number to access the USB Menu.
Factory Default value is 10.
Select the required action from: Read Configuration File; Write
Configuration File; Write Recorder Log File. Read Profile Files; Write Profile
Files.
Note: “Writing” is downloading from the Instrument to the USB stick.
“Reading” is uploading from the USB stick to the Instrument.
Write
Select Profile To
Write
Enter A File Name
Enter A Folder
Name
Note: To prevent existing recordings being over-written, an error message is
shown if the folder name entered already exists.
Read
Writing Profile,
Configuration or
Log
Transfer
Successful
Transfer Failure
Select File
Reading Profile or
Configuration File
Transfer
Successful
Transfer Failure
64
If writing a profile to the USB memory stick, choose a profile to write from
the list provided.
Enter an 8-character file name if writing configurations or profiles. A file
extension is automatically added to the end of file name (bct for
configurations or pfl for profiles).
Caution: Existing files with the same name will be over-written.
Recorder logs can contain multiple files. The user enters an 8-character
folder name for these logs. See the Data Recorder section on page 99.
An animated screen is shown the files are being written.
Caution: Do not disconnect USB device until completed! Data loss or
corruption may result.
Confirmation that the data transfer to the USB stick completed correctly.
Press
to continue
For write failures, check for adequate disk space on the USB stick.
Select the Configuration or Profile file to transfer from the USB stick.
Caution: Configuration reads overwrite all of the instruments existing
settings with new values.
An animated screen is shown while files are being read.
Caution: Do not remove the memory stick whist this operation is in
progress. Data corruption may result.
Confirmation that the data transfer from the USB stick completed correctly.
Press
to continue.
For read failures, check the maximum number of profiles and/or segments
is not being exceeded.
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
8.7 Recorder Control Menu
This menu allows the user to manually start a recording or to delete previous recordings. Refer to the Recorder
Configuration sub-menu in Configuration Mode for information about how to setup the data to be recorded and
the recording interval and the Data Recorder Option section on page 99 for general information about the
recorder feature.
8.7.1 Entry into the Recorder Control Menu
The Recorder Control Menu is entered from the Main Menu
Hold down
Press
or
and press
to enter the Main Menu.
to select the Recorder Control Menu
Note: Entry into this mode is security-protected by the recorder control menu lock code. Refer
to the Lock Code Configuration sub-menu.
Press
to enter the Recorder Control Menu.
8.7.1.1 Navigating the Recorder Control Menu
Press
to move forward, or
to move backwards through parameters & screens.
Holding down
or
for more than 1 second skips immediately to the next/previous screen
accepting ALL values as shown.
Press
or
to select or change the value as required.
The next/previous screen follows the last parameter. If no further changes are required, hold down
or
>1sec to skip straight to next/previous screen accepting ALL values shown.
Hold down
and press
to return to the Main Menu
Scrolling “Help Text” is shown at the bottom of the screens to aid navigation.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
65
Recorder Mode
Unlocking
Recording In
Progress Warning
Start/Stop Data
Recording
Recorder Status
Information
 RECORDER MENU SCREENS
Enter correct code number to access the Data Recorder Menu.
Factory Default value is 10.
Shown if a recording is in progress when the recorder control menu is
entered.
Turn on or off the manual recording trigger.
Note: Recording continues if another record trigger is active (e.g. on
alarm/profile or via a digital input). Access is restricted to this screen only until
recording stops (remove all active triggers).
Current information about the data recorder feature, including if a recording
is in progress (Recording or Stopped); the recording mode (FIFO or Record
Until Memory Is Used); a % memory use bar-graph and the estimated
available time remaining based on the data selected and memory left.
If the alarm status is recorded and is likely to change often, take this into
account when determining if there is sufficient memory available.
Icons are displayed for active recording triggers. If any are active, the
selected data will be recorded.
Manual Record
Clear Recordings
Digital Input
Profile Record
Alarm Record
- see the Data Recorder in section on page 99
Clears the recorder memory. Download any recorded data before use.
Caution: This permanently deletes All recorded data.
8.8 Profiler Setup Menu
Screens marked  will not time-out automatically. They must be completed for a valid profile to be created.
Refer to the Profiler section on page 89 for more details about the profiler.
8.8.1 Entry into the Profiler Setup Menu
The Profiler Setup Menu is entered from the Main Menu
Hold down
Press
or
and press
to enter the Main Menu.
to select the Profiler Setup Menu
Note: Entry into this mode is security-protected by the profiler setup menu lock code. Refer to
the Lock Code Configuration sub-menu.
Press
to enter the Profiler Setup Menu.
8.8.1.1 Navigating the Profiler Setup Menu
Press
to move forward, or
to move backwards through the screens.
Press
or
to select or change the value as required.
Holding down
or
for more than 1 second skips immediately to the next/previous screen
accepting ALL values as shown.
Hold down
and press
to return to the Main Menu
Scrolling “Help Text” is shown at the bottom of the screens to aid navigation.
66
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Profiler Setup Menu
Unlocking
Profile Setup
Options
General
General Profile
Configuration
Enable Edit
While Running
Timer Start
Function
 PROFILER SETUP MENU SCREENS
Enter correct code number to access Profiler Setup Menu.
Factory Default value is 10.
Select the required profile setup sub-menu option from: General
Configuration; Create a Profile; Edit a Profile Header; Edit a Profile
Segment; Insert a Segment; Delete a Segment; Delete a Profile or Delete
ALL Profiles.
Sub-menu with global settings affecting all profiles.
Press
+
to return to Profile Setup Menu
Enables or disables the ability to edit profiles whist a profile is running.
Caution: Edits made to the current or next segment of the running
profile will take effect until after the profile is restarted.
Enable or disable automatic starting of profiles. When enabled, delayed
starts are possible, or if the selected profile has a day & time trigger it waits
until the time set before starting.
Note: If the Timer Start Function is disabled, profiles can only be manually
started, and with immediate effect even if they have a delay or day & time
trigger defined.
Create A Profile
 Sub-menu to create a new profile. A header is created first, followed by the
segments – see below.
Caution: It is not possible to exit from this sub-menu until profile
creation is fully complete. Do not turn off the power during profile
creation or editing. When the profile creation/editing is complete the
instrument returns automatically to the profile setup main menu.
Note: A warning is displayed if the maximum number of 64 profiles or 255
segments is exceeded.
Profile Header: Settings that apply to the chosen profile as a whole.
 Give each profile a unique descriptive name of up to 16 characters. The
Enter Profile
Name
name is shown in the profile status screen and in profile selection lists.

Set the
Select if a profile controls the setpoint of first loop only or both control loops.
Number of
This screen is “read only” when editing a profile. The number cannot be
Loops
changed once the profile has been created.
Profile Header Details
Note: the segment type and time settings are common to both loops. Some
segment types are not available with 2-loop profiling.
Profile
Starting Point
Profile Start
Trigger
 The setpoint value used at the beginning of the first segment. From: Current
Setpoint or Current Process Variable. The setpoint starts from the
measured PV(s) or effective setpoint(s) of the process as it begins running.
 From: None (profile start is not delayed); After Delay or Day and Time.
- Day and Time possible on the recorder version only.
Note: If the Timer Start Function has been disabled, profiles can only be
manually started, and with immediate effect even if they have a delay or day &
time trigger defined.
Profile Start
Time
Profile Start
Day(s)
Profile Start
Delay Time
Profile
Recovery
Method
October 2014
 If Day and Time is the Profile Start Trigger, this is the time (hh:mm:ss) when
the profile will begin if it is selected to run.
 If Day and Time is the Profile Start Trigger, this is the Day(s) when the
profile should run. From: Mon; Tue; Wed; Thu; Fri; Sat; Sun; Mon-Fri; MonSat; Sat-Sun or All.
 If After Delay is the Profile Start Trigger, this is the delay time of up to 99:59
(hh:mm) before a profile begins after a start request has been given.
 The power-on action if profile was running at power-down (e.g. after a
power cut), or following correction of a signal break. From: Control outputs
off; Restart profile from the beginning; Maintain last profile setpoint; Use
controller setpoint; Continue profile from where it was when power failed.
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
67
 The Recovery Method is ignored (the profile continues from where power
Profile
Recovery
failed), if power off for less than this time. Max 99:59 (hh:mm). - Recorder
Time
version only.
 The action taken after profile has been forced to stop early. From: Control
Profile Abort
Action
outputs off; Maintain last profile setpoint or Use controller setpoint.
Profile Cycles  The number of times the program should run each time it is started. From 1
to 9999 or Infinite.
Profile Segments: Settings that apply to individual profile segments
 Shows the number of the profile segment being created. The maximum
Segment
Number
number of profiles across all profiles is 255.
Segment Type  Set the segment type from: Ramp Time (time to reach target SP); Ramp
Rate (rate of change towards target SP – Single loop profiles only); Step
(jump to target SP), Dwell (keep current SP); Hold (hold profile until
released); Loop (back to previous segment); Join (to another profile); End
or Repeat Sequence Then End (repeat a sequence of joined profiles).
Profile Segment Details
Note: Segment Ramp Rate is not available if the profile controls two loops. A
Join, End or Repeat Sequence Then End isthe last segment in the profile.
Repeat Sequence Then End is always the last profile in a sequence.
Loop 1 Target
Setpoint.
Loop 2 Target
Setpoint.
Segment
Ramp Time
Segment
Ramp Rate
Segment
Dwell Time
Number of
Loops
Back to
Segment
Number
 The setpoint value to be reached control loop 1 by the end of this segment,
if the type is Ramp Time, Ramp Rate or Step.
 If the profile is controlling 2 loops, this is the setpoint value to be reached
control loop 2 by the end of the segment, if the type is Ramp Time or Step.
The time (hh:mm:ss) to reach the segment target setpoint if the segment
type is Ramp Time.
 The rate of change towards the Segment Target Setpoint if segment type is
Ramp Rate. The rate can be from 0.001 to 9999.9 display units per hour.
 The time (hh:mm:ss) to maintain the current setpoint if the segment type is
Dwell.

If the segment type is Loop, enter the number of times to repeat the loop
back, before continuing forward to the next segment.
 If the segment type is Loop, enter the segment to loop back to.
Loop 1 AutoHold Type
 The auto-hold type for this segment to ensure loop 1 tracks the setpoint.
From: None (no auto-hold); Above Setpoint (hold if too high only); Below
Setpoint (hold if too low only) or Band (hold if too high or low).

The distance loop 1 can be from setpoint. Beyond this the profile is held for
the selected Auto-Hold Type.
Loop 1 AutoHold Band
Value
Loop 2 AutoHold Type
Loop 2 AutoHold Band
Value
Note: Two Loop-backs cannot be set to cross each other.
Note: For Two-Loop Profiles, either loop can cause the profile to hold. The
profile continues only when both loops are within their Auto-Hold Bands.
 The auto-hold type for this segment to ensure loop 2 tracks the setpoint.
From: None (no auto-hold); Above Setpoint (hold if too high only); Below
Setpoint (hold if too low only) or Band (hold if too high or low).

The distance loop 2 can be from setpoint. Beyond this the profile is held for
the selected Auto-Hold Type.
Note: For Two-Loop Profiles, either loop can cause the profile to hold. The
profile continues only when both loops are within their Auto-Hold Bands.
Segment Hold 
A hold segment can either be released by an Operator/Digital input or be
Release Type
set to wait until a specified Time of Day - Recorder version only.
Hold Release 
The time of day (hh:mm:ss) when a Hold Segment will release if the
Time
Release Type is Time Of Day. The profile is held by the hold segment and
only released at the next occurrence of the time of day set.
68
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Times To
Repeat
Sequence
Segment End
Type
Select Profile
To Join
Event n

The number of times the entire sequence of profiles should run. – if the last
segment is Repeat Sequence Then End.
 The action taken after the profile ends normally. From: Control Outputs Off;
Maintain Last Profile Setpoint or Use Controller Setpoint.
 Choose a profile to join to from the list provided – if the final segment type is
Join. The selected profile will start immediately the current profile ends.
 Select the events to be active during this segment. n = 1 to 5.
Note: For end segments, the events selected to be active stay on until the
instrument exits from profiler mode or a new profile runs.
Note: For end segments, the events selected to be active stay on until the
instrument exits from profiler mode or a new profile runs.
Edit A Profile
Header
Edit A Profile
Segment
 Choose the profile to be edited from the list of names provided, then alter
any values as required – The profile header details are as shown in “Create
A Profile” above.
 Choose the profile, then the segment to be edited from the lists provided.
Alter any values as required – The profile segment details are as shown in
“Create A Profile” above.
Note: The last segment type can only be set to Join, End or Repeat Sequence
Then End. Use Insert or Delete to change the end position.
Insert A Segment
 Choose the profile, then the new segment’s position from the lists provided
– Enter the new segment values as required – The profile segment details
are as shown in “Create A Profile” above.
Note: The new segment type cannot be set to Join, End or Repeat Sequence
Then End. Use Delete to change the end position.
Delete A Segment
Delete A Profile
Delete All Profiles
 Choose the profile, then the segment to be deleted from the lists provided.
End, Join or Repeat segments cannot be deleted.
 Choose the profile to be deleted from the list of names is provided. The
user is prompted confirm the deletion.
 If selected, the user is prompted to confirm that the profiles should be
deleted.
Caution: This deletes all profiles from memory!
8.9 Profiler Control Menu
Profiler Control
Menu Unlocking
Profile Control
Select Profile
 PROFILER CONTROL MENU SCREENS
Enter correct code number to access Profiler Control Menu.
Factory Default value is 10.
If a profile is running, from: Do Nothing; Abort Profile (end immediately); or
Jump to Next Profile Segment; Hold Profile or Release Hold.
If profile not running, from: Do Nothing; Run Profile; End Profile Control
(return to normal controller operation) or Select Profile.
Selects a profile. If Run Profile was chosen in the previous screen, the
profile starts (after a delay if one is enabled). Otherwise the profile is
selected, but waits for a run instruction (e.g. via digital input or timer).
Note: Selection is “read only” if profile selection is via a digital input. Otherwise
choose from the list of profile names provided.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
69
8.10 Service & Product Information Mode
This is read only information about the instrument, its modules and enabled features. It has contact information
to tell the user where they can obtain service, sales or technical support for the product. Normally this is the
manufacturer or suppliers’ details. Using the PC software, the user can enter their own contact information.
There are 7 lines of text - each up to 25 characters in length.
8.10.1 Entry into Service & Product Information Mode
The Service & Product Information Mode is entered from the Main Menu
Hold down
and press
to enter the Main Menu.
Press
or
to select the Service & Product Information Mode
Press
to enter the Service & Product Information Mode.
8.10.1.1 Navigating Product Information Mode
Press
to move forward or
Hold down
and press
to move backwards through the displayed information.
to return to the Main Menu
Scrolling “Help Text” is shown at the bottom of the screens to aid navigation.
Plug-in Module
Information
Base Options
Optional Features
Firmware
Information
Product Revision
Level
Serial Number
Date of Manufacture
Input 1 Calibration
Status
Input 2 Calibration
Status
Calibration Check
Due Date
For Service Contact
SERVICE & PRODUCT INFORMATION SCREENS:
Lists the type plug-in modules types in Slots 1, 2, 3 or A – see page 4 for a
full list of field upgradeable plug-in options.
Lists factory fitted base options, from: 2nd Universal/Aux input; Output 4 &
5 Relay; Output 6 & 7 Linear mA/V DC.
Lists which other optional features are fitted/enabled, from: Profiler; USB
Port; Data Recorder and 8 Digital Inputs.
The type and version of firmware installed in the instrument.
Software and Hardware update status.
The instrument serial number.
The instrument Date of Manufacture (date format is dd/mm/yyyy).
The base calibration status for each signal type on input 1.
Caution: Re-calibrate input 1 for mVDC, VDC, mADC, RTD or
Thermocouple CJC if they do not say “Calibrated” – see page 75
The base calibration status for each signal type on optional input 2.
Caution: Re-calibrate input 2 for mVDC, VDC, mADC, RTD or
Thermocouple CJC if they do not say “Calibrated” – see page 75
The date re-calibration is due. – only shown if the Calibration Reminder is
enabled in the Input Configuration menu.
Contact information for service, sales or technical support.
8.11 Automatic Tuning Menu
The automatic tune menu is used to engage pre-tune and/or self-tune to assist setting up proportional bands
and the integral and derivative time values used by the control loops.
Pre-tune can be used to set PID parameters approximately. Self-tune may then be used to optimise the tuning if
required. See the Tuning section on page 101 for more information.
Pre-tune can be set to run automatically after every power-up by enabling Auto Pre-Tune.
70
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
8.11.1 Entry into the Automatic Tuning Menu
The Automatic Tuning Menu is entered from the Main Menu
Hold down
and press
to enter the Main Menu.
Press
or
to select the Automatic Tuning Menu.
Press
to enter the Automatic Tuning Menu.
8.11.1.1 Navigating the Automatic Tuning Menu
Press
to move forward or
Press
or
Hold down
to move backwards through the selections.
to change values or engage and disengage the tuning as required.
and press
to return to the Main Menu
Scrolling “Help Text” is shown at the bottom of the screens to aid navigation.
Automatic Tuning
Mode Unlocking
Control loop 1 or 2
Cascade Mode
 AUTOMATIC TUNING MENU SCREENS
Enter correct code number to access the Automatic Tuning Menu.
Factory Default value is 10.
Select which control loop you want to tune –if unit has 2 control loops.
To pre-tune a cascade slave, select open-cascade.
Note: When slave tuning is completed, repeat choosing open-cascade to tune
the master.
Pre-Tune Method
From: Pre-Tune Standard or Pre-Tune at Value. Standard Pre-Tune tests
the process response half-way from the activation point to the setpoint.
Pre-Tune at Valve allows the user to specify where the test occurs.
Pre-Tune Value
Sets the value at which the process is tested for Pre-Tune at Valve.
Caution: Consider possible over-shoot!
Pre-Tune Save
Store the pre-tune result to one of 5 PID sets. The new PID terms can be
Location
stored to any set, without changing the “active set” from control
configuration.
Run Pre-Tune on Set w Turns pre-tune on/off for the chosen PID Set. If configured, the TUNE LED
n Now?
indicator flashes whilst pre-tune is operating - *see below.
Note: Pre-tune is disabled in on-off control mode; if the PV is less than 5% of
span from setpoint; during Profiles; if the setpoint is ramping or if the selected
control loop has been disabled.
Pre-Tune Status
Engage Self-Tune
Shows the current pre-tune status: Running or Stopped. If an attempt to
run pre-tune failed, the reason is shown.
Turns self-tune on/off for the active PID Set. If configured, the TUNE LED
indicator is continuously on whilst self-tune is operating - *see below.
Note: Self-Tune disabled if control is On-Off or disabled. If engaged during
setpoint ramping, profile ramps or pre-tuning it is suspended until the ramp or
pre-tune is completed.
Self-Tune Status
Auto Pre-Tune At
Power Up
Shows current self-tune status: Running or Stopped. If an attempt to run
self-tune failed, the reason is shown.
Enables/disables automatic pre-tune. When enabled, this attempts to tune
the active PID set at every power-up (see Run Pre-Tune Now above).
Note: Auto Pre-tune applies standard pre-tune engagement rules at power-up.
It is disabled in on-off control mode; if the PV is less than 5% of span from
setpoint; during Profiles; if the setpoint is ramping or if the selected control loop
has been disabled.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
71
* TUNE indication is the default function of LED 3 but the user may have altered the LED functions or the
labels using the PC Configuration Software. If LED 3 is used as a TUNE indicator, it flashes while pre-tune is
operating, and is continuously on whilst self-tune is operating. If both pre-tune and self-tune are engaged the
TUNE indicator will flash until pre-tune is finished, and is then continuously on.
Note: Pre-tune will flash the LED instead of turning it on, but flashing will be obscured if the LED
had been configured to be used in conjunction with other functions and one of these is on.
8.12 Lost Lock Codes
All menu lock codes can be viewed or changed from configuration mode – see page 63. In the event that the
configuration mode lock code is forgotten, the instrument can be forced into Lock Code Configuration from
power-up, where the codes can be checked or set to new values.
8.12.1.1 Forcing Lock Code Configuration
Power down the instrument.
Re-apply the power and hold down
and
for more than 5 seconds as the start-up splash screen
appears. The Lock Code Configuration menu is displayed.
Press
to move forward or
to move backwards through the screen elements.
Make note of the codes or press
Hold down
and press
or
to change their values if required.
to return to the Main Menu
Scrolling “Help Text” is shown at the bottom of the screens to aid navigation.
72
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
9 Input Calibration & Multi-point Scaling
9.1 User Calibration
The process inputs can be adjusted to remove sensor errors or to match the characteristics of the attached
process. For each loop, independent use of base (unadjusted), single point offset or two point calibration
strategies are possible, as is the use of multi-point scaling for the displayed values of linear inputs. These
parameters are in the Input 1 & 2 calibration sub-menus of Input Configuration Sub-Menu Screens - page 46.
CAUTION: Incorrect use of Calibration & Scaling can make the displayed value
very different from the actual process variable. There is no front panel indication
of when these parameters are in use.
Note: These methods do not alter the internal instrument calibration. Simply choose Base
Calibration to restore normal measured values.
Re-calibration of the internal base values is possible, but should only be attempted by qualified
personnel as it overwrites the factory calibration – see Base Calibration Adjustment below if you
think this may be required.
9.1.1 Calibration Reminder
If the Data Recorder feature is fitted, a calibration reminder can be set for a future date. From this date a daily
reminder is shown (and shown at every start-up), until a new date has been set. This is useful in applications
that require a regular check of the measured accuracy – see Input Configuration Sub-Menu Screens on page 46.
9.1.2 Single Point Calibration
This is a ‘zero offset’ applied to the process variable across the entire span. Positive values are added to the
reading, negative values are subtracted. It can be used if the error is constant across the range, or the user is only
interested in a single critical value.
To use, select Single Point Calibration from the input calibration menu, and simply enter a value equal, but
opposite to the observed error to correct the reading.
Single Point ‘Offset
Calibration’ value
New Displayed Value
This example shows a positive offset value.
For example:
If the process displays 27.8 when it should
read 30, The error is -2.2 so an applied offset
of +2.2 would change the displayed value to
30.
The same offset is applied to all values, so at
100.0 the new displayed value would be
102.2.
Original Displayed Value
Figure 44. Single Point Calibration
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
73
9.1.3 Two Point Calibration
This method is used where an error is not constant across the range.
Separate offsets are applied at two points in the range to eliminate both “zero” and “span” errors. To use:
1. Measure and record the error at a low point in the process.
2. Measure and record the error at a high point in the process.
3. Go to the first two point input calibration screen.
a. Enter the desired low point value as the Calibration Low PV value.
b. Enter an equal, but opposite value to the observed error as the Calibration Low Offset to correct
the error at the low point.
4. Go to the second two point input calibration screen.
a. Enter the desired high point as the Calibration High PV value.
b. Enter an equal, but opposite value to the observed error as the Calibration High Offset to
correct the error at the high point.
Calibration High Offset
Original Displayed Value
This example shows a positive Low Offset
and a negative High Offset. For example:
If the process displays a low end error where
+0.5 displays as 0.0, an offset of +0.5 corrects
the value to +0.5
New Displayed Value
Calibration Low Offset
Calibration Low
Process Value
A high end value of 100.0 with a -1.7 offset
would read 98.3.
There is a linear relationship between these
two calibration points.
Calibration High
Process Value
Figure 45. Two Point Calibration
CAUTION: Choose values as near as possible to the bottom and top of your
usable span to achieve maximum calibration accuracy. The effect of any error can
grow at values beyond the chosen calibration points.
9.1.4 Multi-point Scaling
If an input is connected to a linear input signal (mA, mV or VDC), multi-point scaling can be enabled. This
allows the linearization of a non-linear signal. – see Input Configuration Sub-Menu Screens on page 46.
The Scale Input Upper & Lower Limits define the values shown when the input is at its minimum and
maximum values. Up to 15 breakpoints can scale the input vs. displayed value between these limits. It is
advisable to concentrate the break points in the area of the range with the most non-linearity, or an area of
particular importance to the application.
74
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
To Scale Upper Limit
New Linearized
Displayed Values
Scale Lower Limit
Scaling Point 1
Set the scale limits, and then enter the 1st
scaling point (this is a % of the scaled input
span, and the desired display value to be
shown at that input value. Next set the 2nd
point and display value, followed by the 3rd
etc. Continue unit all breakpoints are used or
Non-linear signal you have reached 100% of the input span.
A breakpoint set at 100% ends the sequence
Scaling Points 2, 3 & 4
Figure 46. Multi-point Scaling
9.2 Base Calibration Adjustment
Calibration of each input type is carried out during manufacture. This can be verified in the Service and Product
Info screens.
Re-calibration of the internal base values is possible, but should only be attempted by qualified personnel as it
overwrites the factory calibration.
For most applications, base re-calibration is not required during the lifetime of the instrument.
WARNING:
BASE CALIBRATION SHOULD ONLY BE PERFORMED IF ERRORS HAVE BEEN
ENCOUNTERED. REFER TO CALIBRATION CHECK BELOW.
CAUTION: Any calibration adjustment must only be performed by personnel who
are technically competent and authorised to do so.
The equipment used must be in a known good state of calibration.
9.2.1 Required Equipment
To verify the accuracy of the instrument or to carry out recalibration, a suitable calibration signal source is
required for each input type as listed below. Accuracy must be better than ±0.05% of reading:
1. DC linear inputs: 0 to 50mV, 0 to 10VDC and 0 to 20mADC.
2. Thermocouple inputs - complete with 0ºC reference facility, appropriate thermocouple functions and
compensating lead wire.
3. RTD inputs: decade resistance box with connections for three-wire input.
9.2.2 Performing a Calibration Check
1. Setup input 1 for the input signal type to be checked.
2. Power up the instrument and correctly connect the signal source.
Leave powered up for at least five minutes for RTD and DC linear inputs, and at least 30 minutes for
thermocouple inputs.
3. After the appropriate delay for stabilisation, check the calibration at a number of cardinal points by
applying the appropriate input signal.
The observed readings should be within the tolerances stated in the specifications (see page 245).
4. Test the other signal types as above if required.
5. Repeat the process for input 2 if fitted.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
75
9.2.3 Recalibration Procedure
For each process input, recalibration is carried out in six phases as shown in the table below; each phase
corresponds to a basic input type.
Note: The 50mV calibration phase MUST always be calibrated before calibration of the
thermocouple input.
INPUT CALIBRATION PHASES
Input 1 Terminals Input 2 Terminals
Signal
Type
Cable Type
(<0.05% error)
+
+
Copper Wire
Milli-volt
2
3
6
7
50 mVDC
Copper Wire
Voltage
2
3
6
7
10 VDC
Copper Wire
Milliamps (pt 1)
3
1
7
5
0 mADC
Copper Wire
Milliamps (pt 2)
3
1
7
5
20 mADC
Copper
3-Wires
RTD
1
2&3
5
6&7
200 ohm
Thermocouple 0ºC K type source K Thermocouple Wire
2
3
6
7
1. For optimum accuracy, leave the instrument power-up for >30 minutes to warm up before beginning the
calibration, and then toggle the power off/on to restart the instrument.
2. During the power-up “splash screen”, press
displayed.
and
together until the Input 1 Calibration Status screen is
3. Correctly connect the 1st phase signal (50mV), then press
4. Press
+
to select the first phase
to initiate the calibration.
5. During calibration the message “50mV DC Input Calibrating” will display for a few seconds. This should be
followed by the “Calibration Successful” confirmation.
6. If the input is misconnected or an incorrect signal is applied, the calibration will be aborted and the values
will not be altered. The display will show “Failed: Signal Too Small!” or “Failed: Signal Too Large!”.
Correct the problem and repeat that phase before continuing.
7. Press
to select the next calibration phase.
8. Repeat this process for each input type until all the phases are calibrated. For each phase, ensure that the
correct input is applied, using the appropriate connections.
9. If the instrument has 2 process inputs, when the first input sequence completes, the Input 2 Calibration
Status screen is displayed. Repeat the procedure from 3 above for this input.
10. Once calibration is complete, recorder versions will ask for a Calibration Reminder Date. If required, this
can be changed to the date of your next calibration check. Ensure that Calibration Reminders are enabled in
Input Configuration to receive a reminder.
11. Press
+
to exit to the main menu.
Note: The Calibration Mode automatically exits if there is no button activity for two minutes.
76
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
10 Digital Inputs
Digital inputs are driven to one of two states (active or inactive) by an applied voltage signal or a contact
opening/closing.
A total of 9 physical digital inputs are possible on this instrument. A multiple digital input can be installed at
time of purchase, and a single plug-in module can be fitted in option slot A.
10.1 Digital Signal Type
The digital inputs can be connected to volt-free contacts, or to a voltage signal (compatible with TTL). They can
often be used in parallel with equivalent menu selections, where either can change function status.
Some inputs are level sensitive, while others are edge sensitive requiring a High to Low or Low to High
transition to change functions status. Pre-Tune is always off at power-up (except if auto pre-tune is enabled),
but other edge sensitive functions retain their power off status at power on. See the tables below for details.
Open contacts (>5000Ώ) or 2 to 24VDC signal = Logic High (logic low if inverted).
Closed contacts (<50 Ώ) or -0.6 to +0.8VDC signal = Logic Low (logic high if inverted).
CAUTION: The response time is ≥0.25 seconds. Signals applied for less than this
time may not register and the function might not change state.
A diagnostic screen assists commissioning and fault
finding by showing the current signal state for all
digital inputs.
Slot A, C1 to C8 & Soft digital input status ( =
Active, Ø = Unavailable)
Profile select bit format (BCD or Binary)
Profile selected (example shown: C1-C3 = 011 = 6)
10.1.1 Inverting Digital Inputs
Digital inputs can be inverted to reverse their
action making an “on” input behave as off.
key.
Step thorough each input using the
Press
to invert  the highlighted input and
to un-invert . Hold
down to skip to next
screen accepting the values shown.
Highlighted Input
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
77
10.2 Soft Digital Inputs
In addition to the physical digital inputs, four “soft” digital inputs are available. They are used to select
functions in the same way as the physical inputs.
The four soft digital inputs can be configured by
combining physical inputs, alarms & events using
Boolean logic. Input AND selections are then
globally OR’d with the input OR selections, the
alarms & the events. By using the invert inputs
function, NAND & NOR equivalents can be
created.
10.3 Digital Input Functions
Some or all of inputs C1 to C7 can be used for profile
selection. If used in this way they cannot be used for any
other functions.
Soft inputs and any physical digital inputs not allocated for
profile selection can be used to change the instrument
status.
Each input can only perform a single function.
The possible functions are listed below.
10.3.1.1 Single Functions
Digital inputs can often work in parallel with equivalent menus, where either can change function status.
In the table below, █ = Level Sensitive: Where a High or low signal sets the function status.
= Edge Sensitive: High-Low or Low-High transition changes the function status.
Pre-Tune is always off at power on (except if auto pre-tune is in use), and profile recovery is as configured, but
others functions retain their power off status when the power returns.
┌ ┐
Function
Logic High*
Logic Low*
Loop 1 Control Select
Enabled
Disabled
Loop 2 Control Select
Enabled
Disabled
Loop 1 Auto/Manual Select
Automatic
Manual
Loop 2 Auto/Manual Select
Automatic
Manual
Loop 1 Setpoint Select
Main SP
Alternate SP
Loop 2 Setpoint Select
Main SP
Alternate SP
Loop 1 Pre-Tune Select
Stop
Run
Loop 2 Pre-Tune Select
Stop
Run
Loop 1 Self-Tune Select
Stop
Run
Loop 2 Self-Tune Select
Stop
Run
78
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
Sensitivity / Functions’
Power On State
┌ ┐
/ Retained
┌ ┐
/ Retained
┌ ┐
/ Retained
┌ ┐
/ Retained
┌ ┐
/ Retained
┌ ┐
/ Retained
┌ ┐
/ OFF
┌ ┐
/ OFF
┌ ┐
/ Retained
┌ ┐
/ Retained
October 2014
┌ ┐
/ As configured
┌ ┐
/ Retained
Profile Run/Hold
Hold
Run
Profile Hold Segment Release
No Action
Release
Profile Abort
No Action
Abort
█ / As Digital Input
Data Recorder Trigger
Not Active
Active
█ / As Digital Input
Output n Forcing
Off/Open
On/Closed
█ / As Digital Input
Clear All Latched Outputs
No Action
Reset
█ / As Digital Input
Output n Clear Latch
No Action
Reset
█ / As Digital Input
No Action
Key Pressed
█ / As Digital Input
Key n Mimic (for
)
10.3.1.2 Profile Selection via digital inputs
For instruments with the profiler option, the multi-digital input option can be used to select the profile to run
using either a standard binary bit pattern, or binary coded decimal from BCD switches. Profile selection inputs
are all level sensitive ( █ ), with a high/open signal equating to a binary 1 (assuming non-inverted), and a
low/closed signal equating to a binary 0 (assuming non-inverted).
Profiles are numbered 0 to 63. Select inputs C1 to Cn for the required number of profiles, from the table:
C1 to C2
C1 to C3
C1 to C4
C1 to C5
C1 to C6
C1 to C7
0 to 3
0 to 7
0 to 15
0 to 31
0 to 63
0 to 3
0 to 7
0 to 9
0 to 19
0 to 39
0 to 63
Using Binary To Select Profile Numbers
Selection of profiles is via a simple binary bit pattern. C1 is the least significant bit (LSB).
C6 to C1
C5 to C1
C4 to C1
C3 to C1
C2 to C1
C1
000000 to 111111
00000 to 11111
0000 to 1111
000 to 111
00 to 11
0 to 1
(0 to 63)
(0 to 31)
(0 to 15)
(0 to 7)
(0 to 3)
(0 to 1)
Using BCD To Select Profile Numbers
A single BCD switch can be used to select profiles 0 to 9 using C1 to C4, with a bit pattern identical to
standard binary. For larger numbers, a double BCD switch arrangement is needed. A separate binary
pattern is applied to C5 to C7 for the “tens” digit (10 = 001, 20 = 010, 30 = 011 etc).
Any number combination higher than 63 is invalid.
Multiples of ten (0x to 6x)
Multiples of one (x0 to x9)
C7 to C1
C6 to C1
C5 to C1
C4 to C1
C3 to C1
C2 to C1
C1
000 to 110
00 to 11
0 to 1
0000 to 1001 000 to 111
00 to 11
0 to 1
(0x to 6x)
(0x to 3x)
(0x to 1x)
(x0 to x9)
(x0 to x7)
(x0 to x3)
(x0 to x1)
Binary
BCD
C1
0 to 1
0 to 1
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
79
11 Cascade Control
Applications with long time lags (e.g. with two or more capacities such as heated jackets) can be difficult to
control with a single control loop. The solution is to split the process into two or more cascaded loops
consisting of a Master and Slave(s) acting on a common actuator. Ideally, the slave loop’s natural response time
should be at least 5 times faster than the master.
The master controller measures the process temperature and compares it to the desired product setpoint. Its
correcting variable (0 to 100% PID output) becomes the slave’s effective setpoint (scaled to suit the process).
This setpoint is compared to the slave’s process input, and the controlling actuator is adjusted accordingly.
Note: Cascade control is only available on models fitted with the 2nd control loop. The master
loop uses input 1; and the slave loop uses input 2.
11.1 Example Cascade Application
In this example the controlling actuator is a heater, indirectly heating the product via an oil jacket. The
maximum input to the slave represents 300ºC, thus restricting the jacket temperature. At start-up the master
compares the product temperature (ambient) to its setpoint (250ºC) and gives 100%. This sets the maximum
slave setpoint (300ºC), which is compared to the oil temperature (ambient) and the slave requests maximum
heater output.
250°C Master Setpoint
MASTER
SP
OP
IP1
0-100%
0-300°C
Output
Slave SP
SLAVE
OP
SP
IP2
OIL JACKET
MASTER SENSOR
PRODUCT
SLAVE SENSOR
HEATER
Figure 47. Cascade example
As the oil temperature rises towards the slave setpoint, its output falls. Gradually, the product temperature will
also begin rising, at a rate dependant on the transfer rate/lag between the oil jacket and the product. Eventually
this causes the master’s PID output to decrease, reducing the slave setpoint. The oil temperature is reduced
towards the new slave setpoint. This continues until the system becomes balanced. The result is quicker,
smoother control with the ability to cope with changes in the load. Overshoot is minimised and the jacket
temperature is kept within acceptable tolerances.
80
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
11.2 Normal Cascade Operation
During operation, the master and slave are coupled together and. "Cascade" is displayed. The master process
value and setpoint are most relevant to the user. The master setpoint is directly adjustable. The process value of
the slave controller is displayed for information only.
11.3 Cascade-Open
The cascade can be disconnected (via digital inputs or menu selection), switching from normal operation to
direct control of the slave. "Cascade-Open" is displayed. Opening the cascade is “Bumpless”. The current
cascade value is used as the initial slave setpoint (displayed as “SlaveSP”). The process is then controlled and
adjusted solely by the slave controller using this setpoint. Switching back to Cascade is also bumpless.
CAUTION: The master process value is not under control when the cascade is
open, but will be affected by the slave process. The operator is responsible for
maintaining safe conditions.
11.4 Manual Mode
The controller can be put into manual mode (via digital inputs or menu selection), switching from normal
operation to direct control of the slave loop’s correcting variable. Manual power is adjusted from 0% or -100 to
100%. "MAN" is displayed.
CAUTION: Manual mode disables the cascade loop. It also ignores any output
power limits, valve open/close limits and the control enable/disable setting. The
operator is responsible for maintaining the process within safe limits.
11.5 Cascade Tuning
The user can tune the slave and master loops manually, or use the pre-tune feature (see Controller Tuning on
page 101).
In either case the slave control loop must first be optimised on its own, followed by the master loop in
combination with the previously tuned slave.
11.5.1 To automatically pre-tune a cascade:
1. Go to the Automatic Tuning menu
2. Select “Cascade-Open” from the pre-tune menu to tune the PID set(s) on the slave.
3. After the slave has successfully tuned, pre-tune the master/slave combination by selecting “CascadeClosed” from the pre-tune menu.
Note: The cascade remains open until you pre-tune the master or manually select CascadeClosed.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
81
11.5.2 To manually tune a cascade:
1. Select Cascade-Open from the Cascade Control menu, breaking the link between the master and slave
loops.
2. Set the slave controller setpoint manually to the appropriate value for your application.
3. Tune the slave for relatively fast control (‘proportional only’ is often sufficient).
4. Select Cascade-Closed from the Cascade Control menu to link the master and slave loops, then tune the
master/slave combination.
82
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
12 Ratio Control
A ratio control loop is used where the quantity of one of the material is to be controlled in proportion to the
measured quantity of a second material. The controller mixes the materials at the desired ratio by adjusting the
flow of input 1. The flow of input 2 may be controlled separately, but is not controlled by the ratio control loop
itself.
The process value used by the controller is therefore determined by the ratio of the two inputs rather than a
single measured variable.
nd
Note: Ratio control is available on models with the 2 Auxiliary Input, or two loop models. The
feature and information displayed is optimised for control of burner fuel/air, but can be used in
other flow ratio applications.
12.1 Stoichiometric Combustion
Below is an example of stoichiometric combustion ratio control. For optimum combustion the fuel-air ratio is
set so that there are no flammable residues in the waste gas.
Burner
Air
Air Valve
Fuel
NO
Atomization Air
Figure 48. Ratio Control Example
It is normal in this application to display the process value and setpoint as relative values rather than the
physical ratio or absolute values. A scaling factor is set such that the displayed value will be 1.00 at the correct
stoichiometric ratio for the application.
Inputs 1 and 2 are configured and scaled to match the attached flow meters.
In this example a 4 to 20mA signal at x1 represents 0 to 1000m3/h of airflow controlled by a valve. The second
4 to 20mA signal at x2 represents 0 to 100m3/h of fuel oil. The fuel flow is not affected by this control loop.
Atomizing air is fed in with the fuel oil at a constant rate ‘NO’. This must be considered when calculating the
correct fuel/air mix. Total airflow is x1 + NO.
The stoichiometric factor, SFac is entered to match the desired ratio. E.g for 10 parts total airflow to one part
fuel, SFac would be 10.
The setpoint (entered as a relative value such as 1.00) is multiplied by SFac when calculating the control
deviation. E.g. with a setpoint of 1.00 and SFac of 10 the controller attempts to make the physical ratio 10. With
a setpoint of 1.03 it would attempt to make the ratio 10.3 for 3% excess air.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
83
The instantaneous (controlled) process value is calculated from the physical ratio, divided by SFac. Like the
setpoint, this is displayed as relative value.
E.g. if SFac is 10, with 59.5m3/h airflow measured at x1, 0.5m3/h atomising air applied at NO and 6m3/h fuel is
measured at x2, the instantaneous process value would be:
𝒙𝟏+𝑵𝑶
𝒙𝟐∗𝑺𝑭𝒂𝒄
=
𝟓𝟗.𝟓+𝟎.𝟓
𝟔∗𝟏𝟎
= 𝟏. 𝟎𝟎
If fuel flow remained at 6m3/h and the setpoint was adjusted to 1.05 (5% excess air), the controller would
increase the x1 air flow to 62.5m3/h.
𝒙𝟏+𝑵𝑶
𝒙𝟐∗𝑺𝑭𝒂𝒄
=
𝟔𝟐.𝟓+𝟎.𝟓
𝟔∗𝟏𝟎
= 𝟏. 𝟎𝟓
Typical Ration display with Setpoint at 1.05
84
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
13 Redundant Input
If the 2nd universal input is fitted, the second input can be configured as a redundant input for the main process
input. This increases process security by protecting against the possible loss of valuable product resulting from
sensor failure.
A second sensor is connected to input 2 so that if the main sensor fails, the instrument automatically switches to
this backup or “redundant” sensor.
In this condition, if input 1 has a signal break alarm configured it will activate, but any other process input or
control status alarms seamlessly switch to the 2nd input. The 2nd input continues to be used until the signal to
input 1 is restored.
Note: The user may not even be aware of a sensor fault, so it is strongly recommended that
signal break alarms are configured for both inputs to provide a notification if problems occur.
The redundant sensor must be of the same type, and be correctly located in the application ready to take over if
needed. If the redundant input option is selected, the 2nd input cannot be used for other functions.
Note: If both signals are lost at the same time, the PV value display is replaced with “OPEN” and
the normal sensor break actions occur.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
85
14 Valve Motor Drive / 3-Point Stepping Control
When directly controlling the motor of a modulating valve or damper, set the Control Mode to VMD in
configuration mode to enable the 3-point stepping Valve Motor Drive control algorithm.
The term “3-point stepping” is used because there are 3 output states, open valve, close valve or stopped (no
action). Switched outputs move the valve further open, or further closed when a control deviation error is
detected. If the error is reduced to zero, no further output is required until the load conditions change.
VMD mode doesn’t allow on-off control (the minimum proportional band equates to 0.5% of the scaled input
span) and usually requires PI control, where the derivative parameter is set to OFF.
Note: Some modulating valves have positioning circuitry to adjust the valve position. These
require a DC linear mA or voltage output and use the standard control algorithm (Set Control
Mode to Standard).
14.1 Special Wiring Considerations for Valve Motor Control
Valve motor drive mode must have two identical outputs assigned to position the valve. One to open and one to
close the valve. These outputs can be two single relays, two triacs, two SSR drivers or one dual relay, but it is
recommended to use two single relays (SPDT change-over contacts), and to interlock the wiring as shown. This
prevents both motor windings from being driven at the same time, even under fault conditions.
Open Valve Winding
“Open” Relay
Valve Common
Close Valve
“Close” Relay
120V Supply
CAUTION: The windings of a valve motor effectively form an autotransformer. This
causes a voltage doubling effect when power is applied to either the Open or
Close terminal, causing twice the supplied voltage at the other terminal.
Switching actuators directly connected to the valve motor must only be used up to half of their rated voltage.
The internal relay and triac outputs in this instrument are rated at 240VAC Therefore, the maximum motor
voltage when using them is therefore 120V unless interposing relays are used. Interposing relays or other
devices used to control the valve must themselves be rated for twice the motor supply voltage.
86
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
14.2 Position Feedback
In VMD mode this instrument uses a boundless (open-loop) 3-point stepping algorithm. It does not require any
kind of position feedback in order to correctly control the process and can therefore avoids problems associated
with faulty feedback signals.
However, where valve feedback is available it can still be displayed in a bar-graph as a percentage open (0 to
100%). Position feedback is usually provided by means of a potentiometer mechanically linked to the valve.
The output of a related flow meter can also be used to indicate the relative valve position. Flow meters typically
have linear 0-20/4-20mA or 0-5/0-10V signals. To display the position/flow signal the 2nd input is must be
configured for this purpose.
The input is adjusted and scaled to show 0 to 100% representing valve fully closed to fully open, or a flow rate
equating to fully closed to fully open. The valve position scaling parameters are set in the Input Configuration
sub menus – see page 46.
14.2.1 Valve Limiting
When valve position/flow indication is in use, the signal can be used by the controller to limit the valve
movement. Upper and/or lower limits can be set beyond which it will not attempt to drive the valve. The valve
open and close limits are set in the Control Configuration sub menu – see page 49.
CAUTION: These limits must be used with care. They are effectively control power
limits. Do not set values that prevent proper control of the process!
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
87
15 Setpoint Sources
The setpoint is the target value at which the instrument attempts to maintain the process variable. Each loop can
have a Main “local” setpoint set from the keypad and an Alternate setpoint.
15.1 Loop 1 Setpoint Sources
Loop 1 can have a Main “local” setpoint set from the keypad and an Alternate setpoint.
The alternate setpoint source can be either another local Setpoint or a remote setpoint (RSP), set by a mA or V
DC signal applied to the 2nd input or to auxiliary input A. The control loop can only use one setpoint source at
a time for each loop. This is called the “Active Setpoint”. If the profiler option is fitted this provides the setpoint
when the profiler is in use, replacing both main an alternate setpoints.
Main/alternate setpoint selection can be made via a digital input; from the Control Configuration menu or if
enabled in the Display Configuration sub-menu, an operator screen can be used to select the setpoint. The
chosen setpoint selection method can be used to permanently select one of the setpoints, or allow switching
between them.
Refer to the Control Configuration Sub-Menu Screens on page 49 for setpoint settings.
15.1.1 Loop 1 Profile Setpoint
When in profile control mode, the selected profile always provides the active setpoint source for loop 1 (see
page 89). Once profile control mode is exited, the selected main or alternate setpoint for loop 1 becomes active
again.
15.2 Loop 2 Setpoint Sources
Loop 2 can have a Main “local” setpoint set from the keypad and an Alternate setpoint.
The alternate setpoint source can be either another local Setpoint” or a remote setpoint (RSP), set by a mA or V
DC signal applied to auxiliary input A. The control loop can only use one setpoint source at a time for each
loop. This is called the “Active Setpoint”. If the profiler option is fitted this provides the setpoint, replacing both
main an alternate setpoints, when 2-loop profiling is in use.
Main/alternate setpoint selection can be made via a digital input; from the Control Configuration menu or if
enabled in the Display Configuration sub-menu, an operator screen can be used to select the setpoint. The
chosen setpoint selection method can be used to permanently select one of the setpoints, or allow switching
between them.
Refer to the Control Configuration Sub-Menu Screens on page 49 for setpoint settings.
15.2.1 Loop 2 Profile Setpoint
If the selected profile was configured to control the setpoint of both loops, it will provide the active setpoint
source (see page 89). Once profile control mode is exited, the selected main or alternate setpoint for loop 2
becomes active again.
88
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
16 Profiler
This section covers the Profiler (or setpoint programmer) option. To confirm if profiling is enabled on your
controller, refer to the Service & Product Info menu (see page 70).
16.1 Introduction
The Profiler feature allows the user to store up to 255 profile segments, shared between a maximum of 64
Profiles. Each profile controls the value of the setpoint over time; increasing, decreasing or holding their values
as required. The profile can control both setpoints if the 2nd control loop is fitted.
Profiler options and screens are added to the Main Menu and Operation Mode – See pages 67, 69 & 36.
16.2 Profiler Enabling
Controllers supplied without the Profiler option installed can be upgraded by purchasing a licence code number.
Refer to the Field Upgrade information on page 4.
To obtain the correct code you must tell your supplier the instrument serial number – this can be found in the
Service & Product Info menu (see page 70).
To enter the licence code, hold down the
+
keys during the power-up splash screen. Enter the 16character licence code in the displayed screen and press
.
16.3 Profile Components
General profile configuration settings apply to all profiles. They enable or disable “profile editing while
running”, and automatic starting of the selected profile if it has been configured with a delay or day & time start
trigger.
If delay or day & time start triggers are disabled, profiles can only be manually started, and this is with
immediate effect even if they have a delay or day & time trigger defined.
If delay or day & time start triggers are enabled, delayed starts are possible, and if the selected profile has a day
& time trigger it will wait until the time set and before starting.
Note: Even if profile editing is enabled, changes to the current and next segment or a running
profile will not take effect until the profile is next run. Changes to other segments will take effect
immediately.
16.3.1 Profile Header & Segment Information
Each profile has its own header information plus 1 or more segments. The header information is unique for each
profile, it contains the profile’s name; if it controls just one or both loops; how it should start & stop; the abort
& power-loss recovery actions; and how many times it should be repeated.
Note: Profile Header information is only stored to memory as the Segment creation sequence
begins. No profile is created if you exit before this point.
Segment information is stored as each segment is created, but the profile remains invalid until an
end or join segment is defined.
Segments can be ramps, dwells, steps or special segments such as holds, ends, joins or loop-backs.
If the instrument also has the data recorder option, its real time clock (RTC) expands the profiling capabilities
by adding Day & Time profile start options, releasing of hold segments at a specific time of day and changing
the power fail recovery option to one based on the length of time the power has been off. These features are
explained below and in the Profiler Setup and Profile Control menus (See pages 67 & 69).
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
89
16.3.2 Profile Starting & Standard Segments
The example profile below explains the standard segment types required to make a simple profile or profile
sequence. A Start Trigger is the instruction to begin the selected profile. This can be from the profile control
menu, a digital input signal, via a serial communications command or if enabled in the display configuration,
the profile can be controlled from an operator screen.
Following a Start Trigger, profiles can start immediately, after a delay, or using the Day & Time start timer
(Day & Time start available on with the Recorder option only). Following the start trigger, the remaining delay
time or the start day & time are shown in the profile status bar-graph until the profile begins running.
Note: Profiles outside current setpoint limits will not run, A “profile not valid” error shows if you
attempt to run a profile under these circumstances.
PROFILE 1
PROFILE 9
Seg. 1 Target SP
Step
Ramp (Time/Rate)
Starting Setpoint
End
Start
Trigger
Timer or Delay
Dwell
Join (Profile 1 to Profile 9)
Figure 49. Profile Starting and Standard Segment Types
Ramps and Step Segments have target setpoint that they will reach as they finish.
If a segment is a Ramp-Time type, the slope needed to reach the target setpoint in the defined time will change
depending on the starting setpoint value.
For a Ramp-Rate segment, the slope is defined by the segments Ramp Rate, so the time to reach the target
setpoint will change instead. This is of particular significance for the first segment, since the starting value of
the process may not be known in advance.
Note: When using the instrument as a two loop profiler Ramp-Rate type segments are not
available. Calculate the time from the starting value to the target setpoint and use Ramp-Time
instead.
A Dwell (often called a “soak”) holds the previous setpoint value for the specified dwell time.
Step segments jump straight to the new target setpoint value.
An End segment ends the profile or profile sequence.
If the last segment is a Join, the “join target” profile will begin running.
Note: If the join target has been deleted the profile sequence will abort and the last profiles abort
action will apply.
16.3.3 Two Loop Profiles
If the instrument is configured to control two control loops, the setpoint of both loops can be maintained when
profiling. Both setpoints are synchronised to a common segment time-base, but have independent target
setpoints for each of the segments.
90
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Note: When using the instrument as a two loop profiler Ramp-Rate type segments are not
available. Calculate the time from the starting value to the target setpoint and use Ramp-Time
instead.
The example below shows how two loop profiling works in practice.
Auto-Hold settings and target setpoints are independent for each loop, but the segment types and time settings
are the same.
2-LOOP PROFILE
Independent Setpoints
Loop 1
Loop 2
Seg. Nos
Both loops on same time-base
Seg. ①& ②shows a ramp and a dwell with the shared time base
The ramp direction can be different (Seg. ③), and although one loop cannot ramp while the other dwells, a
"dwell" is achieved by a ramp with its final setpoint value at the same value as the previous segment (Seg. ④).
Similarly, if only one loop is to Step to a new value, make the other “step” to its existing setpoint value. If you
later change the previous setpoint, you may have to change both segments.
The Loop-back feature takes both loops back to the same defined earlier segment.
Note: Auto-Hold settings are independent for each loop. Either loop can cause the profile to autohold, holding both loops at the current setpoint value. The profile continues only when both loops
are back within their hold bands.
16.3.4 Loop-back Segments
A Loop-back segment goes back to a specified segment in the current profile. This action is repeated for the
required number of times (1 to 9999) before the profile continues onwards. More than one Loop Segment can
be used in a profile, but they cannot cross.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
91
Loop-back target segment
Example:
Runs segments 1 to 5, then
repeats segments 3 to 5
again 500 times, before
continuing on to segments 7
End
x 500
Loop Segment
Figure 50. Loop-back Segments
16.4 Profile Running / Holding vs. Hold Segments
Continue
Triggers
Hold Start
End
Run
Hold Stop
Hold Segments
Figure 51. Run/Hold & Hold Segments
A Hold condition during a segment maintains the current profile setpoint value(s). Once the hold condition is
stopped the Ramp or Dwell continues. The user can request that the profile holds, or it can be instigated
automatically.
Note: A running segment will hold if the operator or a digital input instructs it to. It can also hold
due to “auto-hold”, if one of the profile control loops is disabled, if a cascade is set to “open” or if
manual control is selected.
A Hold Segment is a pre-planned hold programmed into the profile. It maintains the value of the previous
segment and the profile does not continue until a Continue Trigger occurs. This can be via a key-press, serial
communications, a digital input signal or after waiting until a pre-set time of day (time of day is available with
the recorder option only).
16.5 The Auto-Hold Feature
There are independent auto-hold settings for each segment of each loop controlled by the profile. When utilised,
auto-hold ensures that the profile and the actual processes remain synchronised. If the process does not closely
match the setpoints (within the defined Hold Bands), the profile will be held until it returns within bounds.
When Auto-Hold becomes active, the profile status is shown as “Held”.
92
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Note: The segment time is increased by the time that the process is out of bounds, extending the
total profile run time.
Auto-hold can be configured to hold the profile if the process goes beyond the hold band Above The Setpoint
only, Below The Setpoint only or it can be set to Band (either side of the setpoint).
Note: For two-loop profiles, either loop can cause the profile to hold. The entire profile (i.e. both
loops) will be held if either process is outside of its auto-hold band. It continues only when both
loops are back within their auto-hold bands.
16.5.1 Auto Hold Examples
16.5.1.1 Auto Hold on Dwells
Held if Auto-Hold set to Above Setpoint or Band
Hold Band
Dwell Segment
Setpoint
Process Variable
Held if Auto-Hold set to Below Setpoint or Band
Figure 52. Auto-Hold on a Dwell Segment
During a Dwell, the dwell time is increased by the time that the process is outside of the hold band in the
selected direction(s). This ensures the process was at the desired level for the required amount of time.
16.5.1.2 Auto Hold on Ramps
Held if Auto-Hold set to Above Setpoint or Band
Process Variable
Hold Band
Ramp Setpoint
(without AutoHold)
Ramp Setpoint
(with Auto-Hold)
Held if Auto-Hold set to Below Setpoint or Band
Figure 53. Auto-Hold On A Ramp Segment
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
93
During a Ramp segment, the ramp is held at the current setpoint value while the process is outside of the hold
band in the selected direction(s). The time taken to complete the ramp is increased by the time taken by the
Auto-Hold.
16.6 Profile Cycles & Repeat Sequences
A profile can be configured to run itself from 1 to 9999 times or continuously using the Profile Cycles setting.
A profile ending with Repeat Then End will run the entire sequence of profiles again from 1 to 9999 times
before ending.
PROFILE 4
PROFILE 31
PROFILE 7
Profile 4
Profile 7
Cycles = 1
Profile 31
Cycles = 1
Cycles = 3
Example:
Runs profile 4 once,
profile 31 three times
& profile 7 once.
This sequence is
repeated ten times.
Repeat Sequence = 10
Join (Profile 4 to Profile 31)
Repeat Then End
(times to repeat = 10)
Join (Profile 31 to Profile 7)
Figure 54. Profile Cycles & Repeats
94
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
16.7 Power/Signal Lost Recovery Actions
If the power is cut or the input signal is lost while a profile is running, the instrument will use the defined
Profile Recovery Method once the signal / power returns. The profile recovery method is set in the profile
header.
The possible profile recovery options are explained below.
Power off or input lost
Run
(Start-on SP)
Power / input returns
Off Time
Planned Profile
Controller SP
A
B
See note
C
below
D
E
= Control Off
Possible Recovery Methods:
End the profile and maintain the setpoint value(s) from the time the power failed.
End the profile and use Controller Setpoint value(s).
End the profile with the Control outputs off - setpoint value replaced by “OFF”.
Restart the profile again from the beginning.
Continue profile from the point it had reached when the power failed
Figure 55. End, Abort and Recovery Actions
Note: Recorder versions always use option E (Continue profile) if the “off time” is less than the
Profile Recovery Time setting. If the “off time” is longer, the defined Profile Recovery Method is
used.
Note: With option E, after the power returns profile bar graph resets and shows the
remaining/elapsed time for the profile only since re-starting.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
95
16.8 Profile End Actions
Once a running profile ends, that profiles’ Segment End Type defines the action taken by the instrument. If a
sequence of profiles are joined together, the End Segment Type of the last profile in the sequence will be carried
out when it completes. The end segment type is set in the final profile segment data.
The possible profile end actions are explained below.
Run
(Start-on SP)
Last Profile SP
Normal Profile End
Controller SP
= Control Off
Controller SP
Possible Profile End Actions:
A At profile end, maintain the Final Setpoint value(s) of the last segment.
See note
B At profile end, exit Profiler Mode and use the Controller Setpoint value(s).
below C
C At profile end, remain in Profiler Mode with the Control outputs off.
Figure 56. Profile End Action
Note: When using two loop profiles, the end-action applies to both loops, but each ends with its
own individual setpoint in line with the method chosen.
96
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
16.9 Profile Abort Actions
If a running profile is forced to end early, the Profile Abort Action defines action taken by the instrument. The
profile abort action is set in the profile header.
If a profile sequence is forced to end early, the profile abort action of the current segment will be used.
The possible abort options are explained below.
Last Profile SP
Run
(Start-on SP)
Profile Aborted
Controller SP
Controller SP
= Control Off
Possible Profile Abort Actions:
A Abort the profile and maintain the value of the setpoint at the time of the abort.
See note
B Abort the profile and exit Profiler Mode using the Controller Setpoint value.
below
C Abort the profile and remain in Profiler Mode with the Control outputs off.
Figure 57. Profile Abort Action
Note: When using two loop profiles, the abort-action applies to both loops, but each ends with its
own individual setpoint in line with the method chosen.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
97
17 USB Interface
The features in this section are available on models fitted with the optional USB Interface.
17.1 Using the USB Port
The USB Interface can be used to upload or download instrument settings to or from a USB memory stick
(FAT32 formatted). Easy configuration of multiple instruments is achieved by copying from one instrument to
another, or by transferring data from the PC configuration software. If the Data Recorder or Profiler options are
fitted, recordings and profile information can also be transferred via USB memory stick. Refer also to the USB
menu on page 63.
17.1.1 USB Memory Stick Folders & Files
When a USB stick is inserted, the instrument looks for, and if necessary creates the DEVICE, CONFIG,
PROFILE and RECORDER folders. Files must be located in these folders in order to be used by the
instrument. When preparing to upload files from your PC, ensure that you save them to the correct folder on the
memory stick.
CAUTION: If the file name already exists, data will be overwritten.
DEVICE – This folder must be located in the Root of the
USB memory stick
CONFIG – Configuration files (*.bct)
PROFILE – Profile program files (*.pfl)
RECORDER – Recorder log folders/files The user is
asked for a new recorder sub-folder name before
transferring recorder data to USB. The instrument stores
the log files (*.csv) in this folder.
Note: To speed up the disk operation, keep the number of files in these folders to a minimum.
The first recorder log file is named 001-0001.csv. A new file is created with the first 3 digits incremented (e.g.
002-0001.csv; 003-0001.csv etc) each time the data being recorded is changed. The last 4 digits increment (e.g.
001-0002.csv; 001-0003.csv etc) if the file size reaches 65535 lines, if a recording is stopped then re-started or
if there is a period of >10s without an alarm when recording from an alarm trigger.
CAUTION: Do not remove the memory stick during data transfer. Data corruption
may result.
CAUTION: During data transfer, normal operations carry on in the background,
but operator access is denied. Transfer of full memory can take up to 20 minutes.
Only begin a transfer when access to the instrument (e.g. setpoint changes) will
not be required.
98
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
18 Data Recorder
The optional Data Recorder allows the recording of process conditions to memory over time. It operates
independently from the Trend Views. The recorder includes 1Mb of flash memory to store data when powered
down and a real time clock (RTC) with a battery backup.
CAUTION: Servicing of the Data Recorder/RTC circuit and replacement of the
internal lithium battery should be carried out by only a trained technician.
18.1 Recordable Values
A selection of values can be recorded for each control loop, from: Process Variable; Maximum or Minimum
Process Values (since the previous sample); Setpoints; Primary Power, Secondary Power or Auxiliary Input
values. Additionally the status of Alarms and Profiler Events can be recorded, as can when the unit is turned
On/Off. See the Recorder Configuration sub-menu on page 59.
Sampling rates between 1 second and 30 minutes are possible, with the data either recorded until all memory is
used, or with a continuous “First In/First Out” buffer overwriting the oldest data when full.
The recording capacity is dependent on sample rate and number of values recorded. For example: Two analog
values will recorded for 21 days at 30s intervals. More values or faster sample rates reduce the duration
proportionally.
Note: If recorded, each alarm/event change forces an extra sample to be recorded, reducing the
remaining recording time available. If these are likely to change often, take this into account when
determining if there is sufficient memory available.
18.1.1 Recorder Control and Status
Options for starting/stopping recordings include Manually (from the recorder menu or a screen added to
operation mode); a Digital Input; during a Running Profile; or Record on Alarm. See the Recorder
Configuration sub-menu on page 59.
The recorder control menu (page 66) allows the manual trigger to be started or stopped, as well as deleting
recorded data from memory.
A status screen is shown with current information about the recorder, including if a recording is in progress
(Recording or Stopped); the recording mode (FIFO or Record Until Memory Is Used); a % memory use bargraph and the estimated available time remaining based on the data selected and memory used.
These icons are displayed for
each active recording trigger.
Recorder status and manual
record trigger control can
Manual Record
Digital Input
Profile Record Alarm Record
optionally be added to
Operation Mode. This is enabled or disabled in the Display Configuration sub-menu on page 62.
Note: The recorder control screens allow the manual trigger to be started or stopped, but
recording will continue as long as any trigger that has been configured is active.
18.1.2 Uploading Data
Recordings can be transferred to a memory stick using the USB Port (See page 98). They can also be uploaded
directly to the PC software via the configuration port or RS485/Ethernet communications if fitted.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
99
The data is stored in Comma Separated format (.csv) which
can be opened and analysed with the optional PC software
or opened directly into a spreadsheet. Many third party
software programs can also import data in the .csv format.
The file contains a header identifying the source instruments
serial number, the date of the file upload and descriptions of
the data columns.
The data columns seen depends on the data selected to
record, but will always include the date and time of each
sample. The date format follows the instrument date format
selection. Date(en) is dd/mm/yyyy, and Date (us) is
mm/dd/yyyy.
Note: Analysis with the PC software is limited to 8 analog channels, so only the first 8 will be
displayed. The number of recorded alarms & events is not limited.
18.2 Additional Features & Benefits from the Recorder
The real time clock (RTC) included with the data recorder also expands the profiling capabilities (see Profiler
on page 89) and allows a “calibration due” reminder to be shown at a specified date (see the Input
Configuration sub-menu on page 46).
100
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
19 Controller Tuning
19.1 PID Sets & Gain Scheduling
Up to 5 sets of PID tuning terms can be entered for each control loop, allowing the instrument to be pre-set for
differing conditions. Each set has individual values for the following parameters: Primary Proportional Band;
Secondary Proportional Band; On-Off Differential; Integral Time; Derivative time; Overlap/Deadband.
The parameter values can be entered in the control configuration sub menu (page 49), but also see Automatic
Tuning below for automatic tuning of the PID sets.
The PID sets might be configured for different applications, or to allow for differing process or load conditions
that might occur in a single application. In this case one set at a time would be selected as the “Active PID” set
for that loop.
Alternatively, if the process conditions change significantly during use (e.g. if it is partially exothermic as the
temperature rises) Gain Scheduling can be employed.
Gain scheduling ‘bumplessly’ switches PID sets automatically at successively higher setpoint or process values,
giving optimal control across a wide range of process conditions. This is explained in the diagram below.
Scale Upper Limit
PID Set 5
PV or SP
Breakpoints
PID Set 4
PID Set 3
PID Set 2
PID set 1 is used from the scaled
input lower limit until the
“breakpoint” for set 2 is passed and
that set becomes active.
Set 2 is then used until the breakpoint
for Set 3 is reached etc.
If any breakpoint is set to OFF, the
subsequent PID sets are not used.
PID Set 1
Scale Lower Limit
The final set continues from the last
breakpoint to the scaled input upper
limit.
Gain Scheduling breakpoints can be selected to switch PID sets with a change in the current setpoint value, or
the current process value.
Note: ON/OFF control is possible with the individual PID sets but cannot be used with gain
scheduling. On/off control is replaced with the default proportional band if gain scheduling is
turned on.
If the a change to the scale lower or upper limits forces any of the breakpoints out of bounds, all breakpoints
will be turned off and the instruments uses the default PID set 1.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
101
19.2 Automatic Tuning
To automatically optimise the controllers tuning terms for the process, you can use Pre-Tune, Self-Tune or Auto
Pre-Tune independently for each control loop.
Note: Automatic tuning will not engage if either proportional band is set to On/Off control. Also,
pre-tune (including an auto pre-tune attempt) will not engage if the setpoint is ramping, if a profile
is running, or if the Process Variable is <5% of span from setpoint.
19.2.1.1 Pre-Tune
Pre-tune performs a single disturbance of the normal start-up pattern so that a good approximation of the ideal
PID values can be made prior reaching setpoint. It automatically stops running when the test is complete. The
user chooses which PID set the new tuning terms will be applied to, but this selection does not change the
selected “active PID set”. This allows tuning of any PID set for future use before return to control with the
current PID set.
In VMD mode, derivative is not applied by pre-tune, and the controller is optimised for PI control. In standard
control mode, PI & D are all calculated, which may not suit all processes.
There are two pre-tune modes with different process test points. The first is “Standard Pre-Tune” which tests the
process response half-way from the activation point (the process value when pre-tune began running) to the
current setpoint. The second type is “Pre-Tune at Value” which allows the user to specify the exact point at
which the process test will occur.
CAUTION: Consider possible process over-shoot when selecting the value to tune
at. If there is a risk of damage to the product or equipment select a safe value.
During pre-tune, the controller outputs full primary power until the process reaches the specified test point.
Power is then removed (full secondary power applied for dual control), causing an oscillation which the pretune algorithm uses to calculate the proportional band(s), integral and derivative time. The pre-tune process is
shown below.
Setpoint (SP)
Process Variable (PV)
Oscillation Peak
Pre-Tune Value set or
Test Point specified,for
or Std Pre-Tune =
SP – Initial PV
for “standard” pre2
Initial PV
Pre-Tune
+100% Power (HEAT output)
engaged
here
Control Power
-100% Power (Cool output)
Figure 58. Pre-Tune Operation
102
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Pre-tune is selected from the automatic tuning menu. It will not engage if either primary or secondary outputs
on a controller are set for On-Off control, during setpoint/profile ramping or if the process variable is less than
5% of the input span from the setpoint.
Note: To pre-tune a cascade, first select “Cascade-Open” to tune the PID set(s) on the slave.
After the slave has successfully tuned, remember to pre-tune the master/slave combination (this
time select “Cascade-Closed”). The cascade remains open until you do this.
19.2.1.2 Auto Pre-Tune
As a single-shot operation, pre-tune will automatically disengage once complete, but can be configured to run at
every power up using the auto pre-tune function. If auto pre-tune is selected, a Standard Pre-tune will attempt to
run at every power up, applying new tuning terms to the current Active PID set. Auto pre-tune will not be able
to test the process if at the time the controller is powered up, either primary or secondary outputs are set for OnOff control, during setpoint/profile ramping or if the process variable is less than 5% of the input span from the
setpoint. Auto pre-tune is not possible with cascade control mode.
19.2.1.3 Self-Tune
If engaged, self-tune uses a pattern recognition algorithm to continuously monitor and adjust for control
deviation. It optimises the tuning by applying new PID terms to the current Active PID set while the controller
is operating. In VMD control mode, derivative is not applied by self-tune, and the controller is optimised for PI
control.
Temperature
Setpoint 2
Load Disturbance
Setpoint 1
Start-up
Setpoint Change
Time
Figure 59. Self-Tune Operation
The diagram shows a typical application involving a process start up, setpoint change and load disturbance. In
each case, self-tune observes one complete oscillation before calculating new terms. Successive deviations
cause the values to be recalculated converging towards optimal control. When the controller is switched off,
these terms are stored and used as starting values at switch on. The stored values may not always be ideal, if for
instance the controller is new or the application has changed. In this case the user can use pre-tune to establish
new initial values for self-tune to fine-tune.
Use of continuous self-tuning is not always appropriate. For example frequent artificial load disturbances, such
as where an oven door is often left open for extended periods, might lead to calculation errors. In standard
control mode, PI & D are all calculated, which may not suit all processes. Self-Tune cannot be engaged if the
instrument is set for on-off control or with cascade control mode.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
103
19.3 Manually Tuning
19.3.1 Tuning Control Loops - PID with Primary Output only
This technique balances the need to reach setpoint quickly, with the desire to limit setpoint overshoot at startup or during process changes. It determines values for the primary proportional band and the integral and
derivative time constants that allow the controller to give acceptable results in most applications that use a
single control device.
CAUTION: This technique is suitable only for processes that are not harmed by
large fluctuations in the process variable.
1. Check that the scaled input limits and the setpoint limits are set to safe and appropriate levels for your
process. Adjust if required.
2. Set the setpoint to the normal operating value for the process (or to a lower value if an overshoot beyond this
value might cause damage).
3. Select On-Off control (i.e. set the primary proportional band to zero).
4. Switch on the process. The process variable will rise above and then oscillate about the setpoint. Record
the peak-to-peak variation (P) of the first cycle (i.e. the difference between the highest value of the first
overshoot and the lowest value of the first undershoot), and the time period of the oscillation (T) in minutes.
See the diagram below.
5. Calculate the PID control parameters (primary proportional band, integral time and derivative time) using
the formulas shown.
6. Repeat steps 1-5 for the second control loop if required
P = Peak-to-Peak
variation of first cycle
Process Variable
T = Time period of
oscillation (minutes)
Primary Proportional
Band = P
Integral Time = T
minutes
Time
Derivative Time =
Figure 60. Manually Tuning - PID with Primary Output
T
6
19.3.2 Tuning Control Loops - PID with Primary & Secondary Outputs
This tuning technique balances the need to reach setpoint quickly, with the desire to limit setpoint overshoot at
start-up and during process changes. It determines values for the primary & secondary proportional bands,
and the integral and derivative time constants that allow the controller to give acceptable results in most
applications using dual control (e.g. Heat & Cool).
CAUTION: These techniques are suitable only for processes that are not harmed
by large fluctuations in the process variable.
104
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
19.3.2.1 Method 1 – For Simple Processes
Use this method if the process is simple/easily controlled and the relative power available from the primary and
secondary actuators is approximately symmetrical (e.g. if the maximum heating and cooling power is equal)
1. Tune the controller using only the Primary Control output as described in steps 1 to 5 of Manually Tuning PID with Primary Output, above.
2. Set the Secondary Proportional Band to the same value as the Primary Proportional Band and monitor the
operation of the controller in dual control mode.
3. If there is a tendency to oscillate as the control passes into the Secondary Proportional Band, increase its
value. If the process appears to be over-damped (slow to respond) in the region of the secondary
proportional band, decrease its value.
4. When the PID tuning values have been determined, if there is a disturbance to the process variable as control
passes from one proportional band to the other, set the Overlap/Deadband parameter to a positive value to
introduce some overlap. Adjust this value by trial and error until satisfactory results are obtained.
19.3.2.2 Method 2 – For Asymmetrical Processes
Use this method if the relative power available from the primary and secondary actuators is not symmetrical
(e.g. if the maximum cooling power is less than the maximum heating power)
1. Check that the scaled input limits and the setpoint limits of the loop in question are set to safe and
appropriate levels for your process. Adjust if required.
2. Set the setpoint to the normal operating value for the process (or to a lower value if overshoots beyond this
value might cause damage).
3. Select On-Off control by setting the primary proportional band to zero (the secondary proportional band
will automatically be set on-off control when you do this).
4. Switch on the process. The process variable will oscillate about the setpoint. Record the peak-to-peak
variation (V) of the oscillation (i.e. the difference between the on-going overshoot and undershoot), the time
period of the oscillation (T) in minutes and the maximum rate of rise (dP) and fall (dS) as the oscillation
continues.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
105
Process Variable
V = On-going Peak-to-Peak
variation
T = Time period of
oscillation (minutes)
dS = Maximum rate of rise
dP = Maximum rate of fall
R = Ratio
𝒅𝐒
𝒅𝐏
Primary proportional
band = Pb.P =
Time
Integral Time = T minutes
Derivative Time =
T
6
𝐕
𝐑
Secondary proportional
band = R x Pb.P
5. Calculate and enter the PID control parameters (primary proportional band, integral time and derivative
time) using the formulas shown, and observe the process.
6. If symmetrical oscillation occurs, increase the proportional bands together, maintaining the same ratio. If the
asymmetrical oscillation occurs, adjust the ratio between the bands until it becomes symmetrical, then
increase the bands together, maintaining the new ratio.
7. When the PID tuning values have been determined, if there is a disturbance to the process variable as control
passes from one proportional band to the other, set the Overlap/Deadband parameter to a small positive
value to introduce some overlap. Adjust this value by trial and error to find the minimum value that gives
satisfactory results.
19.3.3 Valve, Damper & Speed Controller Tuning
This tuning method is used when controlling devices such as dampers, modulating valves or motor speed
controllers. It applies equally to modulating valves with their own valve positioning circuitry, or in VMD mode
where the instrument directly controls the valve motor– see Valve Motor Drive / 3-Point Stepping Control on
page 14. It determines values for the primary proportional band, and integral time constant. The derivative time
is normally set to OFF. This type of PI Control minimises valve/motor wear whilst giving optimal process
control.
In VMD modem the Motor Travel Time and Minimum On Time must be correctly set to match the valve
specifications before attempting to tune the controller.
CAUTION: This technique is suitable only for processes that are not harmed by
large fluctuations in the process variable.
1. Set the setpoint to the normal operating process value (or to a lower value if overshoot beyond this value is
likely to cause damage).
2. Set the Primary Proportional Band a value approximately equal to 0.5% of the input span for the loop to
be tuned. (Span is the difference between the scaled input limits).
3. Set the Integral & Derivative time constants both to OFF.
4. Switch on the process. The process variable should oscillate about the setpoint.
106
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
5. Follow the instructions in the diagram below. At each stage, allow sufficient settling time before moving on
to the next stage. P.Pb is the Primary Proportional Band, Int.T is the Integral Time Constant.
Process Variable
START
Apply power to
the load
Does the
PV continuously
Time
Tb
Yes
oscillate?
No
Note the time
Are the
interval Ta
Oscillations
Yes
decaying to
zero?
Multiply P.Pb
No
Note the period
setting by 1.5
of the decaying
& Set Int.T = Ta
oscillations (Tb)
Multiply P.Pb
setting by 1.5
Multiply P.Pb
setting by 1.5 &
Process Variable
Set Int.T =
𝐓𝐛
𝟐
END
The controller is now tuned.
Fine-tuning may be required
to optimise the controllers’
response
Ta
Time
This method can also be used to tune PID loops. Set Derivative to approx. Ta / 4
Figure 61. Manually Tuning – PI Control
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
107
19.3.4 Fine Tuning
Small adjustments can be made to correct minor control problems. These examples assume reverse acting
control (e.g. heating). Adjust accordingly for direct action. If they do not help solve the problem, re-tune the
controller as detailed on the preceding sections.
Note: When fine tuning the settings, only adjust one parameter at a time, and allow enough time
for the process to settle into its new state each time you change a value.
19.3.4.1 Cycle Times
A separate cycle time adjustment parameter is provided for the Primary and Secondary control when using
time-proportioning control outputs.
If the process oscillates at the same frequency as the cycle time, it indicates it may be too long for the process.
Decrease the cycle time and re-check the period of oscillation, if it has changed to match the new cycle time this
confirms that the time is too long.
If the control actuators will accept it, continue reducing the cycle time until the process stabilises, or no further
improvement is seem.
Recommended times. Relays ≥10 seconds. SSR Driver 1 second.
Proportional Cycle Times
Ideal: Stable Process
Too Long: Oscillation period = cycle time.
Note: Adjusting the cycle time affects the controllers operation; a shorter cycle time gives more
accurate control, but mechanical control actuators such as relays will have a reduced life span.
19.3.4.2 Proportional Bands
Increase the width of the proportional bands if the process overshoots or oscillates excessively. Decrease the
width of the proportional band if the process responds slowly or fails to reach setpoint.
Proportional Bands
Too Narrow: Process Oscillates
Too Wide: Slow warm up and response
19.3.4.3 Integral Time Constant
To find the optimum integral time, decrease its value until the process becomes unstable, then increase it a little
at a time, until stability has is restored. Induce a load disturbance or make a setpoint change to verify that the
108
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
process stabilises. If not increase the value some more and re-test. If the response is too slow, decrease the
integral time, but avoid instability.
Integral Time
Too Short: Overshoots and oscillates
Too Long: Slow warm up and response
19.3.4.4 Derivative Time Constant
Initially set the derivative to between 1/4th and 1/10th of the Integral time value.
Increase the derivative time if the process overshoots/undershoots. Increase it a little at a time, but if the process
becomes unstable, decrease it until the oscillation stops. Induce a load disturbance or make a setpoint change to
verify that the process stabilises. If not decrease the value some more and re-test.
Derivative Time
Process Disturbance
Process Disturbance
Too Long: Oscillates and over corrects when
process disturbed
Too Short: Slow warm up and disturbance response
under-corrects
Note: When controlling a modulating valve, it is usually recommended that derivative is set to
OFF to avoid excessive valve activity. Derivative can cause process instability in these
processes.
19.3.4.5 Anti Wind-up
If after fully optimising the tuning, there is an overshoot of the setpoint at start-up or in response to large
setpoint changes, the reset wind-up inhibit point can be reduced to suspend integral action until the process is
closer to setpoint. If set too low control deviation can occur (the process settles, but is offset above or below the
setpoint). It this is observed, increase the value until the deviation error is removed.
Anti Wind-up
Too Small: Overshoots setpoint before settling
October 2014
Too Short: Slow to setpoint or offset above/below
setpoint
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
109
19.3.4.6 Manual Reset
For proportional only control, after making all other adjustments, if a positive control deviation error exists
(process is offset above the setpoint) reduce the manual reset until the error is eliminated. If there is a negative
error (process is offset below the setpoint) increase manual reset until the error is eliminated.
For PID or PI control, typically set manual reset to approximately 80% of power needed to maintain setpoint,
but lower values can be used to inhibit start-up overshoot if required.
Manual Reset
Too High: Overshoots setpoint at start-up
110
Too Low: Slow to setpoint
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
20 Serial Communications
20.1 Supported Protocols
Communication with a Modbus RTU or Modbus TCP master device is possible if the appropriate
communications module is fitted in option slot A. An RS485 Module is required for Modbus RTU. An Ethernet
Module is required for Modbus TCP.
The instrument can also act as “setpoint master” over RS485 for multi-zone applications. In this mode the unit
continuously sends its setpoint value using Modbus broadcast messages. Master mode is not available with
Ethernet module.
To protect the EEPROM from excessive write operations, the 6 most recent parameter write requests are held in
standard RAM. All data is written to EEPROM at power-down or if another parameter is changed. Avoid
continuously changing more than 6 parameters.
All models also have a configuration socket for bench setup via the PC configuration software prior to
installation. An RS232 to TTL lead (available from your supplier) is required in order to use this socket. A front
mounted USB port is available on some models; this can also be used to configure the instrument or to transfer
recorder or profile files via a USB memory stick.
20.1.1 RS485 Configuration
The RS485 address, bit rate and character format are configured via the front panel from the Comms
Configuration sub-menu or by using the PC Configurator software.
Data rate:
4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200 bps
Parity:
None (default), Even, Odd
Character format:
Always 8 bits per character.
Device Address:
See below.
20.1.1.1 RS485 Device Addressing
The instrument must be assigned a unique device address in the range 1 to 255. This address is used to
recognise Modbus queries intended for this instrument. With the exception of globally addressed broadcast
messages, the instrument ignores Modbus queries that do not match the address that has been assigned to it.
The instrument will accept broadcast messages (global queries) using device address 0 no matter what device
address is assigned to it. No response messages are returned for globally addressed queries.
20.1.2 Ethernet Configuration
For Modbus TCP communications (Modbus over Ethernet), the Ethernet IP address can either be assigned by a
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), BootP or AutoIP server on the network, or manually assigned
using the IP address allocation software tool.
Refer to the PC Software section of this manual on page 235 for more information about setting the IP address.
The supported data rates 10/100BASE-T (10 or 100 Mbps) are automatically detected.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
111
Link Layer
A query (data request or command) is transmitted from the Modbus Master to the Modbus Slave. The slave
instrument assembles the reply to the master. This instrument is normally a slave device. It can only act as a
master when being use as setpoint master controller to broadcast its setpoint to other controllers in a multi-zone
application.
MODBUS
SLAVE
MASTER
INSTRUMENT
QUERY
RESPONSE
Figure 62. Modbus Link Layer
A message for either a QUERY or RESPONSE is made up of an inter-message gap followed by a sequence of
data characters. The inter-message gap is at least 3.5 data character times - the transmitter must not start
transmission until 3 character times have elapsed since reception of the last character in a message, and must
release the transmission line within 3 character times of the last character in a message.
Note: Three character times is approximately 0.25ms at 115200 bps, 0.51ms at 57600 bps,
0.75ms at 38400 bps, 1.5ms at 19200 bps, 3ms at 9600 bps and 6ms at 4800bps.
Data is encoded for each character as binary data, transmitted LSB first.
For a QUERY the address field contains the address of the slave destination. The slave address is given together
with the Function and Data fields by the Application layer. The CRC is generated from the address, function
and data characters.
For a RESPONSE the address field contains the address of the responding slave. The Function and Data fields
are generated by the slave application. The CRC is generated from the address, function and data characters.
The standard MODBUS RTU CRC-16 calculation employing the polynomial 216+215+22+1 is used.
Inter-message
gap
112
Address
1 character
Function
1 character
Data
n characters
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
CRC Check
2 characters
October 2014
20.2 Supported Modbus Functions
The following Modbus function types are supported by this instrument:
Function
Code
03 / 04
Modbus Meaning
Read Holding/Input registers
06
08
16 (0x10 hex)
Write Single Register
Diagnostics
Write Multiple Registers
23 (0x17 hex)
Read/Write Multiple Registers
Description
Read current binary value of specified number of
parameters at given address. Up to 64 parameters can be
accessed with one query.
Writes two bytes to a specified word address.
Used for loopback test only.
Writes up to 253 bytes of data to the specified address
range.
Reads and Writes 253 bytes of data to the specified
address ranges.
20.2.1 Function Descriptions
The following is interpreted from the Modbus protocol description obtainable from www.modbus.org. Refer to
that document if clarification is required. In the function descriptions below, the preceding device address value
is assumed, as is the correctly formed two-byte CRC value at the end of the QUERY and RESPONSE frames.
20.2.1.1 Function 03 / 04 - Read Holding/Input Registers
Reads current binary value of data at the specified word addresses.
QUERY: Function 03 / 04 - Read Holding/Input Registers
Number of
Func Address of
st
1 Word
Words
Code
03/04 LO
LO
HI
LO
RESPONSE: Function 03 / 04 - Read Holding/Input Registers
st
1 Word
etc Last Word
Func Byte
Code Count
03/04
xx
HI
LO
→
HI
LO
Note: In the response the “Number of Bytes” indicates the number of data bytes read from the
instrument. E.g. if 5 words are read, the count will be 10 (0xA hex). The maximum number of words
that can be read is 64. If a parameter does not exist at one of the addresses read, a value of 0000h
is returned for that word.
20.2.1.2 Function 06 - Write Single Register
Writes two bytes to a specified word address.
QUERY: Function 06 - Write Single Register
Func Address of Value to write
Word
Code
06
HI
LO
HI
LO
RESPONSE: Function 06 - Write Single Register
Func Address of Value Written
Word
Code
06
HI
LO
HI
LO
Note: The Response normally returns the same data as the query.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
113
20.2.1.3 Function 08 - Loopback Diagnostic Test
QUERY: Function 08 - Loopback Diagnostic Test
Value
Func Diagnostic
Code
Code
08
00
00
HI
LO
RESPONSE: Function 08 - Loopback Diagnostic Test
Value
Func Sub-function
Code
08
00
00
HI
LO
Note: The Response normally returns the same data as the loopback query. Other diagnostic
codes are not supported.
20.2.1.4 Function 16 - Write Multiple Registers (0x10 Hex)
Writes consecutive word (two-byte) values starting at the specified address.
QUERY:
Func
Code
10
Function 16 - Write Multiple Registers (0x10 Hex)
st
1 Write
Number of Byte
1st Word
etc
Address
Words
Count
xx
HI
LO
HI
LO
HI
LO
→
Last Word
HI
LO
RESPONSE: Function 16 - Write Multiple Registers (0x10 Hex)
Func
1st Word
Number of
Code
Address
Words
10
HI
LO
HI
LO
Note: The maximum number of data bytes that can be written in one message is 253 bytes.
20.2.1.5 Function 23 Hex - Read / Write Multiple Registers (0x17 hex)
Reads and writes the requested number of consecutive words (two-bytes) starting at the specified addresses.
QUERY:
Func
Code
17
Function 23 Hex - Read / Write Multiple Registers (0x17 hex)
st
st
1 Read
Number of
1 Write
Number of Byte
Address
Words
Address
Write Words Count
HI
LO
HI
LO
HI
LO
HI
LO
xx
Values to Write
1st Word
etc
Last Word
HI
LO
→
HI
LO
RESPONSE: Function 23 Hex - Read / Write Multiple Registers (0x17 hex)
Read Data
Func Byte
Code Count 1st Word
etc
Last Word
17
xx
HI
LO
→
HI
LO
Note: The maximum number of data bytes that can be read and written in one message is 253
bytes.
20.2.2 Exception Responses
If a QUERY is sent without a communication error, but the instrument cannot interpret it, an Exception
RESPONSE is returned. The exception response consists of a modified version of the original function code
and an exception code that explains what was wrong with the message. Possible exception responses and their
reasons are:
114
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Function Code
The original
function code with
its most significant
bit (MSB) set. This
offsets it by 0x80,
so for example
0x06 becomes
0x86.
Exception
Code
00
Modbus
Meaning
Unused
01
Illegal function
02
Illegal Data
Address
Description
None.
Function number is out of range.
Write functions: Parameter number is out of range or
not supported. (for write functions only).
Read Functions: Start parameter does not exist or
the end parameter greater than 65536.
03
Illegal Data
Attempt to write invalid data / required action not
Value
executed.
Note: In the case of multiple exception codes for a single query, the Exception code returned is
the one corresponding to the first parameter in error.
20.3 Modbus Parameters
The register addresses for the Modbus parameters are detailed in the tables below.
The Access column indicates if a parameter is read only (RO) or if it can also be written to (R/W).
Communications writes will not be implemented if the Writing Via Serial Comms parameter in the
Communications Configuration sub-menu is set to Disabled.
Note: Read only parameters will return an exception if an attempt is made to write values to
them.
Some parameters that do not apply for a particular configuration will still accept read / writes (e.g.
attempting to scale a linear output which has not been fitted).
20.3.1 Data Formats
Data can be accessed in three formats: Integer Only (decimal places are not included), Integer with 1 Decimal
Place (only the first decimal place value is included) or an IEEE / Motorola (big endian) Floating Point
Number. Where possible use floating point numbers especially if the values have more than one decimal place.
20.4 Parameter Register Address Listings
Calculating Parameter Register Addresses
Register Address Calculation
Address Example:
(For Loop 1 Process Variable)
Data Value Returned:
If actual Value = 23.9 decimal
(hex)
(dec)
Integer Only
Address
Address
Integer+1
Address + 0x4000
Address + 16384
Floating Point
Address x 2 + 0x8000
Address x 2 + 32768
(hex)
(dec)
(hex)
(dec)
0x0407
1031
0x00, 0x17
23
0x4407
17415
0x00, 0xEF
239
0x880E
34830
0x41, 0xBF, 0x33, 0x33
23.9 as floating decimal
The register address offset calculations are shown above.
For your convenience, the parameter tables on the following pages show each parameter’s Modbus register
address as a decimal and hexadecimal number for all three formats.
The tables also show if the parameter has read-only (RO) or read-write (RW) access.
Analog parameter values and their limits are expressed as decimals.
Bit parameters list the bit positions and their meaning (bit 0 = LSB). Only bits that have a function are listed,
unused bits are omitted.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
115
20.4.1 Calibration Reminder Parameters
Parameter Name & Register Address
Integer
Int +1
Float
Calibration Reminder Enable
Dec
1048
17432 34864
Hex
0418
4418
8830
Access
RW
Calibration Reminder Date
Dec
34866
n/a
n/a
Hex
n/a
n/a
8832
RW
Values
& Descriptions
Value
0
1
Calibration Reminder Status
Disabled
Enabled
Value
Calibration Status
This can be entered only as a floating point number. When
converted to binary the least significant 19 bits represents the
date in this format:
www DDDDD MMMM YYYYYYY
YYYYYYY = YEAR
MMMM = MONTH
DDDDD = DAY OF MONTH (1-31 but must be valid)
www = Day of the week The day of week portion
is calculated from the date (Read Only).
Example with date set to 31/07/2012
Day (31) = 11111
Month (7) = 0111
Year (12) = 0001100
Bits 17 and higher are ignored when writing so 11111 0111
0001100 (64396 decimal) is just one of many possible numbers
to write as 31/07/2012, and when reading the date back, the
number returned is
10 11111 0111 0001100 (195468 decimal) because bits 17-19
are 010 (to represent “Tuesday”).
20.4.2 Universal Process Input 1 Parameters
Parameter Name & Register Address
Integer
Int +1
Float
Universal Process Input 1 Type
Dec
1024
17408 34816
Hex
0400
4400
8800
116
Access
RW
Values
& Descriptions
Value
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
29
30
Process Input Type
B Type Thermocouple
C Type Thermocouple
D Type Thermocouple
E Type Thermocouple
J Type Thermocouple
K Type Thermocouple
L Type Thermocouple
N Type Thermocouple
R Type Thermocouple
S Type Thermocouple
T Type Thermocouple
PtRh 20%: 40% Thermocouple
PT100 RTD
NI120 RTD
0 to 20mA DC
4 to 20mA DC
0 to 50mV DC
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
31
32
33
34
35
36
Input 1 Engineering Units
Dec
1025
17409 34818
Hex
0401
4401
8802
RW
Input 1 Maximum Display Decimal
Places
Dec
1026
17410 34820
RW
Hex
0402
4402
8804
Input 1 Scaled Input Lower Limit
Dec
1027
17411 34822
Hex
0403
4403
8806
Input 1 Scaled Input Upper Limit
Dec
1028
17412 34824
Hex
0404
4404
8808
Input 1 Process Variable Offset
Dec
1029
17413 34826
Hex
0405
4405
880A
Input 1 Filter Time Constant
Dec
1030
17414 34828
Hex
0406
4406
880C
Input 1 Process Variable
Dec
1031
17415 34830
Hex
0407
4407
880E
10 to 50mV DC
0 to 5V DC
1 to 5V DC
0 to 10V DC
2 to 10V DC
Potentiometer
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Engineering Units For Display
= None
= °C (Default for Europe)
= °F (Default for USA)
= °K
= Bar
= pH
=%
= %RH
= PSI
Value
Maximum Number Of Decimal Places In Display
0
1
2
3
None (e.g. 1234)
One (e.g. 123.4)
Two (e.g. 12.34)
Three (e.g. 1.234)
Scaling Value Low Limit
RW
Valid between input 1 range maximum and minimum (see
Specifications section for input details)
Scaling Value High Limit
RW
Valid between input 1 range maximum and minimum (see
Specifications section for input details)
Single Point Calibration PV Offset
RW
Used for Single Point Calibration of input 1
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
Input 1 Process Input Filter Time
RW
Valid between 0.0 and 512.0
Process Input 1 Value
RO
The current input 1 process value
Input 1 Signal /Sensor Break Flag
Dec
1032
17416 34832
RO
Hex
0408
4408
8810
Value
0
1
Process Input Break Status
Inactive
Active (break detected)
Input 1 Signal Under Range Flag
Dec
1033
17417 34834
RO
Hex
0409
4409
8812
Value
0
1
Process Input Under Range Status
Inactive
Active (under-range detected)
Input Signal Over Range Flag
Dec
1034
17418 34836
Hex
040A
440A
8814
Value
0
1
Process Input Over Range Status
Inactive
Active (over-range detected)
Value
0
1
CJC Status
Disabled
Enabled (default)
RO
Input 1 Cold Junction Compensation
Dec
1035
17419 34838
RW
Hex
040B
440B
8816
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
117
Input 1 Multi-point Scaling Enable
Dec
1053
17437 34874
RW
Hex
041D
441D
883A
Input 1 Scale Point 1
Dec
1054
17438
34876
Hex
883C
041E
441E
Input 1 Display Point 1
Dec
1055
17439 34878
Hex
041F
441F
883E
Input 1 Scale Point 2
Dec
1056
17440
34880
Hex
8840
0420
4420
Input 1 Display Point 2
Dec
1057
17441 34882
Hex
0421
4421
8842
Input 1 Scale Point 3
Dec
1058
17442
34884
Hex
8844
0422
4422
Input 1 Display Point 3
Dec
1059
17443 34886
Hex
0423
4423
8846
Input 1 Scale Point 4
Dec
1060
17444
34888
Hex
8848
0424
4424
Input 1 Display Point 4
Dec
1061
17445 34890
Hex
0425
4425
884A
Input 1 Scale Point 5
Dec
1062
17446
34892
Hex
884C
0426
4426
Input 1 Display Point 5
Dec
1063
17447 34894
Hex
0427
4427
884E
Input 1 Scale Point 6
Dec
1064
17448
34896
Hex
8850
0428
4428
Input 1 Display Point 6
Dec
1065
17449 34898
Hex
0429
4429
8852
Input 1 Scale Point 7
Dec
1066
17450
34900
Hex
8854
042A
442A
Input 1 Display Point 7
Dec
1067
17451 34902
Hex
118
042B
442B
8856
Value
0
1
Multi-point Scaling Status
Disabled
Enabled (valid only if the input type is linear)
RW
Multi-Point Scaling Point 1
Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 1
is applied.
0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point.
Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 1
RW
Value to display at multi-point scaling point 1
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
RW
Multi-Point Scaling Point 2
Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 2
is applied.
0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point.
Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 2
RW
Value to display at multi-point scaling point 2
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
RW
Multi-Point Scaling Point 3
Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 3
is applied.
0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point.
Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 3
RW
Value to display at multi-point scaling point 3
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
RW
Multi-Point Scaling Point 4
Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 4
is applied.
0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point.
Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 4
RW
Value to display at multi-point scaling point 4
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
RW
Multi-Point Scaling Point 5
Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 5
is applied.
0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point.
Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 5
RW
Value to display at multi-point scaling point 5
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
RW
Multi-Point Scaling Point 6
Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 6
is applied.
0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point.
Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 6
RW
Value to display at multi-point scaling point 6
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
RW
Multi-Point Scaling Point 7
Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 7
is applied.
0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point.
Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 7
RW
Value to display at multi-point scaling point 7
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Input 1 Scale Point 8
Dec
1068
17452
34904
Hex
8858
042C
442C
Input 1 Display Point 8
Dec
1069
17453 34906
Hex
042D
442D
885A
Input 1 Scale Point 9
Dec
1070
17454
34908
Hex
885C
042E
442E
Input 1 Display Point 9
Dec
1071
17455 34910
Hex
042F
442F
885E
RW
Multi-Point Scaling Point 8
Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 8
is applied.
0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point.
Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 8
RW
Value to display at multi-point scaling point 8
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
RW
Multi-Point Scaling Point 9
Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 9
is applied.
0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point.
Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 9
RW
Value to display at multi-point scaling point 9
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
RW
Multi-Point Scaling Point 10
Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value
10 is applied.
0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point.
Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 10
RW
Value to display at multi-point scaling point 10
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
RW
Multi-Point Scaling Point 11
Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value
11 is applied.
0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point.
Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 11
RW
Value to display at multi-point scaling point 11
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
RW
Multi-Point Scaling Point 12
Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value
12 is applied.
0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point.
Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 12
RW
Value to display at multi-point scaling point 12
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
RW
Multi-Point Scaling Point 13
Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value
13 is applied.
0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point.
Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 13
RW
Value to display at multi-point scaling point 13
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
RW
Multi-Point Scaling Point 14
Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value
14 is applied.
0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point.
Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 14
RW
Value to display at multi-point scaling point 14
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
Input 1 Scale Point 10
Dec
1072
17456 34912
Hex
0430
4430
8860
Input 1 Display Point 10
Dec
1073
17457 34914
Hex
0431
4431
8862
Input 1 Scale Point 11
Dec
1074
17458 34916
Hex
0432
4432
8864
Input 1 Display Point 11
Dec
1075
17459 34918
Hex
0433
4433
8866
Input 1 Scale Point 12
Dec
1076
17460 34920
Hex
0434
4434
8868
Input 1 Display Point 12
Dec
1077
17461 34922
Hex
0435
4435
886A
Input 1 Scale Point 13
Dec
1078
17462 34924
Hex
0436
4436
886C
Input 1 Display Point 13
Dec
1079
17463 34926
Hex
0437
4437
886E
Input 1 Scale Point 14
Dec
1080
17464 34928
Hex
0438
4438
8870
Input 1 Display Point 14
Dec
1081
17465 34930
Hex
0439
October 2014
4439
8872
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
119
Input 1 Scale Point 15
Dec
1082
17466
34932
Hex
043A
443A
8874
Input 1 Display Point 15
Dec
1083
17467 34934
Hex
043B
443B
8876
User Calibration Type
Dec
1085
17469 34938
Hex
043D
443D
887A
RW
Multi-Point Scaling Point 15
Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value
15 is applied.
0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point.
Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 15
RW
Value to display at multi-point scaling point 15
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
RW
Value
0
1
2
Calibration Type
None (input 1 base calibration used)
Single Point Calibration
Two Point Calibration
User Calibration Point - Low Value
Dec
1086
17470 34940
RW
Hex
043E
443E
887C
Two Point Calibration Low Point
User Calibration Low Offset
Dec
1087
17471 34942
Two Point Calibration Low Offset Value
Hex
043F
443F
887E
The input value at which the Low Offset will be applied
Valid between input 1 scaled input lower & upper limits
The Low Offset value applied to the reading at the Low
Calibration Point
0.0 to 100.0%
RW
User Calibration Point - High Value
Dec
1088
17472 34944
RW
Hex
0440
4440
8880
Two Point Calibration High Point
User Calibration High Offset
Dec
1089
17473 34946
Two Point Calibration High Offset Value
Hex
0441
4441
8882
RW
The input value at which the High Offset will be applied
Valid between input 1 scaled input lower & upper limits
The High Offset value applied to the reading at the High
Calibration Point
0.0 to 100.0%
20.4.3 Universal Process Input 2 Parameters
Parameter Name & Register Address
Integer
Int +1
Float
Universal Input 2 Usage
Dec
1166
17550 35100
Hex
048E
448E
891C
Access
RW
Values
& Descriptions
Value
0
1
Process Input Type
Standard
Feedback signal for Input 1
Redundant Sensor (backup for Input 1 Thermocouple
or RTD)
Not Used (or Indication only)
2
3
Universal Process Input 2 Type
Dec
1100
17484 34968
Hex
044C
444C
8898
120
RW
Value
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
Process Input Type
B Type Thermocouple
C Type Thermocouple
D Type Thermocouple
E Type Thermocouple
J Type Thermocouple
K Type Thermocouple
L Type Thermocouple
N Type Thermocouple
R Type Thermocouple
S Type Thermocouple
T Type Thermocouple
PtRh 20%: 40% Thermocouple
PT100 RTD
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Input 2 Engineering Units
Dec
1101
17485 34970
Hex
044D
444D
889A
RW
Input 2 Maximum Display Decimal
Places
Dec
1102
17486 34972
RW
Hex
044E
444E
889C
Input 2 Scaled Input Lower Limit
Dec
1103
17487 34974
Hex
044F
444F
889E
Input 2 Scaled Input Upper Limit
Dec
1104
17488 34976
Hex
0450
4450
88A0
Input 2 Process Variable Offset
Dec
1105
17489 34978
Hex
0451
4451
88A2
Input 2 Filter Time Constant
Dec
1106
17490 34980
Hex
0452
4452
88A4
Input 2 Process Variable
Dec
1107
17491 34982
Hex
0453
4453
88A6
NI120 RTD
0 to 20mA DC
4 to 20mA DC
0 to 50mV DC
10 to 50mV DC
0 to 5V DC
1 to 5V DC
0 to 10V DC
2 to 10V DC
Potentiometer
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Engineering Units For Display
= None
= °C (Default for Europe)
= °F (Default for USA)
= °K
= Bar
= pH
=%
= %RH
= PSI
Value
Maximum Number Of Decimal Places In Display
0
1
2
3
None (e.g. 1234)
One (e.g. 123.4)
Two (e.g. 12.34)
Three (e.g. 1.234)
Scaling Value Low Limit
RW
Valid between input 2 range maximum and minimum (see
Specifications section for input details)
Scaling Value High Limit
RW
Valid between input 2 range maximum and minimum (see
Specifications section for input details)
Single Point Calibration PV Offset
RW
Used for Single Point Calibration of input 2
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
Input 2 Process Input Filter Time
RW
Valid between 0.0 and 512.0
Process Input 2 Value
RO
The current input 2 process value
Input 2 Signal /Sensor Break Flag
Dec
1108
17492 34984
RO
Hex
0454
4454
88A8
Value
0
1
Process Input Break Status
Inactive
Active (break detected)
Input 2 Signal Under Range Flag
Dec
1109
17493 34986
RO
Hex
0455
4455
88AA
Value
0
1
Process Input Under Range Status
Inactive
Active (under-range detected)
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
121
Input 2 Signal Over Range Flag
Dec
1110
17494 34988
Hex
0456
4456
88AC
Value
0
1
Process Input Over Range Status
Inactive
Active (over-range detected)
Input 2 Cold Junction Compensation
Dec
1111
17495 34990
RW
Hex
0457
4457
88AE
Value
0
1
CJC Status
Disabled
Enabled (default)
Input 2 Multi-point Scaling Enable
Dec
1129
17513 35026
RW
Hex
0469
4469
88D2
Value
0
1
Multi-point Scaling Status
Disabled
Enabled (only if the input type is linear)
Input 2 Scale Point 1
Dec
1130
17514
35028
Hex
88D4
046A
446A
Input 2 Display Point 1
Dec
1131
17515 35030
Hex
046B
446B
88D6
Input 2 Scale Point 2
Dec
1132
17516
35032
Hex
88D8
046C
446C
Input 2 Display Point 2
Dec
1133
17517 35034
Hex
046D
446D
88DA
Input 2 Scale Point 3
Dec
1134
17518
35036
Hex
88DC
046E
446E
Input 2 Display Point 3
Dec
1135
17519 35038
Hex
046F
446F
88DE
Input 2 Scale Point 4
Dec
1136
17520
35040
Hex
88E0
0470
4470
Input 2 Display Point 4
Dec
1137
17521 35042
Hex
0471
4471
88E2
Input 2 Scale Point 5
Dec
1138
17522
35044
Hex
88E4
0472
4472
Input 2 Display Point 5
Dec
1139
17523 35046
Hex
0473
4473
88E6
Input 2 Scale Point 6
Dec
1140
17524
35048
Hex
88E8
0474
4474
Input 2 Display Point 6
Dec
1141
17525 35050
Hex
122
0475
4475
88EA
RO
RW
Multi-Point Scaling Point 1
Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 1
is applied.
0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point.
Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 1
RW
Value to display at multi-point scaling point 1
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
RW
Multi-Point Scaling Point 2
Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 2
is applied.
0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point.
Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 2
RW
Value to display at multi-point scaling point 2
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
RW
Multi-Point Scaling Point 3
Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 3
is applied.
0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point.
Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 3
RW
Value to display at multi-point scaling point 3
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
RW
Multi-Point Scaling Point 4
Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 4
is applied.
0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point.
Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 4
RW
Value to display at multi-point scaling point 4
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
RW
Multi-Point Scaling Point 5
Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 5
is applied.
0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point.
Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 5
RW
Value to display at multi-point scaling point 5
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
RW
Multi-Point Scaling Point 6
Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 6
is applied.
0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point.
Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 6
RW
Value to display at multi-point scaling point 6
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Input 2 Scale Point 7
Dec
1142
17526
35052
Hex
88EC
0476
4476
Input 2 Display Point 7
Dec
1143
17527 35054
Hex
0477
4477
88EE
Input 2 Scale Point 8
Dec
1144
17528
35056
Hex
88F0
0478
4478
Input 2 Display Point 8
Dec
1145
17529 35058
Hex
0479
4479
88F2
Input 2 Scale Point 9
Dec
1146
17530
35060
Hex
88F4
047A
447A
Input 2 Display Point 9
Dec
1147
17531 35062
Hex
047B
447B
88F6
RW
Multi-Point Scaling Point 7
Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 7
is applied.
0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point.
Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 7
RW
Value to display at multi-point scaling point 7
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
RW
Multi-Point Scaling Point 8
Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 8
is applied.
0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point.
Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 8
RW
Value to display at multi-point scaling point 8
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
RW
Multi-Point Scaling Point 9
Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 9
is applied.
0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point.
Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 9
RW
Value to display at multi-point scaling point 9
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
RW
Multi-Point Scaling Point 10
Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value
10 is applied.
0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point.
Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 10
RW
Value to display at multi-point scaling point 10
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
RW
Multi-Point Scaling Point 11
Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value
11 is applied.
0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point.
Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 11
RW
Value to display at multi-point scaling point 11
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
RW
Multi-Point Scaling Point 12
Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value
12 is applied.
0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point.
Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 12
RW
Value to display at multi-point scaling point 12
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
RW
Multi-Point Scaling Point 13
Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value
13 is applied.
0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point.
Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 13
RW
Value to display at multi-point scaling point 13
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
Input 2 Scale Point 10
Dec
1148
17532 35064
Hex
047C
447C
88F8
Input 2 Display Point 10
Dec
1149
17533 35066
Hex
047D
447D
88FA
Input 2 Scale Point 11
Dec
1150
17534 35068
Hex
047E
447E
88FC
Input 2 Display Point 11
Dec
1151
17535 35070
Hex
047F
447F
88FE
Input 2 Scale Point 12
Dec
1152
17536 35072
Hex
0480
4480
8900
Input 2 Display Point 12
Dec
1153
17537 35074
Hex
0481
4481
8902
Input 2 Scale Point 13
Dec
1154
17538 35076
Hex
0482
4482
8904
Input 2 Display Point 13
Dec
1155
17539 35078
Hex
0483
4483
8906
Input 2 Scale Point 14
Dec
1156
17540 35080
Hex
0484
October 2014
4484
8908
RW
Multi-Point Scaling Point 14
Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value
14 is applied.
0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point.
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
123
Input 2 Display Point 14
Dec
1157
17541 35082
Hex
0485
4485
890A
Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 14
RW
Value to display at multi-point scaling point 14
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
RW
Multi-Point Scaling Point 15
Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value
15 is applied.
0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point.
Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 15
RW
Value to display at multi-point scaling point 15
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
Input 2 Scale Point 15
Dec
1158
17542 35084
Hex
0486
4486
890C
Input 2 Display Point 15
Dec
1159
17543 35086
Hex
0487
4487
890E
User Calibration Type
Dec
1161
17545 35090
Hex
0489
4489
8912
RW
Value
0
1
2
Calibration Type
None (input 2 base calibration used)
Single Point Calibration
Two Point Calibration
User Calibration Point - Low Value
Dec
1162
17546 35092
RW
Hex
048A
448A
8914
Two Point Calibration Low Point
User Calibration Low Offset
Dec
1163
17547 35094
Two Point Calibration Low Offset Value
The Low Offset value applied to the reading at the Low
Calibration Point
0.0 to 100.0%
Two Point Calibration High Point
Hex
048B
448B
8916
RW
User Calibration Point - High Value
Dec
1164
17548 35096
RW
Hex
048C
448C
8918
User Calibration High Offset
Dec
1165
17549 35098
Hex
048D
448D
891A
RW
The input value at which the Low Offset will be applied
Valid between input 2 scaled input lower & upper limits
The input value at which the High Offset will be applied
Valid between input 2 scaled input lower & upper limits
Two Point Calibration High Offset Value
The High Offset value applied to the reading at the High
Calibration Point
0.0 to 100.0%
20.4.4 Digital Input Setup Parameters
Parameter Name & Register Address
Integer
Int +1
Float
Invert Digital Inputs
Dec 10059 26443
Hex
274B
674B
52886
CE96
Profile Selection Type
Dec 10029 26413 52826
Hex
272D
672D CE5A
124
Access
RW
RW
Values
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Value
0
1
2
& Descriptions
If Bit = 1, Input n is Inverted (ON becomes OFF etc)
Digital Input A
Digital Input C1
Digital Input C2
Digital Input C3
Digital Input C4
Digital Input C5
Digital Input C6
Digital Input C7
Digital Input C8
Profile Selection & Bit Pattern Format
None
Binary
BCD
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Digital input Profile Select
Dec 10030 26414 52828
Hex
272E
672E CE5C
Digital Input A Usage
Dec 10020 26404
Hex
2724
6724
52808
CE48
Digital Input C1 Usage
Dec 10021 26405 52810
Hex
2725
6725 CE4A
October 2014
RW
RW
RW
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Inputs Assigned Exclusively to Profile Selection
Digital Input C1
Digital Input C1 to C2
Digital Input C1 to C3
Digital Input C1 to C4
Digital Input C1 to C5
Digital Input C1 to C6
Digital Input C1 to C7
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Usage for Digital Input A
Unused
Control 1 Enable Disable
Control 2 Enable Disable
Control 1 Auto/Manual
Control 2 Auto/Manual
Control 1 Setpoint Selection
Control 2 Setpoint Selection
Control 1 Pretune Enable/Disable
Control 2 Pretune Enable/Disable
Control 1 Selftune Enable/Disable
Control 2 Selftune Enable/Disable
Clear All Latched Outputs
Recorder Digital Start/Stop Trigger
Profile Run/Hold
Profile Abort
Profile Hold Release
Force Output 1 on/off
Force Output 2 on/off
Force Output 2B on/off
Force Output 3 on/off
Force Output 3B on/off
Force Output 4 on/off
Force Output 5 on/off
Output 1 Clear Latch
Output 2 Clear Latch
Output 2B Clear Latch
Output 3 Clear Latch
Output 3B Clear Latch
Output 4 Clear Latch
Output 5 Clear Latch
Up Key Press Mimic
Down Key Press Mimic
Back Key Press Mimic
Right Key Press Mimic
Value
0
1
2
3
4
Usage for Digital Input C1
Unused
Control 1 Enable Disable
Control 2 Enable Disable
Control 1 Auto/Manual
Control 2 Auto/Manual
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
125
Digital Input C2 Usage
Dec 10022 26406 52812
Hex
2726
6726 CE4C
126
RW
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Control 1 Setpoint Selection
Control 2 Setpoint Selection
Control 1 Pretune Enable/Disable
Control 2 Pretune Enable/Disable
Control 1 Selftune Enable/Disable
Control 2 Selftune Enable/Disable
Clear All Latched Outputs
Recorder Start/Stop
Profile Run/Hold
Profile Abort
Profile Hold Release
Force Output 1 on/off
Force Output 2 on/off
Force Output 2B on/off
Force Output 3 on/off
Force Output 3B on/off
Force Output 4 on/off
Force Output 5 on/off
Output 1 Clear Latch
Output 2 Clear Latch
Output 2B Clear Latch
Output 3 Clear Latch
Output 3B Clear Latch
Output 4 Clear Latch
Output 5 Clear Latch
Up Key Press Mimic
Down Key Press Mimic
Back Key Press Mimic
Right Key Press Mimic
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Usage for Digital Input C2
Unused
Control 1 Enable Disable
Control 2 Enable Disable
Control 1 Auto/Manual
Control 2 Auto/Manual
Control 1 Setpoint Selection
Control 2 Setpoint Selection
Control 1 Pretune Enable/Disable
Control 2 Pretune Enable/Disable
Control 1 Selftune Enable/Disable
Control 2 Selftune Enable/Disable
Clear All Latched Outputs
Recorder Digital Start/Stop Trigger
Profile Run/Hold
Profile Abort
Profile Hold Release
Force Output 1 on/off
Force Output 2 on/off
Force Output 2B on/off
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Digital Input C3 Usage
Dec 10023 26407 52814
Hex
2727
6727 CE4E
October 2014
RW
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Force Output 3 on/off
Force Output 3B on/off
Force Output 4 on/off
Force Output 5 on/off
Output 1 Clear Latch
Output 2 Clear Latch
Output 2B Clear Latch
Output 3 Clear Latch
Output 3B Clear Latch
Output 4 Clear Latch
Output 5 Clear Latch
Up Key Press Mimic
Down Key Press Mimic
Back Key Press Mimic
Right Key Press Mimic
Usage for Digital Input C3
Unused
Control 1 Enable Disable
Control 2 Enable Disable
Control 1 Auto/Manual
Control 2 Auto/Manual
Control 1 Setpoint Selection
Control 2 Setpoint Selection
Control 1 Pretune Enable/Disable
Control 2 Pretune Enable/Disable
Control 1 Selftune Enable/Disable
Control 2 Selftune Enable/Disable
Clear All Latched Outputs
Recorder Digital Start/Stop Trigger
Profile Run/Hold
Profile Abort
Profile Hold Release
Force Output 1 on/off
Force Output 2 on/off
Force Output 2B on/off
Force Output 3 on/off
Force Output 3B on/off
Force Output 4 on/off
Force Output 5 on/off
Output 1 Clear Latch
Output 2 Clear Latch
Output 2B Clear Latch
Output 3 Clear Latch
Output 3B Clear Latch
Output 4 Clear Latch
Output 5 Clear Latch
Up Key Press Mimic
Down Key Press Mimic
Back Key Press Mimic
Right Key Press Mimic
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
127
Digital Input C4 Usage
Dec 10024 26408 52816
Hex
2728
6728
CE50
Digital Input C5 Usage
Dec 10025 26409 52818
Hex
2729
6729
CE52
128
RW
RW
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Usage for Digital Input C4
Unused
Control 1 Enable Disable
Control 2 Enable Disable
Control 1 Auto/Manual
Control 2 Auto/Manual
Control 1 Setpoint Selection
Control 2 Setpoint Selection
Control 1 Pretune Enable/Disable
Control 2 Pretune Enable/Disable
Control 1 Selftune Enable/Disable
Control 2 Selftune Enable/Disable
Clear All Latched Outputs
Recorder Digital Start/Stop Trigger
Profile Run/Hold
Profile Abort
Profile Hold Release
Force Output 1 on/off
Force Output 2 on/off
Force Output 2B on/off
Force Output 3 on/off
Force Output 3B on/off
Force Output 4 on/off
Force Output 5 on/off
Output 1 Clear Latch
Output 2 Clear Latch
Output 2B Clear Latch
Output 3 Clear Latch
Output 3B Clear Latch
Output 4 Clear Latch
Output 5 Clear Latch
Up Key Press Mimic
Down Key Press Mimic
Back Key Press Mimic
Right Key Press Mimic
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Usage for Digital Input C5
Unused
Control 1 Enable Disable
Control 2 Enable Disable
Control 1 Auto/Manual
Control 2 Auto/Manual
Control 1 Setpoint Selection
Control 2 Setpoint Selection
Control 1 Pretune Enable/Disable
Control 2 Pretune Enable/Disable
Control 1 Selftune Enable/Disable
Control 2 Selftune Enable/Disable
Clear All Latched Outputs
Recorder Digital Start/Stop Trigger
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Digital Input C6 Usage
Dec 10026 26410 52820
Hex
272A
672A CE54
October 2014
RW
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Profile Run/Hold
Profile Abort
Profile Hold Release
Force Output 1 on/off
Force Output 2 on/off
Force Output 2B on/off
Force Output 3 on/off
Force Output 3B on/off
Force Output 4 on/off
Force Output 5 on/off
Output 1 Clear Latch
Output 2 Clear Latch
Output 2B Clear Latch
Output 3 Clear Latch
Output 3B Clear Latch
Output 4 Clear Latch
Output 5 Clear Latch
Up Key Press Mimic
Down Key Press Mimic
Back Key Press Mimic
Right Key Press Mimic
Usage for Digital Input C6
Unused
Control 1 Enable Disable
Control 2 Enable Disable
Control 1 Auto/Manual
Control 2 Auto/Manual
Control 1 Setpoint Selection
Control 2 Setpoint Selection
Control 1 Pretune Enable/Disable
Control 2 Pretune Enable/Disable
Control 1 Selftune Enable/Disable
Control 2 Selftune Enable/Disable
Clear All Latched Outputs
Recorder Digital Start/Stop Trigger
Profile Run/Hold
Profile Abort
Profile Hold Release
Force Output 1 on/off
Force Output 2 on/off
Force Output 2B on/off
Force Output 3 on/off
Force Output 3B on/off
Force Output 4 on/off
Force Output 5 on/off
Output 1 Clear Latch
Output 2 Clear Latch
Output 2B Clear Latch
Output 3 Clear Latch
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
129
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Digital Input C7 Usage
Dec 10027 26411 52822
Hex
272B
672B CE56
Digital Input C8 Usage
Dec 10028 26412 52824
Hex
272C
672C CE58
130
RW
RW
Output 3B Clear Latch
Output 4 Clear Latch
Output 5 Clear Latch
Up Key Press Mimic
Down Key Press Mimic
Back Key Press Mimic
Right Key Press Mimic
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Usage for Digital Input C7
Unused
Control 1 Enable Disable
Control 2 Enable Disable
Control 1 Auto/Manual
Control 2 Auto/Manual
Control 1 Setpoint Selection
Control 2 Setpoint Selection
Control 1 Pretune Enable/Disable
Control 2 Pretune Enable/Disable
Control 1 Selftune Enable/Disable
Control 2 Selftune Enable/Disable
Clear All Latched Outputs
Recorder Digital Start/Stop Trigger
Profile Run/Hold
Profile Abort
Profile Hold Release
Force Output 1 on/off
Force Output 2 on/off
Force Output 2B on/off
Force Output 3 on/off
Force Output 3B on/off
Force Output 4 on/off
Force Output 5 on/off
Output 1 Clear Latch
Output 2 Clear Latch
Output 2B Clear Latch
Output 3 Clear Latch
Output 3B Clear Latch
Output 4 Clear Latch
Output 5 Clear Latch
Up Key Press Mimic
Down Key Press Mimic
Back Key Press Mimic
Right Key Press Mimic
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
Usage for Digital Input C8
Unused
Control 1 Enable Disable
Control 2 Enable Disable
Control 1 Auto/Manual
Control 2 Auto/Manual
Control 1 Setpoint Selection
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Soft Digital 1 Usage
Dec 10036 26420
Hex
2734
6734
October 2014
52840
CE68
RW
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Control 2 Setpoint Selection
Control 1 Pretune Enable/Disable
Control 2 Pretune Enable/Disable
Control 1 Selftune Enable/Disable
Control 2 Selftune Enable/Disable
Clear All Latched Outputs
Recorder Digital Start/Stop Trigger
Profile Run/Hold
Profile Abort
Profile Hold Release
Force Output 1 on/off
Force Output 2 on/off
Force Output 2B on/off
Force Output 3 on/off
Force Output 3B on/off
Force Output 4 on/off
Force Output 5 on/off
Output 1 Clear Latch
Output 2 Clear Latch
Output 2B Clear Latch
Output 3 Clear Latch
Output 3B Clear Latch
Output 4 Clear Latch
Output 5 Clear Latch
Up Key Press Mimic
Down Key Press Mimic
Back Key Press Mimic
Right Key Press Mimic
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Usage for "Soft" Digital Input S1
Unused
Control 1 Enable Disable
Control 2 Enable Disable
Control 1 Auto/Manual
Control 2 Auto/Manual
Control 1 Setpoint Selection
Control 2 Setpoint Selection
Control 1 Pretune Enable/Disable
Control 2 Pretune Enable/Disable
Control 1 Selftune Enable/Disable
Control 2 Selftune Enable/Disable
Clear All Latched Outputs
Recorder Digital Start/Stop Trigger
Profile Run/Hold
Profile Abort
Profile Hold Release
Force Output 1 on/off
Force Output 2 on/off
Force Output 2B on/off
Force Output 3 on/off
Force Output 3B on/off
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
131
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Force Output 4 on/off
Force Output 5 on/off
Output 1 Clear Latch
Output 2 Clear Latch
Output 2B Clear Latch
Output 3 Clear Latch
Output 3B Clear Latch
Output 4 Clear Latch
Output 5 Clear Latch
Up Key Press Mimic
Down Key Press Mimic
Back Key Press Mimic
Right Key Press Mimic
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If Bit value = 1 Input n Is Included in OR Selection
Digital Input A
Digital Input C1
Digital Input C2
Digital Input C3
Digital Input C4
Digital Input C5
Digital Input C6
Digital Input C7
Digital Input C8
Soft Digital 1 AND Digital Inputs
Dec 10041 26425 52850
RW
Hex
2739
6739
CE72
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If Bit value = 1 Input n Is Included in AND Selection
Digital Input A
Digital Input C1
Digital Input C2
Digital Input C3
Digital Input C4
Digital Input C5
Digital Input C6
Digital Input C7
Digital Input C8
Soft Digital 1 OR Alarms
Dec 10050 26434 52868
Hex
2742
6742
CE84
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
If Bit value = 1 Alarm n Is Included in OR Selection
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3
Alarm 4
Alarm 5
Alarm 6
Alarm 7
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
If Bit value = 1 Event n Is Included in OR Selection
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Profile Running
Profile End
Soft Digital 1 OR Digital Inputs
Dec 10040 26424 52848
Hex
2738
6738
CE70
Soft Digital 1 OR Events
Dec 10051 26435 52870
Hex
2743
6743
CE86
132
RW
RW
RW
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Soft Digital 2 Usage
Dec 10037 26421
Hex
2735
6735
52842
CE6A
Soft Digital 2 OR Digital Inputs
Dec 10042 26426 52852
Hex
273A
673A CE74
October 2014
RW
RW
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Usage for "Soft" Digital Input S2
Unused
Control 1 Enable Disable
Control 2 Enable Disable
Control 1 Auto/Manual
Control 2 Auto/Manual
Control 1 Setpoint Selection
Control 2 Setpoint Selection
Control 1 Pretune Enable/Disable
Control 2 Pretune Enable/Disable
Control 1 Selftune Enable/Disable
Control 2 Selftune Enable/Disable
Clear All Latched Outputs
Recorder Digital Start/Stop Trigger
Profile Run/Hold
Profile Abort
Profile Hold Release
Force Output 1 on/off
Force Output 2 on/off
Force Output 2B on/off
Force Output 3 on/off
Force Output 3B on/off
Force Output 4 on/off
Force Output 5 on/off
Output 1 Clear Latch
Output 2 Clear Latch
Output 2B Clear Latch
Output 3 Clear Latch
Output 3B Clear Latch
Output 4 Clear Latch
Output 5 Clear Latch
Up Key Press Mimic
Down Key Press Mimic
Back Key Press Mimic
Right Key Press Mimic
If Bit value = 1 Input n Is Included in OR Selection
Digital Input A
Digital Input C1
Digital Input C2
Digital Input C3
Digital Input C4
Digital Input C5
Digital Input C6
Digital Input C7
Digital Input C8
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
133
Soft Digital 2 AND Digital Inputs
Dec 10043 26427 52854
RW
Hex
273B
673B CE76
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If Bit value = 1 Input n Is Included in AND Selection
Digital Input A
Digital Input C1
Digital Input C2
Digital Input C3
Digital Input C4
Digital Input C5
Digital Input C6
Digital Input C7
Digital Input C8
Soft Digital 2 OR Alarms
Dec 10052 26436 52872
Hex
2744
6744
CE88
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
If Bit value = 1 Alarm n Is Included in OR Selection
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3
Alarm 4
Alarm 5
Alarm 6
Alarm 7
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
If Bit value = 1 Event n Is Included in OR Selection
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Profile Running
Profile End
Soft Digital 1 OR Events
Dec 10053 26437 52874
Hex
2745
6745 CE8A
Soft Digital 3 Usage
Dec 10038 26422
Hex
2736
6736
134
52844
CE6C
RW
RW
RW
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Usage for "Soft" Digital Input S3
Unused
Control 1 Enable Disable
Control 2 Enable Disable
Control 1 Auto/Manual
Control 2 Auto/Manual
Control 1 Setpoint Selection
Control 2 Setpoint Selection
Control 1 Pretune Enable/Disable
Control 2 Pretune Enable/Disable
Control 1 Selftune Enable/Disable
Control 2 Selftune Enable/Disable
Clear All Latched Outputs
Recorder Digital Start/Stop Trigger
Profile Run/Hold
Profile Abort
Profile Hold Release
Force Output 1 on/off
Force Output 2 on/off
Force Output 2B on/off
Force Output 3 on/off
Force Output 3B on/off
Force Output 4 on/off
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Force Output 5 on/off
Output 1 Clear Latch
Output 2 Clear Latch
Output 2B Clear Latch
Output 3 Clear Latch
Output 3B Clear Latch
Output 4 Clear Latch
Output 5 Clear Latch
Up Key Press Mimic
Down Key Press Mimic
Back Key Press Mimic
Right Key Press Mimic
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If Bit value = 1 Input n Is Included in OR Selection
Digital Input A
Digital Input C1
Digital Input C2
Digital Input C3
Digital Input C4
Digital Input C5
Digital Input C6
Digital Input C7
Digital Input C8
Soft Digital 3 AND Digital Inputs
Dec 10045 26429 52858
RW
Hex
273D
673D CE7A
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If Bit value = 1 Input n Is Included in AND Selection
Digital Input A
Digital Input C1
Digital Input C2
Digital Input C3
Digital Input C4
Digital Input C5
Digital Input C6
Digital Input C7
Digital Input C8
Soft Digital 3 OR Alarms
Dec 10054 26438 52876
Hex
2746
6746 CE8C
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
If Bit value = 1 Alarm n Is Included in OR Selection
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3
Alarm 4
Alarm 5
Alarm 6
Alarm 7
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
If Bit value = 1 Event n Is Included in OR Selection
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Profile Running
Profile End
Soft Digital 3 OR Digital Inputs
Dec 10044 26428 52856
Hex
273C
673C CE78
Soft Digital 3 OR Events
Dec 10055 26439 52878
Hex
2747
6747 CE8E
October 2014
RW
RW
RW
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
135
Soft Digital 4 Usage
Dec 10039 26423
Hex
2737
6737
52846
CE6E
Soft Digital 4 OR Digital Inputs
Dec 10046 26430 52860
Hex
273E
673E CE7C
136
RW
RW
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Usage for "Soft" Digital Input S4
Unused
Control 1 Enable Disable
Control 2 Enable Disable
Control 1 Auto/Manual
Control 2 Auto/Manual
Control 1 Setpoint Selection
Control 2 Setpoint Selection
Control 1 Pretune Enable/Disable
Control 2 Pretune Enable/Disable
Control 1 Selftune Enable/Disable
Control 2 Selftune Enable/Disable
Clear All Latched Outputs
Recorder Digital Start/Stop Trigger
Profile Run/Hold
Profile Abort
Profile Hold Release
Force Output 1 on/off
Force Output 2 on/off
Force Output 2B on/off
Force Output 3 on/off
Force Output 3B on/off
Force Output 4 on/off
Force Output 5 on/off
Output 1 Clear Latch
Output 2 Clear Latch
Output 2B Clear Latch
Output 3 Clear Latch
Output 3B Clear Latch
Output 4 Clear Latch
Output 5 Clear Latch
Up Key Press Mimic
Down Key Press Mimic
Back Key Press Mimic
Right Key Press Mimic
If Bit value = 1 Input n Is Included in OR Selection
Digital Input A
Digital Input C1
Digital Input C2
Digital Input C3
Digital Input C4
Digital Input C5
Digital Input C6
Digital Input C7
Digital Input C8
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Soft Digital 4 AND Digital Inputs
Dec 10047 26431 52862
RW
Hex
273F
673F CE7E
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If Bit value = 1 Input n Is Included in AND Selection
Digital Input A
Digital Input C1
Digital Input C2
Digital Input C3
Digital Input C4
Digital Input C5
Digital Input C6
Digital Input C7
Digital Input C8
Soft Digital 4 OR Alarms
Dec 10056 26440 52880
Hex
2748
6748
CE90
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
If Bit value = 1 Alarm n Is Included in OR Selection
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3
Alarm 4
Alarm 5
Alarm 6
Alarm 7
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
If Bit value = 1 Event n Is Included in OR Selection
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Profile Running
Profile End
Soft Digital 4 OR Events
Dec 10057 26441 52882
Hex
2749
6749
CE92
RW
RW
20.4.5 Plug-in Module Slot A Parameters
Parameter Name & Register Address
Integer
Int +1
Float
Digital Input A Status
Dec
2115
18499
Hex
0843
4843
36998
9086
Option Slot A Module Type
Dec
2116
18500 37000
Hex
0844
4844
9088
RS485 Address
Dec
2117
18501
Hex
0845
4845
October 2014
37002
908A
Access
RO
RO
RW
Values
& Descriptions
Value
0
1
Digital Input A Status
Inactive
Active
Value
0
1
3
4
5
255
Module Fitted In Slot A
None Fitted
RS485 Communications
Digital Input A
Auxiliary Input A
Ethernet Communications
Error (unrecognised module)
Value
0
1 to 255
RS485 Communications Address
Modbus Master mode
Modbus Slave Address
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
137
RS485 Data Rate
Dec
2118
18502
Hex
0846
4846
37004
908C
RS485 Parity
Dec
2119
Hex
0847
37006
908E
18503
4847
Auxiliary Input A Type
Dec
2120
18504 37008
Hex
0848
4848
9090
Target Setpoint Address
Dec
2121
18505 37010
Hex
0849
4849
9092
Master Transmit Format
Dec
2123
18507 37014
Hex
084B
484B
9096
RW
RW
RW
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
RS485 Communications Baud Rate
4800
9600
19200 (Default)
38400
57600
115200
Value
0
1
2
Parity Used For RS485 Communications
None
Even
Odd
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
Auxiliary Analog A Input Type
0 to 20mA DC
4 to 20mA DC
0 to 10V DC
2 to 10V DC
0 to 5V DC
1 to 5V DC
Slave Controller's Setpoint Register Address
RW
Target setpoint parameter address for master mode
(as required by slave controller)
RW
Value
0
1
2
Data Format For Setpoint Broadcast
Integer
Integer with 1 decimal place
Floating point number
Master Transmit Setpoint Selection
Dec
2110
18494 36988
RW
Hex
083E
483E
907C
Value
0
1
Source Loop Of Setpoint For Broadcast
Loop 1 Setpoint
Loop 2 Setpoint
Comms Write Enable/Disable
Dec
2124
18508 37016
Hex
084C
484C
9098
Value
0
1
Communications Status
Writing via serial communications disabled
Writing via serial communications enabled
Value
0
1
Auxiliary Input A Break Status
Inactive
Active (break detected)
Auxiliary Input A Signal Under Range
Dec
2128
18512 37024
RO
Hex
0850
4850
90A0
Value
0
1
Auxiliary Input A Under Range Status
Inactive
Active (under-range detected)
Auxiliary Input A Signal Over Range
Dec
2129
18513 37026
RO
Hex
0851
4851
90A2
Value
0
1
Auxiliary Input A Over Range Status
Inactive
Active (over-range detected)
Auxiliary Input A Signal Break
Dec
2127
18511 37022
Hex
084F
484F
909E
RW
RO
20.4.6 Plug-in Module Slot 1 Parameters
Parameter Name & Register Address
Integer
Int +1
Float
Plug-in Module 1 Type
Dec
2130
18514 37028
Hex
0852
4852
90A4
138
Access
RO
Values
& Descriptions
Value
0
1
2
3
Module Fitted In Slot 1
None Fitted
Single Relay
Single SSR Driver
Linear mA/V DC
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
8
255
Linear mA/V DC Output 1 Type
Dec
2131
18515 37030
Hex
0853
4853
90A6
Digital Output 1 Status
Dec
2132
18516 37032
Hex
0854
4854
90A8
Digital Output 1 Latch Enable
Dec
2135
18519 37038
Hex
0857
4857
90AE
Digital Output 1 Clear Latch
Dec
2136
18520 37040
Hex
0858
4858
90B0
Digital Output 1 Latch State
Dec
2137
18521 37042
Hex
0859
4859
90B2
Linear Output 1 Level Status
Dec
2134
18518 37036
Hex
0856
4856
90AC
Linear Output 1 Function
Dec
2144
18528 37056
Hex
0860
4860
90C0
Digital Output 1 Function
Dec 10100 26484 52968
Hex
2774
6774 CEE8
Output 1 OR Alarm Selection
October 2014
RW
RO
RW
RW
RO
Triac
Error (unrecognised module)
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
Linear Output 1 Type
0 to 5V DC
0 to 10V DC
2 to 10V DC
0 to 20mA DC
4 to 20mA DC
Variable 0 to 10VDC Transmitter PSU
Value
0
1
Output 1 Status (Relay, SSR Driver or Triac only)
Inactive
Active
Value
0
1
Enable / Disable Latching Of Output
Disable
Enable
Value
0
1
Latch Clear
Do Nothing
Clear Latch
Value
0
1
Latch State
Unlatched
Latched
Linear Output % Value
-2.0% to 102.0% of output nominal range
(control output will over/under drive by 2%).
RO
RW
RW
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Linear Output 1 Function
Disabled
Loop 1 Primary Output Power
Loop 1 Secondary Output Power
Retransmit Loop 1 Actual Setpoint Value
Retransmit Input 1 Process Variable Value
Loop 2 Primary Output Power
Loop 2 Secondary Output Power
Retransmit Loop 2 Actual Setpoint Value
Retransmit Input 2 Process Variable Value
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Digital Output 1 Function
Disabled
Loop 1 Primary Output Power
Loop 1 Secondary Output Power
Loop 1 VMD Open
Loop 1 VMD Close
Loop 2 Primary Output Power
Loop 2 Secondary Output Power
Loop 2 VMD Open
Loop 2 VMD Close
OR Alarm Event Direct
OR Alarm Event Reverse
AND Alarm Event Direct
AND Alarm Event Reverse
Bit
If Bit = 1, Alarm n Is Included in OR Selection
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
139
Dec
Hex
10107
277B
26491
677B
52982
CEF6
Output 1 OR Event Selection
Dec 10108 26492 52984
Hex
277C
677C CEF8
Output 1 AND Alarm Selection
Dec 10109 26493 52986
Hex
277D
677D CEFA
Output 1 AND Event Selection
Dec 10110 26494 52988
Hex
277E
677E CEFC
RW
RW
RW
RW
Output 1 Retransmit Input 1 Minimum
Dec
2152
18536 37072
RW
Hex
0868
4868
90D0
Output 1 Retransmit Input 1 Maximum
Dec
2153
18537 37074
RW
Hex
0869
4869
90D2
140
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3
Alarm 4
Alarm 5
Alarm 6
Alarm 7
Bit
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If Bit = 1, Event n Is Included in OR Selection
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Profile Running
Profile End
Bit
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If Bit = 1, Alarm n Is Included in AND Selection
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3
Alarm 4
Alarm 5
Alarm 6
Alarm 7
Bit
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If Bit = 1, Event n Is Included in AND Selection
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Profile Running
Profile End
Value For Loop 1 Retransmit Minimum
Displayed value at which the retransmission output reaches its
minimum level (e.g. 4mA if type is 4-20mA).
Adjustable from -9999 to 9999.9
Value For Loop 1 Retransmit Maximum
Displayed value at which the retransmission output reaches its
maximum level (e.g. 2mA if type is 4-20mA).
Adjustable from -9999 to 9999.9
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Output 1 Retransmit Input 2 Minimum
Dec
2400
18784 37568
RW
Hex
0960
4960
92C0
Value For Loop 2 Retransmit Minimum
Displayed value at which the retransmission output reaches its
minimum level (e.g. 4mA if type is 4-20mA).
Adjustable from -9999 to 9999.9
Value For Loop 2 Retransmit Maximum
Displayed value at which the retransmission output reaches its
maximum level (e.g. 2mA if type is 4-20mA).
Adjustable from -9999 to 9999.9
Output 1 Retransmit Input 2 Maximum
Dec
2410
18794 37588
RW
Hex
096A
496A
92D4
20.4.7 Plug-in Module Slot 2 Parameters
Parameter Name & Register Address
Integer
Int +1
Float
Plug-in Module 2 Type
Dec
2160
18544 37088
Hex
0870
4870
90E0
Output 2 or 2A Status
Dec
2162
18546 37092
Hex
0872
4872
90E4
Output 2B Status
Dec
2163
18547
Hex
0873
4873
37094
90E6
Digital Output 2 Latch Enable
Dec
2165
18549 37098
Hex
0875
4875
90EA
Digital Output 2 Clear Latch
Dec
2166
18550 37100
Hex
0876
4876
90EC
Digital Output 2 Latch State
Dec
2167
18551 37102
Hex
0877
4877
90EE
Digital Output 2B Latch Enable
Dec
2168
18552 37104
Hex
0878
4878
90F0
Digital Output 2B Clear Latch
Dec
2169
18553 37106
Hex
0879
4879
90F2
Digital Output 2B Latch State
Dec
2170
18554 37108
Hex
087A
487A
90F4
October 2014
Access
RO
RO
RO
RW
RW
RO
RW
RW
RO
Values
& Descriptions
Value
0
1
2
3
8
9
10
11
255
Module Fitted In Slot 2
None Fitted
Single Relay
Single SSR Driver
Error (invalid module for this slot)
Triac
Dual Relay
Dual SSR Driver
24VDC Transmitter PSU
Error (unrecognised module)
Value
0
1
Output 2 or 2A Status
Inactive
Active
Value
0
1
Output 2B Status
Inactive
Active
Value
0
1
Output 2 or 2A Enable / Disable Latching
Disable
Enable
Value
0
1
Output 2 or 2A Latch Clear
Do Nothing
Clear Latch
Value
0
1
Output 2 or 2A Latch State
Unlatched
Latched
Value
0
1
Output 2B Enable / Disable Latching
Disable
Enable
Value
0
1
Output 2B Latch Clear
Do Nothing
Clear Latch
Value
0
1
Output 2B Latch State
Unlatched
Latched
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
141
Output 2 or 2A Function
Dec 10101 26485 52970
Hex
2775
6775 CEEA
Output 2B Function
Dec 10102 26486
Hex
2776
6776
52972
CEEC
Output 2 OR Alarm Selection
Dec 10111 26495 52990
Hex
277F
677F CEFE
Output 2 OR Event Selection
Dec 10112 26496 52992
Hex
2780
6780
CF00
142
RW
RW
RW
RW
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Output 2 or 2A Function
Disabled
Loop 1 Primary Output Power
Loop 1 Secondary Output Power
Loop 1 VMD Open
Loop 1 VMD Close
Loop 2 Primary Output Power
Loop 2 Secondary Output Power
Loop 2 VMD Open
Loop 2 VMD Close
OR Alarm Event Direct
OR Alarm Event Reverse
AND Alarm Event Direct
AND Alarm Event Reverse
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Output 2B Function
Disabled
Loop 1 Primary Output Power
Loop 1 Secondary Output Power
Loop 1 VMD Open
Loop 1 VMD Close
Loop 2 Primary Output Power
Loop 2 Secondary Output Power
Loop 2 VMD Open
Loop 2 VMD Close
OR Alarm Event Direct
OR Alarm Event Reverse
AND Alarm Event Direct
AND Alarm Event Reverse
Bit
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If Bit = 1, Alarm n Is Included in OR Selection
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3
Alarm 4
Alarm 5
Alarm 6
Alarm 7
Bit
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If Bit = 1, Event n Is Included in OR Selection
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Profile Running
Profile End
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Output 2 AND Alarm Selection
Dec 10113 26497 52994
Hex
2781
6781
CF02
Bit
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If Bit = 1, Alarm n Is Included in AND Selection
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3
Alarm 4
Alarm 5
Alarm 6
Alarm 7
Bit
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If Bit = 1, Event n Is Included in AND Selection
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Profile Running
Profile End
Bit
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If Bit = 1, Alarm n Is Included in OR Selection
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3
Alarm 4
Alarm 5
Alarm 6
Alarm 7
Bit
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If Bit = 1, Event n Is Included in OR Selection
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Profile Running
Profile End
Output 2B AND Alarm Selection
Dec 10117 26501 53002
RW
Hex
2785
6785 CF0A
Bit
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If Bit = 1, Alarm n Is Included in AND Selection
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3
Alarm 4
Alarm 5
Alarm 6
Alarm 7
Output 2B AND Event Selection
Dec 10118 26502 53004
Hex
2786
6786 CF0C
Bit
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If Bit = 1, Event n Is Included in AND Selection
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Profile Running
Profile End
Output 2 AND Event Selection
Dec 10114 26498 52996
Hex
2782
6782
CF04
Output 2B OR Alarm Selection
Dec 10115 26499 52998
Hex
2783
6783
CF06
Output 2B OR Event Selection
Dec 10116 26500 53000
Hex
2784
6784
CF08
October 2014
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
143
20.4.8 Plug-in Module Slot 3 Parameters
Parameter Name & Register Address
Integer
Int +1
Float
Plug-in Module 3 Type
Dec
2192
18576 37152
Hex
0890
4890
9120
Output 3 or 3A Status
Dec
2194
18578 37156
Hex
0892
4892
9124
Output 3B Status
Dec
2195
18579
Hex
0893
4893
37158
9126
Digital Output 3 Latch Enable
Dec
2197
18581 37162
Hex
0895
4895
912A
Digital Output 3 Clear Latch
Dec
2198
18582 37164
Hex
0896
4896
912C
Digital Output 3 Latch State
Dec
2199
18583 37166
Hex
0897
4897
912E
Digital Output 3B Latch Enable
Dec
2200
18584 37168
Hex
0898
4898
9130
Digital Output 3B Clear Latch
Dec
2201
18585 37170
Hex
0899
4899
9132
Digital Output 3B Latch State
Dec
2202
18586 37172
Hex
089A
489A
9134
Output 3 Function
Dec 10103 26487
Hex
2777
6777
144
52974
CEEE
Access
RO
RO
RO
RW
RW
RO
RW
RW
RO
RW
Values
& Descriptions
Value
0
1
2
3
8
9
10
11
255
Module Fitted In Slot 3
None Fitted
Single Relay
Single SSR Driver
Error (invalid module for this slot)
Triac
Dual Relay
Dual SSR Driver
24VDC Transmitter PSU
Error (unrecognised module)
Value
0
1
Output 3 or 3A Status
Inactive
Active
Value
0
1
Output 3B Status
Inactive
Active
Value
0
1
Output 3 or 3A Enable / Disable Latching
Disabled
Enabled
Value
0
1
Output 3 or 3A Latch Clear
Do Nothing
Clear Latch
Value
0
1
Output 3 or 3A Latch State
Unlatched
Latched
Value
0
1
Output 3B Enable / Disable Latching
Disabled
Enabled
Value
0
1
Output 3B Latch Clear
Do Nothing
Clear Latch
Value
0
1
Output 3B Latch State
Unlatched
Latched
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Output 3 or 3A Function
Disabled
Loop 1 Primary Output Power
Loop 1 Secondary Output Power
Loop 1 VMD Open
Loop 1 VMD Close
Loop 2 Primary Output Power
Loop 2 Secondary Output Power
Loop 2 VMD Open
Loop 2 VMD Close
OR Alarm Event Direct
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
10
11
12
Output 3B Function
Dec 10104 26488
Hex
2778
6778
52976
CEF0
Output 3 OR Alarm Selection
Dec 10119 26503 53006
Hex
2787
6787
CF0E
Output 3 OR Event Selection
Dec 10120 26504 53008
Hex
2788
6788
CF10
Output 3 AND Alarm Selection
Dec 10121 26505 53010
Hex
2789
6789
CF12
Output 3 AND Event Selection
Dec 10122 26506 53012
Hex
278A
678A CF14
October 2014
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
OR Alarm Event Reverse
AND Alarm Event Direct
AND Alarm Event Reverse
Output 3B Function
Disabled
Loop 1 Primary Output Power
Loop 1 Secondary Output Power
Loop 1 VMD Open
Loop 1 VMD Close
Loop 2 Primary Output Power
Loop 2 Secondary Output Power
Loop 2 VMD Open
Loop 2 VMD Close
OR Alarm Event Direct
OR Alarm Event Reverse
AND Alarm Event Direct
AND Alarm Event Reverse
Bit
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If Bit = 1, Alarm n Is Included in OR Selection
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3
Alarm 4
Alarm 5
Alarm 6
Alarm 7
Bit
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If Bit = 1, Event n Is Included in OR Selection
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Profile Running
Profile End
Bit
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If Bit = 1, Alarm n Is Included in AND Selection
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3
Alarm 4
Alarm 5
Alarm 6
Alarm 7
Bit
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If Bit = 1, Event n Is Included in AND Selection
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Profile Running
Profile End
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
145
Output 3B OR Alarm Selection
Dec 10123 26507 53014
Hex
278B
678B CF16
Bit
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If Bit = 1, Alarm n Is Included in OR Selection
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3
Alarm 4
Alarm 5
Alarm 6
Alarm 7
Bit
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If Bit = 1, Event n Is Included in OR Selection
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Profile Running
Profile End
Output 3B AND Alarm Selection
Dec 10125 26509 53018
RW
Hex
278D
678D CF1A
Bit
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If Bit = 1, Alarm n Is Included in AND Selection
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3
Alarm 4
Alarm 5
Alarm 6
Alarm 7
Output 3B AND Event Selection
Dec 10126 26510 53020
Hex
278E
678E CF1C
Bit
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If Bit = 1, Event n Is Included in AND Selection
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Profile Running
Profile End
RW
Output 3B OR Event Selection
Dec 10124 26508 53016
Hex
278C
678C CF18
RW
RW
20.4.9 Output 4 Parameters
Parameter Name & Register Address
Integer
Int +1
Float
Linear Output 4 Fitted
Dec
3000
19384 38768
Hex 0BB8
4BB8
9770
Output 4 Usage
Dec 10105 26489
Hex
2779
6779
146
52978
CEF2
Access
RO
RW
Values
& Descriptions
Value
0
1
Linear Output 4 Fitted
Not fitted
Fitted
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Output 4 Function
Disabled
Loop 1 Primary Output Power
Loop 1 Secondary Output Power
Loop 1 VMD Open
Loop 1 VMD Close
Loop 2 Primary Output Power
Loop 2 Secondary Output Power
Loop 2 VMD Open
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
8
9
10
11
12
Output 4 Status
Dec
3001
19385
Hex 0BB9
4BB9
38770
9772
Digital Output 4 Latch Enable
Dec
3002
19386 38772
Hex 0BBA 4BBA 9774
Digital Output 4 Clear Latch
Dec
3004
19388 38776
Hex 0BBC 4BBC 9778
Digital Output 4 Latch State
Dec
3003
19387 38774
Hex 0BBB 4BBB 9776
Output 4 OR Alarm Selection
Dec 10127 26511 53022
Hex
278F
678F
CF1E
Output 4 OR Event Selection
Dec 10128 26512 53024
Hex
2790
6790
CF20
Output 4 AND Alarm Selection
Dec 10129 26513 53026
Hex
2791
6791
CF22
Output 4 AND Event Selection
Dec 10130 26514 53028
Hex
2792
6792
CF24
October 2014
RO
RW
RW
RO
RW
RW
RW
RW
Loop 2 VMD Close
OR Alarm Event Direct
OR Alarm Event Reverse
AND Alarm Event Direct
AND Alarm Event Reverse
Value
0
1
Output 4 Status
Inactive
Active
Value
0
1
Output 4 Latch Enable / Disable
Disable
Enable
Value
0
1
Output 4 Latch Clear
Do Nothing
Clear Latch
Value
0
1
Output 4 Latch State
Unlatched
Latched
Bit
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If Bit = 1, Alarm n Is Included in OR Selection
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3
Alarm 4
Alarm 5
Alarm 6
Alarm 7
Bit
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If Bit = 1, Event n Is Included in OR Selection
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Profile Running
Profile End
Bit
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If Bit = 1, Alarm n Is Included in AND Selection
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3
Alarm 4
Alarm 5
Alarm 6
Alarm 7
Bit
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If Bit = 1, Event n Is Included in AND Selection
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Profile Running
Profile End
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
147
20.4.10 Output 5 Parameters
Parameter Name & Register Address
Integer
Int +1
Float
Linear Output 5 Fitted
Dec
3005
19389 38778
Hex 0BBD 4BBD 977A
Output 5 Usage
Dec 10106 26490
Hex
277A
677A
Output 5 Status
Dec
3006
19390
Hex 0BBE
4BBE
52980
CEF4
38780
977C
Digital Output 5 Latch Enable
Dec
3007
19391 38782
Hex 0BBF
4BBF 977E
Digital Output 5 Clear Latch
Dec
3009
19393 38786
Hex 0BC1
4BC1
9782
Digital Output 5 Latch State
Dec
3008
19392 38784
Hex 0BC0
4BC0
9780
Output 5 OR Alarm Selection
Dec 10131 26515 53030
Hex
2793
6793
CF26
Output 5 OR Event Selection
Dec 10132 26516 53032
Hex
2794
6794
CF28
148
Access
RO
RW
RO
RW
RW
RO
RW
RW
Values
& Descriptions
Value
0
1
Linear Output 5 Fitted
Not fitted
Fitted
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Output 5 Function
Disabled
Loop 1 Primary Output Power
Loop 1 Secondary Output Power
Loop 1 VMD Open
Loop 1 VMD Close
Loop 2 Primary Output Power
Loop 2 Secondary Output Power
Loop 2 VMD Open
Loop 2 VMD Close
OR Alarm Event Direct
OR Alarm Event Reverse
AND Alarm Event Direct
AND Alarm Event Reverse
Value
0
1
Output 5 Status
Inactive
Active
Value
0
1
Latch Enable
Disable
Enable
Value
0
1
Latch Clear
Do Nothing
Clear Latch
Value
0
1
Latch State
Unlatched
Latched
Bit
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If Bit = 1, Alarm n Is Included in OR Selection
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3
Alarm 4
Alarm 5
Alarm 6
Alarm 7
Bit
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If Bit = 1, Event n Is Included in OR Selection
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Profile Running
Profile End
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Output 5 AND Alarm Selection
Dec 10133 26517 53034
Hex
2795
6795 CF2A
Output 5 AND Event Selection
Dec 10134 26518 53036
Hex
2796
6796 CF2C
RW
RW
Bit
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If Bit = 1, Alarm n Is Included in AND Selection
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3
Alarm 4
Alarm 5
Alarm 6
Alarm 7
Bit
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
If Bit = 1, Event n Is Included in AND Selection
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
Event 4
Event 5
Profile Running
Profile End
20.4.11 Linear Output 6 Parameters
Parameter Name & Register Address
Integer
Int +1
Float
Linear Output 6 Fitted
Dec
3016
19400 38800
Hex 0BC8
4BC8
9790
Linear Output 6 Usage
Dec
2174
18558 37116
Hex
087E
487E
90FC
Linear mA/V DC Output 6 Type
Dec
3011
19395 38790
Hex 0BC3
4BC3
9786
Linear Output 6 Level Status
Dec
3014
19398 38796
Hex
0BC6
4BC6
978C
Access
RO
RW
RW
& Descriptions
Value
0
1
Linear Output 6 Fitted
Not fitted
Fitted
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Output 6 Function
Disabled
Loop 1 Primary Output Power
Loop 1 Secondary Output Power
Retransmit Loop 1 Actual Setpoint Value
Retransmit Input 1 Process Variable Value
Loop 2 Primary Output Power
Loop 2 Secondary Output Power
Retransmit Loop 2 Actual Setpoint Value
Retransmit Input 2 Process Variable Value
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
Linear Output 6 Type
0 to 5V DC
0 to 10V DC
2 to 10V DC
0 to 20mA DC
4 to 20mA DC
Variable 0 to 10VDC Transmitter PSU
Linear Output % Value
RO
Output 6 Retransmit Input 1 Minimum
Dec
2182
18566 37132
RW
Hex
0886
4886
910C
October 2014
Values
-2.0% to 102.0% of output nominal range
(control output will over/under drive by 2%).
Value For Loop 1 Retransmit Minimum
Displayed value at which the retransmission output reaches its
minimum level (e.g. 4mA if type is 4-20mA).
Adjustable from -9999 to 9999.9
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
149
Output 6 Retransmit Input 1 Maximum
Dec
2183
18567 37134
RW
Hex
0887
4887
910E
Output 6 Retransmit Input 2 Minimum
Dec
2430
18814 37628
RW
Hex
097E
497E
92FC
Output 6 Retransmit Input 2 Maximum
Dec
2431
18815 37630
RW
Hex
097F
497F
92FE
Value For Loop 1 Retransmit Maximum
Displayed value at which the retransmission output reaches its
maximum level (e.g. 2mA if type is 4-20mA).
Adjustable from -9999 to 9999.9
Value For Loop 2 Retransmit Minimum
Displayed value at which the retransmission output reaches its
minimum level (e.g. 4mA if type is 4-20mA).
Adjustable from -9999 to 9999.9
Value For Loop 2 Retransmit Maximum
Displayed value at which the retransmission output reaches its
maximum level (e.g. 2mA if type is 4-20mA).
Adjustable from -9999 to 9999.9
20.4.12 Linear Output 7 Parameters
Parameter Name & Register Address
Integer
Int +1
Float
Linear Output 7 Fitted
Dec
3026
19410 38820
Hex 0BD2
4BD2 97A4
Linear Output 7 Usage
Dec
2203
18587 37174
Hex
089B
489B
9136
Linear mA/V DC Output 7 Type
Dec
3021
19405 38810
Hex 0BCD 4BCD 979A
Linear Output 7 Level Status
Dec
3024
19408 38816
Hex
0BD0
4BD0
97A0
Access
RO
RW
RW
& Descriptions
Value
0
1
Linear Output 7 Fitted
Not fitted
Fitted
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Output 6 Function
Disabled
Loop 1 Primary Output Power
Loop 1 Secondary Output Power
Retransmit Loop 1 Actual Setpoint Value
Retransmit Input 1 Process Variable Value
Loop 2 Primary Output Power
Loop 2 Secondary Output Power
Retransmit Loop 2 Actual Setpoint Value
Retransmit Input 2 Process Variable Value
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
Linear Output 6 Type
0 to 5V DC
0 to 10V DC
2 to 10V DC
0 to 20mA DC
4 to 20mA DC
Variable 0 to 10VDC Transmitter PSU
Linear Output % Value
RO
Output 7 Retransmit Input 1 Minimum
Dec
2211
18595 37190
RW
Hex
08A3
48A3
9146
Output 7 Retransmit Input 1 Maximum
Dec
2212
18596 37192
RW
Hex
08A4
48A4
9148
Output 7 Retransmit Input 2 Minimum
Dec
2460
18844 37688
RW
Hex
099C
499C
9338
150
Values
-2.0% to 102.0% of output nominal range
(control output will over/under drive by 2%).
Value For Loop 1 Retransmit Minimum
Displayed value at which the retransmission output reaches its
minimum level (e.g. 4mA if type is 4-20mA).
Adjustable from -9999 to 9999.9
Value For Loop 1 Retransmit Maximum
Displayed value at which the retransmission output reaches its
maximum level (e.g. 2mA if type is 4-20mA).
Adjustable from -9999 to 9999.9
Value For Loop 2 Retransmit Minimum
Displayed value at which the retransmission output reaches its
minimum level (e.g. 4mA if type is 4-20mA).
Adjustable from -9999 to 9999.9
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Output 7 Retransmit Input 2 Maximum
Dec
2461
18845 37690
RW
Hex
099D
499D
933A
Value For Loop 2 Retransmit Maximum
Displayed value at which the retransmission output reaches its
maximum level (e.g. 2mA if type is 4-20mA).
Adjustable from -9999 to 9999.9
20.4.13 Loop 1 Setpoint Parameters
Parameter Name & Register Address
Integer
Int +1
Float
Access
Loop 1 Setpoint Minimum
Dec
3944
20328 40656
Hex
0F68
4F68
9ED0
Loop 1 Setpoint Maximum
Dec
3945
20329 40658
Hex
0F69
4F69
9ED2
Loop 1 Main Local Setpoint Value
Dec
3960
20344 40688
Hex
0F78
4F78
9EF0
& Descriptions
Minimum Allowed Setpoint For Loop 1
RW
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
Maximum Allowed Setpoint For Loop 1
RW
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
Main Setpoint Value For Loop 1
RW
Valid between Setpoint Maximum and Minimum
Loop 1 Main Local Setpoint Offset
Dec
3961
20345 40690
RW
Hex
0F79
4F79
9EF2
Offset Of Main Setpoint Of Loop 1
Changes effective setpoint (for multi-zone slaves. +ve values
added -ve values subtracted.
Setpoint always limited by Setpoint Max and Min.
Alternate Setpoint Value For Loop 1
Loop 1 Alternate Local Setpoint Value
Dec
3962
20346 40692
RW
Hex
0F7A
4F7A 9EF4
Valid between Setpoint Maximum and Minimum
Loop 1 Alternate Local Setpoint Offset
Dec
3963
20347 40694
RW
Hex
0F7B
4F7B
9EF6
Loop 1 Main Setpoint Source
Dec
4050
20434 40868
Hex
0FD2
4FD2 9FA4
Values
RW
Offset Of Alternate setpoint Of Loop 1
Changes effective setpoint (for multi-zone slaves. +ve values
added -ve values subtracted.
Setpoint always limited by Setpoint Max and Min.
Value
Main Setpoint Source For Loop 1
0
Local Setpoint 1
1
Not Used
Loop 1 Alternate Setpoint Source
Dec
4051
20435 40870
RW
Hex
0FD3
4FD3 9FA6
Value
0
1
2
3
Alternate Setpoint Source For Loop 1
Not Used
Local Setpoint 2
Input 2 Remote Setpoint
Input A Remote Setpoint
Loop 1 Setpoint Select
Dec
4122
20506 41012
Hex
101A
501A
A034
Value
0
1
Setpoint Select For Loop 1
Main Setpoint
Alternate setpoint
Loop 1 Setpoint Ramp Rate
Dec
4123
20507 41014
Hex
101B
501B
A036
Loop 1 Target Setpoint
Dec
4125
20509 41018
Hex
101D
501D
A03A
RW
Setpoint Ramp Rate For Loop 1
RW
Actual Setpoint Value Of Selected Loop 1 Setpoint
RO
Operator Access Setpoint Ramp Rate
Dec
4126
20510 41020
RW
Hex
101E
501E A03C
October 2014
0 to 10000 display units per hour
(1 to 9999 is ramp rate per hour, either 0 or >10000 = Off)
The Loop 1 target setpoint value when ramping
Value
0
1
Operator Access To Loop 1 Setpoint Ramp Rate
No
Yes
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
151
Operator Access To Setpoint Edit
Dec
4128
20512 41024
RW
Hex
1020
5020
A040
Value
0
1
Operator Access To Edit Loop 1 Setpoint
No
Yes
Loop 1 Selected Setpoint
Dec
4127
20511 41022
Hex
101F
501F
A03E
Value
0
1
Selected Setpoint For Loop 1
Main Setpoint
Alternate setpoint
RO
Loop 1 Actual Setpoint
Dec
8256
24640 49280
Hex
2040
6040
Effective Setpoint Value Of Selected Loop 1 Setpoint
The effective setpoint for loop 1
(current instantaneous value of the active setpoint source)
RO
C080
20.4.14 Loop 2 Setpoint Parameters
Parameter Name & Register Address
Integer
Int +1
Float
Access
Loop 2 Setpoint Minimum
Dec
3950
20334 40668
Hex
0F6E
4F6E
9EDC
Loop 2 Setpoint Maximum
Dec
3951
20335 40670
Hex
0F6F
4F6F
9EDE
Loop 2 Main Local Setpoint Value
Dec
3964
20348 40696
Hex
0F7C
4F7C
9EF8
& Descriptions
Minimum Allowed Setpoint For Loop 2
RW
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
Maximum Allowed Setpoint For Loop 2
RW
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
Main Setpoint Value For Loop 2
RW
Loop 2 Main Local Setpoint Offset
Dec
3965
20349 40698
RW
Hex
0F7D
4F7D 9EFA
Loop 2 Alternate Local Setpoint Value
Dec
3966
20350 40700
RW
Hex
0F7E
4F7E 9EFC
Loop 2 Alternate Local Setpoint Offset
Dec
3967
20351 40702
RW
Hex
0F7F
4F7F 9EFE
Loop 2 Main Setpoint Source
Dec
4052
20436 40872
Hex
0FD4
4FD4 9FA8
Values
RW
Valid between Setpoint Maximum and Minimum
Offset Of Main Setpoint Of Loop 2
Changes effective setpoint (for multi-zone slaves. +ve values
added -ve values subtracted.
Setpoint always limited by Setpoint Max and Min.
Alternate Setpoint Value For Loop 2
Valid between Setpoint Maximum and Minimum
Offset Of Alternate setpoint Of Loop 2
Changes effective setpoint (for multi-zone slaves. +ve values
added -ve values subtracted.
Setpoint always limited by Setpoint Max and Min.
Value
Main Setpoint Source For Loop 2
0
Local Setpoint 1
1
Not Used
Loop 2 Alternate Setpoint Source
Dec
4053
20437 40874
RW
Hex
0FD5
4FD5 9FAA
Value
0
1
3
Alternate Setpoint Source For Loop 2
Not Used
Local Setpoint 2
Input A Remote Setpoint
Loop 2 Setpoint Select
Dec
4200
20584 41168
Hex
1068
5068
A0D0
Value
0
1
Setpoint Select For Loop 2
Local Setpoint 1
Alternate setpoint
Loop 2 Setpoint Ramp Rate
Dec
4201
20585 41170
Hex
152
1069
5069
A0D2
RW
Setpoint Ramp Rate For Loop 2
RW
0 to 10000 display units per hour
(1 to 9999 is ramp rate per hour, either 0 or >10000 = Off)
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Loop 2 Target Setpoint
Dec
4203
20587 41174
Actual Setpoint Value Of Selected Loop 2 Setpoint
RO
Hex
106B
506B A0D6
Operator Access To Setpoint Ramp
Rate
Dec
4204
20588 41176
RW
Hex
106C
506C A0D8
Value
Operator Access To Setpoint Edit
Dec
4206
20590 41180
RW
Hex
106E
506E A0DC
Value
0
1
Operator Access To Edit Loop 2 Setpoint
No
Yes
Loop 2 Selected Setpoint
Dec
4205
20589 41178
Hex
106D
506D A0DA
Value
0
1
Selected Setpoint For Loop 2
Main Setpoint
Alternate setpoint
204D
604D
0
1
RO
Loop 2 Actual Setpoint
Dec
8269
24653 49306
Hex
The Loop 1 target setpoint value when ramping
Operator Access To Loop 2 Setpoint Ramp Rate
No
Yes
Effective Setpoint Value Of Selected Loop 2 Setpoint
The effective setpoint for loop 1
(current instantaneous value of the active setpoint source)
RO
C09A
20.4.15 Aux A Input Parameters
Parameter Name & Register Address
Integer
Int +1
Float
Access
Auxiliary Input A Scale Minimum
Dec
2111
18495 36990
Hex
083F
483F
Auxiliary Input A Scale Maximum
Dec
2112
18496 36992
Hex
0840
4840
9080
RW
Auxiliary Input A Offset
Dec
2113
18497 36994
Hex
0841
4841
9082
Auxiliary Input A Value
Dec
2114
18498 36996
Hex
0842
4842
9084
& Descriptions
Minimum Input Scaling Value
Scale value (between ±0.001 & ±10000) when input A is at
minimum value. When used for RSP, setpoint is still constrained
by setpoint limits.
Maximum Input Scaling Value
Scale value (between ±0.001 & ±10000) when input A is at
maximum value. When used for RSP, setpoint is still constrained
by setpoint limits.
Offset Applied To Scaled Aux A Value
Changes effective setpoint (for multi-zone slaves. +ve values
added -ve values subtracted. from +/-0.001 to 20000 units or
OFF
Auxiliary Input A Measured Value
RW
907E
Values
RW
RO
The current input A value (scaled).
20.4.16 Loop 1 Control Parameters
Parameter Name & Register Address
Integer
Int +1
Float
Loop 1 Manual Control Select
Dec
4308
20692 41384
Hex
10D4
50D4 A1A8
Loop 1 Control Enable Select
Dec
4309
20693 41386
Hex
10D5
50D5 A1AA
Access
RW
RW
Loop 1 Auto/Manual Operator Access
Dec
4394
20778 41556
RW
Hex
112A
512A
A254
October 2014
Values
& Descriptions
Value
0
1
Auto/Manual Mode Selection
Automatic Mode
Manual Mode
Value
0
1
Loop Control Enable/Disable
Disable
Enable
Value
0
1
Operator Access To Auto/Manual Control
Off
On
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
153
Loop 1 Control Enable Access
Dec
4395
20779 41558
Hex
112B
512B
A256
Loop 1 Primary Cycle Time
Dec
4301
20685 41370
Hex
10CD
50CD
A19A
Loop 1 Secondary Cycle Time
Dec
4302
20686 41372
Hex
10CE
50CE
Loop 1 Control Mode
Dec
4390
20774
Hex
1126
5126
A19C
41548
A24C
RW
Value
0
1
Operator Access To Control Enable/Disable
Off
On
Cycle Time For Primary Control Outputs
RW
0.5 to 512.0 Seconds
Cycle Time For Secondary Control Outputs
RW
RW
Loop 1 Control Selection
0.5 to 512.0 Seconds
Value
0
1
2
Control Mode For Loop 1
Standard
Cascade Mode
Ratio Mode
Value
Control Actuator Type Selection
Standard (Time Proportioned or Continuous Linear
PID)
VMD (3-Point Stepping For Valve Motor Drive)
Dec
4307
20691
41382
Hex
10D3
50D3
A1A6
1
41388
A1AC
Value
0
1
Primary Only or Primary & Secondary
Single (Primary Only Control)
Dual Control (Primary & Secondary Control)
Value
0
1
Direction Of Control Action
Direct Acting
Reverse Acting
Loop 1 Control type
Dec
4310
20694
Hex
10D6
50D6
Loop 1 Control Action
Dec
4311
20695 41390
Hex
10D7
50D7 A1AE
RW
RW
RW
PID Set 1 - Primary Prop Band
Dec
4312
20696 41392
Hex
10D8
50D8
A1B0
RW
PID Set 1 - Secondary Prop Band
Dec
4313
20697 41394
Hex
10D9
50D9
A1B2
PID Set 1 - Integral Time
Dec
4314
20698 41396
Hex
10DA
50DA
A1B4
PID Set 1 - Derivative Time
Dec
4315
20699 41398
Hex
10DB
50DB
A1B6
Loop 1 Manual Reset
Dec
4316
20700
41400
Hex
A1B8
10DC
50DC
RW
RW
10DD
50DD
154
10E0
50E0
Gain Set 1 integral time constant for loop 1
0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF
RW
Gain Set 1 derivative time constant for loop 1
0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF
PID Set 1 Manual Reset (Bias) For Loop 1
A1BA
PID Set 1 - On/Off Differential
Dec
4320
20704 41408
Hex
PID Set 1 Primary Proportional Band For Loop 1
Primary Proportional Band for Gain Set 1.
1 display unit to 9999 units,
but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control
PID Set 1 Secondary Proportional Band For Loop 1
Secondary Proportional Band for Gain Set 1.
1 display unit to 9999 units,
but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control
PID Set 1 Integral Time For Loop 1
PID Set 1 Derivative Time For Loop 1
RW
PID Set 1 - Overlap/Deadband
Dec
4317
20701 41402
Hex
0
A1C0
RW
RW
Working point from 0 to 100 for single control or
-100 to 100 for dual control (primary & secondary)
PID Set 1 - Overlap or Deadband For Loop 1
PID Set 1 overlap (+ve) or deadband (-ve) between primary &
secondary prop bands. In display units - limited to 20% of the
combined band width.
PID Set 1 - On/Off Control Differential For Loop 1
The on-off control hysteresis (deadband) for PID Set 1.
1 to 300 display units, centred about the setpoint.
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Loop 1 Primary Power Upper limit
Dec
4321
20705 41410
Hex
10E1
50E1
A1C2
Loop 1 Primary Power Upper limit
RW
10 to 100%
but must be at least 10% above the primary power lower limit.
Loop 1 Primary Power Lower Limit
Dec
4322
20706 41412
RW
Hex
10E2
50E2 A1C4
Loop 1 Primary Power Lower Limit
Loop 1 Secondary Upper Power limit
Dec
4323
20707 41414
RW
Hex
10E3
50E3 A1C6
Loop 1 Secondary Upper Power limit
Loop 1 Secondary Power Lower limit
Dec
4324
20708 41416
RW
Hex
10E4
50E4 A1C8
Loop 1 Secondary Power Lower limit
Loop 1 Pre-Tune Method
Dec
4396
20780 41560
Hex
112C
512C
A258
Loop 1 Pretune at Value
Dec
4399
20783 41566
Hex
112F
512F
Loop 1 Pretune Set
Dec
4397
20781
Hex
112D
512D
A25E
RW
0 to 90%
but must be at least 10% below the primary power upper limit.
10 to 100%
but must be at least 10% above the secondary power lower limit.
0 to 90%
but must be at least 10% below the primary power upper limit.
Value
0
1
Pre-tune type
Standard
Pretune at Value
Value To Pre-tune Loop 1
RW
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
(applies if Pre-Tune Type = Pre-tune at Value)
Value
0
1
2
3
4
PID Set Pre-tune Will Optimize
PID Set 1
PID Set 2
PID Set 3
PID Set 4
PID Set 5
Value
0
1
Cascade Loop To Be Pre-Tuned
Slave (opens cascade - close when finished)
Master (tunes master/slave combination)
Loop 1 Pre-Tune Engage/disengage
Dec
4325
20709 41418
RW
Hex
10E5
50E5 A1CA
Value
0
1
Pre-Tune Engage/Disengage For Loop 1
Pre-Tune OFF
Run Pre-Tune
Loop 1 Self-Tune Engage/disengage
Dec
4326
20710 41420
RW
Hex
10E6
50E6 A1CC
Value
0
1
Self-Tune Engage/Disengage For Loop 1
Self-Tune OFF
Self-Tune ON
Loop 1 Loop Alarm Type
Dec
4327
20711 41422
Hex
10E7
50E7 A1CE
Value
1
2
Loop Alarm Type For Loop 1
User Defined Time
Automatic (2x Integral Time)
41562
A25A
Loop 1 Pretune Cascade Loop
Dec
4398
20782 41564
Hex
112E
512E A25C
Loop Alarm Time
Dec
4328
20712
41424
Hex
A1D0
10E8
50E8
10E9
50E9
A1D2
Loop 1 Secondary Power
Dec
4330
20714 41428
Hex
10EA
October 2014
50EA
RW
RW
Loop Alarm Activation Time
Loop 1 Primary Power
Dec
4329
20713 41426
Hex
RW
A1D4
RW
1 to 5999 Seconds after output loop 1 power reaches saturation
Loop 1 Primary Power Level
RO
The current loop 1 primary power level (0 to 100%)
Loop 1 Secondary Power Level
RO
The current loop 1 secondary power level (0 to 100%)
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
155
Loop 1 Combined Power
Dec
4331
20715 41430
Hex
10EB
50EB
A1D6
Loop 1 Pre-Tune Status
Dec
4332
20716 41432
Hex
10EC
50EC A1D8
Loop 1 Self-Tune Status
Dec
4333
20717 41434
Hex
10ED
50ED A1DA
Loop 1 Loop Alarm status
Dec
4334
20718 41436
Hex
10EE
50EE A1DC
Loop 1 Combined Primary & Secondary Power Level
RO
RO
RO
RO
Loop 1 Input Failure Pre-set Power
Dec
4335
20719 41438
RW
Hex
10EF
50EF A1DE
Loop 1 Auto Pre-tune
Dec
4336
20720
Hex
10F0
50F0
41440
A1E0
Pre-tune Secondary Status
Dec
4341
20725 41450
Hex
10F5
50F5 A1EA
Self-tune Secondary Status
Dec
4342
20726 41452
Hex
10F6
50F6 A1EC
Loop 1 Anti Wind-up Limit
Dec
4391
20775 41550
Hex
1127
5127
A24E
Loop 1 Motor Travel Time
Dec
4343
20727 41454
Hex
10F7
50F7
A1EE
Loop 1 Minimum Motor On Time
Dec
4344
20728 41456
Hex
10F8
50F8
A1F0
Loop 1 VMD Break Action
Dec
4401
20785 41570
Hex
1131
5131
A262
Loop 1 Valve Close Limit
Dec
4376
20760 41520
Hex
156
1118
5118
A230
RW
RO
RO
The current loop 1 combined PID power level (-100 to 100%)
Value
0
1
Pre-Tune Status For Loop 1
Inactive
Active
Value
0
1
Self-Tune Status For Loop 1
Inactive
Active
Value
0
1
Loop Alarm Status For Loop 1
Inactive
Active
Loop 1 Input Sensor Break Pre-set Power
The pre-defined power output applied if input signal is lost
0 to 100% (-100% to 100% for dual control).
Value
0
1
Auto Pre-Tune At Every Power-up For Loop 1
Disabled
Enabled
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Pre-tune Secondary Status
No Additional Information
PV within 5% (Pre-Tune cannot run)
Manual Control Enabled (Pre-Tune cannot run)
Control has On/Off element (Pre-Tune cannot run)
Input not valid (Pre-Tune cannot run)
Control Disabled (Pre-Tune cannot run)
Profile Running (Pre-Tune cannot run)
Setpoint Ramping (Pre-Tune cannot run)
Value
0
2
3
4
5
Self-tune Secondary Status
No Additional Information
Manual Control Enabled (Self-Tune cannot run)
Control has On/Off element (Self-Tune cannot run)
Input not valid (Self-Tune cannot run)
Control Disabled (Self-Tune cannot run)
Loop 1 Anti Wind-up Limit
Power level where integral action is suspended.
Adjustable from 10.0 to 100.0% of PID power.
RW
Loop 1 Motor Travel Time
RW
The motor travel time (from fully open to fully closed) for 3-point
stepping VMD control. Adjustable from 5 to 300 seconds.
Loop 1 Minimum Motor On Time
RW
RW
Minimum drive effort to begin moving valve for 3-point stepping
VMD control. In seconds, from 0.02 to 1/10 of Motor Travel Time
Value
0
1
Loop 1 Sensor Break Action For VMD Control
Close Valve Output On
Open Valve Output On
Loop 1 Minimum Valve Position
RW
Minimum position to drive valve in VMD Mode
from the valve close limit+1% to 100.0%
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Loop 1 Valve Open Limit
Dec
4377
20761 41522
Hex
1119
5119
A232
Loop 1 PID Set Select
Dec
4367
20751 41502
Hex
110F
510F
A21E
Loop 1 Maximum Valve Position
RW
PID Set 2 - Primary Prop Band
Dec
4347
20731 41462
Hex
10FB
50FB
A1F6
RW
PID Set 2 - Secondary Prop Band
Dec
4348
20732 41464
Hex
10FC
50FC
A1F8
PID Set 2 - Integral Time
Dec
4349
20733 41466
Hex
10FD
50FD
A1FA
PID Set 2 - Derivative Time
Dec
4350
20734 41468
Hex
10FE
50FE
A1FC
RW
RW
10FF
50FF
A1FE
PID Set 2 - On/Off Differential
Dec
4378
20762 41524
Hex
111A
511A
A234
RW
RW
RW
PID Set 3 - Primary Prop Band
Dec
4352
20736 41472
Hex
1100
5100
A200
RW
PID Set 3 - Secondary Prop Band
Dec
4353
20737 41474
Hex
1101
5101
A202
PID Set 3 - Integral Time
Dec
4354
20738 41476
Hex
1102
5102
A204
PID Set 3 - Derivative Time
Dec
4355
20739 41478
Hex
1103
5103
A206
RW
RW
1104
October 2014
5104
A208
Loop 1 PID Set Selection
PID Set 1
Gain Schedule Selected by SP
Gain Schedule Selected by PV
PID Set 2
PID Set 3
PID Set 4
PID Set 5
PID Set 2 Primary Proportional Band For Loop 1
Primary Proportional Band for Gain Set 2.
1 display unit to 9999 units,
but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control
PID Set 2 Secondary Proportional Band For Loop1
Secondary Proportional Band for Gain Set 2.
1 display unit to 9999 units,
but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control
PID Set 2 - Integral Time For Loop 1
Gain Set 2 integral time constant for loop 1
0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF
Gain Set 2 derivative time constant for loop 1
0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF
PID Set 2 - Overlap/Deadband For Loop 1
PID Set 2 overlap (+ve) or deadband (-ve) between primary &
secondary prop bands. In display units - limited to 20% of the
combined band width.
PID Set 2 - On/Off Differential For Loop 1
The on-off control hysteresis (deadband) for PID Set 2.
1 to 300 display units, centred about the setpoint.
PID Set 3 Primary Proportional Band For Loop 1
Primary Proportional Band for Gain Set 3.
1 display unit to 9999 units,
but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control
PID Set 3 Secondary Proportional Band For Loop 1
Secondary Proportional Band for Gain Set 3.
1 display unit to 9999 units,
but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control
PID Set 3 - Integral Time For Loop 1
Gain Set 3 integral time constant for loop 1
0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF
PID Set 3 - Derivative Time For Loop 1
RW
PID Set 3 - Overlap/Deadband
Dec
4356
20740 41480
Hex
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
PID Set 2 - Derivative Time For Loop 1
PID Set 2 - Overlap/Deadband
Dec
4351
20735 41470
Hex
Maximum position to drive valve in VMD Mode.
From 0.0% to the valve open limit-1%
RW
RW
Gain Set 3 derivative time constant for loop 1
0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF
PID Set 3 - Overlap/Deadband For Loop 1
PID Set 3 overlap (+ve) or deadband (-ve) between primary &
secondary prop bands. In display units - limited to 20% of the
combined band width.
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
157
PID Set 3 - On/Off Differential
Dec
4379
20763 41526
Hex
111B
511B
A236
PID Set 3 - On/Off Differential For Loop 1
RW
PID Set 4 - Primary Prop Band
Dec
4357
20741 41482
Hex
1105
5105
A20A
RW
PID Set 4 - Secondary Prop Band
Dec
4358
20742 41484
Hex
1106
5106
A20C
PID Set 4 - Integral Time
Dec
4359
20743 41486
Hex
1107
5107
A20E
PID Set 4 - Derivative Time
Dec
4360
20744 41488
Hex
1108
5108
A210
RW
RW
1109
5109
A212
PID Set 4 - On/Off Differential
Dec
4380
20764 41528
Hex
111C
511C
A238
RW
RW
RW
PID Set 5 - Primary Prop Band
Dec
4362
20746 41492
Hex
110A
510A
A214
RW
PID Set 5 - Secondary Prop Band
Dec
4363
20747 41494
Hex
110B
510B
A216
PID Set 5 - Integral Time
Dec
4364
20748 41496
Hex
110C
510C
A218
PID Set 5 - Derivative Time
Dec
4365
20749 41498
Hex
110D
510D
A21A
RW
RW
110E
510E
A21C
PID Set 5 - Overlap/Deadband
Dec
4381
20765 41530
Hex
111D
511D
A23A
Loop 1 Gain Set 2 Breakpoint
Dec
4369
20753 41506
Hex
1111
5111
A222
Loop 1 Gain Set 3 Breakpoint
Dec
4370
20754 41508
Hex
158
1112
5112
A224
Gain Set 4 integral time constant for loop 1
0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF
Gain Set 4 derivative time constant for loop 1
0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF
PID Set 4 - Overlap/Deadband For Loop 1
PID Set 4 overlap (+ve) or deadband (-ve) between primary &
secondary prop bands. In display units - limited to 20% of the
combined band width.
PID Set 4 - On/Off Differential For Loop 1
The on-off control hysteresis (deadband) for PID Set 4.
1 to 300 display units, centred about the setpoint.
PID Set 5 Primary Proportional Band For Loop 1
Primary Proportional Band for Gain Set 5.
1 display unit to 9999 units,
but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control
PID Set 5 Secondary Proportional Band For Loop 1
Secondary Proportional Band for Gain Set 5.
1 display unit to 9999 units,
but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control
PID Set 5 - Integral Time For Loop 1
Gain Set 5 integral time constant for loop 1
0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF
PID Set 5 - Derivative Time For Loop 1
RW
PID Set 5 - Overlap/Deadband
Dec
4366
20750 41500
Hex
PID Set 4 Primary Proportional Band For Loop 1
Primary Proportional Band for Gain Set 4.
1 display unit to 9999 units,
but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control
PID Set 4 Secondary Proportional Band For Loop 1
Secondary Proportional Band for Gain Set 4.
1 display unit to 9999 units,
but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control
PID Set 4 - Integral Time For Loop 1
PID Set 4 - Derivative Time For Loop 1
PID Set 4 - Overlap/Deadband
Dec
4361
20745 41490
Hex
The on-off control hysteresis (deadband) for PID Set 3.
1 to 300 display units, centred about the setpoint.
RW
RW
Gain Set 5 derivative time constant for loop 1
0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF
PID Set 5 - Overlap/Deadband For Loop 1
PID Set 5 overlap (+ve) or deadband (-ve) between primary &
secondary prop bands. In display units - limited to 20% of the
combined band width.
PID Set 5 - On/Off Differential For Loop 1
The on-off control hysteresis (deadband) for PID Set 5.
1 to 300 display units, centred about the setpoint.
Gain Scheduling PID Set 1 To 2 Switch Point
RW
Value (SP or PV) gain scheduling switches from PID Set 1 To 2.
Value between Scaled Input 1 Lower & Upper Limits
Gain Scheduling PID Set 2 To 3 Switch Point
RW
Value (SP or PV) gain scheduling switches from PID Set 2 To 3.
Value between Set 2 Breakpoint & Scaled Input 1 Upper Limit.
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Loop 1 Gain Set 4 Breakpoint
Dec
4371
20755 41510
Hex
1113
5113
A226
Loop 1 Gain Set 5 Breakpoint
Dec
4372
20756 41512
Hex
1114
5114
A228
Loop 1 Cascade Mode
Dec
4393
20777 41554
Hex
1129
5129
A252
Loop 1 Ratio NO Constant
Dec
4387
20771 41542
Hex
1123
5123
A246
Loop 1 Ratio Sfac Constant
Dec
4388
20772 41544
Hex
1124
5124
A248
Gain Scheduling PID Set 3 To 4 Switch Point
Value (SP or PV) gain scheduling switches from PID Set 3 To 4.
Value between Set 3 Breakpoint & Scaled Input 1 Upper Limit.
RW
Gain Scheduling PID Set 4 To 5 Switch Point
Value (SP or PV) gain scheduling switches from PID Set 4 To 5.
Value between Set 4 Breakpoint & Scaled Input 1 Upper Limit.
RW
Value
0
1
RW
Cascade Master/Slave Link Status
Cascade Closed
Cascade Open
Ratio NO Constant For Atomizing Air
0 to 9999 atomizing air value,
Added to the x1 value in ratio mode (air flow is x1 + NO).
RW
Ratio Sfac Constant
Ratio control mode scaling factor. Adjustable from 0.010 to
99.999
RW
20.4.17 Loop 2 Control Parameters
Parameter Name & Register Address
Integer
Int +1
Float
Loop 2 Manual Control Select
Dec
4408
20792 41584
Hex
1138
5138
A270
Loop 2 Control Enable Select
Dec
4409
20793 41586
Hex
1139
5139
A272
Loop 2 Auto/Manual Access
Dec
4494
20878 41756
Hex
118E
518E A31C
Loop 2 Control Enable Access
Dec
4495
20879 41758
Hex
118F
518F
A31E
Loop 2 Primary Cycle Time
Dec
4303
20687 41374
Hex
10CF
50CF
A19E
Loop 2 Secondary Cycle Time
Dec
4304
20688 41376
Hex
10D0
50D0
A1A0
Loop 2 Control Selection
Dec
4407
20791 41582
Hex
1137
5137
A26E
Loop 2 Control type
Dec
4410
20794
Hex
113A
513A
October 2014
41588
A274
Access
RW
RW
RW
RW
Values
& Descriptions
Value
0
1
Selection
Automatic Mode
Manual Mode
Value
0
1
Control Enable Selection
Disabled
Enabled
Value
0
1
Operator Access To Auto/Manual Control
Off
On
Value
0
1
Operator Access To Control Enable/Disable
Off
On
Cycle Time For Primary Control Outputs
RW
0.5 to 512.0 Seconds
Cycle Time For Secondary Control Outputs
RW
RW
RW
0.5 to 512.0 Seconds
Value
0
1
Control Actuator Type Selection
Standard (Time Proportioned or Continuous PID)
VMD (3-Point Stepping for Valve Motor Drive)
Value
0
1
Primary Only or Primary & Secondary
Single (Primary Only Control)
Dual Control (Primary & Secondary Control)
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
159
Loop 2 Control Action
Dec
4411
20795 41590
Hex
113B
513B
A276
RW
PID Set 1 - Primary Prop Band
Dec
4412
20796 41592
Hex
113C
513C
A278
RW
PID Set 1 - Secondary Prop Band
Dec
4413
20797 41594
Hex
113D
513D
A27A
PID Set 1 - Integral Time
Dec
4414
20798 41596
Hex
113E
513E
A27C
PID Set 1 - Derivative Time
Dec
4415
20799 41598
Hex
113F
513F
A27E
Loop 2 Manual Reset (Bias)
Dec
4416
20800 41600
Hex
1140
5140
A280
RW
1141
5141
A282
PID Set 1 - On/Off Differential
Dec
4420
20804 41608
Hex
1144
5144
A288
Direction Of Control Action
Direct Acting
Reverse Acting
PID Set 1 Primary Proportional Band For Loop 2
Primary Proportional Band for Gain Set 1.
1 display unit to 9999 units,
but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control
PID Set 1 Secondary Proportional Band For Loop 2
Secondary Proportional Band for Gain Set 1.
1 display unit to 9999 units,
but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control
PID Set 1 Integral Time For Loop 2
Gain Set 1 integral time constant for loop 2
0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF
RW
PID Set 1 Derivative Time For Loop 2
Gain Set 1 derivative time constant for loop 2
0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF
RW
PID Set 1 Manual Reset (Bias) For Loop 2
Working point from 0 to 100 for single control or
-100 to 100 for dual control (primary & secondary)
RW
PID Set 1 - Overlap/Deadband
Dec
4417
20801 41602
Hex
Value
0
1
RW
RW
PID Set 1 - Overlap or Deadband For Loop 2
PID Set 1 overlap (+ve) or deadband (-ve) between primary &
secondary prop bands. In display units - limited to 20% of the
combined band width.
PID Set 1 - On/Off Control Differential For Loop 2
The on-off control hysteresis (deadband) for PID Set 1.
1 to 300 display units, centred about the setpoint.
Loop 2 Primary Power Upper limit
Dec
4421
20805 41610
RW
Hex
1145
5145
A28A
Loop 2 Primary Power Upper limit
Loop 2 Primary Power Lower Limit
Dec
4422
20806 41612
RW
Hex
1146
5146
A28C
Loop 2 Primary Power Lower Limit
Loop 2 Secondary Upper Power limit
Dec
4423
20807 41614
RW
Hex
1147
5147
A28E
Loop 2 Secondary Upper Power limit
Loop 2 Secondary Power Lower limit
Dec
4424
20808 41616
RW
Hex
1148
5148
A290
Loop 2 Secondary Power Lower limit
Loop 2 Pre-Tune Method
Dec
4496
20880 41760
Hex
1190
5190
A320
Loop 2 Pre-Tune at Value
Dec
4499
20883 41766
Hex
160
1193
5193
A326
RW
10 to 100%
but must be at least 10% above the primary power lower limit.
0 to 90%
but must be at least 10% below the primary power upper limit.
10 to 100%
but must be at least 10% above the secondary power lower limit.
0 to 90%
but must be at least 10% below the primary power upper limit.
Value
0
1
Pre-Tune type
Standard
Pre-tune at Value
Value To Pre-Tune Loop 2
RW
Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits
(applies if Pre-Tune Type = Pre-Tune at Value)
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Loop 2 Pre-Tune Set
Dec
4497
20881
Hex
1191
5191
Value
0
1
2
3
4
PID Set Pre-tune Will Optimize
PID Set 1
PID Set 2
PID Set 3
PID Set 4
PID Set 5
Loop 2 Pre-Tune Engage/disengage
Dec
4425
20809 41618
RW
Hex
1149
5149
A292
Value
0
1
Pre-Tune Engage/disengage For Loop 2
Pre-Tune OFF
Run Pre-Tune
Loop 2 Self-Tune Engage/disengage
Dec
4426
20810 41620
RW
Hex
114A
514A
A294
Value
0
1
Self-Tune Engage/disengage For Loop 2
Self-Tune OFF
Self-Tune ON
Loop 2 Loop Alarm Type
Dec
4427
20811 41622
Hex
114B
514B
A296
Value
1
2
Loop Alarm Type For Loop 2
User Defined Time
Automatic (2x Integral Time)
41762
A322
Loop Alarm Time
Dec
4428
20812
41624
Hex
A298
114C
514C
114D
514D
A29A
Loop 2 Secondary Power
Dec
4430
20814 41628
Hex
114E
514E
A29C
Loop 2 Combined Power
Dec
4431
20815 41630
Hex
114F
514F
RW
Loop Alarm Activation Time
Loop 2 Primary Power
Dec
4429
20813 41626
Hex
RW
A29E
Loop 2 Pre-Tune Status
Dec
4432
20816 41632
Hex
1150
5150
A2A0
Loop 2 Self-Tune Status
Dec
4433
20817 41634
Hex
1151
5151
A2A2
Loop 2 Loop Alarm status
Dec
4434
20818 41636
Hex
1152
5152
A2A4
RW
Loop 2 Primary Power Level
RO
October 2014
41640
A2A8
The current loop 2 primary power level (0 to 100%)
Loop 2 Secondary Power Level
RO
The current loop 2 secondary power level (0 to 100%)
Loop 2 Combined Primary & Secondary Power Level
RO
RO
RO
RO
Loop 2 Input Failure Pre-set Power
Dec
4435
20819 41638
RW
Hex
1153
5153
A2A6
Loop 2 Auto Pre-tune
Dec
4436
20820
Hex
1154
5154
1 to 5999 Seconds after output loop 2 power reaches saturation
RW
The current loop 2 combined PID power level (-100 to 100%)
Value
0
1
Pre-Tune Status For Loop 2
Inactive
Active
Value
0
1
Self-Tune Status For Loop 2
Inactive
Active
Value
0
1
Loop Alarm Status For Loop 2
Inactive
Active
Loop 2 Input Sensor Break Pre-set Power
The pre-defined power output applied if input signal is lost
0 to 100% (-100% to 100% for dual control).
Value
0
1
Auto Pre-Tune At Every Power-up For Loop 2
Disabled
Enabled
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
161
Pre-Tune Secondary Status
Dec
4441
20825 41650
Hex
1159
5159
A2B2
Self-Tune Secondary Status
Dec
4442
20826 41652
Hex
115A
515A A2B4
Loop 2 Anti Wind-up Limit
Dec
4491
20875 41750
Hex
118B
518B
A316
Loop 2 Motor Travel Time
Dec
4443
20827 41654
Hex
115B
515B
A2B6
Loop 2 Minimum Motor On Time
Dec
4444
20828 41656
Hex
115C
515C
A2B8
Loop 2 Valve Break Action
Dec
4501
20885 41770
Hex
1195
5195
A32A
Loop 2 Minimum Valve Position
Dec
4476
20860 41720
Hex
117C
517C
A2F8
Loop 2 Maximum Valve Position
Dec
4477
20861 41722
Hex
117D
517D
A2FA
Loop 2 PID Set Select
Dec
4467
20851 41702
Hex
1173
5173
A2E6
RW
RW
115F
515F
A2BE
162
1160
5160
A2C0
Value
0
2
3
4
5
Loop 2 Self-Tune Secondary Status
No Additional Information
Manual Control Enabled (Self-Tune cannot run)
Control has On/Off element (Self-Tune cannot run)
Input not valid (Self-Tune cannot run)
Control Disabled (Self-Tune cannot run)
Power level where integral action is suspended.
Adjustable from 10.0 to 100.0% of PID power.
RW
Loop 2 Motor Travel Time
RW
The motor travel time (from fully open to fully closed) for 3-point
stepping VMD control. Adjustable from 5 to 300 seconds.
Loop 2 Minimum Motor On Time
RW
RW
Minimum drive effort to begin moving valve for 3-point stepping
VMD control. In seconds, from 0.02 to 1/10 of Motor Travel Time
Value
0
1
Loop 2 Sensor Break Action For VMD Control
Close Valve Output On
Open Valve Output On
Loop 2 Minimum Valve Position
Minimum position to drive valve in VMD Mode
from the valve close limit+1% to 100.0%
RW
Loop 2 Maximum Valve Position
Maximum position to drive valve in VMD Mode.
From 0.0% to the valve open limit-1%
RW
RW
RW
PID Set 2 - Secondary Prop Band
Dec
4448
20832 41664
Hex
Loop 2 Pre-Tune Secondary Status
No Additional Information
PV within 5% (Pre-Tune cannot run)
Manual Control Enabled (Pre-Tune cannot run)
Control has On/Off element (Pre-Tune cannot run)
Input not valid (Pre-Tune cannot run)
Control Disabled (Pre-Tune cannot run)
Profile Running (Pre-Tune cannot run)
Setpoint Ramping (Pre-Tune cannot run)
Loop 2 Anti Wind-up Limit
PID Set 2 - Primary Prop Band
Dec
4447
20831 41662
Hex
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
RW
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Loop 2 PID Set Selection
PID Set 1
Gain Schedule Selected by SP
Gain Schedule Selected by PV
PID Set 2
PID Set 3
PID Set 4
PID Set 5
PID Set 2 Primary Proportional Band For Loop 2
Primary Proportional Band for Gain Set 2.
1 display unit to 9999 units,
but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control
PID Set 2 Secondary Proportional Band For Loop1
Secondary Proportional Band for Gain Set 2.
1 display unit to 9999 units,
but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
PID Set 2 - Integral Time
Dec
4449
20833 41666
Hex
1161
5161
A2C2
PID Set 2 - Derivative Time
Dec
4450
20834 41668
Hex
1162
5162
A2C4
PID Set 2 - Integral Time For Loop 2
RW
PID Set 2 - Derivative Time For Loop 2
RW
PID Set 2 - Overlap/Deadband
Dec
4451
20835 41670
Hex
1163
5163
A2C6
PID Set 2 - On/Off Differential
Dec
4478
20862 41724
Hex
117E
517E
A2FC
RW
RW
PID Set 3 - Primary Prop Band
Dec
4452
20836 41672
Hex
1164
5164
A2C8
RW
PID Set 3 - Secondary Prop Band
Dec
4453
20837 41674
Hex
1165
5165
A2CA
PID Set 3 - Integral Time
Dec
4454
20838 41676
Hex
1166
5166
A2CC
PID Set 3 - Derivative Time
Dec
4455
20839 41678
Hex
1167
5167
A2CE
RW
RW
1168
5168
A2D0
PID Set 3 - On/Off Differential
Dec
4479
20863 41726
Hex
117F
517F
A2FE
RW
RW
RW
PID Set 4 - Primary Prop Band
Dec
4457
20841 41682
Hex
1169
5169
A2D2
RW
PID Set 4 - Secondary Prop Band
Dec
4458
20842 41684
Hex
116A
516A
A2D4
PID Set 4 - Integral Time
Dec
4459
20843 41686
Hex
116B
516B
A2D6
PID Set 4 - Derivative Time
Dec
4460
20844 41688
Hex
116C
October 2014
516C
A2D8
Gain Set 2 derivative time constant for Loop 2
0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF
PID Set 2 - Overlap/Deadband For Loop 2
PID Set 2 overlap (+ve) or deadband (-ve) between primary &
secondary prop bands. In display units - limited to 20% of the
combined band width.
PID Set 2 - On/Off Differential For Loop 2
The on-off control hysteresis (deadband) for PID Set 2.
1 to 300 display units, centred about the setpoint.
PID Set 3 Primary Proportional Band For Loop 2
Primary Proportional Band for Gain Set 3.
1 display unit to 9999 units,
but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control
PID Set 3 Secondary Proportional Band For Loop 2
Secondary Proportional Band for Gain Set 3.
1 display unit to 9999 units,
but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control
PID Set 3 - Integral Time For Loop 2
Gain Set 3 integral time constant for Loop 2
0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF
PID Set 3 - Derivative Time For Loop 2
PID Set 3 - Overlap/Deadband
Dec
4456
20840 41680
Hex
Gain Set 2 integral time constant for Loop 2
0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF
RW
RW
Gain Set 3 derivative time constant for Loop 2
0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF
PID Set 3 - Overlap/Deadband For Loop 2
PID Set 3 overlap (+ve) or deadband (-ve) between primary &
secondary prop bands. In display units - limited to 20% of the
combined band width.
PID Set 3 - On/Off Differential For Loop 2
The on-off control hysteresis (deadband) for PID Set 3.
1 to 300 display units, centred about the setpoint.
PID Set 4 Primary Proportional Band For Loop 2
Primary Proportional Band for Gain Set 4.
1 display unit to 9999 units,
but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control
PID Set 4 Secondary Proportional Band For Loop 2
Secondary Proportional Band for Gain Set 4.
1 display unit to 9999 units,
but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control
PID Set 4 - Integral Time For Loop 2
Gain Set 4 integral time constant for Loop 2
0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF
PID Set 4 - Derivative Time For Loop 2
RW
Gain Set 4 derivative time constant for Loop 2
0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
163
PID Set 4 - Overlap/Deadband
Dec
4461
20845 41690
Hex
116D
516D
A2DA
PID Set 4 - On/Off Differential
Dec
4480
20864 41728
Hex
1180
5180
A300
RW
RW
PID Set 5 - Primary Prop Band
Dec
4462
20846 41692
Hex
116E
516E
A2DC
RW
PID Set 5 - Secondary Prop Band
Dec
4463
20847 41694
Hex
116F
516F
A2DE
PID Set 5 - Integral Time
Dec
4464
20848 41696
Hex
1170
5170
A2E0
PID Set 5 - Derivative Time
Dec
4465
20849 41698
Hex
1171
5171
A2E2
RW
RW
1172
5172
A2E4
PID Set 5 - On/Off Differential
Dec
4481
20865 41730
Hex
1181
5181
A302
Loop 2 Gain Set 2 Breakpoint
Dec
4469
20853 41706
Hex
1175
5175
A2EA
Loop 2 Gain Set 3 Breakpoint
Dec
4470
20854 41708
Hex
1176
5176
A2EC
Loop 2 Gain Set 4 Breakpoint
Dec
4471
20855 41710
Hex
1177
5177
A2EE
Loop 2 Gain Set 5 Breakpoint
Dec
4472
20856 41712
Hex
1178
5178
A2F0
Slave Setpoint Scale Minimum
Dec
4485
20869 41738
Hex
1185
5185
A30A
RW
RW
RW
4486
20870
41740
Hex
1186
5186
A30C
RW
4492
20876
41752
Hex
118C
518C
A318
164
Gain Set 5 integral time constant for Loop 2
0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF
Gain Set 5 derivative time constant for Loop 2
0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF
PID Set 5 - Overlap/Deadband For Loop 2
PID Set 5 overlap (+ve) or deadband (-ve) between primary &
secondary prop bands. In display units - limited to 20% of the
combined band width.
PID Set 5 - On/Off Differential For Loop 2
The on-off control hysteresis (deadband) for PID Set 5.
1 to 300 display units, centred about the setpoint.
Value (SP or PV) gain scheduling switches from PID Set 1 to 2.
Value between Scaled Input 2 Lower & Upper Limits
Gain Scheduling PID Set 2 To 3 Switch Point
RW
Value (SP or PV) gain scheduling switches from PID Set 2 to 3.
Value between Set 2 Breakpoint & Scaled Input 2 Upper Limit.
Gain Scheduling PID Set 3 To 4 Switch Point
RW
Value (SP or PV) gain scheduling switches from PID Set 3 to 4.
Value between Set 3 Breakpoint & Scaled Input 2 Upper Limit.
Gain Scheduling PID Set 4 To 5 Switch Point
RW
Value (SP or PV) gain scheduling switches from PID Set 4 to 5.
Value between Set 4 Breakpoint & Scaled Input 2 Upper Limit.
0% Master Power Demand to Slave Setpoint Scaling
RW
The effective cascade slave setpoint value equating to 0% power
demand from the master loop.
100% Master Power Demand to Slave Setpoint Scaling
RW
Slave Setpoint
Dec
PID Set 5 Primary Proportional Band For Loop 2
Primary Proportional Band for Gain Set 5.
1 display unit to 9999 units,
but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control
PID Set 5 Secondary Proportional Band For Loop 2
Secondary Proportional Band for Gain Set 5.
1 display unit to 9999 units,
but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control
PID Set 5 - Integral Time For Loop 2
Gain Scheduling PID Set 1 To 2 Switch Point
Slave Setpoint Scale Maximum
Dec
The on-off control hysteresis (deadband) for PID Set 4.
1 to 300 display units, centred about the setpoint.
PID Set 5 - Derivative Time For Loop 2
PID Set 5 - Overlap/Deadband
Dec
4466
20850 41700
Hex
PID Set 4 - Overlap/Deadband For Loop 2
PID Set 4 overlap (+ve) or deadband (-ve) between primary &
secondary prop bands. In display units - limited to 20% of the
combined band width.
PID Set 4 - On/Off Differential For Loop 2
RW
The effective cascade slave setpoint value equating to 100%
power demand from the master loop.
Slave Setpoint Value for Cascade Control
The slave setpoint valve when in Cascade Control Mode.
Only write to this parameter if the unit is cascade status is OPEN
(e.g. when tuning slave)..
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
20.4.18 Alarm Parameters
Parameter Name & Register Address
Integer
Int +1
Float
Alarm 1 Input Source
Dec
6143
22527
Hex
17FF
57FF
45054
AFFE
Alarm 1 Type
Dec
6144
Hex
1800
22528
5800
45056
B000
Alarm 1 Value
Dec
6145
22529
Hex
1801
5801
45058
B002
1806
5806
RW
RW
B00C
Dec
6146
22530
45060
Hex
1802
5802
B004
Alarm 1 Inhibit Enable
Dec
6147
22531 45062
Hex
1803
5803
B006
45064
B008
Alarm 1 Inhibit Status
Dec
6149
22533 45066
Hex
1805
5805
B00A
October 2014
& Descriptions
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Alarm 1 Source
Input 1
Input 2
Aux A Input
Control Loop 1 Primary Power
Control Loop 1 Secondary Power
Control Loop 2 Primary Power
Control Loop 2 Secondary Power
Loop 1
Loop 2
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
Alarm 1 Type
Unused
Process High Alarm
Process Low Alarm
Deviation Alarm (SP-PV)
Band Alarm
Input Rate of Change
Input/Sensor Break Alarm
Loop Alarm
% memory used
High Power Alarm
Low Power Alarm
Limited by input scaling for alarm types 1 to 4.
Not used for alarms 5, 6 or 7.
0 to 100% for alarms 10 to 12.
RW
Process Variable Rate of Change Alarm Threshold
RW
Alarm 1 Hysteresis
Alarm 1 Status
Dec
6148
22532
Hex
1804
5804
Values
Value At Which Alarm 1 Activates
Alarm 1 Rate of Change Value
Dec
6150
22534 45068
Hex
Access
RW
RW
RO
RO
Value for Rate of Change Alarm. Alarm 1 activates when PV
change exceeds this level. From 0.0 to 99999
Alarm 1 Hysteresis Value
Deadband value (on “safe” side of alarm), through which signal
must pass before alarm 1 deactivates.
Limited by the input scaling span
Value
Alarm 1 Power-up/Setpoint Change Inhibit
0
Disabled
1
Enabled
Value
0
1
Alarm 1 Status
Inactive
Active
Value
0
1
Alarm 1 Inhibit Status
Not Inhibited
Inhibited
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
165
Alarm 1 Main Label
Dec
6151
22535
45070
Hex
1807
5807
B00E
RW
Alarm 1 Alternate Label
Dec
6152
22536
45072
Hex
1808
5808
B010
RW
Alarm 1 Minimum Duration
Dec
6153
22537 45074
Hex
1809
5809
B012
Alarm 2 Input Source
Dec
6159
22543
Hex
180F
580F
45086
B01E
Alarm 2 Type
Dec
6160
Hex
1810
22544
5810
45088
B020
RW
RW
RW
Alarm 2 Value
Dec
Hex
6161
1811
Alternate Language Name For Alarm 1 In Status Screen
8 ASCII characters replacing the title "Alarm 1" in alarm status
screens when the alternate language is used, read/written with
Modbus functions 16 or 23. Valid characters are 0 to 9, a to z, A
to Z, plus ß ö ( ) - and _.
Alarm 1 Minimum Duration
Minimum time alarm 1 must be passed its threshold before
activating (deactivation is not affected by this parameter).
From 0 to 9999 secs
Value
Source
0
Input 1
1
Input 2
2
Aux A Input
3
Control Loop 1 Primary Power
4
Control Loop 1 Secondary Power
5
Control Loop 2 Primary Power
6
Control Loop 2 Secondary Power
7
Loop 1
8
Loop 2
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
Alarm 2 Type
Unused
Process High Alarm
Process Low Alarm
Deviation Alarm (SP-PV)
Band Alarm
Input Rate of Change
Input/Sensor Break Alarm
Loop Alarm
% memory used
High Power Alarm
Low Power Alarm
Value At Which Alarm 2 Activates
22545
5811
45090
B022
RW
Alarm 2 Rate of Change Value
Dec
6166
22550
45100
Hex
1816
5816
B02C
Dec
6162
22546
45092
Hex
1812
5812
B024
Alarm 2 Inhibit Enable/disable
Dec
6163
22547 45094
Hex
1813
5813
B026
Limited by input scaling for alarm types 1 to 4.
Not used for alarms 5, 6 or 7.
0 to 100% for alarms 10 to 12.
Process Variable Rate of Change Alarm Threshold
RW
Alarm 2 Hysteresis
166
Main Language Name For Alarm 1 In Status Screen
8 ASCII characters replacing the title "Alarm 1" in alarm status
screens when main display language is used, read/written with
Modbus functions 16 or 23. Valid characters are 0 to 9, a to z, A
to Z, plus ß ö ( ) - and _.
RW
RW
Value for Rate of Change Alarm. Alarm 2 activates when PV
change exceeds this level. From 0.0 to 99999
Alarm 2 Hysteresis Value
Deadband value (on “safe” side of alarm), through which signal
must pass before Alarm 2 deactivates.
Limited by the input scaling span
Value
Alarm 2 Power-up/Setpoint Change Inhibit
0
Disabled
1
Enabled
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Alarm 2 Status
Dec
6164
22548
Hex
1814
5814
45096
B028
Alarm 2 Inhibit Status
Dec
6165
22549 45098
Hex
1815
5815
B02A
RO
RO
Alarm 2 Label
Dec
6167
22551
45102
Hex
1817
5817
B02E
RW
Alarm 2 Alternate Label
Dec
6168
22552
45104
Hex
1818
5818
B030
RW
Alarm 2 Minimum Duration
Dec
6169
22553 45106
Hex
1819
5819
B032
Alarm 3 Input Source
Dec
6175
22559
Hex
181F
581F
45118
B03E
Alarm 3 Type
Dec
6176
Hex
1820
45120
B040
October 2014
22560
5820
RW
RW
RW
Value
0
1
Alarm 2 Status
Inactive
Active
Value
0
1
Alarm 2 Inhibit Status
Not Inhibited
Inhibited
Main Language Name for Alarm 2 In Status Screen
8 ASCII characters replacing the title "Alarm 2" in alarm status
screens when main display language is used, read/written with
Modbus functions 16 or 23. Valid characters are 0 to 9, a to z, A
to Z, plus ß ö ( ) - and _.
Alternate Language Name for Alarm 2 In Status Screen
8 ASCII characters replacing the title "Alarm 2" in alarm status
screens when the alternate language is used, read/written with
Modbus functions 16 or 23. Valid characters are 0 to 9, a to z, A
to Z, plus ß ö ( ) - and _.
Alarm 2 Minimum Duration
Minimum time alarm 2 must be passed its threshold before
activating (deactivation is not affected by this parameter).
From 0 to 9999 secs
Value
Source
0
Input 1
1
Input 2
2
Aux A Input
3
Control Loop 1 Primary Power
4
Control Loop 1 Secondary Power
5
Control Loop 2 Primary Power
6
Control Loop 2 Secondary Power
7
Loop 1
8
Loop 2
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
Alarm 3 Type
Unused
Process High Alarm
Process Low Alarm
Deviation Alarm (SP-PV)
Band Alarm
Input Rate of Change
Input/Sensor Break Alarm
Loop Alarm
% memory used
High Power Alarm
Low Power Alarm
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
167
Alarm 3 Value
Dec
Hex
6177
1821
Value At Which Alarm 3 Activates
22561
5821
45122
B042
Alarm 3 Rate of Change Value
Dec
6182
22566
45132
Hex
1826
5826
B04C
Process Variable Rate of Change Alarm Threshold
RW
Alarm 3 Hysteresis
Dec
6178
22562
45124
Hex
1822
5822
B044
Alarm 3 Inhibit Enable/disable
Dec
6179
22563 45126
Hex
1823
5823
B046
Alarm 3 Status
Dec
6180
22564
Hex
1824
5824
45128
B048
Alarm 3 Inhibit Status
Dec
6181
22565 45130
Hex
1825
5825
B04A
RW
RW
RO
RO
Alarm 3 Label
Dec
6183
22567
45134
Hex
1827
5827
B04E
RW
Alarm 3 Alternate Label
Dec
6184
22568
45136
Hex
1828
5828
B050
RW
Alarm 3 Minimum Duration
Dec
6185
22569 45138
Hex
5829
B052
Alarm 4 Input Source
Dec
6191
22575
Hex
182F
582F
45150
B05E
168
1829
Limited by input scaling for alarm types 1 to 4.
Not used for alarms 5, 6 or 7.
0 to 100% for alarms 10 to 12.
RW
RW
RW
Value for Rate of Change Alarm. Alarm 3 activates when PV
change exceeds this level. From 0.0 to 99999
Alarm 3 Hysteresis Value
Deadband value (on “safe” side of alarm), through which signal
must pass before Alarm 3 deactivates.
Limited by the input scaling span
Value
Alarm 3 Power-up/Setpoint Change Inhibit
0
Disabled
1
Enabled
Value
0
1
Alarm 3 Status
Inactive
Active
Value
0
1
Alarm 3 Inhibit Status
Not Inhibited
Inhibited
Main Language Name For Alarm 3 In Status Screen
8 ASCII characters replacing the title "Alarm 3" in alarm status
screens when main display language is used, read/written with
Modbus functions 16 or 23. Valid characters are 0 to 9, a to z, A
to Z, plus ß ö ( ) - and _.
Alternate Language Name For Alarm 3 In Status Screen
8 ASCII characters replacing the title "Alarm 3" in alarm status
screens when the alternate language is used, read/written with
Modbus functions 16 or 23. Valid characters are 0 to 9, a to z, A
to Z, plus ß ö ( ) - and _.
Alarm 3 Minimum Duration
Minimum time alarm 3 must be passed its threshold before
activating (deactivation is not affected by this parameter).
From 0 to 9999 secs
Value
Source
0
Input 1
1
Input 2
2
Aux A Input
3
Control Loop 1 Primary Power
4
Control Loop 1 Secondary Power
5
Control Loop 2 Primary Power
6
Control Loop 2 Secondary Power
7
Loop 1
8
Loop 2
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Alarm 4 Type
Dec
6192
Hex
1830
22576
5830
45152
B060
RW
Alarm 4 Value
Dec
Hex
6193
1831
22577
5831
45154
B062
Dec
6198
22582
45164
Hex
1836
5836
B06C
Dec
6194
22578
45156
Hex
1832
5832
B064
Alarm 4 Inhibit Enable/disable
Dec
6195
22579 45158
Hex
1833
5833
B066
Alarm 4 Status
Dec
6196
22580
Hex
1834
5834
45160
B068
Alarm 4 Inhibit Status
Dec
6197
22581 45162
Hex
1835
5835
B06A
Process Variable Rate of Change Alarm Threshold
RW
RW
RW
RO
RO
Alarm 4 Label
Dec
6199
22583
45166
Hex
1837
5837
B06E
RW
Alarm 4 Alternate Label
Dec
6200
22584
45168
Hex
1838
5838
B070
RW
Alarm 4 Minimum Duration
Dec
6201
22585 45170
October 2014
5839
B072
Limited by input scaling for alarm types 1 to 4.
Not used for alarms 5, 6 or 7.
0 to 100% for alarms 10 to 12.
RW
Alarm 4 Hysteresis
1839
Alarm 4 Type
Unused
Process High Alarm
Process Low Alarm
Deviation Alarm (SP-PV)
Band Alarm
Input Rate of Change
Input/Sensor Break Alarm
Loop Alarm
% memory used
High Power Alarm
Low Power Alarm
Value At Which Alarm 4 Activates
Alarm 4 Rate of Change Value
Hex
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
RW
Value for Rate of Change Alarm. Alarm 4 activates when PV
change exceeds this level. From 0.0 to 99999
Alarm 4 Hysteresis Value
Deadband value (on “safe” side of alarm), through which signal
must pass before Alarm 4 deactivates.
Limited by the input scaling span
Value
Alarm 4 Power-up/Setpoint Change Inhibit
0
Disabled
1
Enabled
Value
0
1
Alarm 4 Status
Inactive
Active
Value
0
1
Alarm 4 Inhibit Status
Not Inhibited
Inhibited
Main Language Name For Alarm 4 In Status Screen
8 ASCII characters replacing the title "Alarm 4" in alarm status
screens when main display language is used, read/written with
Modbus functions 16 or 23. Valid characters are 0 to 9, a to z, A
to Z, plus ß ö ( ) - and _.
Alternate Language Name For Alarm 4 In Status Screen
8 ASCII characters replacing the title "Alarm 4" in alarm status
screens when the alternate language is used, read/written with
Modbus functions 16 or 23. Valid characters are 0 to 9, a to z, A
to Z, plus ß ö ( ) - and _.
Alarm 4 Minimum Duration
Minimum time alarm 4 must be passed its threshold before
activating (deactivation is not affected by this parameter).
From 0 to 9999 secs
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
169
Alarm 5 Input Source
Dec
6207
22591
Hex
183F
583F
Alarm 5 Type
Dec
6208
Hex
1840
45182
B07E
22592
5840
45184
B080
22593
5841
45186
B082
RW
RW
Alarm 5 Value
Dec
Hex
6209
1841
Source
Input 1
Input 2
Aux A Input
Control Loop 1 Primary Power
Control Loop 1 Secondary Power
Control Loop 2 Primary Power
Control Loop 2 Secondary Power
Loop 1
Loop 2
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
Alarm 5 Type
Unused
Process High Alarm
Process Low Alarm
Deviation Alarm (SP-PV)
Band Alarm
Input Rate of Change
Input/Sensor Break Alarm
Loop Alarm
% memory used
High Power Alarm
Low Power Alarm
Value At Which Alarm 5 Activates
Dec
6214
22598
45196
Hex
1846
5846
B08C
Process Variable Rate of Change Alarm Threshold
RW
Alarm 5 Hysteresis
Dec
6210
22594
45188
Hex
1842
5842
B084
Alarm 5 Inhibit Enable/disable
Dec
6211
22595 45190
Hex
1843
5843
B086
Alarm 5 Status
Dec
6212
22596
Hex
1844
5844
45192
B088
Alarm 5 Inhibit Status
Dec
6213
22597 45194
Hex
1845
5845
B08A
RW
RW
RO
RO
Alarm 5 Label
Dec
6215
22599
45198
Hex
1847
5847
B08E
Limited by input scaling for alarm types 1 to 4.
Not used for alarms 5, 6 or 7.
0 to 100% for alarms 10 to 12.
RW
Alarm 5 Rate of Change Value
RW
170
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Value for Rate of Change Alarm. Alarm 5 activates when PV
change exceeds this level. From 0.0 to 99999
Alarm 5 Hysteresis Value
Deadband value (on “safe” side of alarm), through which signal
must pass before Alarm 5 deactivates.
Limited by the input scaling span
Value
Alarm 5 Power-up/Setpoint Change Inhibit
0
Disabled
1
Enabled
Value
0
1
Alarm 5 Status
Inactive
Active
Value
0
1
Alarm 5 Inhibit Status
Not Inhibited
Inhibited
Main Language Name For Alarm 5 In Status Screen
8 ASCII characters replacing the title "Alarm 5" in alarm status
screens when main display language is used, read/written with
Modbus functions 16 or 23. Valid characters are 0 to 9, a to z, A
to Z, plus ß ö ( ) - and _.
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Alarm 5 Alternate Label
Dec
6216
22600
45200
Hex
1848
5848
B090
RW
Alarm 5 Minimum Duration
Dec
6217
22601 45202
Hex
1849
5849
B092
Alarm 6 Input Source
Dec
6223
22607
Hex
184F
584F
45214
B09E
Alarm 5 Type
Dec
6224
Hex
1850
22608
5850
45216
B0A0
RW
RW
RW
Alarm 6 Value
Dec
Hex
6225
1851
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
Alarm 5 Type
Unused
Process High Alarm
Process Low Alarm
Deviation Alarm (SP-PV)
Band Alarm
Input Rate of Change
Input/Sensor Break Alarm
Loop Alarm
% memory used
High Power Alarm
Low Power Alarm
Value At Which Alarm 6 Activates
22609
5851
45218
B0A2
Dec
6230
22614
45228
Hex
1856
5856
B0AC
Process Variable Rate of Change Alarm Threshold
RW
Alarm 6 Hysteresis
Dec
6226
22610
45220
Hex
1852
5852
B0A4
Alarm 6 Inhibit Enable/disable
Dec
6227
22611 45222
Hex
1853
5853
B0A6
Alarm 6 Status
Dec
6228
22612
Hex
1854
5854
45224
B0A8
Limited by input scaling for alarm types 1 to 4.
Not used for alarms 5, 6 or 7.
0 to 100% for alarms 10 to 12.
RW
Alarm 6 Rate of Change Value
October 2014
Alternate Language Name For Alarm 5 In Status Screen
8 ASCII characters replacing the title "Alarm 5" in alarm status
screens when the alternate language is used, read/written with
Modbus functions 16 or 23. Valid characters are 0 to 9, a to z, A
to Z, plus ß ö ( ) - and _.
Alarm 5 Minimum Duration
Minimum time alarm 5 must be passed its threshold before
activating (deactivation is not affected by this parameter).
From 0 to 9999 secs
Value
Source
0
Input 1
1
Input 2
2
Aux A Input
3
Control Loop 1 Primary Power
4
Control Loop 1 Secondary Power
5
Control Loop 2 Primary Power
6
Control Loop 2 Secondary Power
7
Loop 1
8
Loop 2
RW
RW
RO
Value for Rate of Change Alarm. Alarm 6 activates when PV
change exceeds this level. From 0.0 to 99999
Alarm 6 Hysteresis Value
Deadband value (on “safe” side of alarm), through which signal
must pass before Alarm 6 deactivates.
Limited by the input scaling span
Value
Alarm 6 Power-up/Setpoint Change Inhibit
0
Disabled
1
Enabled
Value
0
1
Alarm 6 Status
Inactive
Active
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
171
Alarm 6 Inhibit Status
Dec
6229
22613 45226
Hex
1855
5855 B0AA
RO
Alarm 6 Label
Dec
6231
22615
45230
Hex
1857
5857
B0AE
RW
Alarm 6 Alternate Label
Dec
6232
22616
45232
Hex
1858
5858
B0B0
RW
Alarm 6 Minimum Duration
Dec
6233
22617 45234
Hex
1859
5859
B0B2
Alarm 7 Input Source
Dec
6239
22623
Hex
185F
585F
45246
B0BE
Alarm 7 Type
Dec
6240
Hex
1860
22624
5860
45248
B0C0
RW
RW
RW
Alarm 7 Value
Dec
Hex
6241
1861
Alarm 6 Inhibit Status
Not Inhibited
Inhibited
Main Language Name For Alarm 6 In Status Screen
8 ASCII characters replacing the title "Alarm 6" in alarm status
screens when main display language is used, read/written with
Modbus functions 16 or 23. Valid characters are 0 to 9, a to z, A
to Z, plus ß ö ( ) - and _.
Alternate Language Name For Alarm 6 In Status Screen
8 ASCII characters replacing the title "Alarm 6" in alarm status
screens when the alternate language is used, read/written with
Modbus functions 16 or 23. Valid characters are 0 to 9, a to z, A
to Z, plus ß ö ( ) - and _.
Alarm 6 Minimum Duration
Minimum time alarm 6 must be passed its threshold before
activating (deactivation is not affected by this parameter).
From 0 to 9999 secs
Value
Source
0
Input 1
1
Input 2
2
Aux A Input
3
Control Loop 1 Primary Power
4
Control Loop 1 Secondary Power
5
Control Loop 2 Primary Power
6
Control Loop 2 Secondary Power
7
Loop 1
8
Loop 2
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
Alarm 7 Type
Unused
Process High Alarm
Process Low Alarm
Deviation Alarm (SP-PV)
Band Alarm
Input Rate of Change
Input/Sensor Break Alarm
Loop Alarm
% memory used
High Power Alarm
Low Power Alarm
Value At Which Alarm 7 Activates
22625
5861
45250
B0C2
RW
Alarm 7 Rate of Change Value
Dec
6246
22630
45260
Hex
1866
5866
B0CC
Dec
6242
22626
45252
Hex
1862
5862
B0C4
Limited by input scaling for alarm types 1 to 4.
Not used for alarms 5, 6 or 7.
0 to 100% for alarms 10 to 12.
Process Variable Rate of Change Alarm Threshold
RW
Alarm 7 Hysteresis
172
Value
0
1
RW
Value for Rate of Change Alarm. Alarm 7 activates when PV
change exceeds this level. From 0.0 to 99999
Alarm 7 Hysteresis Value
Deadband value (on “safe” side of alarm), through which signal
must pass before Alarm 7 deactivates.
Limited by the input scaling span
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Alarm 7 Inhibit Enable/disable
Dec
6243
22627 45254
Hex
1863
5863
B0C6
Alarm 7 Status
Dec
6244
22628
Hex
1864
5864
45256
B0C8
Alarm 7 Inhibit Status
Dec
6245
22629 45258
Hex
1865
5865 B0CA
RW
RO
RO
Alarm 7 Label
Dec
6247
22631
45262
Hex
1867
5867
B0CE
6248
22632
45264
Hex
1868
5868
B0D0
RW
RW
Alarm 7 Minimum Duration
Dec
6249
22633 45266
Hex
1869
5869
B0D2
Alarm 7 Power-up/Setpoint Change Inhibit
Disabled
Enabled
Value
0
1
Alarm 7 Status
Inactive
Active
Value
0
1
Alarm 7 Inhibit Status
Not Inhibited
Inhibited
Main Language Name For Alarm 7 In Status Screen
8 ASCII characters replacing the title "Alarm 7" in alarm status
screens when main display language is used, read/written with
Modbus functions 16 or 23. Valid characters are 0 to 9, a to z, A
to Z, plus ß ö ( ) - and _.
Alternate Language Name For Alarm 7 In Status Screen
8 ASCII characters replacing the title "Alarm 7" in alarm status
screens when the alternate language is used, read/written with
Modbus functions 16 or 23. Valid characters are 0 to 9, a to z, A
to Z, plus ß ö ( ) - and _.
Alarm 7 Minimum Duration
Minimum time alarm 7 must be passed its threshold before
activating (deactivation is not affected by this parameter).
From 0 to 9999 secs
Alarm 7 Alternate Label
Dec
Value
0
1
RW
20.4.19 Recorder & Clock Parameters
Parameter Name & Register Address
Integer
Int +1
Float
Recording Sample Interval
Dec
7550
23934 47868
Hex
1D7E
5D7E BAFC
Recording Mode
Dec
7551
23935
Hex
1D7F
5D7F
47870
BAFE
Manual Recording Trigger
Dec
7552
23936 47872
Hex
1D80
5D80 BB00
Data Recorder Fitted
Dec
7553
23937
Hex
1D81
5D81
October 2014
47874
BB02
Access
RW
RW
RW
RO
Values
& Descriptions
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Recording Sample Interval
Every Second
Every 2 Seconds
Every 5 Seconds
Every 10 Seconds
Every 15 Seconds
Every 30 Seconds
Every Minute
Every 2 Minutes
Every 5 Minutes
Every 10 Minutes
Every 15 Minutes
Every 30 Minutes
Value
0
1
Recording Mode
Record until memory used
Continuous FIFO buffer
Value
0
1
Manual Recording Trigger
Manual Recording Trigger Off
Manual Recording Trigger On
Value
0
1
Data Recorder Fitted
Not Fitted
Recorder Fitted
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
173
Memory Remaining
Dec
7554
23938
47876
Hex
BB04
1D82
5D82
Remaining Data Recorder Capacity
Time Remaining
Dec
7555
23939
47878
Hex
BB06
1D83
5D83
RO
Remaining Data Recorder Time
Recorder Auto-Alarm Trigger
Dec
7563
23947 47894
Hex 1D8B
5D8B BB16
RO
RW
Operator Access To Record Trigger
Dec
Hex
7559
1D87
23943
5D87
47886
BB0E
RW
Recorder Status In Operator Mode
Dec
Hex
7560
1D88
23944
5D88
47888
BB10
RW
Record Input 1 Process Variable
Dec
Hex
7572
1D94
23956
5D94
The unused memory remaining, in bytes.
47912
BB28
Approximate recording time remaining until memory filled, in
seconds. Based on the current recorder settings & sample rate.
Value
0
1
2
3
Value
0
1
Value
0
1
Value
RW
0
1
Automatic Data Recorder Trigger
None
On Alarm
On Profile Run
On Alarm or Profile Running
Operator Access To Manual Record Trigger
No
Yes
Recorder Status Visible In Operator Mode
No
Yes
Record Process Variable Of Input 1
Do Not Record PV
Record PV Value
Record Input 1 Max Between Samples
Dec
7573
23957 47914
RW
Hex
1D95
5D95 BB2A
Value
0
1
Record Max PV For Input 1 Since Last Sample
Do Not Record Maximum PV
Record Maximum PV Between Samples
Record Input 1 Min Between Samples
Dec
7574
23958 47916
RW
Hex
1D96
5D96 BB2C
Value
0
1
Record Min PV For Input 1 Since Last Sample
Do Not Record Minimum PV
Record Minimum PV Between Samples
Record Input 2 Process Variable
Dec
7607
23991 47982
RW
Hex 1DB7
5DB7 BB6E
Value
0
1
Record Process Variable Of Input 2
Do Not Record PV
Record PV Value
Record Input 2 Max Between Samples
Dec
7608
23992 47984
RW
Hex 1DB8
5DB8 BB70
Value
0
1
Record Max PV For Input 2 Since Last Sample
Do Not Record Maximum PV
Record Maximum PV Between Samples
Record Input 2 Min Between Samples
Dec
7609
23993 47986
RW
Hex 1DB9
5DB9 BB72
Value
0
1
Record Min PV For Input 2 Since Last Sample
Do Not Record Minimum PV
Record Minimum PV Between Samples
Record Aux A Input
Dec
7606
23990
Hex 1DB6
5DB6
Value
0
1
Record Auxiliary A Input Value
Do Not Record Aux A
Record Aux A Value
Value
0
1
Record Effective Value of Loop 1 Setpoint
Do Not Record Setpoint
Record Actual Setpoint
Value
0
1
Record Effective Value of Loop 2 Setpoint
Do Not Record Setpoint
Record Actual Setpoint
47980
BB6C
Record Loop 1 Actual Setpoint
Dec
7575
23959 47918
Hex
1D97
5D97 BB2E
Record Loop 2 Actual Setpoint
Dec
7610
23994 47988
Hex 1DBA 5DBA BB74
174
RW
RW
RW
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Record Loop 1 Primary Power
Dec
7576
23960 47920
Hex
1D98
5D98 BB30
Value
0
1
Record Primary Power Value For Loop 1
Do Not Record Primary Power
Record Primary Power
Record Loop 1 Secondary Power
Dec
7577
23961 47922
RW
Hex
1D99
5D99 BB32
Value
0
1
Record Secondary Power Value For Loop 1
Do Not Record Secondary Power
Record Secondary Power
Record Loop 2 Primary Power
Dec
7611
23995 47990
Hex 1DBB 5DBB BB76
Value
0
1
Record Primary Power Value For Loop 2
Do Not Record Primary Power
Record Primary Power
Record Loop 2 Secondary Power
Dec
7612
23996 47992
RW
Hex 1DBC 5DBC BB78
Value
0
1
Record Secondary Power Value For Loop 2
Do Not Record Secondary Power
Record Secondary Power
Record Alarm 1 Status
Dec
7578
23962 47924
Hex 1D9A
5D9A BB34
Value
0
1
Record Change Of State For Alarm 1
Do Not Record Alarm 1
Record Alarm 1
Value
0
1
Record Change Of State For Alarm 2
Do Not Record Alarm 2
Record Alarm 2
Value
0
1
Record Change Of State For Alarm 3
Do Not Record Alarm 3
Record Alarm 3
Value
0
1
Record Change Of State For Alarm 4
Do Not Record Alarm 4
Record Alarm 4
Value
0
1
Record Change Of State For Alarm 5
Do Not Record Alarm 5
Record Alarm 5
Value
0
1
Record Change Of State For Alarm 6
Do Not Record Alarm 6
Record Alarm 6
Value
0
1
Record Change Of State For Alarm 7
Do Not Record Alarm 7
Record Alarm 7
Value
0
1
Record Instrument Power Turned On/Off
Do Not Record Power On/Off
Record Power On/Off
Value
0
1
Record Cascade Mode Master Process Value
Do Not Record PV
Record PV Value Of Master
Value
0
1
Record Cascade Mode Master Setpoint
Do Not Record SP
Record SP Value Of Master
Value
0
1
Record Cascade Mode Slave Process Value
Do Not Record PV
Record PV Value Of Slave
Record Alarm 2 Status
Dec
7579
23963 47926
Hex 1D9B
5D9B BB36
Record Alarm 3 Status
Dec
7580
23964 47928
Hex 1D9C
5D9C BB38
Record Alarm 4 Status
Dec
7581
23965 47930
Hex 1D9D
5D9D BB3A
Record Alarm 5 Status
Dec
7582
23966 47932
Hex
1D9E
5D9E BB3C
Record Alarm 6 Status
Dec
7615
23999 47998
Hex 1DBF
5DBF BB7E
Record Alarm 7 Status
Dec
7616
24000 48000
Hex 1DC0
5DC0 BB80
Record Power
Dec
7583
23967
Hex
1D9F
5D9F
47934
BB3E
Record Cascade Master PV
Dec
7530
23914 47828
Hex 1D6A
5D6A BAD4
Record Cascade Master SP
Dec
7531
23915 47830
Hex 1D6B
5D6B BAD6
Record Cascade Slave PV
Dec
7532
23916 47832
Hex 1D6C
5D6C BAD8
October 2014
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
175
Record Cascade Slave Primary Power
Dec
7533
23917 47834
RW
Hex 1D6D
5D6D BADA
Value
0
1
Record Primary Power Value of Cascade Slave
Do Not Record Primary Power
Record Primary Power Of Slave
Record Slave Secondary Power
Dec
7538
23922 47844
Hex
1D72
5D72 BAE4
Value
0
1
Record Slave Secondary Power in Cascade Mode
Do Not Record Secondary Power
Record Secondary Power Of Slave
Value
0
1
Record Ratio Mode Input 1 Process Value
Do Not Record PV
Record Ratio Input 1 PV Value
Value
0
1
Record Ratio Mode Input 2 Process Value
Do Not Record PV
Record Ration Input 2 PV Value
Value
0
1
Record Ratio Mode Setpoint
Do Not Record SP
Record Ratio Mode SP Value
Value
0
1
Record Ratio Mode Power Output Value
Do Not Record Ratio Power
Record Ratio Mode Power
Value
0
1
Alarm 1 To Trigger Recording
Off
Trigger On Alarm 1 (if auto-trigger = profile or alarm)
Value
0
1
Alarm 2 To Trigger Recording
Off
Trigger On Alarm 2 (if auto-trigger = profile or alarm)
Value
0
1
Alarm 3 To Trigger Recording
Off
Trigger On Alarm 3 (if auto-trigger = profile or alarm)
Value
0
1
Alarm 4 To Trigger Recording
Off
Trigger On Alarm 4 (if auto-trigger = profile or alarm)
Value
0
1
Alarm 5 To Trigger Recording
Off
Trigger On Alarm 5 (if auto-trigger = profile or alarm)
Value
0
1
Alarm 6 To Trigger Recording
Off
Trigger On Alarm 6 (if auto-trigger = profile or alarm)
Value
0
1
Alarm 7 To Trigger Recording
Off
Trigger On Alarm 7 (if auto-trigger = profile or alarm)
Record Ratio PV Input 1
Dec
7534
23918 47836
Hex
1D6E
5D6E BADC
Record Ratio PV Input 2
Dec
7535
23919 47838
Hex
1D6F
5D6F BADE
Record Ratio SP
Dec
7536
23920
Hex
1D70
5D70
47840
BAE0
Record Ratio Power
Dec
7537
23921
Hex
1D71
5D71
47842
BAE2
Trigger Recording On Alarm 1
Dec
7584
23968 47936
Hex 1DA0
5DA0 BB40
Trigger Recording On Alarm 2
Dec
7685
24069 48138
Hex
1E05
5E05 BC0A
Trigger Recording On Alarm 3
Dec
7686
24070 48140
Hex
1E06
5E06 BC0C
Trigger Recording On Alarm 4
Dec
7687
24071 48142
Hex
1E07
5E07 BC0E
Trigger Recording On Alarm 5
Dec
7688
24072 48144
Hex
1E08
5E08
BC10
Trigger Recording On Alarm 6
Dec
7613
23997 47994
Hex 1DBD 5DBD BB7A
Trigger Recording On Alarm 7
Dec
7614
23998 47996
Hex 1DBE
5DBE BB7C
Sample Size
Dec
7595
23979
47958
Hex
5DAB
BB56
176
1DAB
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Data Recording Sample Size
RO
The size (in bytes) for recording sample with current settings
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Record Event 1
Dec
7599
23983
Hex 1DAF
5DAF
47966
BB5E
Record Event 2
Dec
7600
23984
Hex 1DB0
5DB0
47968
BB60
Record Event 3
Dec
7601
23985
Hex 1DB1
5DB1
47970
BB62
Record Event 4
Dec
7602
23986
Hex 1DB2
5DB2
47972
BB64
Record Event 5
Dec
7603
23987
Hex 1DB3
5DB3
47974
BB66
Memory Used
Dec
7605
23989
47978
Hex
BB6A
1DB5
Date format
Dec
7868
Hex 1EBC
5DB5
24252
5EBC
48504
BD78
24253
48506
Hex
5EBD
BD7A
n/a
n/a
48508
BD7C
Clock Date
Dec
n/a
Hex
n/a
RW
RW
RW
RW
Record Change Of State For Event 1
Do Not Record Event 1
Record Event 1
Value
0
1
Record Change Of State For Event 2
Do Not Record Event 2
Record Event 2
Value
0
1
Record Change Of State For Event 3
Do Not Record Event 3
Record Event 3
Value
0
1
Record Change Of State For Event 4
Do Not Record Event 4
Record Event 4
Value
0
1
Record Change Of State For Event 5
Do Not Record Event 5
Record Event 5
Percentage Data Recorder Memory Used
Clock Time
Dec
7869
1EBD
RW
Value
0
1
RO
RW
Recorder Memory Used. 0 (Empty) to 100% (Full)
Value
0
1
Display Date Format
dd/mm/yyyy (European Default)
mm/dd/yyyy (USA Default)
Real Time Clock Time Of Day Setting
RW
RW
Format is the number of seconds since midnight.
Real Time Clock Date Setting
This can be entered only as a floating point number. When
converted to binary the least significant 19 bits represent the
date in this format:
www DDDDD MMMM YYYYYYY
YYYYYYY = YEAR
MMMM = MONTH
DDDDD = DAY OF MONTH (1-31 but must be valid)
www = Day of the week The day of week portion
is calculated from the date (Read Only).
Example with date set to 31/07/2012
Day (31) = 11111
Month (7) = 0111
Year (12) = 0001100
Bits 17 and higher are ignored when writing so 11111 0111
0001100 (64396 decimal) is just one of many possible numbers
to write as 31/07/2012, and when reading the date back, the
number returned is
10 11111 0111 0001100 (195468 decimal) because bits 17-19
are 010 (to represent “Tuesday”).
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
177
Real Time Clock Fitted
Dec
7871
24255 48510
Hex 1EBF
5EBF BD7E
Day Of The Week
Dec
7872
24256
Hex
1EC0
5EC0
48512
BD80
RO
RO
Value
0
1
Real Time Clock Fitted
Not Fitted
Fitted
Value
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Day Of Week (calculated from clock date setting)
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
Values
& Descriptions
20.4.20 Display & Security
Parameter Name & Register Address
Integer
Int +1
Float
LED 1 Label
Dec 7656
24040
48080
Hex
5DE8
BBD0
1DE8
Access
RW
LED 1 Alternate Label
Dec
Hex
7660
1DEC
24044
5DEC
48088
BBD8
RW
LED 2 Label
Dec 7657
Hex 1DE9
24041
5DE9
48082
BBD2
RW
LED 2 Alternate Label
Dec 7661
24045 48090
Hex 1DED 5DED BBDA
LED 3 Label
Dec 7658
Hex 1DEA
24042
5DEA
48084
BBD4
LED 3 Alternate Label
Dec 7662
24046 48092
Hex 1DEE 5DEE BBDC
LED 4 Label
Dec 7659
Hex 1DEB
24043
5DEB
48086
BBD6
LED 4 Alternate Label
Dec 7663
24047 48094
Hex 1DEF
5DEF BBDE
178
RW
RW
Labels shown in display immediately below the 4 red LED
indicators.
With up to 5 ASCII characters, which can read or written using
Modbus functions 16 or 23.
Valid characters are 0 to 9, a to z, A to Z, plus ß ö ( ) - and _.
Defaults: 1 = PRI (Primary); 2 = SEC (Secondary);
3 = TUNE (Tuning); 4 = ALARM (Alarm)
RW
RW
RW
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
LED 1 Usage
Value
Dec
7664
24048
48096
Hex
1DF0
5DF0
BBE0
RW
LED 1 Usage. For 8 & 9 see also LED 1 Selections.
0
Loop 1 Primary Control ON = LED 1 ON
1
Loop 1 Secondary Control ON = LED 1 ON
2
Loop 2 Primary Control ON = LED 1 ON
3
Loop 2 Secondary Control ON = LED 1 ON
4
Loop 1 VMD Open ON = LED 1 ON
5
Loop 1 VMD Close ON = LED 1 ON
6
Loop 2 VMD Open ON = LED 1 ON
7
Loop 2 VMD Close ON = LED 1 ON
8
Alarm/Event/Digital/Control (Logical OR)
9
Alarm/Event/Digital/Control inverted (Logical NOR)
Value 8 (Logical OR selection of Alarm/Events/Digital/Control) turns ON the LED if any of the selected
alarms, events, inputs or functions are active.
Value 9 (Logical NOR selection of Alarm/Events/Digital/Control) turns OFF the LED if any of the selected
alarms, events, inputs or functions are active.
Note: Pre-tune will flash the LED instead of turning it on, but flashing will be obscured if used in conjunction
with other functions when they are on.
LED 1 Alarm Indication
Bit
Dec
7690
24074
48148
Hex
1E0A
5E0A
BC14
RW
LED 1 Profiler Event Indication
Dec
7692
24076
48152
Hex
1E0C
5E0C
BC18
LED 1 Slot A & Soft Input Indication
Dec
7694
24078
48156
Hex
1E0E
5E0E
BC1C
October 2014
0
Alarm 1
1
Alarm 2
2
Alarm 3
3
Alarm 4
4
Alarm 5
5
Alarm 6
6
Alarm 7
Bit
RW
RW
If bit =1, Alarm n status is selected
If bit =1, Event n status is selected
0
Event 1
1
Event 2
2
Event 3
3
Event 4
4
Event 5
5
Profile Running
6
Profile End
Bit
If bit =1, Digital A / Soft Input n status is selected
0
Digital Input A
1
Soft Digital 1
2
Soft Digital 2
3
Soft Digital 3
4
Soft Digital 4
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
179
LED 1 Option C Digital Indication
Dec
7696
24080
48160
Hex
1E10
5E10
BC20
Bit
RW
LED 1 Control Indication
0
Digital Input C1
1
Digital Input C2
2
Digital Input C3
3
Digital Input C4
4
Digital Input C5
5
Digital Input C6
6
Digital Input C7
Bit
Dec
7644
24028
48056
Hex
1DDC
5DDC
BBB8
RW
LED 2 Usage
7665
24049
48098
Hex
1DF1
5DF1
BBE2
RW
If bit =1, the function's status is selected
0
Loop 1 Auto Tune (self-tune=On, pre-tune=flashing)
1
Loop 1 Manual Control
2
Loop 2 Auto Tune (self-tune=On, pre-tune=flashing)
3
Loop 2 Manual Control
Value
Dec
If bit =1, Digital Cn status is selected
LED 2 Usage. For 8 & 9 see also LED 2 Selections.
0
Loop 1 Primary Control ON = LED 1 ON
1
Loop 1 Secondary Control ON = LED 1 ON
2
Loop 2 Primary Control ON = LED 1 ON
3
Loop 2 Secondary Control ON = LED 1 ON
4
Loop 1 VMD Open ON = LED 1 ON
5
Loop 1 VMD Close ON = LED 1 ON
6
Loop 2 VMD Open ON = LED 1 ON
7
Loop 2 VMD Close ON = LED 1 ON
Alarm/Events/Digital/Control (Logical OR of selection
below)
Alarm/Events/Digital/Control inverted (Logical NOR of
selection)
8
9
Value 8 (Logical OR selection of Alarm/Events/Digital/Control) turns ON the LED if any of the selected
alarms, events, inputs or functions are active.
Value 9 (Logical NOR selection of Alarm/Events/Digital/Control) turns OFF the LED if any of the selected
alarms, events, inputs or functions are active.
Note: Pre-tune will flash the LED instead of turning it on, but flashing will be obscured if used in conjunction
with other functions when they are on.
LED 2 Alarm Indication
Bit
Dec
7698
24082
48164
Hex
1E12
5E12
BC24
180
RW
If bit =1, Alarm n status is selected
0
Alarm 1
1
Alarm 2
2
Alarm 3
3
Alarm 4
4
Alarm 5
5
Alarm 6
6
Alarm 7
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
LED 2 Event Indication
Bit
Dec
7700
24084
48168
Hex
1E14
5E14
BC28
RW
LED 2 Slot A & Soft Input Indication
Dec
7702
24086
48172
Hex
1E16
5E16
BC2C
RW
LED 2 Option C Digital Indication
Dec
7704
24088
48176
Hex
1E18
5E18
BC30
LED 2 Control Indication
Dec
7646
24030
48060
Hex
1DDE
5DDE
BBBC
0
Event 1
1
Event 2
2
Event 3
3
Event 4
4
Event 5
5
Profile Running
6
Profile End
Bit
Digital Input A
1
Soft Digital 1
2
Soft Digital 2
3
Soft Digital 3
4
Soft Digital 4
LED 3 Usage
Digital Input C1
1
Digital Input C2
2
Digital Input C3
3
Digital Input C4
4
Digital Input C5
5
Digital Input C6
6
Digital Input C7
7666
24050
48100
Hex
1DF2
5DF2
BBE4
RW
If bit =1, the function's status is selected
0
Loop 1 Auto Tune (self-tune=On, pre-tune=flashing)
1
Loop 1 Manual Control
2
Loop 2 Auto Tune (self-tune=On, pre-tune=flashing)
3
Loop 2 Manual Control
Value
Dec
If bit =1, Digital Cn status is selected
0
Bit
RW
If bit =1, Digital A / Soft Input n status is selected
0
Bit
RW
If bit =1, Event n status is selected
LED 3 Usage. For 8 & 9 see also LED 3 Selections.
0
Loop 1 Primary Control ON = LED 1 ON
1
Loop 1 Secondary Control ON = LED 1 ON
2
Loop 2 Primary Control ON = LED 1 ON
3
Loop 2 Secondary Control ON = LED 1 ON
4
Loop 1 VMD Open ON = LED 1 ON
5
Loop 1 VMD Close ON = LED 1 ON
6
Loop 2 VMD Open ON = LED 1 ON
7
Loop 2 VMD Close ON = LED 1 ON
Alarm/Events/Digital/Control (Logical OR of selection
below)
Alarm/Events/Digital/Control inverted (Logical NOR of
selection)
8
9
Value 8 (Logical OR selection of Alarm/Events/Digital/Control) turns ON the LED if any of the selected
alarms, events, inputs or functions are active.
Value 9 (Logical NOR selection of Alarm/Events/Digital/Control) turns OFF the LED if any of the selected
alarms, events, inputs or functions are active.
Note: Pre-tune will flash the LED instead of turning it on, but flashing will be obscured if used in conjunction
with other functions when they are on.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
181
LED 3 Alarm Indication
Bit
Dec
7706
24090
48180
Hex
1E1A
5E1A
BC34
RW
LED 3 Event Indication
0
Alarm 1
1
Alarm 2
2
Alarm 3
3
Alarm 4
4
Alarm 5
5
Alarm 6
6
Alarm 7
Bit
Dec
7708
24092
48184
Hex
1E1C
5E1C
BC38
RW
LED 3 Slot A & Soft Input Indication
Dec
7710
24094
48188
Hex
1E1E
5E1E
BC3C
RW
LED 3 Option C Digital Indication
Dec
7712
24096
48192
Hex
1E20
5E20
BC40
LED 3 Control Indication
Event 1
1
Event 2
2
Event 3
3
Event 4
4
Event 5
5
Profile Running
6
Profile End
Bit
7648
24032
48064
Hex
1DE0
5DE0
BBC0
RW
LED 4 Usage
Digital Input A
1
Soft Digital 1
2
Soft Digital 2
3
Soft Digital 3
4
Soft Digital 4
7667
24051
48102
Hex
1DF3
5DF3
BBE6
RW
Digital Input C1
1
Digital Input C2
2
Digital Input C3
3
Digital Input C4
4
Digital Input C5
5
Digital Input C6
6
Digital Input C7
If bit =1, the function's status is selected
0
Loop 1 Auto Tune (self-tune=On, pre-tune=flashing)
1
Loop 1 Manual Control
2
Loop 2 Auto Tune (self-tune=On, pre-tune=flashing)
3
Loop 2 Manual Control
LED 4 Usage. For 8 & 9 see also LED 4 Selections.
0
Loop 1 Primary Control ON = LED 1 ON
1
Loop 1 Secondary Control ON = LED 1 ON
2
Loop 2 Primary Control ON = LED 1 ON
3
Loop 2 Secondary Control ON = LED 1 ON
4
Loop 1 VMD Open ON = LED 1 ON
5
Loop 1 VMD Close ON = LED 1 ON
6
Loop 2 VMD Open ON = LED 1 ON
7
Loop 2 VMD Close ON = LED 1 ON
Alarm/Events/Digital/Control (Logical OR of selection
below)
8
182
If bit =1, Digital Cn status is selected
0
Value
Dec
If bit =1, Digital A / Soft Input n status is selected
0
Bit
Dec
If bit =1, Event n status is selected
0
Bit
RW
If bit =1, Alarm n status is selected
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
9
Alarm/Events/Digital/Control inverted (Logical NOR of
selection)
Value 8 (Logical OR selection of Alarm/Events/Digital/Control) turns ON the LED if any of the selected
alarms, events, inputs or functions are active.
Value 9 (Logical NOR selection of Alarm/Events/Digital/Control) turns OFF the LED if any of the selected
alarms, events, inputs or functions are active.
Note: Pre-tune will flash the LED instead of turning it on, but flashing will be obscured if used in conjunction
with other functions when they are on.
LED 4 Alarm Indication
Bit
Dec
7714
24098
48196
Hex
1E22
5E22
BC44
RW
LED 4 Event Indication
7716
24100
48200
Hex
1E24
5E24
BC48
RW
LED 4 Slot A & Soft Input Indication
Dec
7718
24102
48204
Hex
1E26
5E26
BC4C
RW
LED 4 Option C Digital Indication
Dec
7720
24104
48208
Hex
1E28
5E28
BC50
Alarm 1
1
Alarm 2
2
Alarm 3
3
Alarm 4
4
Alarm 5
5
Alarm 6
6
Alarm 7
RW
Dec
7650
24034
48068
Hex
1DE2
5DE2
BBC4
Event 1
1
Event 2
2
Event 3
3
Event 4
4
Event 5
5
Profile Running
6
Profile End
Bit
If bit =1, Digital A / Soft Input n status is selected
0
Digital Input A
1
Soft Digital 1
2
Soft Digital 2
3
Soft Digital 3
4
Soft Digital 4
If bit =1, Digital Cn status is selected
0
Digital Input C1
1
Digital Input C2
2
Digital Input C3
3
Digital Input C4
4
Digital Input C5
5
Digital Input C6
6
Digital Input C7
Bit
RW
If bit =1, Event n status is selected
0
Bit
LED 4 Control Indication
October 2014
0
Bit
Dec
If bit =1, Alarm n status is selected
If bit =1, the function's status is selected
0
Loop 1 Auto Tune (self-tune=On, pre-tune=flashing)
1
Loop 1 Manual Control
2
Loop 2 Auto Tune (self-tune=On, pre-tune=flashing)
3
Loop 2 Manual Control
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
183
Backlight Color
Dec 7668 24052
Hex 1DF4 5DF4
48104
BBE8
Display Language
Dec 7675 24059
Hex 1DFB 5DFB
48118
BBF6
Display Contrast
Dec 7676 24060
48120
Hex
BBF8
1DFC
5DFC
Invert Display
Dec 7677 24061
Hex 1DFD 5DFD
48122
BBFA
48124
Hex
BBFC
5DFE
1DFF
5DFF
BBFE
Tuning Lock Code
Dec 7680 24064
48128
Hex
BC00
1E00
5E00
1E01
5E01
BC02
Profiler Setup Lock Code
Dec 7682 24066 48132
Hex
1E02
5E02
BC04
USB Lock Code
Dec 7683 24067
48134
Hex
BC06
1E03
5E03
48136
Hex
BC08
5E04
1E08
5E08
BC10
Read Only Operation Mode
Dec 7685 24069 48138
Hex 1E05
5E05
BC0A
184
RW
Value
0
1
Normal Or Inverted Display
Normal Display
Inverted Display
RW
1 to 9999. Default is 10
Configuration Mode Entry Passcode
RW
1 to 9999. Default is 10
RW
1 to 9999. Default is 10
Supervisor Mode Entry Passcode
RW
1 to 9999. Default is 10
Profiler Setup Mode Entry Passcode
RW
1 to 9999. Default is 10
RW
1 to 9999. Default is 10
Recorder Control Mode Entry Passcode
Profile Control Lock Code
Dec 7688 24072 48144
Hex
Screen contrast adjustment to improve clarity.
10 to 100 with 100 = maximum contrast.
RW
USB Mode Entry Passcode
Recorder Lock Code
Dec 7684 24068
1E04
Select Display Language
Main Display Language
Alternate Display Language
Automatic Tuning Mode Entry Passcode
Supervisor Lock Code
Dec 7681 24065 48130
Hex
Value
0
1
Setup Mode Entry Passcode
Configuration Lock Code
Dec 7679 24063 48126
Hex
RW
Display Backlight Color
Green to Red if any output is latched
Red to Green if any output is latched
Green to Red if any alarm active
Red to Green if any alarm active
Permanent Green
Permanent Red
Display Contrast Value
Setup Lock Code
Dec 7678 24062
1DFE
RW
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
RW
1 to 9999. Default is 10
Profile Control Mode Entry Passcode
RW
RW
1 to 9999. Default is 10
Value
0
1
Read Only Operation Mode
Operation Mode Read/Write
Operation Mode Read Only
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Loop 1 Trend View Sample Rate
Dec 9000 25384 50768
RW
Hex 2328
6328
C650
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Trend Sample Interval For Loop 1
Every Second
Every 2 Seconds
Every 5 Seconds
Every 10 Seconds
Every 15 Seconds
Every 30 Seconds
Every Minute
Every 2 Minutes
Every 5 Minutes
Every 10 Minutes
Every 15 Minutes
11
Loop 1 Trend View Data
Dec 9001 25385 50770
Hex 2329
6329
C652
Every 30 Minutes
RW
Value
1
2
3
Values To Display In Loop 1 Trend View
Process variable only
Process variable and setpoint
Max & min process value since last sample
Loop 1 Trend View in Operator Mode
Dec 9007 25391 50782
RW
Hex 232F
632F
C65E
Value
0
1
Trend View For Loop 1 Visible In Operator Mode
No
Yes
Loop 2 Trend View Sample Rate
Dec 9010 25394 50788
RW
Hex 2332
6332
C664
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Trend Sample Interval For Loop 2
Every Second
Every 2 Seconds
Every 5 Seconds
Every 10 Seconds
Every 15 Seconds
Every 30 Seconds
Every Minute
Every 2 Minutes
Every 5 Minutes
Every 10 Minutes
Every 15 Minutes
11
Loop 2 Trend View Data
Dec 9011 25395 50790
Hex 2333
6333
C666
Every 30 Minutes
RW
Value
1
2
3
Values To Display In Loop 2 Trend View
Process variable only
Process variable and setpoint
Max & min process value since last sample
Loop 1 Trend View in Operator Mode
Dec 9017 25401 50802
RW
Hex 2339
6339
C672
Value
0
1
Trend View For Loop 2 Visible In Operator Mode
No
Yes
20.4.21 Instrument Data Parameters
Parameter Name & Register Address
Integer
Int +1
Float
Serial Number 1
Dec
210
16594
33188
Hex
81A4
00D2
40D2
Serial Number 2
October 2014
Access
Values
& Descriptions
Serial Number (part 1)
RO
The first 4 digits of the instrument’s Serial number.
Serial Number (part 2)
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
185
Dec
211
16595
33190
Hex
00D3
40D3
81A6
RO
Serial Number 3
Serial Number (part 3)
Dec
212
16596
33192
Hex
00D4
40D4
81A8
RO
Serial Number 4
213
16597
33194
Hex
00D5
40D5
81AA
RO
Manufacture Day
370
16754
33508
Hex
0172
4172
82E4
RO
Manufacture Month
371
16755
33510
Hex
0173
4173
82E6
RO
Manufacture Year
372
16756
33512
Hex
0174
4174
82E8
USB Option Fitted
Dec
7503
23887
Hex
1D4F
5D4F
47774
BA9E
Data Recorder Fitted
Dec
7553
23937
Hex
1D81
5D81
47874
BB02
Profiler Enabled
Dec
8199
24583
Hex
2007
6007
49166
C00E
Software PRL
Dec
208
16592
33184
Hex
81A0
33182
Hex
819E
33202
Hex
81B2
33204
Hex
81B4
40DA
33568
Hex
8320
4190
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
401
0191
16785
4191
Value
0
1
Data Recorder Fitted
Not Fitted
Fitted
Value
0
1
Profiler Feature Enabled
Profiler Not Enabled
Profiler Enabled
A 4 character ASCII string incremented with each update.
Starting 0x20 (space) & ending 0x0, (e.g “ 0P” is 20, 30, 50, 00)
A 4 character ASCII string incremented with each update.
Starting 0x20 (space) & ending 0x0, (e.g “ 02” is 20, 30, 32, 00)
A 6 character ASCII string starting with 0x20 (space) & ending
0x0, (e.g type “ 406A” is 20, 34, 30, 36, 43, 00)
A 6 character ASCII string starting with 1 or more spaces (0x20),
(e.g type “ 3.0” is 20, 20, 33, 2E, 36, 30, 00)
“For Service” Contact Details - Lines 1 to 7
RW
7 lines of user definable text - 25 ASCII characters per line which
can be read or written using Modbus functions 16 or 23.
33570
8322
RW
Note: The number of ASCII characters transmitted per line must
be EVEN. If the text string you wish to send has an odd number,
place an additional space character at the end. The space
character is 20 hex.
33572
RW
Valid characters are 0 to 9, a to z, A to Z, plus ß ö ( ) - and _.
Contact Details 2
Dec
Hex
USB Option
Not Fitted
Fitted
Product Firmware Revision Number
Contact Details 1
Dec
400
16784
0190
RO
Value
0
1
Product Firmware Type Reference Number
Firmware Version
Dec
218
16602
00DA
RO
4 digit number = Year of manufacture (e.g. 2013)
Product Revision Level (Hardware)
Firmware Type
Dec
217
16601
40D9
RO
Product Revision Level (Firmware)
Hardware PRL
Dec
207
16591
00D9
Month of manufacture – 1 to 12
Year Of Manufacture
Dec
40CF
Date of manufacture – 1 to 31 (day of month)
Month Of Manufacture
Dec
40D0
The digits 12 to 14 of the instrument’s Serial number.
Day Of Manufacture
Dec
00CF
The digits 9 to 11 of the instrument’s Serial number.
Serial Number (part 4)
Dec
00D0
The digits 5 to 8 of the instrument’s Serial number.
Contact Details 3
Dec
186
402
16786
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Hex
0192
4192
8324
Example. To write “My Company Name” to line 1 send:
Contact Details 4
Dec
Hex
403
0193
16787
4193
33574
8326
RW
33576
8328
RW
33578
832A
RW
33580
832C
RW
[ADDRESS], 16, 01, 90, 00, 08, 10, 4D, 79, 20, 43, 6F, 6D, 70,
61, 6E, 79, 20, 4E, 61, 6D, 65, 20, [CRC]
Contact Details 5
Dec
Hex
404
0194
16788
4194
Contact Details 6
Dec
Hex
405
0195
16789
4195
Contact Details 7
Dec
Hex
406
0196
16790
4196
20.4.22 Profiler Control & Status Parameters
Parameter Name & Register Address
Integer
Int +1
Float
Active Profiler
Dec
8243
24627
49254
Hex
6033
C066
Active Segment
Dec
8244
24628
49256
Hex
C068
2033
2034
6034
Access
Values
& Descriptions
Active Profiler Number
RW
Currently selected profile number (0 to 63)
Active Segment Number
Profiler Control Commands
Dec
8245
24629 49258
Hex
2035
6035
C06A
RO
The active segment number (1 to 255) of the selected profile.
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
Profiler Command
Do nothing
Run the currently selected profile
Hold the currently running profile
Abort the currently running profile
Jump to the next segment
Release the hold
Exit profiler, return to controller mode
Select a profile to be run but not start it
Profiler Control Confirmation Action
Dec
8257
24641 49282
RW
Hex
2041
6041
C082
Value
0
1
Implement Profiler Command
Do not Implement Command
Implement previous Profiler Command
Enable Edit While Running
Dec
8262
24646 49292
Hex
2046
6046
C08C
Value
0
1
Operator Editing of Current Running Profile
Editing of running profile forbidden
Editing of running profile via Keypad allowed
Value
0
1
Profile Control From Operation Mode
Operation Mode profile control disabled
Operation Mode profile control enabled
RW
Note: The Profiler Control Commands
must be followed by a Profiler Control
Confirmation Action command, otherwise
the command will not be implemented.
RW
Operator Access To Profile Control
Dec
8260
24644 49288
RW
Hex
2044
6044
C088
Profile Cycles Run
Dec
8247
24631
49262
Hex
6037
C06E
Event 1 Status
Dec
8249
24633
Hex
2039
6039
49266
C072
2037
October 2014
Profile Cycles Run Status
RO
RO
The Number of times the currently running profile has cycled
Value
0
1
Status Of Event 1
Event 1 Inactive
Event 1 Active
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
187
Event 2 Status
Dec
8250
24634
Hex
203A
603A
49268
C074
Event 3 Status
Dec
8251
24635
Hex
203B
603B
49270
C076
Event 4 Status
Dec
8252
24636
Hex
203C
603C
49272
C078
Event 5 Status
Dec
8253
24637
Hex
203D
603D
49274
C07A
Segment Type Status
Dec
8258
24642
Hex
2042
6042
49284
C084
Active Profile Name
Dec
8259
24643
49286
Hex
C086
2043
6043
Delay time
Dec
8233
24617
49234
Hex
6029
C052
188
RO
RO
RO
RO
Status Of Event 2
Event 2 Inactive
Event 2 Active
Value
0
1
Status Of Event 3
Event 3 Inactive
Event 3 Active
Value
0
1
Status Of Event 4
Event 4 Inactive
Event 4 Active
Value
0
1
Status Of Event 5
Event 5 Inactive
Event 5 Active
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The Current Running Profile Segment Type
No segment
Setpoint ramping up
Step
Dwell
Held
Loop
Join
End
Setpoint ramping down
Name of Currently Selected Profile
Secondary Profile Status
Dec
8232
24616 49232
Hex
2028
6028
C050
2029
RO
Value
0
1
RO
RO
The name of the currently selected profile
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Secondary Profile Status of Selected Profile
Profile running
Input sensor break
Profile not valid
Controller in manual mode
Profile finished and maintaining last profile setpoint
Profile finished with control outputs off
Profile control has ended. Unit is Controller Mode.
Remaining Profile Delay Time
RO
The current start delay time remaining in seconds, before
selected profile will begin.
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Current Profile Running Time
Dec
8235
24619 49238
Hex
202B
602B
Current Profile Running Time
Current Profile Remaining Time
Dec
8236
24620 49240
Hex
202C
602C
Current Profile Remaining Time
202D
602D
C058
Current Segment Running Time
RO
C05A
Current Segment Remaining Time
Dec
8238
24622 49244
Hex
202E
602E
C05C
Total Hold Time
Dec
8239
24623
49246
Hex
C05E
202F
602F
2030
6030
C060
Profile Setup
Dec
8198
24582
49164
Hex
6006
C00C
2006
The elapsed time of the current profile segment in seconds
Current Segment Remaining Time
RO
The remaining time for the current profile segment in seconds
Total Hold Time
Current Segment Loops Run
Dec
8240
24624 49248
Hex
The remaining time for the current running profile before
reaching its end segment, in seconds
RO
Current Segment Running Time
Dec
8237
24621 49242
Hex
The elapsed time of the current running profile in seconds since
it began running.
RO
C056
Total (accumulated) time the current profile has been held in
seconds
RO
Number of Current Segment Loop-backs
The number of times the current looping segment has looped
back
RO
Profile Setup via Modbus
Note: Refer to the Profile Setup Over Modbus information below
for setting up profiles via comms
RW
20.4.23 Profile Setup via Modbus
The information in this section is intended for advanced users writing their own software code. Most users will
create or edit profiles using the instrument keypad, or using the the PC software (available from your supplier).
Either method allows quick and easy editing of profiles.
Note: There is a global block on profile creation or editing via Modbus while a profile is running.
An attempt to do so returns the error code 0x15.
The only profile related commands allowed while a profile runs are the Profile Control & Status
Parameters in the previous section.
Advanced users can setup or edit profiles by writing to the Profile Configuration parameter at address 8198
(0x2006). This can only be accessed by using Modbus function code 23 (0x17). The instrument replies with a
status message.
When creating a new profile the steps below must be followed exactly, either to create a profile at the next
available position, or at the position you specify.
Each message in the sequence includes a 2 byte Command Code that tells the instrument the purpose of the
message, and therefore the meaning of the data contained in it.
20.4.23.1
Instruction Sequence to create a profile at the next available position
1. Create a profile by writing the profile header data using the Command Code value CP (0x43, 0x50). This
starts the profile creation process by reserving a profile memory slot. The profile number is returned by the
instrument in the Edit Response Message.
2. Write the first segment using the Command Code value Code WS (0x57, 0x53). This command will fill the
next available segment position and link it to the profile created in step 1.
3. Write the second segment, again using Command Code WS. This fills the next available segment position
and links it to the segment created in step 2.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
189
4. Continue writing segments until the profile is complete (whilst remaining within the overall limit of 255
segments for all profiles combined). Each of these segments fills the next available position and links it to
the previous segment specified.
5. The very last segment of the profile must be one of the end type segments. Thereafter, no more segments can
be added to the specified profile. To add a segment to an existing profile the insert segment command must
be used.
20.4.23.2
Instruction Sequence to create a profile at a specified profile position
CAUTION: If this profile number is already in use then the profile header data is
overwritten but the segments associated with it are kept.
1. Determine which profile positions are being used by using the Command Code value PS (0x50, 0x53). This
command will return a list of all the profile positions currently being used.
2. Choose a location that is not being used and write the profile header data using the Command Code value
WP (0x57, 0x50).
The profile number is echoed back by the instrument in the Edit Response Message.
3. Write the first segment using the Command Code value Code WS (0x57, 0x53). This command will fill the
next available segment position and link it to the profile created in step 1.
4. Write the second segment, again using Command Code WS. This fills the next available segment position
and links it to the segment created in step 2.
5. Continue writing segments until the profile is complete (whilst remaining within the overall limit of 255
segments for all profiles combined). Each of these segments fills the next available position and links it to
the previous segment specified.
6. The very last segment of the profile must be one of the end type segments. Thereafter, no more segments can
be added to the specified profile. To add a segment to an existing profile the insert segment command must
be used.
20.4.23.3
Instruction Sequence to edit an existing Profile Header
When a profile header is changed, the segments associated with it remain unchanged. They must be edited
separately if required.
1. Determine the number of the profile to be edited. Use the Command Code value PS (0x50, 0x53) which
returns a list of all profile positions/numbers currently in use.
2. Write a new profile header data using the Command Code value EP (0x45, 0x50).
The profile number is echoed back by the instrument in the Edit Response Message.
20.4.23.4
Instruction Sequence to read a profile
1. Use the command RP to read the profile header data
2. Use the command RS to read the 1st segment’s data
3. Use the command RS to read the 2nd segment’s data.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until an end segment is reached.
190
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
The following rules apply when creating a profile over communications:
•
Profiles must always be terminated with an end segment.
•
Segments cannot be added after an end segment has been added.
•
All changes made to the selected profile are immediately saved in the instrument.
20.4.23.5
Creating or Editing a Profile Header
Creating Or Editing A Profile Header - Request (to instrument)
Field Name
Comments
Data
Dec
Hex
A/R
A/R
Function Code
23
17
Read Start Address High Byte
32
20
Read Start Address Low Byte
6
6
Read Quantity Of Registers High Byte
0
0
Read Quantity Of Registers Low Byte
1
1
Write Start Address High Byte
32
20
Write Start Address Low Byte
6
6
Write Quantity Of Registers High Byte
0
0
Unit Address
Write Quantity Of Registers Low Byte
Requires the multi read/write function.
20dec / 0x14hex if creating a profile at the
next available location.
21dec / 0x15hex if creating a profile at a
specified location, or editing a profile.
20 or 21
14 or 15
40 or 42
40dec / 0x28hex if creating a profile at the
next available location.
28 or 2A
42dec / 0x2Ahex if creating a profile at a
specified location, or editing a profile.
Byte Count
Command Code High Byte
67, 69 or
87
Command Code Low Byte
80
Profile Number High Byte
A/R
Profile Number Low Byte
A/R
October 2014
The network address ID of the instrument.
0x43hex (67dec) if creating a profile at the
next available location.
43, 45 or
45hex (69 dec) / 57hex (87dec) if creating a
57
profile at a specified location, or editing a
profile.
50
Note: The profile number is not included in
A/R
the message when creating a profile at the
A/R
next available position.
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
191
Profile Name Character 1
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 2
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 3
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 4
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 5
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 6
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 7
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 8
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 9
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 10
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 11
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 12
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 13
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 14
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 15
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 16
A/R
A/R
Profile Start Signal High Byte
0
0
Profile Start Signal Low Byte
A/R
A/R
Profile Start Time (Byte 4 - High)
A/R
(Floating point
number)
Profile Start Time (Byte 3)
Profile Start Time (Byte 2)
Profile Start Time (Byte 1 - Low)
Profile Start Day High Byte
0
0
A/R
A/R
Profile Starting Setpoint High
0
0
Profile Starting Setpoint Low
A/R
A/R
0
0
A/R
A/R
Profile Start Day Low Byte
Profile Recovery High Byte
Profile Recovery Low Byte
The ASCII codes equivalent to each of the
16 characters of the profile name, e.g.:
A = 65dec / 0x41, B = 66dec / 0x42 etc.
a = 97dec / 0x61, b = 98dec / 0x62 etc.
Valid characters are 0 to 9, a to z, A to Z,
plus ß ö ( ) - and _.
Note: Only valid characters from the
instruments supported character set should
be used
The space character (32dec / 0x20hex) is
used to fill any unused characters at the
end of the name.
0 = No delay, 1 = After delay, 2 = At
Time/day *2 only if recorder (RTC) fitted
The time, in elapsed seconds from the start
trigger, before a profile will begin if Start
Signal =1 (After Delay) or seconds from
midnight if Start Signal =2 (Time of Day)
Use zero if Start Signal =0 (No Delay)
1 = Monday, 2 = Tuesday, 3 = Wednesday,
4 = Thursday, 5 = Friday, 6 = Saturday, 7 =
Sunday, 8 = Monday to Friday, 9 = Monday
to Saturday, 10 = Saturday And Sunday,
11= All Week. Use 1 if no recorder fitted.
0 = Current Setpoint, 1 = Current Process
Variable Value
0 = Control to off, 1 = Restart profile, 2 =
Maintain last profile setpoint, 3 = Use
controller setpoint, 4 = Continue profile
from where it was when power failed
Profile Recovery Time (Byte 4 - high)
Profile Recovery Time (Byte 3)
Profile Recovery Time (Byte 2)
The Profile Recovery Time (before the
recovery action will be used after
power/signal returns).
Entered as elapsed seconds.
Use zero if no recorder fitted.
A/R
(Floating point
number)
Profile Recovery Time (Byte 1 - Low)
Profile Abort action High Byte
0
0
Profile Abort Action Low Byte
A/R
A/R
Profile Cycles High Byte
A/R
A/R
Profile Cycles Low Byte
A/R
A/R
Profile Number of Loops High Byte
0
0
Profile Number of Loops Low Byte
A/R
A/R
CRC High Byte
A/R
A/R
CRC Low Byte
A/R
A/R
0 = Control to off, 1 = Maintain last profile
setpoint, 2 = Use controller setpoint
1 to 9999 or 10,000 for “Infinite”
The number of loops to be controlled by the
profile: 1 or 2
The instrument replies to this message with an Edit Response Message.
192
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
20.4.23.6
Creating, Editing or Inserting Segments
Creating new segments is only possible when a new profile is being created (see above for instruction for
creating a profile at the next available position, or at a position that you specify). An error is returned if the
correct sequence is not followed.
The Insert Segment command is used to add segments to an existing profile (one that already has an end
segment). This inserts a new segment at the position specified.
The Edit Segment command is used to alter segments of an existing profile.
The segment number is in relation to the profile number, e.g. to edit or insert a segment at position 3 of profile 1
the segment number will be 3, and to edit or insert a segment at position 3 of profile 6 the segment number will
also be 3.
Creating, Editing or Inserting Segments - Request (to instrument)
Field Name
Unit Address
Comments
Data
Dec
Hex
A/R
A/R
Function Code
23
17
Read Start Address High Byte
32
20
Read Start Address Low Byte
6
6
Read Quantity Of Registers High
0
0
Read Quantity Of Registers Low
1
1
Write Start Address High
32
20
Write Start Address Low
6
6
Write Quantity Of Registers High
0
0
16 or 17
10 or 11
Create Segment (WS) = 16dec / 0x10hex
Insert Segment (IS) = 17dec / 0x11hex
Edit A Segment (ES) = 17dec / 0x11hex
32 or 34
20 or 22
Create Segment (WS) = 32dec / 0x20hex
Insert Segment (IS) = 34dec / 0x22hex
Edit A Segment (ES) = 34dec / 0x22hex
87, 69 or
73
57, 45 or
49
Create Segment (WS) = 87dec / 0x57hex
Insert Segment (IS) = 73dec / 0x49hex
Edit A Segment (ES) = 69dec / 0x45hex
Command Code Low Byte
83
53
Profile Number High Byte
A/R
A/R
Profile Number Low Byte
A/R
A/R
Segment Position High Byte
A/R
A/R
A/R
A/R
0
0
A/R
A/R
Write Quantity Of Registers Low
Byte Count
Command Code High Byte
Segment Position Low Byte
Segment Type High Byte
Segment Type Low Byte
The network address ID of the instrument.
Requires the multi read/write function.
Profile number to place this segment in (IS,
ES) or append to (WS)
Note: The Segment Position is not
included in the message when creating a
segment at the next available position.
0 = Ramp Time, 1 = Ramp Rate*
2 = Step, 3 = Dwell, 4 = Hold, 5 = Loop
6 = Join, 7 = End, 8 = Repeat sequence
then end
(*1 is not valid for 2 loop profiles)
Segment Info A (Byte 4 - High)
Segment Info A (Byte 3)
Segment Info A (Byte 2)
A/R
(Floating point
number)
The meaning of the data contained in
Segment Info A depends on the type of
segment it relates to. See below.
Segment Info A (Byte 1 - Low)
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
193
Segment Info B (Byte 4 - High)
A/R
(Floating point
number)
The meaning of the data contained in
Segment Info B depends on the type of
segment it relates to. See below.
Auto Hold Type Loop 1 High Byte
A/R
A/R
Auto Hold Type Loop 1 Low Byte
A/R
A/R
0 = Auto-Hold Off, 1 = Hold above SP, 2 =
Hold below SP,
3 = Hold above and below SP
Segment Info B (Byte 3)
Segment Info B (Byte 2)
Segment Info B (Byte 1 - Low)
Auto Hold Value Loop 1 (Byte 4 High)
Auto Hold Value Loop 1 (Byte 3)
A/R
(Floating point
number)
Auto Hold Value Loop 1 (Byte 2)
Auto Hold Value Loop 1 (Byte 1 Low)
Events High Byte
Events Low Byte
Segment Info B Loop 2 (Byte 4 High)
Segment Info B Loop 2 (Byte 3)
0
0
A/R
A/R
A/R
(Floating point
number)
Segment Info B Loop 2 (Byte 2)
Segment Info B Loop 2 (Byte 1 Low)
Auto Hold Type Loop 2 High Byte
A/R
A/R
Auto Hold Type Loop 2 Low Byte
A/R
A/R
Auto Hold Value Loop 2 (Byte 4 High)
Auto Hold Value Loop 2 (Byte 3)
Auto Hold Value Loop 2 (Byte 2)
A/R
(Floating point
number)
Auto Hold Value Loop 2 (Byte 1 Low)
CRC High Byte
A/R
A/R
CRC Low Byte
A/R
A/R
20.4.23.7
The distance loop 1 can be way from
setpoint before Auto-Hold activates.
The status of the five events are defined by
the lowest 5 bits of the low byte. A bit value
of 1 signifies the event is on.
Bit 0 = event 1, bit 1 = event 2, bit 2 =
event 3 bit 3 = event 4 and bit 4 = event 5.
The meaning of the data contained in
Segment Info B depends on the type of
segment it relates to. See below.
(write 0 for single loop profiles)
0 = Auto-Hold Off, 1 = Hold above SP, 2 =
Hold below SP,3 - Hold above and below
SP (write 0 for single loop profiles).
The distance loop 2 can be way from
setpoint before Auto-Hold activates.
(write 0 for single loop profiles).
Segment Data
The Segment Data is included in the command message when creating, editing or inserting segments (see
above). It is provided in two parts (Segment Info A and B).
The meaning of the data contained in Segment Info A and B depends on the type of segment it relates to. Null is
shown for unused data, these data values should be set to zero when writing the segment data.
Segment Type
Segment
Info
A
Description
B
Ramp Time
Time
Target
setpoint
Ramp to the target setpoint “B” in the time “A”
Ramp Rate
Ramp rate
Target
setpoint
Ramp to the target setpoint “B” at the ramp
rate “A”
Step
Null (0)
Target
setpoint
Step to a target setpoint “B”
Dwell
Dwell time
Null (0)
Hold
0 = Operator
Null (0)
Stay at the current setpoint for a period of time
“A”
Wait for the operator to release the hold
194
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
1 = Time of
day
Start Time
Wait until time of the day “B” in seconds since
midnight (recorder only).
2 = Digital
input
Null (0)
Wait for digital input signal
Loop
Number of
times to
repeat 1 to
9999
Segment
number
Join
Null (0)
Profile
number
Loop to the specified segment number “B”
from this point. Repeat this “A” times.
Note: Only segments below the current
segment can be entered. Two "loop-backs"
must not cross each other.
On completion of this profile jump run profile
“B”
End
0 = Control
off
Null (0)
1 = Maintain
profile
setpoint
Null (0)
2 = Use
controller
setpoint
Null (0)
Use the active controller setpoint (e.g. Main or
Alternate as selected). This exits from Profiler
Mode back to Controller Mode.
0 = Outputs
off
Number of
times to
repeat
sequence
Repeat the profile sequence number “B” times,
then turn off the control outputs
Repeat Sequence Then End
1 = Maintain
profile
setpoint
Turn off all control outputs on the loop(s)
controlled by the profile. Doesn't affect loop 2
on single loop profiles.
Stay at the final setpoint of the profile
2 = Use
controller
setpoint
Repeat the profile sequence number “B” times,
then hold the last profile setpoint.
Repeat the profile sequence number “B” times,
then use the active controller setpoint (e.g.
Main or Alternate as selected). This exits from
Profiler Mode back to Controller Mode.
The instrument replies to this message with an Edit Response Message.
20.4.23.8
Deleting All or Single Profiles
An individual profile can be deleted, or all profiles can be deleted with a single message.
Deleting a profile removes the header of the specified profile and any segments associated with it. Delete all
profiles wipes all profiles and segments from the instrument.
Delete Profiles - Request (to instrument)
Field Name
Comments
Data
Dec
Hex
A/R
A/R
Function Code
23
17
Read Start Address High Byte
32
20
Read Start Address Low Byte
6
6
Read Quantity Of Registers High
0
0
Read Quantity Of Registers Low
1
1
Write Start Address High
32
20
Write Start Address Low
6
6
Write Quantity Of Registers High
0
0
Write Quantity Of Registers Low
02 or
01
02 or
01
Unit Address
October 2014
The network address ID of the instrument.
Requires the multi read/write function
Delete A Profile (DP) = 02dec / 0x02hex
Delete All Profiles (DA) = 01dec / 0x01hex
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
195
Byte Count
04 or
02
04 or
02
Command Code High Byte
68
44
Command Code Low Byte
80 or
65
50 or
41
Profile Number High Byte
A/R
A/R
Profile Number Low Byte
A/R
A/R
CRC High Byte
A/R
A/R
CRC Low Byte
A/R
A/R
Delete A Profile (DP) = 04dec / 0x04hex
Delete All Profiles (DA) = 02dec / 0x02hex
Delete A Profile (DP) = 80dec / 0x50hex
Delete All Profiles (DA) = 65dec / 0x41hex
Note: The profile number is not included in the
message when deleting all profiles.
The instrument replies to this message with an Edit Response Message.
20.4.23.9
Delete a Segment
The delete segment command deletes the specified segment from the specified profile. The following segments
are moved up one place in the profile (e.g. if segment 6 is deleted segment 7 becomes segment 6).
Delete A Segment - Request (to instrument)
Field Name
Data
Comments
(Dec)
(Hex)
A/R
A/R
Function Code
23
17
Read Start Address High Byte
32
20
Read Start Address Low Byte
6
6
Read Quantity Of Registers High
0
0
Read Quantity Of Registers Low
1
1
Write Start Address High
32
20
Write Start Address Low
6
6
Write Quantity Of Registers High
0
0
Write Quantity Of Registers Low
3
3
Byte Count
6
6
Command Code High Byte
68
44
Command Code Low Byte
83
53
Profile Number High Byte
A/R
A/R
Profile Number Low Byte
A/R
A/R
Segment Number High Byte
A/R
A/R
Segment Number Low Byte
A/R
A/R
CRC High Byte
A/R
A/R
CRC Low Byte
A/R
A/R
Unit Address
The ID address of the instrument
Requires the multi read/write function
The instrument replies to this message with an Edit Response Message.
196
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
20.4.23.10
Get Segments Remaining
Returns the number of unused segments remaining in the instrument. The number will be between 0 and 255,
depending on how many have been used in the profiles so far created.
Get Segments Remaining - Request (to instrument)
Field Name
Comments
Data
Dec
Hex
A/R
A/R
Function Code
23
17
Read Start Address High Byte
32
20
Read Start Address Low Byte
6
6
Read Quantity Of Registers High
0
0
Read Quantity Of Registers Low
1
1
Write Start Address High
32
20
Write Start Address Low
6
6
Write Quantity Of Registers High
0
0
Write Quantity Of Registers Low
1
1
Byte Count
2
2
Command Code High Byte
83
53
Command Code Low Byte
82
52
CRC High Byte
A/R
A/R
CRC Low Byte
A/R
A/R
Unit Address
The ID address of the instrument as required
Requires the multi read/write function
The instrument replies to this message with an Edit Response Message.
20.4.23.11
Edit Response Message from Instrument
The instrument replies to each profile or segment creation, edit or delete message with an Edit Response
Message. The same format is used when replying to the Get Segments Remaining request.
Edit Response Message - Response (from instrument)
Field Name
Comments
Data
Dec
Hex
A/R
A/R
Function Code
23
17
Byte Count
2
2
Command Response High Byte
A/R
A/R
Command Response Low Byte
A/R
A/R
CRC High Byte
A/R
A/R
CRC Low Byte
A/R
A/R
Unit Address
20.4.23.12
The ID address of the instrument
The multi read/write function
Two data bytes containing the Command
Response data (see below)
Command Response Data
The data contained in the Edit Response Message returned after each profile or segment edit message is shown
below. The data seen can be an error code, the number of unused segments or the profile number following a
successful profile header creation/edit.
The error code shown will be as appropriate for the request message and instrument status.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
197
Command Response Name
Response
Description
Profile Number
Low
Byte
A/R
High
Byte
A/R
The number of the profile created or edited
Segments Remaining
A/R
A/R
The number of unused segments remaining
Command Successfully
0x4F
0x4B
The command requested was executed without error
Command Not Recognized
0xFF
0xFF
The command is not recognized
Profile Number Invalid
0xF0
0x00
The profile number specified is not available.
Profile Name Invalid
0xF0
0x01
The profile name/characters are not valid
Start Signal Invalid
0xF0
0x02
The start signal is not recognized
Start Time Invalid
0xF0
0x03
The specified time is not within range
Start Day Invalid
0xF0
0x04
The specified day is not recognized
Starting Setpoint Invalid
0xF0
0x05
The specified starting setpoint is not recognized
Profile Recovery Invalid
0xF0
0x06
The profile recovery is not recognized
Recovery Time Invalid
0xF0
0x07
The recovery time is not within limits
Abort Action Invalid
0xF0
0x08
The abort action is not recognized
Profile Cycles Invalid
0xF0
0x09
The number of profile cycles is not within limits
Segment Number Invalid
0xF0
0x0A
The segment number is not valid for this profile
Segment Type Invalid
0xF0
0x0B
The segment type is not recognized
Segment Info A Invalid
0xF0
0x0C
Segment information A not valid for the type defined
Segment Info B Invalid
0xF0
0x0D
Segment information B is not valid for the type defined
Write Length Invalid
0xF0
0x12
The number of parameters to be written are invalid for
the function requested
Segment Setpoint Clamped
0xF0
0x13
The setpoint value entered was out of bounds. It has
been clamped within the units setpoint limits.
Segment Not Written
0xF0
0x14
The segment has not been written
Profiler Running
0xF0
0x15
The profiler is currently running so cannot be edited
Loop 1 Auto Hold Value Invalid
0xF0
0x16
The auto hold value is not within input span
Loop 2 Auto Hold Value Invalid
0xF0
0x17
The auto hold value is not within input span
Invalid number of loops
0xF0
0x18
The number of loops is not recognised
Deleting End Segment Is Invalid
0xF0
0x19
Deleting final segment (End, Join or Repeat) is denied
Already Editing A Profile
0xF0
0x1A
Finish editing the profile before starting another edit
20.4.23.13
Read a Profile Header Request & Response Sequence
Read A Profile Header - Request (to instrument)
Field Name
Comments
Data
Dec
Hex
A/R
A/R
Function Code
23
17
Read Start Address High Byte
32
20
Read Start Address Low Byte
6
6
Unit Address
198
The ID address of the instrument
Requires the multi read/write function
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Read Quantity Of Registers High Byte
0
0
Read Quantity Of Registers Low Byte
19
13
Write Start Address High Byte
32
20
Write Start Address Low Byte
6
6
Write Quantity Of Registers High Byte
0
0
Write Quantity Of Registers Low Byte
2
2
Byte Count
4
4
Command Code High Byte
82
52
Command Code Low Byte
80
50
Profile Number High Byte
A/R
A/R
Profile Number Low Byte
A/R
A/R
CRC High Byte
A/R
A/R
CRC Low Byte
A/R
A/R
Profile number from 0 to 63
The instrument replies to the Read A Profile Header request as follows:
Read Profile Header - Response (from instrument)
Field Name
Comments
Data
Dec
Hex
A/R
A/R
Function Code
23
17
Byte Count
38
26
A/R
A/R
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 3
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 4
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 5
A/R
A/R
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 7
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 8
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 9
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 10
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 11
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 12
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 13
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 14
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 15
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 16
Unit Address
Profile Name Character 1
The ID address of the instrument
The multi read/write function
Profile Name Character 2
Profile Name Character 6
A/R
A/R
Profile Start Signal High Byte
0
0
Profile Start Signal Low Byte
A/R
A/R
October 2014
The ASCII codes equivalent to each of the 16
characters of the profile name, e.g.:
A = 65dec / 0x41, B = 66dec / 0x42 etc.
a = 97dec / 0x61, b = 98dec / 0x62 etc.
0 = No delay, 1 = After delay, 2 = At Time/day
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
199
Profile Start Time (Byte 4 - High)
Profile Start Time (Byte 3)
Profile Start Time (Byte 2)
Profile Start Time (Byte 1 - Low)
Profile Start Day High Byte
A/R
(Floating
point
number)
0
0
A/R
A/R
Profile Starting Setpoint High
0
0
Profile Starting Setpoint Low
A/R
A/R
0
0
A/R
A/R
Profile Start Day Low Byte
Profile Recovery High Byte
Profile Recovery Low Byte
Profile Recovery Time (Byte 4 - high)
The time, in elapsed seconds, from the start
trigger before a profile will begin if Start Signal
=1 (After Delay) or seconds from midnight if
Start Signal =2 (Time of Day)
Is zero if Start Signal =0 (No Delay)
1 = Monday, 2 = Tuesday, 3 = Wednesday, 4
= Thursday, 5 = Friday, 6 = Saturday, 7 =
Sunday, 8 = Monday to Friday, 9 = Monday to
Saturday, 10 = Saturday And Sunday, 11= All
Week
0 = Current Setpoint, 1 = Current Process
Value
0 = Control to off, 1 = Restart profile, 2 =
Maintain last profile setpoint, 3 = Use
controller setpoint, 4 = Continue profile from
where it was when power failed
A/R
(Floating
point
number)
The Profile Recovery Time (before the
recovery action will be used after power/signal
returns) in elapsed seconds.
Is zero if no recorder (RTC) fitted - function
not possible
Profile Abort action High Byte
0
0
Profile Abort Action Low Byte
A/R
A/R
0 = Control to off, 1 = Maintain last profile
setpoint, 2 = Use controller setpoint
Profile Cycles High Byte
A/R
A/R
Profile Cycles Low Byte
Profile Recovery Time (Byte 3)
Profile Recovery Time (Byte 2)
Profile Recovery Time (Byte 1 - Low)
A/R
A/R
Profile Number of Loops High Byte
0
0
Profile Number of Loops Low Byte
A/R
A/R
CRC High Byte
A/R
A/R
CRC Low Byte
A/R
A/R
20.4.23.14
1 to 9999 or 10,000 for “Infinite”
The number of loops controlled by the profile:
1 or 2
Read a Segment
Read A Segment - Request (to instrument)
Field Name
Comments
Data
Dec
Hex
A/R
A/R
Function Code
23
17
Read Start Address High Byte
32
20
Read Start Address Low Byte
6
6
Read Quantity Of Registers High Byte
0
0
Read Quantity Of Registers Low Byte
17
11
Write Start Address High Byte
22
16
Write Start Address Low Byte
6
6
Write Quantity Of Registers High Byte
0
0
Write Quantity Of Registers Low Byte
3
3
Byte Count
6
6
Command Code High Byte
82
52
Command Code Low Byte
83
53
Unit Address
200
The ID address of the instrument
Requires the multi read/write function
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Profile Number High Byte
A/R
A/R
Profile Number Low Byte
A/R
A/R
Segment Number High Byte
A/R
A/R
Segment Number Low Byte
A/R
A/R
CRC High Byte
A/R
A/R
CRC Low Byte
A/R
A/R
The instrument replies to the Read A Segment request as follows:
Read A Segment - Response (from instrument)
Field Name
Comments
Data
Dec
Hex
A/R
A/R
Function Code
23
17
Byte Count
34
22
Command Response High Byte
82
52
Command Response Low Byte
83
53
Profile Number High Byte
A/R
A/R
Profile Number Low Byte
A/R
A/R
Segment Number High Byte
A/R
A/R
Segment Number Low Byte
A/R
A/R
Segment Type High Byte
0
0
Segment Type Low Byte
A/R
A/R
Unit Address
Segment Info A (Byte 4 - High)
Segment Info A (Byte 3)
Segment Info A (Byte 2)
Segment Info A (Byte 1 - Low)
Segment Info B (Byte 4 - High)
Segment Info B (Byte 3)
Segment Info B (Byte 2)
Segment Info B (Byte 1 - Low)
A/R
(Floating
point
number)
A/R
(Floating
point
number)
Auto Hold Type Loop 1 High Byte
A/R
A/R
Auto Hold Type Loop 1 Low Byte
A/R
A/R
Auto Hold Value Loop 1 (Byte 4 - High)
Auto Hold Value Loop 1 (Byte 3)
Auto Hold Value Loop 1 (Byte 2)
Auto Hold Value Loop 1 (Byte 1 - Low)
Events High Byte
Events Low Byte
Segment Info B Loop 2 (Byte 4 - High)
Segment Info B Loop 2 (Byte 3)
Segment Info B Loop 2 (Byte 2)
Segment Info B Loop 2 (Byte 1 - Low)
October 2014
A/R
(Floating
point
number)
0
0
A/R
A/R
A/R
(Floating
point
number)
The ID address of the instrument
The multi read/write function
0 = Ramp Time, 1 = Ramp Rate, 2 = Step, 3 =
Dwell, 4 = Hold, 5 = Loop, 6 = Join, 7 = End, 8 =
Repeat sequence then end
The meaning of the data contained in
Segment Info A depends on the type of
segment it relates to. See below.
The meaning of the data contained in
Segment Info B depends on the type of
segment it relates to. See below.
0 = Auto-Hold Off, 1 = Hold above SP, 2 = Hold
below SP,3 - Hold above and below SP
The distance loop 2 can be way from setpoint
before Auto-Hold activates.
The status of the five events are defined by the
lowest 5 bits of the low byte. A bit value of 1
signifies the event is on.
Bit 0 = event 1, bit 1 = event 2, bit 2 = event 3, bit
3 = event 4 and bit 4 = event 5.
The meaning of the data contained in
Segment Info B depends on the type of
segment it relates to. See below.
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
201
Auto Hold Type Loop 2 High Byte
A/R
A/R
Auto Hold Type Loop 2 Low Byte
A/R
A/R
0 = Auto-Hold Off, 1 = Hold above SP, 2 = Hold
below SP,3 - Hold above and below SP
Auto Hold Value Loop 2 (Byte 4 - High)
A/R
(Floating
point
number)
Auto Hold Value Loop 2 (Byte 3)
Auto Hold Value Loop 2 (Byte 2)
Auto Hold Value Loop 2 (Byte 1 - Low)
CRC High Byte
A/R
A/R
CRC Low Byte
A/R
A/R
20.4.23.15
The distance loop 2 can be way from setpoint
before Auto-Hold activates.
(Always 0 when profile only controls a single
loop)
Segment Data
The Segment Data is included in the response to a Read Segment request. It is provided in two parts (Segment
Info A and B).
The meaning of the data contained in Segment Info A and B depends on the type of segment it relates to. Null is
shown for unused data, this can be any value.
Segment Type
Segment Info
A
Description
B
Ramp Time
Time
Target
setpoint
Ramp to the target setpoint “B” in the time “A”
Ramp Rate
Ramp rate
Target
setpoint
Ramp to the target setpoint “B” at the ramp
rate “A”
Step
Null (0)
Target
setpoint
Step to a target setpoint “B”
Dwell
Dwell time
Null (0)
Stay at the current setpoint for time “A”
Hold
0 = Operator
Null (0)
1 = Time of
day
Start Time
Wait for the operator to release the hold or
Digital Input
Wait until time of the day “B” in seconds since
midnight (recorder only).
Loop
Number of
times to
repeat 1 to
9999
Segment
number
Loop to the specified segment number “B”
from this point. Repeat this “A” times. Only
segments below the current segment can be
entered. Two loops must not cross each other.
Join
Null (0)
Profile
number
On completion of this profile run profile “B”
End
0 = Control
off
Null (0)
Turn off all control outputs.
1 = Maintain
profile
setpoint
Null (0)
Stay at the final setpoint of the profile
2 = Use
controller
setpoint
Null (0)
Use the active controller setpoint.
0 = Outputs
off
Number of
times to
repeat
sequence
Repeat the profile sequence number “B” times,
then turn off the control outputs
Repeat Sequence Then End
1 = Maintain
profile
setpoint
2 = Use
controller
setpoint
202
Repeat the profile sequence number “B” times,
then hold the last profile setpoint.
Repeat the profile sequence number “B” times,
then use the active controller setpoint.
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
20.4.23.16
Read a Profile Name
This command requests the name of a specific profile. The instrument responds with the name of the profile
number requested.
Read Profile Name - Request (to instrument)
Field Name
Comments
Data
Dec
Hex
A/R
A/R
Function Code
23
17
Read Start Address High Byte
32
20
Read Start Address Low Byte
6
6
Read Quantity Of Registers High Byte
0
0
Read Quantity Of Registers Low Byte
8
8
Write Start Address High Byte
32
20
Write Start Address Low Byte
6
6
Write Quantity Of Registers High Byte
0
0
Write Quantity Of Registers Low Byte
2
2
Byte Count
4
4
Command Code High Byte
80
50
Command Code Low Byte
78
4E
Profile Number High Byte
A/R
A/R
Profile Number Low Byte
A/R
A/R
CRC High Byte
A/R
A/R
CRC Low Byte
A/R
A/R
Unit Address
The ID address of the instrument
Requires the multi read/write function
The instrument replies to the Read Profile Name request as follows:
Read Profile Name - Response (from instrument)
Field Name
Comments
Data
Dec
Hex
A/R
A/R
Function Code
23
17
Byte Count
Unit Address
16
10
Profile Name Character 1
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 2
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 3
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 4
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 5
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 6
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 7
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 8
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 9
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 10
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 11
A/R
A/R
October 2014
The ID address of the instrument
The multi read/write function
The ASCII codes equivalent to each of the 16
characters of the profile name, e.g. :
A = 65dec / 0x41, B = 66dec / 0x42 etc.
a = 97dec / 0x61, b = 98dec / 0x62
The space character (32dec / 0x20hex) is used
to fill any unused characters at the end of the
name.
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
203
Profile Name Character 12
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 13
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 14
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 15
A/R
A/R
Profile Name Character 16
A/R
A/R
CRC High Byte
A/R
A/R
CRC Low Byte
A/R
A/R
20.4.23.17
Read Profile Memory Status
This command returns the status of the profile memory used. The response to this command is to return a table
of all the profile numbers that are in use. A value of 0x00 indicates that the profile position is free and value of
0x01 indicates that the position is used by a profile. Using this command in conjunction with the read profile
name command can be used to create a directory of profile numbers and profile names.
Read Profile Memory Status - Request (to instrument)
Field Name
Comments
Data
Dec
Hex
A/R
A/R
Function Code
23
17
Read Start Address High Byte
32
20
Read Start Address Low Byte
6
6
Read Quantity Of Registers High Byte
0
0
Read Quantity Of Registers Low Byte
32
20
Write Start Address High Byte
32
20
Write Start Address Low Byte
6
6
Write Quantity Of Registers High Byte
0
0
Write Quantity Of Registers Low Byte
1
1
Byte Count
2
2
Command Code High Byte
80
50
Command Code Low Byte
83
53
CRC High Byte
A/R
A/R
CRC Low Byte
A/R
A/R
Unit Address
The ID address of the instrument
Requires the multi read/write function
The instrument replies to the Read Profile Memory Status request as follows:
204
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
20.4.23.18
Read Profile Status
Read Profile Memory Status - Response (from instrument)
Field Name
Data
Unit Address
Function Code
Byte Count
Dec
Hex
A/R
A/R
23
17
Profile 1 Position
etc…..
0 or
1
0 or
1
0 or
1
0 or
1
CRC High Byte
A/R
A/R
CRC Low Byte
A/R
A/R
Profile 63 Position
October 2014
The ID address of the instrument
The multi read/write function
64
40
0 or 0 or
1
1
0 or 0 or
1
1
Profile 0 Position
Profile 62 Position
Comments
For each of the 64 possible profile positions, a
value of 0 is returned if the position is free, or 1 if
the position is empty.
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
205
21 Glossary
21.1 Active Setpoint
The term Active Setpoint is used to describe the currently selected setpoint when the instrument is in controller
mode. Controllers can use the Main local setpoint and/or the Alternate Setpoint. Only one of the setpoints can
be active at any time. During profiler control, the setpoint value is controlled by the profiler function.
Also refer to: Actual Setpoint; Alternate Setpoint; Controller Mode; Local Setpoints; Profiler Mode;
Remote Setpoint; Setpoint; and Setpoint Selection.
21.2 Actual Setpoint
Actual Setpoint is the effective current value of the active setpoint. This will be different to the setpoints target
value during setpoint ramps. The actual setpoint will rise or fall at the ramp-rate set, until it reaches its target
setpoint value. During profile control, the actual setpoint value is controlled by the profiler function.
Also refer to: Active Setpoint; Controller Mode; Profiler Mode; Setpoint; Setpoint Ramp Rate and
Setpoint Selection.
21.3 Alarm Activation Inhibit
Alarm Inhibit prevents unwanted alarm activation at power-up or when the controller setpoint is changed. The
alarm activation is inhibited until a ‘Safe’ (non-alarm) condition is present. The alarm operates normally from
that point onwards. E.g. if inhibited, a low alarm will not activate at power-up, until the process has first risen
above the alarm point and then falls back below. This parameter is in addition to the alarm minimum duration
setting.
Also refer to: Alarm Duration Inhibit; Alarm Types and Alarm Operation.
21.4 Alarm Configuration
A sub-menu of the configuration menu, used to adjust the alarm parameters (alarm types, values, hysteresis,
minimum duration and inhibiting).
Also refer to: Alarm Hysteresis; Alarm Inhibit; Alarm Operation; Alarm Types and Configuration Mode.
21.5 Alarm Duration Inhibit
An adjustable alarm configuration time. After an alarm trigger point is passed, the alarm is inhibited from
activation until this time has elapsed. If the alarm trigger is removed before the time has passed (e.g. the process
falls back below a high alarm value) the alarm will not activate at all. The time duration inhibit is not applied
when an alarm condition ends.
This parameter is in addition to the alarm activation inhibit.
Also refer to: Alarm Hysteresis; Alarm Inhibit; Alarm Operation; Alarm Types and Configuration Mode.
Alarm Hysteresis
An adjustable band through which the process variable must pass before the alarm will change state. The band
is always on the “safe” side of an alarm point, e.g. a high alarm’s hysteresis band is below the high alarm value,
and a low alarm’s hysteresis is above the low alarm value.
Refer to the Alarm Hysteresis Operation diagram on the next page.
Also refer to: Alarm Duration Inhibit; Alarm Types; Loop Alarm; Alarm Operation; LSD; Process
Variable; and Rate Of Change Alarm.
206
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Inactive
Inactive
Active
Figure 63. Alarm Hysteresis Operation
PROCESS HIGH
ALARM
Alarm Value
Alarm Hysteresis Value
Process Variable
Process Variable
Alarm Hysteresis Value
PROCESS LOW
ALARM
Alarm Value
Inactive
Inactive
Active
Alarm Value
(from Setpoint)
Alarm Hysteresis Value
Process Variable
BAND ALARM
Setpoint
Alarm Hysteresis Value
Alarm Value
(from Setpoint)
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
Active
Active
Active
Inactive
Inactive
Alarm Value
(from Setpoint)
DEVIATION HIGH
ALARM
Alarm Hysteresis Value
Process Variable
Setpoint
Setpoint
Process Variable
Alarm Hysteresis Value
DEVIATION LOW
ALARM
Alarm Value
(from Setpoint)
Alarm Inactive
Alarm Inactive
Alarm Active
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
207
21.6 Alarm Operation
The process and control deviation alarm types are illustrated, together with the action of any associated outputs.
Also refer to: Alarm Hysteresis; Alarm Inhibit; Alarm Types; Band Alarm Value; Deviation Alarm;
Latching Relay; Logical Alarm Combinations; Loop Alarm; Process High Alarm and Process Low
Alarm.
Output Off
Process High Alarm
Alarm Off
Direct Acting
Alarm
Output Om
Process High Alarm
Alarm Off
Reverse Acting
Alarm
Output On
Process Low Alarm
Alarm On
Direct Acting
Alarm
Output Off
Process Low Alarm
Alarm On
Reverse Acting
Alarm
Band Alarm
Direct Acting
Output On
Alarm On
Output On
Alarm On
Value
Output Off
Alarm On
Reverse Acting
Output Off
Process Variable
Value
Output Off
Alarm Off
Value
Process Variable
Output On
Alarm Off
Value
Output
Off
Alarm
Off
Alarm Value
Band Alarm
Process Variable
Process Variable
Output On
Alarm On
Alarm Value
Output On
Alarm On
Alarm
Output Off
Alarm On
Off
Alarm Value
Alarm Value
Deviation High
Direct Acting
Alarm Value
Deviation High
Output On
Alarm (+ve values)
Alarm Off
Reverse Acting
Alarm (+ve values)
Alarm Value
Alarm (+ve values)
Reverse Acting
Process Variable
Output Off
Alarm On
Process Variable
Output On Output Off
Alarm On Alarm Off
Direct Acting
Deviation Low
Process Variable
Output Off Output On
Alarm Off Alarm On
Alarm (+ve values)
Deviation Low
Process Variable
Alarm Value
Output Off
Process Variable
Output On
Alarm On Alarm Off
Alarm Value
Figure 64. Alarm Operation
Process Variable
Setpoint
21.7 Alarm Types
There are three basic alarm types, Process Alarms, Control Deviation Alarms and Event Based Alarms; plus
some special condition alarms.
Process Alarms are based on the absolute value of the Process Variable. If the PV rises above a high alarm
value, or falls below a low alarm value, the alarm will become active. Control Deviation Alarms are based on
the value of the Control Deviation error. If the PV is more than the high deviation alarm value above setpoint,
208
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
or more than the low deviation alarm value below setpoint, the alarm will become active.
Event based alarms activate when the condition for that alarm type is true. These can be Signal Break, Low
Memory or Loop Alarms.
Rate of Signal Change Alarm is based on the rate of change of the PV. If the rate of change is greater than the
alarm value for longer than the Minimum Duration time, the alarm will activate. Control Power High and
Control Power Low alarms are based on the output power from the PID control algorithm.
Also refer to: Alarm Operation; Band Alarm Value; Control Deviation; Control Power Alarm; Deviation
Alarm; Loop Alarm; PID; Process High Alarm; Process Low Alarm; Process Variable; Rate Of
Change Alarm; and Setpoint.
21.8 Alternate Setpoint
The instrument can use one of two setpoints (Main or Alternate). The alternate setpoint can be chosen from
Local Setpoint 2 or a remote setpoint input from Auxiliary Input A if fitted. One setpoint can be chosen as the
active at using the setpoint selection screen.
Also refer to: Auxiliary Input; Local Setpoints; Main Setpoint; Profiler; Remote Setpoints; Setpoint and
Setpoint Select.
21.9 Auto Pre-Tune
When the auto pre-tune is enabled, a pre-tune activation is attempted at every power-up (Standard Pre-Tune
activation rules apply). Auto pre-tune is useful when the process to be controlled may vary significantly each
time it is run. Auto pre-tune ensures that the process is tuned correctly each time the process is started. Selftune may also be engaged to fine-tune the controller.
Also refer to: Pre-Tune; Self-Tune; PID and Tuning.
21.10 Automatic Reset
- Refer to Integral Action
21.11 Auxiliary Input
A secondary linear input module can be installed in option slot A to provide a remote setpoint input. Signals can
be mA, or VDC. The 2nd Universal input can also be used as an auxiliary input if fitted.
Also refer to: Alternate Setpoint; Digital Input; Linear Input; mADC; Remote Setpoint and VDC
21.12 Auxiliary Input Lower Limit
When auxiliary input A is used to provide a remote setpoint (RSP), this setting defines the Alternate Setpoint
value when the auxiliary input signal is at its minimum value (e.g. for 4 to 20mA, the value when 4mA is
applied). However, the setpoint is always constrained by the setpoint limits.
Also refer to: Alternate Setpoint; Auxiliary Input; Auxiliary Input Upper Limit; Auxiliary Input Offset;
Remote Setpoint; Setpoint and Setpoint Upper Limit and Setpoint Lower Limit.
21.13 Auxiliary Input Offset
Used to adjust the value of auxiliary input A if it provides a Remote Setpoint. Positive values are added to the
remote setpoint value, negative values are subtracted, but the setpoint is still constrained by the setpoint limits.
Also refer to: Auxiliary Input; Remote Setpoint; Scaled Input Upper Limit; Scaled Input Lower Limit
Setpoint Lower Limit and Setpoint Upper Limit.
21.14 Auxiliary Input Type
Defines the type and range of the linear input signal for auxiliary input A. It can be mADC or VDC. This can be
used as a Remote Setpoint input.
Also refer to: Remote Setpoint and Setpoint.
21.15 Auxiliary Input Upper Limit
When the auxiliary input is used to provide a Remote Setpoint (RSP), this setting defines the value of the RSP
when the auxiliary input signal is at its maximum value (e.g. for 4 to 20mA, the value when 20mA is applied).
However, the RSP value is always constrained by the setpoint limits.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
209
Also refer to: Auxiliary Input; Auxiliary Input Lower Limit; Auxiliary Input Offset; Remote Setpoint;
Setpoint and Setpoint Upper Limit and Setpoint Lower Limit.
21.16 Band Alarm Value
The amount of control deviation that is acceptable before a Band Alarm is activated. If the process variable is
more than the value of this band from the actual setpoint, the alarm will be active.
Also refer to: Actual Setpoint; Alarm Operation; Alarm Types; Control Deviation; Input Span; LSD and
Process Variable.
21.17 Bar Graphs
The instrument displays uni or bi-directional bar-graphs in the operation mode for loop 1 & 2 PID power (single
control = 0 to 100%, dual control = -100% to +100%), control deviation (-5% to +5%) and % Recorder
Memory Used (0 to 100%). In Profiler Mode, profile & current segment bar-graphs are shown (0 to 100%).
Also refer to: Control Deviation; Data Recorder; Display Configuration; Operation Mode; Main Menu;
PID and Profiler.
21.18 Bias
- Refer to Manual Reset.
21.19 Bumpless Transfer
A method used to prevent sudden changes to the correcting variable, when switching between automatic PI or
PID and Manual control modes. During a transition from PI or PID to manual control, the initial manual power
value is set to the previous automatic mode value. The operator then adjusts the value as required. During a
transition from manual control to PI or PID, the initial automatic value is set to the previous manual mode
value. The correcting variable level will gradually adjusted by the control algorithm at a rate dependant on the
integral action resulting from the integral time constant value. A similar Bumpless transfer is used with Gain
Scheduling when switching PID Sets. Since integral action is essential to Bumpless Transfer, this feature is not
available if integral is turned off.
Also refer to: Correcting Variable; Gain Scheduling; Integral Action; Manual Mode; PI and PID.
21.20 Calibration
Adjustment or correction of the displayed values relative to the actual measured values.
Refer to the User Calibration section of this manual for calibration use and instructions.
Also refer to: Multi-point Scaling and Process Variable.
21.21 Cascade Control
Applications with long time lags (e.g. indirect heat via hot water jackets) can be difficult to control with a single
control loop. The solution is to split the process into two (or more) cascaded loops consisting of a Master and
Slave acting on a common actuator. The 2-loop version with built-in cascade feature is ideal for this type of
application, although it can be achieved with two discrete controllers, one with a setpoint retransmission output
and the other with a remote setpoint input.
The master controller measures the main process variable and compares it to the desired product setpoint. Its
PID output becomes the slave’s effective setpoint (scaled to suit the process). This is compared the slave’s
process input, and the controlling actuator is adjusted accordingly.
Refer to the Cascade Control section of this manual for full details.
Also refer to: Master & Slave; Proportional Control; PID; Remote Setpoint and Setpoint.
21.22 Clock Configuration
A sub-menu of the configuration menu used to adjust the setting of the real time clock fitted with the data
recorder option (e.g. date, time, and date format).
Also refer to: Data Recorder and Configuration Mode
210
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
21.23 Communications Write Enable
Enables/disables the changing of parameter values via the Serial Communications link, if a communication
option such as Modbus RTU (RS485) or Modbus TCP (Ethernet) is installed. When disabled, communication
becomes read-only.
Also refer to: Ethernet; Modbus RTU; Modbus TCP; RS485 and Serial Communications
21.24 Configuration Menu
A selection of sub-menus from which the user can adjust the major instrument settings. There are sub-menus for
the Inputs, Control, Outputs, Alarms, Communications, Recorder, Clock, Display and Lock Codes.
Configuration mode is entered from the main menu. An unlock code is required to access this mode.
Refer to the Configuration Menu information in the Configuration & Use section.
Also refer to: Alarm Configuration, Lock Codes, Clock Configuration, Control Configuration, Display
Configuration, Input Configuration, Main Menu, Output Configuration, Recorder Configuration, Serial
Communications Configuration
21.25 Contactor
- Refer to Relay
21.26 Continuous Control
Current or voltage correcting variables using linear outputs (4 to 20mA, 0-20mA, 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V or 2 - 10V
DC) for proportional control, PI, PD or PID control modes. On-Off control cannot be used with linear outputs.
Also refer to: Correcting Variable; Linear Output; On-Off Control; PD; PI; PID; Proportional Control;
and Time Proportional Control.
21.27 Control Configuration
A sub-menu of the configuration menu used to adjust the parameters that relate to the control of the process
(enabling control, auto/manual mode, control type and action, PID tuning terms, power limits, sensor break
action, setpoint values and setpoint selection).
Also refer to: Configuration Mode; Control Action; Control Enable; Local Setpoints; Manual Mode;
PID; Setpoint Selection and Tuning.
21.28 Control Deviation
Control Deviation is the difference between the process variable value and the actual setpoint. The control
deviation error is equal to PV – SP. This value can be monitored using the bar-graph (±5% of span). An
excessive deviation warning can be given by using a deviation or band alarm.
Also refer to: Actual Setpoint; Alarm Types; Band Alarm; Bar Graph; Deviation Alarm; Input Span;
Process Variable and Setpoint
21.29 Control Action
This refers to the control loop(s) primary power output direction. Reverse action is typically used with heating
applications as it increases the correcting variable as the process variable falls. If a secondary output has been
configured, its action is always the opposite of the primary output.
Also refer to: Control Type; Correcting Variable; Direct Acting Control and Reverse Acting Control.
21.30 Control Enable/Disable
The PID controller outputs can be temporarily turned off by disabling the control. When control is disabled the
setpoint value is replaced by “OFF”. All other functions continue as normal. The control enable/disable function
can be controlled from the control configuration sub-menu, via a digital input or optionally from the operation
menu if enabled in the display configuration sub-menu.
Also refer to: Digital Input; Display Configuration; Operation Mode and PID
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
211
21.31 Control Power Alarm
A control power alarm is based on the output from the PID control algorithm. It can provide a warning if the
PID output rises above or falls below a set value. This is often used in conjunction with the minimum alarm
duration time so that very brief power output peaks can be ignored.
Also refer to: Alarm Duration Minimum; Alarm Types and PID
21.32 Control Type
This defines if a control loop has Single (unidirectional) or Dual (bidirectional) control outputs. Single outputs
have a primary output only. This can drive the process in one direction (e.g. heat only, cool only, increase
humidity etc). Dual outputs have both primary and secondary outputs which can force the process to increase or
decrease (e.g. heat & cool, humidify & dehumidify etc).
Also refer to: Control Action; PID; Primary Proportional Band; Process Variable; and Secondary
Proportional Band.
212
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
21.33 Controller
An instrument that controls one or more process control loops. For each control loop it compares a process
variable to a target setpoint, and attempts to make the process maintain the setpoint value by applying a
correcting variable (e.g. turning on a heater or dosing with alkali if controlling pH). The controller uses
proportional (P, PI, PD o PID) or On-Off control.
Also refer to: Correcting Variable; Indicator; Limit Controller; On-Off Control; PD Control; PI Control;
PID; Process Variable; Proportional Control; Profiler and Setpoint.
21.34 Controller Mode
The normal operating mode when profiling is not fitted or it is not being used.
Also refer to: Controller; Profiler and Profiler Mode
21.35 Correcting Variable
The output level from a controller used to adjust the process variable up or down, in order to remove any
control deviation. This might be turning on a chiller in a temperature application or increasing the variable
speed drive of a pump in a flow application. The level of correcting variable is commonly referred to as the
controller output power.
Also refer to: Control Deviation; PID; Primary Power Output Limit and Process Variable
21.36 CPU
This stands for Central Processing Unit and refers to the on-board microprocessor that controls the
measurement, control, alarm; display and other functions of the instrument.
21.37 Custom Display Mode
The user can copy up to 50 Configuration Menu parameters into operation mode using the PC software. If
enabled in the display configuration sub-menu, the configured parameters follow the normal operation mode
screens. In this mode these screens are not protected by a lock code.
Also refer to: Control Configuration; Display Configuration; Lock Codes and Operation Mode
21.38 Cycle Time
For time proportioning outputs, the cycle time is the period over which the controller averages the ON vs. OFF
time, in order to provide the required correcting variable. Each control loop has separate cycle times for the
primary and secondary control outputs. Shorter cycle times give better control, but at the expense of reduce life
for any electromechanical control devices (e.g. relays or solenoid valves). Short cycle times do not harm SSRs.
Also refer to: Correcting Variable; PID; Primary Proportional Band; Proportional Control; Relay;
Secondary Proportional Band; Solenoid Valve; SSRSSR and Time Proportioning.
21.39 Data Recorder
The Data Recorder option can record the process values, setpoints, alarms and events over time. Recordings can
be transferred to a USB memory stick or via the serial communications options for analysis in the PC software
or spreadsheets. This option includes a battery backed-up real time clock (RTC) which continues to keep time
when the instrument is powered down.
Refer to the Data Recorder Option section of this manual for full details.
Also refer to: PC Software and Recorder Configuration.
21.40 Deadband
- Refer to Overlap/Deadband.
21.41 Derivative Action
Derivative action biases the proportional control output to compensate for the rate of change in the process
variable. In a typical reverse acting application, derivative power is increased if the PV is rising, or decreased if
it is falling. The combined proportional and derivative values adjust the correcting variable until the process
stabilises, at which point derivative power becomes zero. Increasing the derivative time increases the effect of
derivative action.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
213
Setpoint
Constant
Rate
Derivative
Time
Power
The Derivative Time Constant is defined as the time interval in which
the part of the output signal due to proportional action increases by
the
same amount as the immediate output change due to derivative
Process
action,
when the control deviation error is changing at a constant
Value
rate*. As the PV falls at a fixed rate, derivative action causes a step
in power output (D%), and over time proportional power (P%)
increases as the PV falls within the proportional band. *For the
purpose of the definition, the increased power does not affect the PV
(in reality it would begin correcting the control error). Derivative
must be set to OFF if PI control is required, and it is not available if
the primary output is set to on-off.
Time
Also refer to: Modulating Valve; On-Off Control; PD Control; PI Control; PID; PID Sets; Process
Variable and Tuning.
21.42 Deviation Alarm
An alarm configured to activate once an unacceptable amount of control deviation error occurs. A positive
value (deviation high) sets the alarm point above the current actual setpoint, a negative value (deviation low)
sets the alarm point below actual setpoint. If the process variable deviates from the actual setpoint by a margin
greater than this value, the alarm becomes active. If an alarm is required if the control deviation is either side of
the setpoint, consider using a Band alarm or a logical combination of a deviation high and deviation low alarm.
Also refer to: Actual Setpoint; Alarm Operation; Alarm Types; Band Alarm; Control Deviation; Logical
Combination; Process Variable and Setpoint.
21.43 Digital Input
An input that can be driven to one of two states (active or inactive) by and external voltage or a contact
opening/closing. Digital Inputs can be used to set the instrument in to different states. Typical uses are to select
auto/manual mode, active setpoint selection, control enable/disable, profile selection, profile run/hold/abort,
hold segment release, recorder trigger, tuning start/stop and latching alarm reset. Digital inputs may be
“inverted” so that they are inactive when on.
Also refer to: Active Setpoint; Control Enable; Data Recording; Invert Digital Inputs; Manual Mode;
Profiling and Segment Types.
21.44 Direct Acting Control
Direct action is required for applications where the primary control output will be used to force the process
variable down towards the setpoint. A typical application is a chiller. When the control action is selected as
direct acting, primary proportional control outputs decrease the correcting variable as the process variable
reduces within the proportional band, and primary On-Off outputs turn off when the process variable is less
than the setpoint. The control action of a secondary output is always the opposite of the primary output.
Also refer to: Control Action; Control Type; Correcting Variable; On-Off Control; Process Variable;
Proportional Control and Reverse Acting Control.
21.45 Display Configuration
A sub-menu of configuration mode used to adjust the display (color & contrast) and to enable access to selected
parameters from operation mode. These are: Profile Control; Recorder Start/Stop; Recorder Status; Loop 1 & 2
Setpoint Select; Loop 1 & 2 Auto/Manual Select; Loop 1 & 2 Control Enable/Disable; Loop 1 & 2 Trend View;
Loop 1 & 2 Setpoint Ramp Rate. It also has settings for language selection, to enable the custom menus or to
make operation mode read-only.
Also refer to: Configuration Mode; Control Enable; Custom Display Mode; Display Language; Manual
Control; Operation Mode; Profile Control; Setpoint Ramp Rate; Recorder; Setpoint Select and Trend
Display.
214
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
21.46 Display Languages
The instrument supports two languages. The main language is English. The alternate language is chosen at time
of order, but can also be changed by downloading a new file via the PC software. Supported languages include
English, French, German, Italian and Spanish.
Also refer to: Display Configuration; Operation Mode; Main Menu and PC Software.
21.47 Display Resolution
The maximum number of digits that can be displayed and/or the maximum number of decimal places. Numeric
values (e.g. process variable, setpoints etc) are limited to no more than 5 digits.
The maximum number of decimal places is selectable from 0 to 3 places, but the overall 5-digit limit means that
larger values reduce the number of decimal places shown. For example, values >99.999 will show no more than
2 decimal places (e.g. 100.00).
Also refer to: LSD.
21.48 Effective Setpoint
- Refer to Actual Setpoint.
21.49 Engineering Units
The Process Variable and Setpoint displays can assigned engineering units to describe the signals connected to
the process inputs. The engineering units for linear inputs can be: °C; °F; K; bar; %; %RH; pH; psi or none. For
temperature inputs (RTD or Thermocouples) they can be °C; °F or K.
Also refer to: Linear Input; Process Input; Process Variable RTD and Thermocouple.
21.50 Ethernet
A networking technology for local area networks (LANs). Used to link computers and other equipment in order
to share data or control such devices. If fitted with an Ethernet communications module in option slot A, this
instrument can connect as a slave to a Modbus TCP master device via a wired Ethernet LAN connection.
Also refer to: Modbus TCP and Serial Communications.
21.51 Gain Scheduling
Gain scheduling bumplessly switches between pre-set PID values automatically at successively higher setpoint
or process values. This allows optimal control across a wide range of process conditions, or if the controller is
used in several different applications. It is especially useful if the process conditions change significantly during
use, such as a process that becomes exothermic as the temperature rises.
Also refer to: Bumpless Transfer; PID; PID Sets; Process Variable and Setpoint.
21.52 Indicator
An instrument that displays process values, but lacks control features. Typically, alarm outputs are available
that will activate at pre-set PV values.
Also refer to: Controller; Limit Controller and Process Variable.
21.53 Input Configuration
A sub-menu of configuration mode, used to adjust the parameters that relate to the process and auxiliary inputs
(type, engineering units, decimal places, scaling, filtering etc.).
Also refer to: Auxiliary Input; Configuration Mode and Process Input.
21.54 Input Filter Time Constant
This parameter is used to filter out extraneous impulses affecting process variable values. The filtered PV is
used for all PV dependent functions (display, control, alarm etc). Use this parameter with care as it will also
slow the response to genuine process changes.
Also refer to: Process Variable.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
215
21.55 Input Range
This is the overall process variable input range and type as selected by the Process Input Type parameter. This
range can be scaled using the Scale Input Upper & Lower Limits.
Also refer to: Input Span; Process Input; Scaled Input Lower Limit and Scaled Input Upper Limit.
21.56 Input Span
The measuring and display limits, as defined by the Scale Input Lower and Scaled Input Upper Limits. The
trimmed span value is also used as the basis for calculations that relate to the span of the instrument (e.g.
proportional bands).
Also refer to: Input Range; LSD; Primary Proportional Band; Scaled Input Lower Limit; Scaled Input
Upper Limit and Secondary Proportional Band.
21.57 Integral Action
Integral action biases the proportional control output to compensate for process load variations. Their
combined values adjust the correcting variable, until the control deviation error is zero, at which point the
integral value is held constant. Decreasing the integral time constant increases the integral action. Integral
action is also known as “Automatic Reset”.
Response
begins to control
deviation step
Power
Integral
Time
required, and
The time constant is defined as the interval in which the part of
the output due to integral action increases by an amount equal
to the part of the output due to the proportional action, when
the control deviation is unchanging*. For example, if a step
change is made in the PV, the output immediately changes due
to proportional action. The deviation error is integrated over
time, steadily changing the integral output. The time it takes for
integral power to change by the same amount due to
proportional action (I% = P%) is the “reset”, or integral time.
Time
*For the purpose of the definition, the power output change
does not affect the PV (in reality it would begin correcting the
control error). Integral must be set to OFF if PD control is
it is not available if the primary output is set to On-Off.
Also refer to: Control Deviation; On-Off Control; PD Control; PI Control; PID; PID Sets; Primary
Proportional Band; Secondary Proportional Band; Derivative Action; and Tuning.
21.58 Invert Digital Input
Digital inputs may be “inverted” so that they are active when off and inactive when on. This is useful if the
signal applied to the chosen digital input function is reversed in relation the digital input action.
Also refer to: Digital Input.
21.59 Latching Output
Alarm outputs can be set to latch on when they become active. If enabled, an output will remain latched ON
even if the condition that caused it to be on is no-longer present and it remains latched even if the unit is
powered off-on. The output latch must be reset to turn it off. The latch reset signal can be via a digital input or
using the front keys in the clear latched output screen. The alarm condition that caused the output to switch
must have cleared before the latch can be deactivated.
Also refer to: Alarm Types; Digital Input and Relay
21.60 LED
Light Emitting Diode. Four LED’s are used as indicator lights (e.g. for the alarm indication, automatic tuning
stats, manual mode etc). Their function and labels can be changed with the PC software.
Also refer to: Alarm Operation; Alarm Types; Automatic Tuning; Manual Mode and PC Software.
21.61 Linear Input
A mVDC, mADC or voltage signal usually used to represent the value of the process variable for one of the
PID control loops. This can be any variable that can be converted into a suitable DC linear signal. Common
216
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
examples are Humidity, pressure, pH or temperature. One or optionally two main inputs are available, and an
auxiliary linear input can also be installed to provide a remote setpoint source.
Also refer to: Auxiliary Input; Input Range; Linear Output; mVDC; mADC; PID; Process Variable;
Remote Setpoint and VDC.
21.62 Linear Output
A mVDC, mADC or voltage signal used to provide a continuous proportional control output or to retransmit the
process or setpoint values to an external device.
Also refer to: Continuous Control; Linear Input mVDC; mADC; Process Variable; Proportional Control;
Retransmit Output; Setpoint and VDC
21.63 Limit Controller
A process protection device that can shut down a process at a pre-set “exceed condition”. Limit controllers work
independently of the normal process controller in order to prevent possible damage to equipment or products. A
fail-safe latching relay is fitted, which cannot be reset by the operator until the process has returned to a safe
condition. Limit controllers are especially recommended for any process that could potentially become
hazardous under fault conditions. Ensure you choose a limit controller with the correct approvals for local
regulations (e.g EN 14597 etc) if it is to be used as a safety limiter.
Also refer to: Controller and Latching Relay.
21.64 Local Setpoints
Local setpoints are target setpoint values for the control loops that are entered by the user and stored in the
controller. The value of local setpoints can be adjusted within the setpoint limits using the front keypad, or via a
serial communications link.
The instrument can has two setpoints for each control loop. The main local setpoint and an alternate setpoint.
The alternate setpoint can be a local setpoint or a remote setpoint from an auxiliary input. One setpoint at a time
is chosen to be active using the setpoint selection.
Also refer to: Alternate Setpoint; Auxiliary Input; PID; Remote Setpoint; Serial Communications;
Setpoint; Setpoint Lower Limit; Setpoint Upper Limit; and Setpoint Select.
21.65 Lock Codes
The four-digit passwords required when entering the setup wizard, configuration mode, tuning menu, supervisor
mode, USB menu, recorder menu and profiler setup menu. The correct code must be entered to gain access. If
unrestricted access is required for a menu, its lock can set to OFF.
Refer to the Lock Code Configuration sub-menu in the Configuration Menu.
Also refer to: Configuration Mode; Main Menu; Profiler Setup Menu; Recorder Menu; Setup Wizard;
Supervisor Mode; Tuning Menu and USB Menu.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
217
21.66 Logical Output Combinations
Any suitable output may be assigned as a logical OR or logical AND output of the alarm and profile event
conditions, and can be configured for reverse or direct action. If OR is chosen, any of the selected alarms or
profile events that are active will cause the output to turn on for direct acting outputs, or inactive for reverse
acting outputs (NOR). If AND is chosen, all of the selected alarms or profile events must be active to cause the
output to turn on for direct acting outputs, or inactive for reverse acting outputs.
The following table explains the concept of logical OR & AND outputs.
Also refer to: Alarm Operation; Alarm Types; Output Configuration and Profile Events.
EXAMPLES OF LOGICAL OUTPUTS
OUTPUT
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OUTPUT
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ALARM
2
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ALARM
1
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OUTPUT
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ALARM
2
ALARM
1
Logical OR: Alarm 1 OR Alarm 2
Direct Acting
Reverse-Acting
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Event
3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ALARM
2
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OUTPUT
OFF
ON
OFF
ALARM
2
Event
3
Logical AND: Event 3 AND Alarm 2
Direct Acting
Reverse-Acting
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
21.67 Loop Alarm
A loop alarm detects faults in the control feedback in the selected loop, by continuously monitoring the process
variable response to the control outputs. If any alarm is setup as a loop alarm, it repeatedly checks if the control
output is at saturation. If saturation is reached (0% or 100% power for single control type, -100% or +100% for
dual control type), an internal timer is started. Thereafter, if the output has not caused the process variable to be
corrected by a predetermined amount 'V' after time 'T' has elapsed, the alarm becomes active. The alarm
repeatedly checks the process variable and the control output. If the process starts to change in the correct
direction or the control output is no longer at the limit, the alarm deactivates.
For PI or PID control, the loop alarm time 'T' can be automatic (twice the Integral Time value) or set to a user
defined value up to 99m 59s. Correct operation with the automatic loop alarm time depends upon reasonably
accurate PID tuning. The user defined value is always used for P, PD or On-Off control. The timer starts as
soon as an output turns on with on-off control.
The value of 'V' is dependent upon the input type. For Temperature inputs, V = 2°C or 3°F. For Linear inputs, V
= 10 x LSD
The loop alarm is automatically disabled in manual control mode and during execution of a pre-tune. Upon exit
from manual mode or after completion of the pre-tune routine, the loop alarm is automatically re-enabled.
Also refer to: Alarm Types; Control Type; Manual Loop Alarm Time; Linear Input; LSD; Manual Mode;
On-Off Control; PD; PI; PID; Pre-Tune; Process Variable and Tuning.
21.68 LSD
The Least Significant Digit (LSD) is the smallest incremental value that can be shown at the defined display
resolution.
Also refer to: Display Resolution.
218
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
21.69 mADC
This stands for milliamp DC. It is used in reference to the linear DC milliamp input ranges and the linear DC
milliamp outputs. Typically, these will be 0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA.
Also refer to: Input Range; Linear Input; Linear Output; mVDC; Process Variable and VDC
21.70 Main Menu
The top-level menu that allows access to operation mode as well as all other menus. These are: configuration
mode, profiler setup and recorder menus, the setup wizard, supervisor mode and the tuning and USB menus.
Most menus require an unlock code to gain access.
Refer to the Main Menu information in the Configuration & Use section.
Also refer to: Configuration Mode; Lock Codes; Operation Mode; Profiler Setup Menu; Recorder
Menu; Setup Wizard; Supervisor Mode; Tuning Menu and USB Menu.
21.71 Main Setpoint
The instrument can has two setpoints for each control loop. The main local setpoint and an alternate setpoint. If
used, the main setpoint is always a “local” setpoint. One setpoint can be chosen to be active from the setpoint
selection screen.
Also refer to: Alternate Setpoint; Auxiliary Input; Local Setpoints; Profiler; Remote Setpoints; Setpoint
and Setpoint Select.
21.72 Manual Loop Alarm Time
The loop alarm time used is manually set whenever a loop alarm is defined to have a manually set time, or if P,
PD or On-Off control is selected. This parameter determines the duration of the output saturation condition after
which the loop alarm will be activated.
Also refer to: Loop Alarm; On-Off Control; PD; PI and PID.
21.73 Manual Mode
Manual Mode operates as follows:
The setpoint legend is replaced by the word MAN and setpoint value is replaced by a % output power value.
This value may be adjusted using the keypad or via serial comms. The power value can be varied from 0% to
100% for controllers using single control type, and -100% to +100% for controllers using dual control type.
Switching between automatic and manual modes is achieved using “bumpless transfer”.
Auto/manual mode can selected from the control configuration sub-menu or via a digital input if one has been
configured for this function. Alternatively, if enabled in the display configuration sub-menu, the user to switch
between automatic and manual control from operation mode. It is possible to use a controller as a permanent
“Manual Station” by permanently selecting manual control in the control configuration sub-menu.
Caution: Manual Mode should be used with care because the power output level is set by the operator,
therefore the PID algorithm is no longer in control of the process. Manual mode also ignores any output
power limits, valve open/close limits and the control enable/disable setting. The operator is responsible
for maintaining the process within safe limits.
Also refer to: Bumpless Transfer; Control Configuration; Control Type; Operation Mode; PID; Power
Output Limits and Serial Communications.
21.74 Manual Reset
Used to manually bias proportional outputs to compensate for control deviation errors due to process load
variations. It is expressed as a percentage of output power. This parameter is not applicable if the primary
output is set to On-Off control. If the process variable settles below setpoint use a higher value to remove the
error, if the process variable settles above the setpoint use a lower value.
For PID or PI control, typically set manual reset to approximately 80% of power needed to maintain setpoint,
although lower values can be used to inhibit start-up overshoot. Integral action will automatically remove any
control deviation error.
Also refer to: Control Deviation; Integral Action; ON/OFF Control; PI Control; PID; Proportional
Control; Process Variable; and Setpoint.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
219
21.75 Master & Slave Controllers
The terms Master and Slave are often used in relation to serial communications. This instrument can be a
communications slave if an Ethernet or RS485 module is fitted.
With RS485 it can also act as a setpoint master or slave in multi-zone applications. In this case, one instrument
controls the setpoint of one or more others. This could be a simple master/slave application where the master
controller transmits its setpoint to the slaves so that all operate at the same temperature. Alternatively, an offset
can be applied to each zone using the slave’s setpoint offset parameter, so each is offset slightly from the
master.
A similar master/slave relationship can be achieved if the master retransmits its setpoint as an analog signal. In
this case, the slave controllers must have matching remote setpoint inputs so that they can follow the masters’
setpoint value. It is possible to apply an offset to each zone if the slave has an RSP offset parameter. If not the
remote setpoint input scaling can be adjusted to achieve the offset.
Cascade Control is another type of Master & Slave application where the slaves setpoint is set using the master
controllers PID power output.
Also refer to: Cascade Control; Linear Output; Retransmit Output; Remote Setpoint; Auxiliary Input
Offset; Serial Communications and Setpoint.
21.76 Modbus RTU
Modbus RTU is the serial communications protocol used on instruments fitted with the RS485 Communications
module into option slot A. Alternatively, the Modbus TCP protocol is available if the Ethernet communications
module is fitted.
Modbus RTU is a Master/Slave protocol. Only the Master may initiate communications. Each slave is given a
unique address, and the message contains the Modbus address of the intended slave. Only this slave will act on
the command, even though other devices might receive it (an exception is “broadcast commands” sent to
address 0, which are acted upon by all slaves). The commands can instruct the slave to change values in its
memory registers, or ask it to send back values contained in the registers. Each query or response message
includes a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) checksum to ensure that it arrives uncorrupted.
This instrument can act as a slave, or it can be a “setpoint master” over RS485. In this mode the unit
continuously sends its setpoint value using broadcast messages.
Refer to the Serial Communications and Modbus Parameter sections for more information.
Also refer to: Modbus TCP; RS485; Serial Communications and Setpoint.
21.77 Modbus TCP
Modbus TCP is a version of the Modbus protocol for networks such as Ethernet, which support the Internet
Protocol. It is available if an Ethernet communications module is fitted into option slot A.
This instrument can only act as a Slave when using Modbus TCP. A master device initiates the
communications, and the instrument only acts on the command if it has been sent to its own IP address.
Modbus/TCP does not require a checksum to ensure that the message arrives intact. Apart from this, the data
model and function calls used by Modbus TCP and RTU are identical; only the message encapsulation is
different.
Refer to the Serial Communications and Modbus Parameter sections for more information.
Also refer to: Ethernet; Modbus RTU and Serial Communications.
21.78 Minimum Motor On Time
This defines the minimum drive effort needed to initiate valve movement if the valve was previously stationary.
It ensures that frictional and inertial effects are taken into account when driving the valve, and reduces the
actuator switching operations when close to setpoint.
If the pulse required to position the valve would be less than the minimum on time, the output is suppressed.
Each of these short pulse times is accumulated until their value exceeds the minimum on time, and the output is
turned on for this time.
220
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
When the control deviation error is inside a “neutral zone”, the PID algorithm inhibits integration in order to
avoid oscillation. The neutral zone (symmetrical to setpoint) is:
2 * PropBand * (MinOnTime / MotorTravelTime)
Also refer to Motor Travel Time; Self-Tune and Valve Motor Drive Control.
21.79 Modulating Valve
A valve that can be positioned anywhere between fully closed and fully open by means of an incorporated
motor. A typical application would be controlling temperature in a furnace heated by gas burners. The controller
moves the valve to the desired position in order to control the gas flow.
If the valve motor is directly driven with Open and Close outputs from the controller feeding power to the
motor, valve motor drive (VMD) control mode must be used. Some modulating valves have positioning
circuitry incorporated that requires linear (mA or VDC) signals to set the position. These use the standard
control mode (using PI control) instead of VMD mode.
Also refer to Linear Outputs; PI Control and Valve Motor Drive Control.
21.80 Motor Travel Time
The Motor Travel Time parameter is used in Valve Motor Drive control mode. It must be set to the time the
valve takes to travel from one physical end stop to the other. This time is used by the VMD algorithm when
calculating how long to energise the “Valve Open” or “Valve Close” outputs in order to bring the process on to
control.
It is important that the time set accurately reflects the time taken to travel between the physical limits, otherwise
the control can be severely impaired. The motor travel time may be stated in your valve supplier’s specification
or the valve can be timed from the fully closed to fully opened position. The controller can be placed in Manual
Mode to assist with the timing of valve movement.
Also refer to Manual Mode Enable
21.81 Multi-Point Scaling
If the process input is connected to a linear input signal, multi-point scaling can be enabled in the input
configuration sub-menu. This allows the linearization of non-linear signals.
The scale input limits define the values shown when the input is at minimum and maximum values, and up to
15 breakpoints can scale input vs. displayed value between these limits. It is advisable to concentrate the break
points in the area of the range that has the greatest amount of non-linearity, or the area of particular interest in
the application.
Also refer to: Input Configuration; Linear Input; Process Input; Scaled Input Lower Limit and Scaled
Input Upper Limit.
21.82 mVDC
This stands for millivolt DC. It is used in reference to the linear DC millivolt input ranges of the main process
inputs. These can be 0 to 50mV or 10 to 50mV
Also refer to: Input Range; Linear Input; mADC; Process Variable and VDC
21.83 On-Off Control
When operating in On-Off mode, the control output(s) turn on or off as the process variable crosses the setpoint
in a manner similar to a simple thermostat. Some oscillation of the process variable is inevitable when using onoff control. The amount of oscillation is mainly defined by the process characteristics, but is also affected by the
on-off differential setting.
On-off control can be implemented only with Relay, Triac or SSR driver outputs. It can be assigned to the
primary output alone (secondary output not present), primary and secondary outputs or to a secondary output
only (with the primary output set for time proportional or continuous control). On-off Control is selected by
setting the corresponding proportional band(s) to on-off.
Also refer to: Continuous Control, Current_Proprotioning_Control; On-Off Differential; PID; Process
Variable; Primary Proportional Band; Secondary Proportional Band; Relay; Setpoint; SSR Driver;
Time Proportioning Control and Triac.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
221
21.84 On-Off Differential
A switching differential, centred about the setpoint, when using On-off control. Relay ‘chatter’ can be
eliminated by proper adjustment of this parameter, but too large a value may increase process variable
oscillation to unacceptable levels. On-off differential is also known as hysteresis or deadband.
Also refer to: Input Span; On-Off Control; PID Sets; Process Variable; Relay and Setpoint
21.85 On-Off Hysteresis
-
Refer to On-Off Differential.
21.86 Operation Mode
The mode used during normal operation of the instrument. It can be accessed from the main menu, and is the
usual mode entered at power-up. The screens shown include a main screen with bar-graphs, trend views,
information about the process, alarms plus optionally, selection of auto/manual control, control output
disabling. Recorder and profiler information can be displayed if these features are fitted. Up to 50 configuration
menu screens also can be shown in operation mode if set to do so with the PC software. In this mode screens are
not protected by a lock code.
Refer to the Operation Mode information in the Configuration & Use section.
Also refer to: Bar-Graphs; Configuration Mode; Custom Display Mode; Display Configuration; Lock
Codes; Main Menu; PC Software; Profiler Setup Menu; Recorder Menu and Trend Display.
21.87 Output Configuration
A sub-menu of configuration mode used to adjust the parameters that relate to the outputs. Available settings
include linear output type & scaling, output usage and retransmit output scaling etc.
Boolean logical OR / AND can be used to combine alarms and/or events to a single output.
Also refer to: Configuration Mode; Logical Output Combinations and Linear Output.
21.88 Overlap/Deadband
The Overlap/Deadband parameter defines the portion of the primary and secondary proportional bands over
which both outputs are active (called overlap), or neither is active (called deadband). This is entered in display
units, and is limited to -20% to +20% of the sum of the two proportional bands. E.g. if the proportional bands
were 2° and 8° (totalling = 10°) the maximum overlap or deadband would be ±2°. Positive values = Overlap,
negative values = Deadband. The 5 PID sets for each control loop have their own overlap/deadband setting.
Overlap/deadband is not applicable if the primary output is set for on-off control or there is no secondary
output. If the secondary output is set for on-off, this parameter has the effect of moving the on-off differential
band of the secondary output to create the overlap or deadband. When overlap/deadband = OFF, the edge of the
secondary output differential band coincides with the point at which the primary output is at 0% (off).
The effect of the Overlap/Deadband parameter is shown in Figure 65.
Also refer to: On-Off Differential; On-Off Control; PID Sets; Primary Proportional Band and Secondary
Proportional Band.
222
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
OVERLAP
Proportional Band 1
Output Power (%)
WITH PID
Proportional Band 2
Output 1
Output 2
Output 2
Output 1
Process Variable
Overlap
(positive value)
DEADBAND
Output Power (%)
WITH PID
Proportional
Proportional
Band 1
Band 2
Output 1
Output 2
Output 2
Output 1
Process Variable
Deadband
(negative value)
Proportional
OVERLAP &
Band 1
Output 2
Proportional Band 2 = 0
Output 2 ON
Output 1
Output 2 OFF
WITH ON/OFF
Output Power (%)
DEADBAND
Output 2
Output 1
Process Variable
ON/OFF Differential
Positive values
Negative values
Overlap/Deadband
Figure 65. Overlap/Deadband
21.89 PC Software
The PC software can create, download and store instrument configurations & profiles. If the recorder feature is
fitted, its recordings can be downloaded and analysed via the software.
In addition, changes can be made to the instrument operation by adding extra screens, amending the contact
details, alarm status labels or to the functions and labels of the LED’s. The software can download a new
language file, change the start-up “splash screen” or configure the “Supervisor Mode” screens. An on-screen
simulation of the instrument can be setup and tested on a configurable load simulator.
Refer to the PC software and use sections of this manual for full details.
Also refer to: LEDs and Supervisor Mode.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
223
21.90 PD Control
Proportional and Derivative (PD) control combines proportional control with derivative action. It is similar to
PID control, but without Integral action.
Also refer to: Derivative; Integral; PID Control; Proportional Control and Tuning.
21.91 PI Control
Proportional and Integral Control (PI) combines proportional control with integral action. It is similar to PID
Control, but without derivative action. It is often used for modulating valves, dampers or motor speed control,
where derivative action can sometimes cause instability or wear of mechanical components like valves, due to
excessive movement.
Also refer to: Derivative; Integral; Modulating Valve; PID Control; Proportional Control; Tuning and
Valve Motor Control.
21.92 PID Control
Proportional Integral and Derivative control maintains accurate and stable levels in a process (e.g. when
controlling temperature or humidity etc). Proportional control avoids the oscillation characteristic of on-off
control by continuously adjusting the correcting variable output(s) to keep the process variable stable. Integral
action eliminates control deviation errors, and Derivative action counters rapid process movements.
Also refer to: Control Action; Control Deviation; Control Enable; Control Type; Controller; Correcting
Variable; Derivative Action; Gain Scheduling; Integral Action; Manual Mode; On-Off Control; PD
Control; PI Control; PID Sets; Primary Proportional Band; Process Variable; Secondary Proportional
Band; Setpoint and Tuning.
21.93 PID Gain Sets
The instrument contains PID 5 sets for each control loop, allowing the instrument to be pre-set for differing
conditions. Each set has individual values for the proportional bands; overlap/deadband; on-off differential and
integral & derivative times.
These values are entered in the control configuration sub menu or via the automatic tuning.
The PID sets might be configured for different applications, or to allow for differing process or load conditions
that might occur in a single application. In these cases one set at a time would be selected as the “Active PID”
set for that loop.
The PID sets are also used by the automatic gain scheduling feature.
Also refer to: Derivative Action; Gain Scheduling; Integral Action; On-Off Control; PID; Primary
Proportional Band; Secondary Proportional Band and Tuning.
21.94 PLC
This stands for Programmable Logic Controller. A microprocessor based device used in machine control. It is
particularly suited to sequential control applications, and uses “Ladder Logic” programming techniques. Some
PLC’s are capable of basic PID control, but tend to be expensive and often give inferior levels of control.
Also refer to: PID.
21.95 Pre-Tune
The Pre-Tune facility artificially disturbs the process variable normal start-up pattern, so that an approximation
of the PID values can be made prior to the setpoint being reached. During pre-tune, the controller outputs full
primary power until the process value reaches the “tuning point”. With Standard Pre-Tune this is halfway to the
setpoint, but an alternative method allows the user to specify the process value to tune at. Pre-tune can be
selected from the automatic tuning menu and will automatically disengage once complete.
If self-tune is enabled, it will be suspended while pre-tune runs.
A pre-tune can be configured to run at every power up using the Auto Pre-Tune function.
Refer to the Automatic Tuning section of this manual for full details.
Also refer to: Auto Pre-Tune; PID; Process Variable; Self-Tune; and Tuning.
224
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
21.96 Power Output Limits
Used to limit the correcting variable. Normally the control algorithm can set these outputs to any value between
0% and 100%. If this is undesirable in a particular application, individual settings can limit the primary power
upper and lower levels and the secondary power upper and lower levels for each control loop. The upper limit
values must be higher than the lower limits. These parameters are not applicable if that output is set for on-off
control.
Use with caution: The instrument will not be able to control the process if the limits do not allow the
outputs to be set to the correct values needed to maintain setpoint.
Also refer to: Correcting Variable; On-Off Control; PID and Setpoint.
21.97 Primary Proportional Band
The portion of the input span over which the primary output power level is proportional to the process variable
value. Applicable if the control type is single or dual. For dual control a secondary proportional band is used for
the second output. The control action can be direct or reverse acting, switching the direction of change in power
relative to the change in PV.
Also refer to: Control Action; Control Type; Overlap/Deadband; PID; Process Variable; Secondary
Proportional Band; and Tuning.
21.98 Process High Alarm
An alarm configured to as Process High will activate once the process has been above the high alarm value for
longer than the alarm minimum duration time. Once activated, the level must drop below the alarm trigger point
by more than the alarm hysteresis value before it will deactivate.
High alarm activation is not affected by setpoint changes or the level of control deviation.
Also refer to: Alarm Operation; Alarm Types; Alarm Duration Minimum; Alarm Hysteresis; Control
Deviation; Process Variable and Setpoint.
21.99 Process Inputs
The main inputs used to monitor the process value(s) being controlled.
The input are “Universal”, supporting all common thermocouples, PT100 & NI120 RTDs, potentiometers and
DC linear mV, voltage or mA signals. Linear inputs are compatible with any parameter that can be converted to
a suitable electronic signal. They can be scaled into engineering units to match the process. The 2nd input can
also act as an auxiliary input.
Also refer to: Auxiliary Inputs; Engineering Units; Input Span; PV Offset; Process Variable; Scaled Input
Lower Limit and Scaled Input Upper Limit.
21.100 Process Low Alarm n Value
An alarm configured to as Process Low will activate once the process has been below the low alarm value for
longer than the alarm minimum duration time. Once activated, the level must rise above the alarm trigger point
by more than the alarm hysteresis value before it will deactivate.
Low alarm activation is not affected by setpoint changes or the level of control deviation.
Also refer to: Alarm Operation; Alarm Types; Alarm Duration Minimum; Alarm Hysteresis; Control
Deviation; Process Variable and Setpoint.
21.101 Process Variable (PV)
Process Variables are the parameter to be controlled. Each control loop monitors its PV via one of the process
inputs. PVs can be any type that can be measured by these circuits. Common types are thermocouple or RTD
temperature probes, or pressure, level, flow etc from transducers that convert these parameters into DC linear
input signals (e.g. 4 to 20mA). Linear signals can be scaled into engineering units using the input upper &
lower limits.
Also refer to: Engineering Units; Input Span; Linear Input; Process Input; RTD; Scaled Input Lower
Limit; Scaled Input Upper Limit and Thermocouple.
21.102 Process Variable Offset
-
Refer to Calibration.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
225
21.103 Profile Control Menu
If the profiler option is fitted, a profile control menu is available from the main menu. It allows the user to select
or run a profile, and then control that profile (run, hold, abort, skip to next segment etc.).
Refer to the Profiler Control Menu information in the Configuration & Use section.
Also refer to: Main Menu; Profile Setup Menu; Profiler and Profiler Mode.
21.104 Profile Events
Events are outputs that can be made active during profile segments. Any of the five events tracks can be
configured to be active or inactive for the duration of each segment, from the profile setup menu. For end
segments, events selected to be stay active until the unit is powered down or a new profile runs. It is possible to
logically link event and alarms to outputs with a boolean OR or AND selection.
Also refer to: Alarm Types; Logical Combinations; Profile Segments; Profile Setup Menu; Profiler and
Profiler Mode.
21.105 Profile Header
The profile header contains information about how the profile starts and stops, the power loss recovery action, if
the profile should repeat multiple times when run as well as whether the profile runs as a single or two loop
profile.
Refer to the Profile Components information in the Profiler Option section of this manual.
Also refer to: Profile Segments, Profile Setup Menu, Profiler and Profiler Mode.
21.106 Profile Segments
Segments can be ramps, dwells, steps or special segments such as holds, loop-backs, ends or joins. A maximum
of 255 segments are possible, shared amongst up to 64 profiles.
Refer to the Profile Components information in the Profiler Option section of this manual.
Also refer to: Profile Events, Profile Setup Menu, Profiler and Profiler Mode.
21.107 Profile Setup Menu
If the Profiler option is fitted, a profile setup menu is available from the main menu. It allows the user to create
or edit the profile header and profile segments. Profiles can also be deleted from this menu. This menu is
protected by a lock code.
Refer to the Profiler Setup Menu information in the Configuration & Use section.
Also refer to: Lock Codes; Profile Control Menu; Profile Header; Profile Segments; Profiler and Profiler
Mode.
21.108 Profiler
A profiler controls the value of the actual setpoint over time; increasing, decreasing or holding its value as
required. This is used in applications where the rate of rise or fall of the process variable must be closely
controlled, or where a value must be maintained for a period before moving to the next value. If the Profiler is
fitted, up to 64 profiles can be created with 255 segments shared amongst them. These profiles can control the
setpoints for loop 1 only or both loops. Each segment can activate/deactivate the five events.
Refer to the Profiler Option section.
Also refer to: Actual Setpoint; Controller Mode; Profile Events; Profile Control Menu; Profile Header;
Profile Segments; Profile Setup Menu and Profiler Mode.
21.109 Profiler Mode
This mode is entered when a profile is selected or run. The instrument will remain in profiler mode when the
profile finishes or is aborted, unless the segment end type/profile abort action is set to “Use Controller
Setpoint”.
Also refer to: Controller Mode; Profile Control Menu; Profile Segments; Profile Setup Menu; Profiler and
Setpoint.
226
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
21.110 Proportional Control
Proportional control gradually changes the correcting variable applied from 0 to 100% of the available power as
the process moves through the “Proportional Band”. If the control type is dual, both primary & secondary
outputs available, equating to -100 to +100%. When the proportional bands are correctly tuned, the process is
maintained at a steady value, avoiding the oscillation characteristic of on-off control. Proportional control is
commonly used in conjunction with integral and derivative action to give PI. PD or PID control.
Also refer to: Control Type; Correcting Variable; Derivative Action; Integral Action; PD; PI; PID;
Primary Proportional Band; Process Variable; Secondary Proportional Band; and Tuning.
21.111 Rate
-
Refer to Derivative Action.
21.112 Rate of Change Alarm
An alarm based on the rate of change in the measured process variable. If the PV changes at a rate greater than
the alarm level, the alarm will activate. The rate of change must be above the alarm threshold for longer than the
alarm minimum duration time before the alarm will change state (from on to off, or off to on). Caution: If the
duration is less than this time, the alarm will not activate no matter how fast the rate of rise.
Also refer to: Alarm Hysteresis; Alarm Minimum Duration; Alarm Operation; Alarm Types and Process
Variable.
21.113 Ratio Control
Ratio control is where part of the process is controlled in proportion to another part. For example, it could mix
two materials at a desired ratio by adjusting the flow of input 1 in relation to the flow measured by input 2. The
flow of input 2 may be controlled separately, but not by the ratio loop. If two process inputs are fitted, this
instrument can be configured for stoichiometric combustion control, where the fuel-air ratio is controlled for a
burner.
Refer to the Ratio Control section of this manual for full details.
Also refer to: Controller; PID and Process Variable.
21.114 Recorder Configuration
If the data recorder is fitted, a recorder configuration sub-menu is added to configuration mode. This is used to
adjust the recorder parameters (recording mode, sample interval, recording triggers and values to record).
Also refer to: Configuration Mode; and Data Recorder
21.115 Recorder Option
- Refer to Data Recorder.
21.116 Recorder Menu
If the data recorder is fitted, a recorder menu is added to the main menu. This is used to control the recording
manual recording trigger, delete recordings or to show the recorder status. This menu is protected by a lock
code.
Refer to the Recorder Menu information in the Configuration & Use section.
Also refer to: Lock Codes; Main Menu and Data Recorder
21.117 Relay
An electromechanical switch operated by a solenoid coil. Relays are used for alarms or, on-off/time
proportioning control outputs. The limited current capacity and switching cycles of the internal relays means
that they are often connected to larger external slave relays/contactors which are capable of switching much
larger currents and are easily replaced once worn out. A suitably rated RC snubber should be used to suppress
noise generated as they switch (refer to the noise suppression information in the Electrical Installation
section).
Also refer to: Latching Relay; SSR Driver; Time Proportioning Control and Triac
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
227
21.118 Remote Setpoint (RSP)
The alternate setpoint type can be configured as a “remote” setpoint, where an analog VDC or mADC signal
applied to the 2nd input or auxiliary input A sets the controller setpoint value. The signal can be scaled to give
the desired setpoint values at the inputs’ minimum & maximum values, but the setpoint is always constrained
by the setpoint limits. This method can also be used for cascade or multi-zone slaves.
Also refer to: Alternate Setpoint; Auxiliary Input; Auxiliary Input Lower Limit; Auxiliary Input Type;
Auxiliary Input Upper Limit; Cascade Control; Linear Input; Local Setpoints; Master & Slave; mADC;
Setpoint and Setpoint Select; and VDC.
21.119 Retransmit Output
A linear VDC or mADC output signal proportional to the process variable or setpoint, for use by slave
controllers in multi-zone applications or external devices, such as a chart recorder or PLCs. The output can be
scaled to transmit any portion of the input or setpoint span.
Also refer to: Input Span; Linear Output; mADC; Master & Slave; PLC; Process Variable; Retransmit
Output Scale Maximum; Retransmit Scale Minimum; Setpoint and VDC.
21.120 Retransmit Output Scale Maximum
Scales a linear output if it has been selected to retransmit a process or setpoint value. Retransmit scale
maximum defines the point at which the output will be at its maximum value. E.g. for a 0 to 5V output, it is the
PV or SP value corresponding to 5V. If this parameter is set to less than the retransmit output scale minimum,
the relationship between the process/setpoint value and the retransmission output is reversed so that higher
PV/SP values give a lower output.
Also refer to: Process Variable; Retransmit Output; Retransmit Output Scale Minimum; Scaled Input
Upper Limit and Setpoint.
21.121 Retransmit Output Scale Minimum
Scales a linear output if it has been selected to retransmit a process or setpoint value. Retransmit scale minimum
defines the point at which the output will be at its minimum value. E.g. for a 0 to 5V output, it is the PV or SP
value corresponding to 0V. If this parameter is set to a value greater than that for retransmit output scale
maximum, the relationship between the process/setpoint value and the retransmission output is reversed so that
higher PV/SP values give a lower output level.
Also refer to: Process Variable; Retransmit Output; Retransmit Output Scale Maximum; Scaled Input
Lower Limit and Setpoint.
21.122 Reset To Defaults
This Configuration sub-menu selection returns all of the instruments settings back to their factory defaults. It
should be used with great care, as the action cannot be undone.
Also refer to: Configuration Menu.
21.123 Reverse Acting Control
Reverse control action is required for applications where the primary control output increases the process
variable, such as in a heating application. With reverse action, primary proportional outputs decrease the
correcting variable as the process variable increases within the proportional band, and primary On-Off outputs
turn off when the process exceeds the setpoint. The control action of a secondary output is always the
opposite of the primary.
Also refer to: Control Action; Control Type; Correcting Variable; Direct Acting Control; On-Off Control
and Proportional Control.
21.124 RS485
RS485 (also known as EIA-485) is two-wire, half-duplex, multi-drop serial communications connection. RS485
only defines the physical layer electrical specification, not the protocol that is transmitted across it. It uses
differential signals (the voltage difference between the wires) to convey data. One polarity indicates a logic 1,
the reverse polarity indicates logic 0. The applied voltages can be between +12 V and -7 volts, but the
difference of potential must be > 0.2 volts for valid operation. RS485 can span distances up to 1200 metres
228
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
using inexpensive twisted pair wires. Data speeds can be as high as 35 Mbit/s over 10 m and 100 kbit/s at 1200
m. This instrument supports 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200 bps.
It is recommended that the wires be connected as series of point-to-point (multi-dropped) nodes (not in a star or
ring format), with 120Ω termination resistors connected across the wires at the two ends of the network.
Without termination resistors, electrical noise sensitivity is increased and signal reflections can cause data
corruption. The master device should provide powered resistors to bias the wires to known voltages when they
are not being driven. Without biasing the data lines float, so noise can be interpreted as data.
Converters from RS232 or USB to RS485 allow computers to communicate over RS485. Repeaters can be used
to extend the distance and/or number of nodes on a network.
Also refer to: Modbus RTU and Serial Communications
21.125 RTD
Resistance Temperature Detector. A temperature sensor that changes resistance with a change in the measured
temperature. This instrument supports PT100 (platinum, 100 Ω at 0°C) and NI120 (nickel, 120Ω at 0°C)
sensors. These have positive temperature coefficients (PTC) which means their resistance increases with higher
temperatures. The temperature measured by the sensor can be displayed as °C; °F or K.
Also refer to: Input Range; Process Input and Thermocouple.
21.126 Scaled Input Upper Limit
For linear inputs, this parameter is used to scale the displayed process variable. It defines the displayed value
when the process variable input is at its maximum value (e.g. if 4 to 20mA represents 0 to 14pH, this parameter
should be set to 14). The value can be set from -1999 to 9999 and can be set to a value less than (but not within
100 LSDs of) the Scaled Input Lower Limit, in which case the sense of the input is reversed.
For thermocouple and RTD inputs, it is used to reduce the effective span of the input. All span related functions
work from the trimmed input span. It can be adjusted within the limits of the range, but not less than 100 LSD’s
above the Scaled Input Lower Limit.
Also refer to: Engineering Units; Input Range; Input Span; LSD; Process Variable and Scaled Input
Lower Limit.
21.127 Scaled Input Lower Limit
For linear inputs, this parameter is used to scale the displayed process variable. It defines the displayed value
when the process variable input is at its minimum value (e.g. if 4 to 20mA represents 0 to 14pH, this parameter
should be set to 0). The value can be set from -1999 to 9999 and can be set to a value higher than (but not
within 100 LSDs of) the Scaled Input Upper Limit, in which case the sense of the input is reversed.
For thermocouple and RTD inputs, it is used to reduce the effective range of the input. All span related
functions work from the trimmed input span. It can be adjusted within the limits of the range, but not less than
100 LSD’s below the Scaled Input Upper Limit.
Also refer to: Engineering Units; Input Range; Input Span; LSD; Process Variable and Scaled Input
Upper Limit.
21.128 Secondary Proportional Band
If the control type is set to dual, this is the portion of the input span over which the secondary output power
level is proportional to the process variable value. The control action for the secondary output is always the
opposite of the primary output.
Also refer to: Control Action; Control Type; On-Off Control; Input Span; Overlap/Deadband; PID;
Primary Proportional Band and Tuning.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
229
21.129 Self-Tune
Self-Tune continuously optimises tuning while a controller is operating. It monitors control deviation errors and
uses them to calculate new PID values. If the controller is new or the application has changed, the initial values
may be far from ideal, in which case pre-tune can be used to first establish new initial values. Self-tune will then
fine-tune these values. Self-tune is suspended while pre-tune is running.
Refer to the Automatic Tuning section of this manual for full details.
Also refer to: Control Deviation; Modulating Valves. On-Off Control; Pre-Tune; PI; PID; Setpoint and
Tuning.
21.130 Sensor Break Pre-Set Power
If a thermocouple or RTD is disconnected or breaks, the instrument detects the condition within 2 seconds, and
sets the control loops output(s) to a value defined by the sensor break pre-set power parameter in the control
configuration sub-menu. Process, band and deviation alarms behave as though the PV has gone high.
Non-zero based linear inputs (e.g. 2 to10V or 4 to 20mA, but not 0 to 20mA) also detect sensor break
conditions and set the same pre-set power value, but alarms behave as though the PV has gone low.
Also refer to: Input Range; Linear Input; RTD and Thermocouple.
21.131 Serial Communications Configuration
A sub-menu of configuration mode used to adjust the serial communications parameters (addressing, data rate,
parity, master/slave settings and write enabling).
Also refer to: Configuration Mode and Serial Communications
21.132 Serial Communications Option
An optional feature that allows other devices such as a PC, PLC or master controller, to read and change
instruments parameters via an RS485 or Ethernet network.
Full details can be found in the Serial Communications sections of this manual.
Also refer to: Ethernet; Master & Slave; Modbus RTU; Modbus TCP; PLC; RS485 and Serial
Communications Configuration.
21.133 Set Valve Closed Position
When valve position indication is used in valve motor drive control mode, this parameter defines the input value
that is measured by the 2nd input when the valve is fully closed. The valve must be driven to its “Closed” end
stop before setting this parameter.
It must not be used to limit valve movement; separate Valve Close and Open Limit parameters are available for
this purpose.
Also refer to Auxiliary Input; Set Valve Opened Position; Valve Close Limit; Valve Open Limit; Valve
Motor Control and Valve Position Indication.
21.134 Set Valve Opened Position
When valve position indication is used in valve motor drive control mode, this parameter defines the input value
that is measured by the 2nd input, when the valve is fully opened. The valve must be driven to its “Open” end
stop before setting this parameter.
It must not be used to limit valve movement; separate Valve Close and Open Limit parameters are available for
this purpose.
Also refer to Auxiliary Input; Set Valve Closed Position; Valve Close Limit; Valve Open Limit; Valve
Motor Control and Valve Position Indication.
230
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
21.135 Setpoint
The target value at which the instrument attempts to maintain the process, by adjusting its control output power
(the correcting variable). There are two setpoints for each control loop. A main local setpoint and an alternate
setpoint that can be another local setpoint or a remote setpoint input from an auxiliary input. One setpoint at a
time is chosen to be active using the setpoint selection, or if the profiler is fitted it can set the actual setpoint
value over time. Setpoint values are always limited by the setpoint limits.
Also refer to: Alternate Setpoint; Auxiliary Input; Correcting Variable; Local Setpoints; Process
Variable; Profiler; Remote Setpoint; Scaled Input Lower Limit; Setpoint Lower Limit; Setpoint Upper
Limit and Setpoint Select
21.136 Setpoint Upper Limit
The maximum value allowed for setpoints, adjustable within the scaled input limits. The value should be set
below any level that might cause problems in the process. If the value is moved below the current value of a
setpoint, that setpoint will automatically adjust to keep it within bounds.
Also refer to: Input Span; Scaled Input Upper Limit; Setpoint and Setpoint Lower Limit.
21.137 Setpoint Lower Limit
The minimum value allowed for setpoints, adjustable within the scaled input limits. The value should be set
above any level that might cause problems in the process. If the value is moved above the current value of a
setpoint, that setpoint will automatically adjust to keep it within bounds.
Also refer to: Input Span; Scaled Input Lower Limit; Setpoint and Setpoint Upper Limit.
21.138 Setpoint Ramp Rate
Setpoint ramping is used to protect the process from sudden changes in the setpoint, which would result in a
rapid change in the process variable. A rate is set at which the actual setpoint value ramps towards its target
value, when the setpoint value is adjusted or the active setpoint is changed. The feature can be turned off by
setting the ramp rate to “OFF”.
To further protect the process, the initial value of the setpoint is made equal to the current process variable value
at power-up, when switching back to automatic from manual control, from control disabled to enabled or after a
sensor break is repaired. The actual setpoint will rise/fall from this value at the ramp rate set, until it reaches the
target setpoint value.
Also refer to: Active Setpoint; Actual Setpoint; Manual Mode; Process Variable; Setpoint and Setpoint
Selection.
21.139 Setpoint Selection
The setpoint select parameter in the control sub-menu defines whether the active setpoint will be the main or
alternate setpoint. The choice of setpoint can also be made via a digital input or an operation mode if the
selection screen has been enabled.
Also refer to: Active Setpoint; Display Configuration; Alternate Setpoint; Digital Input; and Setpoint.
21.140 Setup Wizard
A sub-set of the configuration menu parameters chosen to allow easy setup for basic applications. Users with
more complex applications should select the parameters they need directly from the configuration menus.
The wizard runs automatically at the first ever power-up and exits to operation mode when completed. The
wizard can be run manually from the main menu (requires an unlock code). An option to reset all parameters to
default is offered when manually running the wizard.
Refer to the Setup Wizard information in the Configuration & Use section.
Also refer to: Lock Codes; Configuration Menu; Main Menu; Operation Mode and Reset to Defaults.
21.141 Solid State Relay (SSR)
An external device manufactured using two silicone controlled rectifiers in reverse parallel. SSRs can replace
mechanical relays in most AC power applications. Some special SSRs can switch DC, but most cannot. As a
solid-state device, an SSR does not suffer from contact degradation when switching electrical current. Much
faster switching cycle times are also possible, leading to superior control. The triac option on this instrument
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
231
provides is a small 1amp AC internal SSR. The SSR driver options on this instrument provide >10VDC timeproportioned pulses at the rate defined by the cycle time. When applied to the signal input of an external SSR, it
causes it to pulse current from the line supply to the load.
The external SSR can be any current capacity available.
Also refer to: Cycle Time; Time Proportioning Control; Relay; and Triac.
21.142 Solenoid Valve
An electromechanical device, use to control the flow of gases or liquids. Unlike a modulating valve, a solenoid
valve has just two states, open or closed. Usually a spring holds the valve closed until a current passed through
the solenoid coil forces it open. Standard control mode is required with a time-proportioned or on-off output for
this type of valve.
Solenoid valves are often used with high/low flame burners. A bypass supplies some fuel at all times, but not
enough to heat the process more than a nominal amount (low flame). A controller output opens the valve when
the process requires additional heat (high flame).
Also refer to: Modulating Valves; On-Off Control and Time Proportioning Control.
21.143 Supervisor Mode
Supervisor Mode allows access to a lock-code protected sub-set of the main configuration parameters. Up to 50
configuration menu parameters can be chosen for inclusion in using the PC configuration software.
Refer to the Supervisor Mode information in the Configuration & Use section.
Also refer to: Configuration Menu; Lock Codes and PC Software.
21.144 Thermocouple
A temperature sensor made from two different metals. The thermoelectric effect generates a small signal (a few
microvolts per °C) relative to the difference between the “cold” junction (at the measuring instrument) and the
“hot” junction. This does mean that the wires and connectors used must match the metals used in their
construction. Other issues are their nonlinearity and limited accuracy.
However, basic thermocouples are cheap to make and can measure a wide range of temperatures. While those
made from more exotic materials can even withstand the very high temperatures found in furnaces.
The color codes for the common types are shown in the Thermocouple Wire Identification Chart in the
Electrical Installation Section of this manual.
Also refer to: Input Range; Process Input and RTD.
21.145 Three Point Stepping Control
Motorised modulating valves normally require a special “Three Point Stepping” control algorithm. This which
provides an output to move the valve further open, or further closed whenever there is a control deviation error.
When this error is zero, no further output is required to maintain control unless load conditions change. This
type of control is use when the instrument is in Valve Motor Drive (VMD) control mode.
Also refer to: Control Deviation; Modulating Valve and Valve Motor Control
21.146 Time Proportioning Control
Time proportioning control is accomplished by cycling the output on and off during the prescribed cycle time,
whenever the process variable is within the proportional band(s). The PID control algorithm determines the
ratio of time (on vs. off) to achieve the level of the correcting variable required to remove the control deviation
error. E.g. for a 32 second cycle time, 25% power would result in the output turning on for 8 seconds, then off
to 24 seconds. This type of output might be used with electrical contactors, solid state relays or solenoid valves.
Time proportioning control can be implemented with relay, triac or SSR driver outputs.
Also refer to: Control Deviation; Correcting Variable; Continuous Control,
Current_Proprotioning_Control; Cycle Time; PID; Primary Proportional Band; Relay; Secondary
Proportional Band; Solenoid Valve; SSR and Triac.
232
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
21.147 Trend Displays
Trend views are a standard feature on all models. They graphically represent recent process conditions for the
control loops, showing the most recent 120 out of 240 stored data points. This data can be the process variable;
process variable & setpoint (shown as a doted line) or the minimum and maximum value of the process variable
measured since the last sample. The scaling adjusts automatically to the visible data. Any active alarms are
indicated above the graph. The user can scroll the right hand cursor line back to examine all 240 data points.
Their sample interval and data to display is set in display configuration.
Unlike the optional data recorder, trend views do not retain the stored data if the power is turned off.
Also refer to: Alarm Types; Display Configuration; Operation Mode; and Process Variable; Setpoint.
21.148 Tuning
PID Controllers must be tuned to the process in order for them to attain the optimum level of control.
Adjustment is made to the tuning terms either manually, or via the automatic tuning facilities. Tuning is not
required if the controller is configured for on-off Control.
Also refer to: Auto Pre-Tune; Controller; Derivative Action; Integral Action; On-Off control; PID; PreTune; Primary Proportional Band; Self-Tune; Secondary Proportional Band and Tuning Menu.
21.149 Tuning Menu
The tuning menu can be accessed from the main menu. This menu is lock-code protected.
It gives access to the pre-tune, auto pre-tune and self-tune facilities. These assist with PID tuning, by setting up
Proportional bands, Integral and Derivative time values.
Pre-tune can be used to set PID parameters initially. Self-tune may then be used to optimise the tuning if
required. Pre-tune can be set to run automatically after every power-up by enabling Auto Pre-Tune.
Refer to the Automatic Tuning information in the Configuration & Use section.
Also refer to: Auto Pre-Tune; Derivative Action; Integral Action; Lock Codes; Main Menu; On-Off
control; PID; Pre-Tune; Primary Proportional Band; Self-Tune and Secondary Proportional Band.
21.150 Triac
A small internal solid state relay, which can be used in place of a mechanical relay for low power AC switching
(0.1 to 1 amp AC). Like a relay, the output is time proportioned. However, as solid-state devices, triacs do not
suffer from contact degradation so much faster switching cycle times are possible, offering improved control
and reliability. A snubber should be fitted across inductive loads to ensure reliable switch off the triac.
Also refer to: Cycle Time; Relay; SSR and Time Proportioning Control.
21.151 USB Menu
A lock-code protected USB menu is offered from the main menu for the USB option. This allows the user to
read or write files to a USB memory stick. The current configuration of the instrument can be copied to the
stick, or the instrument can be reconfigured from a file created using the PC software or copied from
another instrument. Profiles can also be copied from the instrument to a USB stick or you can upload prestored files created earlier from the PC software or copied from another instrument.
Data recordings can be copied to the stick for later analysis on a PC.
Refer to the USB Menu information in the Configuration & Use section.
Also refer to: Data Recorder; Lock Codes; Main Menu; PC Software and Profiler
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
233
21.152 Valve Motor Drive Control (VMD)
This control mode is used when directly controlling the motor of a modulating valve or damper. It uses a 3point stepping Valve Motor Drive control algorithm to open or close the valve. VMD mode is not suitable if the
modulating valve has its own positioning circuit (use standard control with a continuous current proportioned
linear output) or solenoid valves (use standard control with a time proportioned output).
Also refer to: Continuous Control, Current_Proprotioning_Control; Linear Output; Modulating Valve;
Solenoid Valve; Three Point Stepping Control and Time Proportioning Control.
21.153 Valve Position or Flow Indication
The valve motor drive control mode does not require any kind of position feedback in order to correctly control
the process. However, where potentiometer feedback or (mA or VDC) flow signals are available, they can be
connected to the 2nd input to indicate valve position or flow level. The display is a percentage (0 to 100%)
shown as a bar-graph in the main operator mode screen.
Even if position feedback is provided, it is not used by the VMD control algorithm when positioning the valve,
thus avoiding problems associated with faulty feedback signals.
Also refer to Auxiliary Input; Bar-graph; Display Strategy; Open Loop VMD; PID; Set Valve Closed
Position; Set Valve Open Position; Setpoint; and Valve Motor Control.
21.154 Valve Open & Closed Limits
When valve position indication is used in VMD control mode, the valve limit parameters can be used to
“clamp” the maximum and minimum valve positions. The controller will not attempt to drive the valve past
these points.
The position indication input must correctly scaled using “set valve open” and “set valve closed” before using
the valve limits.
Also refer to Set Valve Closed Position; Set Valve Open Position; Valve Motor Control and Valve
Position Indication.
234
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
22 PC Software
The primary function of the software is to create, download and store instrument configurations and profiles. If
the data recorder feature is fitted, its recordings can be downloaded and analysed via the software.
There are several extra features that are only possible via the software.
Changes can be made to the operation of the instrument by adding extra screens into operation mode, enabling
and configuring a “Supervisor Mode”, as well as changing the contact details, alarm status labels or the
functions and labels of the front LED’s.
You can download a new language file or customise the controller by changing the start-up “splash screen”.
An on-screen simulation of the instrument can be setup and tested on a configurable load simulation prior to
downloading the settings to an instrument.
An additional software tool is available to set the IP address required for the Modbus TCP communications
option - refer to the Network Configuration section on page 238.
22.1 Using the PC Software
The menus and button bar are used to select the main parameter screena or one of the other modes or functions.
Hover the mouse over the parameter description or value to view a fuller description. Consult the
comprehensive help (available from the Help Menu) for information about the general software functions.
Menus
Functional Groups
Button Bar
Parameter Address (hex)
Mode Drop Down
Parameter Values
Description
Value Range
Figure 66. Main Parameter Screen
The main parameter screen is used to change the configuration and other instrument settings. This screen also
allows access to the Supervisor and Enhanced Operation Mode configuration screens from the Mode drop-down
list. Refer to the relevant sections of this manual for full information on the various instrument modes and
parameters.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
235
The Button bar, Device and View menus are used to access the other software functions.
View & Device Menus
Instrument Simulation
Parameter Configuration
Profile Editor
Trend
Figure 67. Button Bar & View Menu
22.2 Instrument Simulation
The software has a fully functional and interactive instrument simulation that includes a configurable simulated
process, allowing the instrument settings to be tested before use.
Inputs are simulated in the top panel. A value (in
display units) entered in INP1 & INP2 will
override the values from the simulated processes or
for a linear inputs, a mA or VDC value preceded
by # (e.g. #12.0) can be used to verify the scaling.
Enter F to simulate a sensor break. Tick boxes
simulate the digital inputs
Active analog and digital outputs are indicated in
the lower panel.
The simulated instrument can also be accessed and
configured by pressing its “buttons” with your
mouse, or by using the 4 arrow keys on your
keyboards.
Figure 68. Honeywell DCP250 Instrument Simulation
22.3 Configuring the Connection
The software communicates with the instrument using Modbus via the RJ11 configuration socket located on the
underside of the case, or via the Ethernet or RS485 options if fitted. Refer to the wiring section for connection
details.
The configuration socket is intended for initial configuration before installing the instrument in the application.
An RS232 to TTL lead (available from your supplier) is required to connect this socket to your PCs RS232
serial port or USB to RS232 adaptor.
A front mounted USB port is available on some models; this can also be used to configure the instrument or
transfer profile files, via a USB memory stick.
CAUTION: The configuration lead/socket is not isolated from the process input or
SSR Driver outputs. It is not intended for use in live applications.
236
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
A communications settings screen is shown whenever the user attempts to connect to the instrument from the
software. If the settings are not in-line with the information below, the software may not be able to
communicate with the instrument.
22.3.1 Connection from PC to Bottom Configuration Socket
When using the built-in configuration socket, set the communications parameters as shown here and in the
following table.
•
Device connector = Configuration Socket
•
PC connector = the PC Serial Com port number you are connected to
•
Start and Stop bits = 1
•
Data bits = 8.
•
Parity, Bit Rate & Address = must match settings in the table below
Note: When uploading or downloading via the bottom mounted configuration port, the required
software communication settings depend on the module fitted in slot A. See the table below.
Slot A Module
Slot A Empty
Digital Input
Ethernet
Comms
Auxiliary Input
RS485
Comms
Bit Rate
19200
19200
Parity
None
None
9600
None
Address
1
1
1
4800
None
1
Must match the Communication
Configuration menu settings.
22.3.2 Connection from PC to Rear RS485 Communications Option
When using the optional RS485 communications, set the parameters as shown here.
•
Device connector = Bus
•
PC connector = the PC Serial Com port number you are connected to
•
Start and Stop bits = 1
•
Data bits = 8
•
Parity, Bit Rate & Address = must match the settings in the instruments own Communication
Configuration menu.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
237
22.3.3 Connection from PC/Network to Ethernet Port
When using the optional Ethernet communications, set
the parameters as shown here.
Device connector = Bus
PC connector = Ethernet (bus coupler)
IP Address = Instrument IP address*
Port Address = 502.
The supported data rates 10/100BASE-T (10 or 100 Mbps) are automatically detected.
Note: *An IP address must be set before connecting via Ethernet. Use the default address of
0.0.0.0 if your network uses DHCP, BootP or AutoIP or ask your network administrator for a valid
address.
Most networks will assign the IP address automatically, but you can use the Lantronix XPort®
DeviceInstaller™ tool if you need to assign or change the IP address manually.
For the latest version, go to: www.lantronix.com/device-networking/utilities-tools/device-installer.html
22.3.4 Changing the IP Address
Connect the instrument to your network by plugging an Ethernet cable into the top mounted RJ45 socket. Run
the DeviceInstaller™ tool from a PC on the same network. The tool should automatically find this and any
other controllers on the network. If not use the search button. The existing IP and Hardware (MAC) addresses
are shown for the instruments found.
Click the Assign IP button and enter the correct hardware address from the list (if necessary, confirm the
number by comparing the hardware address with the number printed on Ethernet adaptor label).
At the next screen, choose whether to obtain the IP address automatically or to enter a specific address. For
automatic addresses, select the protocols supported on your network (DHCP, BootP or AutoIP. For a specific
address, enter the address, sub-net mask and default gateway information. Your network administrator will be
able to provide this information. Press the assign button to confirm.
It is recommended to keep all other Ethernet device settings at the default values. If you do change the internal
interface transfer speed or parity, matching settings must be made to the instruments Modbus data rate and
parity settings in the communications configuration menu.
Note: You can enter any valid IP address, perhaps for use in another location, but if the number
used does not match your existing network settings, further communication with the instrument
will cease.
238
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
22.3.5 USB Memory Stick Folders & Files
If a USB flash drive is used to transfer files between instruments and/or the software, the files must be stored in
specific DEVICE, CONFIG and PROFILE folders. When saving files from the software to the USB stick,
always ensure they are saved to the correct folder. Local file storage on your PC can be in any location. The
USB option also limits the file name to 8 characters plus the 3 digit .bct or .pfl extension. Longer file names will
be truncated.
DEVICE – This folder must be located in the Root of
the USB memory stick
CONFIG – Configuration files (*.bct)
PROFILE – Profile program files (*.pfl)
RECORDER – Recorder log folders/files. These can
be created or saved from the PC software.
CAUTION: When saving a file, the data will be overwritten If the file name already
exists.
22.4 Instrument Configuration
When creating a new configuration with the software, the basic
instrument type and the options fitted to it must be defined in
the Device Selection screen. You can select these from the drop
down lists or by typing the full model number in the Order
number field.
Note: It is important that the options selected match
those fitted to your unit.
Alternatively the complete instrument type and existing configuration can be uploaded to the PC from your
instrument, via the configuration socket or serial communications. A
previously saved configuration file can be opened from the file open menu or button.
22.4.1 Main Parameter Adjustment
The main parameter screen contains the configuration settings broken down into functional groups similar to the
instruments’ menus. The parameters can be changed in the yellow Value column. Type in new values or select
from the list offered. Invalid values will be highlighted in red (possible values are show to the left). Parameters
are “greyed out” if they are inaccessible due the hardware not being fitted or if they are disabled by other
settings.
Once the required changes are made, the configuration can then be download to the instrument or saved to hard
disk or a USB stick, with a .bct file extension. The file contains the device information and configuration
parameter settings, including any supervisor and enhanced operation mode screens or changes to the LED
functions. Transfer of comms settings and clock date/time are via optional tick boxes on the download settings
screen. Profiles, splash screens language files and data recordings are not saved in the .bct file. They are
uploaded/saved separately.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
239
22.4.2 Extending Functionality via Software
22.4.2.1 LED Functions & Labels
The allocated functions and descriptive labels for the 4 LED indicators can be changed with the PC software,
replacing the default PRI; SEC; TUNE; ALARM functions. These parameters can be found in the LED settings
section of the software’s Display Configuration functional group.
LED 1 to 4
LED LABELS (max 5 characters)
Possible functions for each of the LEDs are: Loop 1 or 2 primary/secondary/valve control output indication
(output ON = LED ON), or driving them from a logical OR combination of the alarm/profile event/digital
inputs/auto-tune status/manual mode. This logical combination can be inverted to create a logical NOR function
for the LEDs.
The user can create new 5 characters LED labels for the main and alternate language.
22.4.2.2 Alarm Status Screen Labels
The titles “Alarm n” used in the alarm status screen can be replaced with the software. Two separate sets of 8
characters labels can be entered for each of the seven alarms. One label set is used when the main display
language has been selected, the other is used when the alternate language is in use.
22.4.2.3 Configuring the Supervisor Mode
The purpose of the supervisor mode is to allow selected operators access to a “lock-code” protected sub-set of
the configuration parameters, without giving them the higher level configuration menu unlock code Up to 50
configuration parameters can be selected for inclusion in the supervisor mode screen sequence. If the parameter
is normally displayed on screen with another parameter, both parameters will appear.
It is not possible to configure supervisor mode screens without using the software.
To define these screens, first select Supervisor Mode from the mode drop-down list, then select the functional
group containing the parameter to be added. Highlight the parameter name and click the Add Entry button. The
Move Entry Up and Down buttons are used to change the order which the parameters will appear in the
instruments’ Supervisor Mode. Unwanted entries can be highlighted and deleted with the Remove Entry button.
22.4.2.4 Configuring Custom Display Screens for the Extended Operator Mode
Users can access a sub-set of the configuration parameters at the end of the normal operation mode if this
additional screen sequence is defined from the software. Up to 50 parameters from configuration menus can be
selected for inclusion in the screen sequence. If the parameter is normally displayed on screen with another
parameter, both parameters will appear.
It is not possible to configure custom display screens without using the software. To define these screens, first
select Extended Operator Mode from the mode drop-down list, then select the functional group containing the
parameter to be added.
Highlight the parameter name and click the Add Entry button. The Move Entry Up and Down buttons are used
to change the order which the parameters will appear at the end of the normal operator screens.
Unwanted entries can be highlighted and deleted with the Remove Entry button.
Note: Any parameters copied into the custom display screens are not password protected. They
can be freely viewed and adjusted by anyone with access to the instrument keypad.
240
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Functional Groups
Mode Drop Down
Add Entry
Parameter List
Remove Entry
Move Up
Selected Parameters
Move Down
Figure 69. Supervisor/Enhanced Operation Mode Configuration
22.4.2.5 Changing the Start-up Splash Screen
The graphic shown during the instrument start-up sequence can be changed by selecting the Download Splash
Screen option from the Device menu. Choose your
new graphic file (most common graphic file types
are supported).
The chosen image will converted to monochrome
and be rescaled to 160 pixels wide by 80 pixels
high. For best results, the image should be simple
and have an aspect ratio of 2:1. Complex graphics
with multiple colors or greyscales will not
reproduce well. A preview of the results is shown.
Click the Download button to store it to the
instrument.
22.4.2.6 Changing the Alternate Display Language
The alternate language can be changed by selecting the Download Language File option from the Device menu.
Choose the correct file (language files have a .bin extension) and click the Open button to store it to the
instrument.
Ask your supplier for a copy of the latest language file.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
241
22.5 Profile Creation and Editing
Select the Profile Editor from the button bar or view menu. An existing profile file can be opened from the file
open menu or button, or uploaded from an instrument connected to the PC via the configuration socket or serial
communications module. The new profile can be download to the instrument or saved to disk with a .pfl file
extension.
CAUTION: Take care to preserve any profile joins when editing or uploading
profile files to an existing configuration. Joins are based on the profile numbers.
Ensure profiles is uploaded to the correct location.
New / Open / Save / Print
Header Parameters
Upload Profile
Download Profile
Header Values
Mode Drop-Down
Profile Directory List
Figure 70. Profile Editor – Header
If the option to upload a profile is chosen, a list of profiles in the connected
instrument is shown. The user can select the required profile from the list.
A directory of existing profiles in the instrument can also be requested. This
allows one or all of the profiles to be deleted.
When downloading a profile to the instrument via the configuration socket
or over serial communications, a list of existing profiles and empty profile
slots is displayed. The user can select where to place the profile (a warning
is shown if the profile will overwrite an existing profile).
The number of available free segments is also shown.
A drop-down menu switches between the Profile Header and Segment
Data. Refer to the Profiler Setup Menu and Profiler Option sections for
full details of the header and segment data.
Header data includes a 16-character profile name, options for starting the profile after a delay or at a specific
day and time, the starting setpoint, the action to take after a power/sensor failure or profile abort, the number of
times the profile will run and if one or both control loops will be controlled.
242
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
The segments are shown in Segment Data mode. The last segment type is either End, Join or Repeat Sequence,
and cannot be deleted. The user can change any segments’ type and values, or insert additional segments before
the selected one. A dynamically scaled graphic shows the setpoint(s) for each segment of the profile, with the
current selected segment highlighted in red. The five profile events are shown below the graph.
Insert Segment
Un-Zoom
Segment List & Values
Profile Directory
Loop 1 & 2 Setpoints
Selected Segment (Red)
Active Event
Scaling
A hard copy of the profile, including the graph and events can be printed from the File | Print menu.
22.6 Data Recorder Trend Upload & Analysis
22.6.1.1 Uploading Data
Recordings can be transferred to a memory stick using the optional USB Port, or they can also be uploaded
directly to your PC or network with the software, via the configuration port or RS485/Ethernet communications
if fitted. To upload from a connected instrument, go to the Device | Upload recorder Data menu in the software.
Select a folder location and enter a file name when prompted, then click Save. Enter the communications
parameters for your connection, and click OK to save the data in Comma Separated (.csv) format.
22.6.1.2 Analysing Data
The data can be opened and analysed with the PC software, or with any spreadsheet. It can also be imported into
other software that can interpret a .csv file.
To analyse a recording file in the PC software, go to the File | Open Trend menu. Locate and open the .csv file.
The recording opens with the analog traces (process, power or setpoint values) in the main window at the top,
and digital traces (alarm or events statuses) below.
Note: Analysis with the PC software is limited to 8 analog channels, so only the first 8 will be
displayed. The number of recorded alarms & events is not limited.
The settings button allows trend data channels to be made visible/invisible, or change their color and scaling.
Click & drag your mouse over an area of interest to zoom in (use the un-zoom button to cancel) or move the
cursor line to that area to see the instantaneous analog values and the alarm & event statuses.
October 2014
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
243
Enable Cursor
Un-Zoom
Status/Value at Cursor
Settings
Analog Traces
Cursor Line
Trend Settings
Alarms/Events
Visibility & Format
22.6.1.3 Project Documentation
The Project information (file name, instrument model code and
version, modules / options fitted) and other user entered information
such as the project name and version, operator details, creation and
modification dates and a text description of the project can be entered
into the file.
A hard copy of the instrument configuration can be printed from the File |
Print menu.
This includes the project information, configuration parameters and their
values, the Modbus parameter addresses, supervisor mode screens and the
terminal wiring for your
hardware/configuration.
Profile information can also be printed. The profile header and segment
data is listed along with a graphical representation of the profile.
244
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
23 Specifications
23.1.1.1 Reference Test Conditions
Ambient Temperature
Relative Humidity
Supply Voltage
Source Resistance
RTD Lead Resistance
20°C ±2°C.
60 to 70%.
100 to 240V AC 50Hz ±1%.
<10Ω for thermocouple input.
<0.1Ω/lead balanced (Pt100).
23.2 Universal Process Inputs
23.2.1 General Input 1 and 2 Specifications
Input Sample Rate
Input Filter Time
Input Resolution
Supply Voltage
Humidity Influence
Temp. Stability
Input Impedance
Isolation
User Calibration
PV Display
100mS (Ten samples per second)
0.0 (OFF), 0.1 to 100.0 seconds in 0.1 second increments.
16 bits. Always four times better than the display resolution.
Negligible effect on readings within the specified supply tolerances.
Negligible effect on readings if non-condensing.
Error <0.01% of span per °C change in ambient temperature.
V DC
47KΩ.
mA DC
5Ω.
Other ranges
Greater than 10MΩ resistive.
Reinforced safety isolation from outputs and other inputs.
Single or two point. +ve values are added -ve subtracted from PV.
Displays process variable up to 5% over and 5% under span.
23.2.2 Thermocouple Input
23.2.2.1 Thermocouple Types & Ranges
Sensor
Type
Range in °C
Range in °F
Sensor
Type
Range in °C
Range in °F
B
C
D
+100 to 1824°C
0 to 2320°C
0 to 2315°C
+211 to 3315°F
32 to 4208°F
32 to 4199°F
0 to 762°C
0 to 1399°C
0 to 1850°C
32 to 1402°F
32 to 2551°F
32 to 3362°F
E
J (default)
K
-240 to 1000°C
-200 to 1200°C
-240 to 1373°C
-400 to 1832°F
-328 to 2192°F
-400 to 2503°F
L
N
PtRh20%
PtRh40%
R
S
T
0 to 1759°C
0 to 1762°C
-240 to 400°C
32 to 3198°F
32 to 3204°F
-400 to 752°F
Note: Defaults to °F for USA units. Defaults to °C for non-USA units.
The Scaled Input Upper Limit and Scaled Input Lower Limit parameters, can be used to restrict
range. An optional decimal place can be displayed.
23.2.2.2 Thermocouple Performance
Calibration
Measurement
Accuracy
October 2014
Complies with BS4937, NBS125 and IEC584.
±0.1% of full selected input range ±1LSD (Least significant display digit).
NOTE: Reduced performance for B Thermocouple from +100 to 600°C.
NOTE: PtRh 20% vs PtRh 40% Thermocouple accuracy is 0.25% and
has reduced performance below 800°C.
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
245
Linearization better than better ±0.2°C (±0.05 typical) for J, K, L, N and
T thermocouples; than better than ±0.5°C for other types.
If enabled, CJC error is better than ±1°C under operating conditions.
Thermocouple 100Ω: <0.1% of span error.
Thermocouple 1000Ω: <0.5% of span error.
Break detected within two seconds. Process Control outputs go to the
pre-set power value. High and Senor Break Alarms operate.
Linearization Accuracy
Cold Junction
Sensor Resistance
Influence
Sensor Break
Protection
23.2.3 Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) Input
23.2.3.1 RTD Types & Ranges
Sensor
Type
Range in °C
Range in °F
Sensor
Type
Range in °C
Range in °F
3-Wire
PT100
-199 to 800°C
-328 to 1472°F
NI120
-80 to 240°C
-112 to 464°F
Note: The Scaled Input Upper Limit and Scaled Input Lower Limit parameters, can be used to
restrict range. An optional decimal place can be displayed.
23.2.3.2 RTD Performance
Measurement
Accuracy
Linearization Accuracy
Sensor Resistance
Influence
RTD Sensor Current
Sensor Break
Protection
±0.1% of full selected input range ±1LSD (Least significant display digit).
Better than ±0.2°C any point (±0.05°C typical).
PT100 Input complies with BS1904 and DIN43760 (0.00385Ω/Ω/°C).
Pt100 50Ω/lead balanced.
Automatic Lead Compensation: <0.5% of span error.
150μA ±10%.
Break detected within two seconds. Process Control outputs go to the
pre-set power value. High and Senor Break Alarms operate.
23.2.4 DC Linear Input
23.2.4.1 DC Linear Types & Ranges
Input
Type
mA DC
0 to 20mA
mV DC
0 to 50mV
Potentiometer
Ranges
4 to 20mA
10 to 50mV
≥100Ω
Input
Type
V DC
Ranges
0 to 5V
0 to 10V
1 to 5V
2 to 10V
23.2.4.2 DC Linear Performance
Display Scaling
Minimum Span
Decimal Point Display
DC Input Multi-Point
Linearization
Measurement
Accuracy
246
Scalable from -2000 to 100000 for any DC Linear input type.
100 display units.
Decimal point selectable from 0 to 3 places.
Note: Rounds to 2 places above 99.999; 1 place above 999.99 and no
decimal above 9999.9.
Up to 15 scaling values can be defined anywhere between 0.1 and 100%
of input.
±0.1% of span ±1LSD (Least significant display digit).
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Maximum Overload
1A (mA input terminals), 30V (voltage input terminals) at 25°C ambient.
Sensor Break
Protection
Applicable for 4 to 20mA, 1 to 5V and 2 to 10V ranges only.
Break detected within two seconds. Process Control outputs go to the
pre-set power value. Low and Senor Break Alarms operate.
23.2.5 Input Functions
Function
Input 1
Input 2
Process Control
Cascade Control
Ratio Control
Remote Setpoint (RSP)
Valve Position Feedback
Loop 1
Master Loop
Controlled Variable
-
Loop 2
Slave Loop
Un-controlled Variable
RSP for loop 1
Valve Position for loop 1
Note: RSP Linear inputs only, scalable between -9999 to 10000, but actual setpoint value is kept
within the setpoint limit settings.
23.3 Auxiliary Input
23.3.1.1 Auxiliary Input A Types & Ranges
Input
Type
mA DC
V DC
Ranges
0 to 20mA
0 to 5V
2 to 10V
4 to 20mA
1 to 5V
0 to 10V
23.3.1.2 Auxiliary Input Performance
Input Sampling rate
Input Resolution
Input Function
Measurement
Accuracy
Input Resistance
Input protection
Isolation
Sensor Break
Detection
October 2014
4 samples per second.
16 bit ADC.
Scalable as a Remote Setpoint (RSP) between ±0.001 & ±10000
Scaled input value used for setpoint (but constrained by setpoint limits).
±0.25% of input span ±1LSD (Least significant display digit).
V DC
47KΩ
mA DC
10Ω
Other ranges
Greater than 10MΩ resistive
Voltage input: will withstand up to 5x input voltage overload without
damage or degradation of performance in either polarity.
Current input: will withstand 5x input current overload in reverse
direction and up to 1A in the normal direction.
Reinforced safety isolation from outputs and inputs
Applicable for 4 to 20mA, 1 to 5V and 2 to 10V ranges only.
Control goes to the pre-set power value if Auxiliary Input is providing the
active setpoint source.
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
247
23.4 Digital Inputs
23.4.1.1 Digital Input Functions
┌ ┐
┌ ┐
┌ ┐
┌ ┐
┌ ┐
┌ ┐
┌ ┐
┌ ┐
┌ ┐
┌ ┐
┌ ┐
┌ ┐
█
█
█
█
█
█
█
Function
Loop 1 Control Select
Loop 2 Control Select
Loop 1 Auto/Manual Select
Loop 2 Auto/Manual Select
Loop 1 Setpoint Select
Loop 2 Setpoint Select
Loop 1 Pre-Tune Select
Loop 2 Pre-Tune Select
Loop 1 Self-Tune Select
Loop 2 Self-Tune Select
Profile Run/Hold
Profile Hold Segment Release
Profile Abort
Data Recorder Trigger
Output n Forcing Open/Close
Clear All Latched Outputs
Output n Clear Latch
Key n Mimic (for
)
Inputs C1-C7 can be used as
Binary or BCD Profile Selection
Logic High*
Enabled
Enabled
Automatic
Automatic
Main SP
Main SP
Stop
Stop
Stop
Stop
Hold
No Action
No Action
Not Active
Off/Open
No Action
No Action
No Action
Binary 0
Logic Low*
Disabled
Disabled
Manual
Manual
Alternate SP
Alternate SP
Run
Run
Run
Run
Run
Release
Abort
Active
On/Closed
Reset
Reset
Key Pressed
Binary 1
Note: , *but the High/Low function can be switched using the Inputs to Invert
selection screen.
23.4.1.2 Digital Input Performance
Number Available
Type
Logic States
*Inverted Logic
Digital Input Sensitivity
Response Time
Isolation
248
0 to 9. One from Module Slot A, 8 from Multi-Digital Input C
Voltage-free or TTL-compatible voltage signals.
Held in High state via pull-up resistors.
Logic High = Open contacts (>5000Ω) or 2 to 24VDC signal.
Logic Low = Closed contacts (<50Ω) or -0.6 to +0.8VDC signal.
Inputs can be inverted. This swaps the actions listed above (e.g.
Profile Aborts on Logic High if selected input is inverted).
Inputs set for: Control disable; Auto/Manual; Setpoint Select; PreTune; Self-Tune; Profile Run/Hold and Profile Hold Segment
Release are all Edge Sensitive, where a High-Low or Low-High
transition changes the function status. Pre-Tune is always off at
power on (except if using the auto pre-tune feature), but others
functions retain their power off status at power on.
Inputs set for: Profile Abort; Data Recorder Trigger; Output Forcing;
Clearing Latched Outputs; Key Mimic and Profile Selection are all
Level Sensitive, where a high or low input sets the function status.
Digital inputs generally work in parallel with equivalent menus,
where either can change the function status.
Response within <0.25 second of signal state change.
Reinforced safety isolation from inputs and outputs.
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
23.5 Output Specifications
23.5.1.1 Output Module Types
Plug-in Slot 1
Plug-in Slot 2
Plug-in Slot 3
Base Option 4 & 5
Base Option 6 & 7
Single SPDT Relay, Single SSR Driver, Triac or DC linear.
Single SPDT Relay, Dual SPST Relay, Single SSR Driver, Dual SSR
Driver, Triac or 24VDC Transmitter Power Supply.
Single SPDT Relay, Dual SPST Relay, Single SSR Driver, Dual SSR
Driver, Triac or 24VDC Transmitter Power Supply.
Slot 4 SPDT Relay (std.). Slot 5 SPDT Relay (optional.)
Slots 6 & 7 DC Linear (optional.)
23.5.1.2 Single Relay Output 1-3 Performance
Positions
Contact Type
Contact Rating
Lifetime
Isolation
Optional in Plug-in Modules 1, 2 & 3.
Single pole double throw (SPDT).
2A resistive at 120/240V AC
>500,000 operations at full rated AC voltage/current. De-rate if
switching DC loads.
Reinforced safety isolation from inputs and other outputs.
CAUTION: Plastic pegs prevent fitting of older non-reinforced single relay
modules – Remove the peg to fit dual relays (all dual relay modules have reinforced
isolation).
23.5.1.3 Dual Relay Output 2-3 Performance
Positions
Contact Type
Contact Rating
Lifetime
Isolation
Optional in Plug-in Modules 2 & 3.
2 x Single pole single throw (SPST) relays with shared common.
2A resistive at 120/240V AC.
>200,000 operations at full rated AC voltage/current. De-rate if
switching DC loads.
Reinforced safety isolation from inputs and other outputs.
23.5.1.4 Base Relay 4-5 Output Performance
Positions
Contact Type
Contact Rating
Lifetime
Isolation
Base outputs 4 & 5.
1 x Single pole single throw (SPST).
2A resistive at 120/240V AC.
>200,000 operations and which contacts at full rated voltage/current.
De-rate if switching DC loads.
Reinforced safety isolation from inputs and other outputs.
23.5.1.5 Single SSR Driver Output 1-3 Output Performance
Positions
Drive Capability
Isolation
October 2014
Optional in Plug-in Modules 1, 2 & 3.
1 x Logic / SSR Driver output at >10VDC into 500Ω minimum.
Isolated from all inputs/outputs except other SSR driver outputs and
the configuration socket
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
249
23.5.1.6 Dual SSR Driver Output 2-3 Performance
Positions
Drive Capability
Optional in Plug-in Modules 2 & 3.
2 x Logic / SSR Driver outputs* at >10VDC into 500Ω minimum.
*Dual SSR Driver modules have shared positive terminal.
Isolated from all inputs/outputs except other SSR driver outputs and
the configuration socket
Isolation
23.5.1.7 Triac Output 1-3 Performance
Positions
Operating Voltage
Current Rating
Non-repetitive Surge
Current
OFF-State dv/dt
OFF-State leakage
ON-State Voltage Drop
Repetitive Peak OFFstate Voltage, Vdrm
Isolation
Optional in Plug-in Modules 1, 2 & 3.
20 to 280Vrms @47 to 63Hz.
0.01 to 1A (full cycle rms on-state @ 25°C); de-rates linearly above
40°C to 0.5A @ 80°C.
25A peak maximum, for <16.6ms.
500V/µs Minimum at Rated Voltage.
1mA rms Maximum at Rated Voltage.
1.5V peak Maximum at Rated Current.
600V minimum.
Reinforced safety isolation from inputs and other outputs.
23.5.1.8 Single DC Linear Output Types & Ranges
Output
Type
mA DC
Ranges
0 to 20mA
4 to 20mA
Output
Type
V DC
Ranges
0 to 5V
2 to 10V
0 to 10V
0 to 10V TxPSU*
23.5.1.9 DC Linear Output 1, 6-7 Performance
Positions
Resolution
Update Rate
Load Impedance
Accuracy
Over/Under Drive
Isolation
0 to 10VDC Transmitter
Power Supply*
23.5.1.10
Optional in Plug-in Module 1, and Base Options 6 & 7.
Eight bits in 250mS
(10 bits in 1 second typical, >10 bits in >1 second typical).
Every control algorithm execution (10 times per second).
0 to 20mA & 4 to 20mA: 500Ω maximum.
0 to 5V, 0 to 10V & 2 to 10V: 500Ω minimum. Short circuit protected.
±0.25% of range at 250Ω (mA) or 2kΩ (V). Degrades linearly to ±0.5%
for increasing burden (to specification limits).
For 4 to 20mA and 2 to 10V a 2% over/underdrive is applied (3.68 to
20.32mA and 1.84 to 10.16V) when used as control output
Reinforced safety isolation from inputs and other outputs.
Can be used to provide an adjustable 0.0 to 10.0V (regulated), up to
20mA output to excite external circuits & transmitters.
24V Transmitter Power Supply 2-3 Performance
Positions
Power Rating
Isolation
250
Optional in Plug-in Modules 2 & 3.
1 x 24V nominal (unregulated) excitation for external circuits &
transmitters. Rated at 19 to 28VDC at 20mA. Load 910Ω minimum.
Reinforced safety isolation from inputs and other outputs.
*see Linear output (above) for adjustable 0 to 10V Transmitter Power Supply
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
CAUTION: Only one Transmit PSU is supported by the instrument. Do not fit in
both positions simultaneously.
23.6 Communications
23.6.1.1 Supported Communication Methods
Plug-in Slot A
PC Configuration Socket
USB Port
RS485 or Ethernet
TTL socket fitted as standard beneath the case.
Requires the optional PC Configuration Lead for use.
Optional front mounted USB socket. Use with memory sticks only.
23.6.1.2 PC Configuration Socket
Functions
Type
Connection
Isolation
PC software for configuration, data extraction and profile creation.
Proprietary TTL level serial communications.
RS232 via PC Configurator Cable to RJ11 socket under case
Not isolated from SSR driver outputs. For bench configuration only.
CAUTION: The configuration lead/socket is not isolated from SSR Driver outputs.
It is not intended for use in live applications.
23.6.1.3 RS485
Functions
Type
Connection
Protocol
Slave Address Range
Bit rate
Bits per character
Parity
Isolation
Setpoint broadcast master or general communications slave to any
suitable Modbus RTU master device (inc. extraction of recordings,
transfer of configuration & profile files to or from the PC software).
RS485 Asynchronous serial communications module.
Locates in Option Slot A.
Connection via rear terminals 16-18 (refer to wiring diagram).
Modbus RTU slave or Modbus RTU setpoint broadcast master.
1 to 255 or setpoint master broadcast mode
4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200 bps.
10 or 11 (1 start and 1 stop bit, 8 data bits plus 1 optional parity bit).
None, even or odd (selectable).
240V reinforced safety isolation from all inputs and outputs.
23.6.1.4 Ethernet
Functions
Type
Connection
Protocol
Supported Speed
IP Address Allocation
Isolation
October 2014
General communications (inc. extraction of data recordings, transfer
of configuration & profile files to or from the PC software).
Ethernet communications module.
Locates in plug-in Slot A. Connection via RJ45 socket in case top.
Modbus TCP Slave only.
10BaseT or 100BaseT (automatically detected)
Via DHCP or manual configuration via PC Tool.
240V reinforced safety isolation from all inputs and outputs.
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
251
23.6.1.5 USB Socket
Functions
Extraction of data recordings, transfer of configuration & profiles files
to or from the PC software or direct to another controller.
USB Memory Stick with FAT32 formatted file system
Up to 250mA.
Locates in slot C. Provides an optional front mounted connector.
USB 1.1 or 2.0 compatible. Mass Storage Class.
Reinforced safety isolation from all inputs and outputs
Targeted Peripheral
Supply Current
Connection
Protocol
Isolation
23.7 Control Loop(s)
Control types
VMD Feedback
Tuning Types
Gain Scheduling
Proportional Bands
Automatic Reset
Rate
Manual Reset
Deadband/Overlap
ON/OFF Differential
Auto/Manual Control
Control Cycle Times
Setpoint Maximum
Setpoint Minimum
Setpoint Ramp
252
1 or 2 control loops, each with either standard PID (single or dual
control) or Valve Motor Drive (3-point stepping PID control).
2 internally linked cascade loops, with standard PID (single or
dual control) or Valve Motor Drive (3-point stepping PID control).
1 Ratio loop for combustion control.
Second input can provide valve position feedback or flow indication.
Feedback not required or used for control algorithm.
Pre-Tune, Auto Pre-Tune, Self-Tune and Manual Tuning with up to 5
PID sets stored internally for each control loop.
Automatically switches the 5 PID sets at user definable break-points
relating to the process variable or setpoint value.
Primary & Secondary (e.g. Heat & Cool) 1 to 9999 display units, or
On-Off control.
Integral Time Constant, 1s to 99min 59s and OFF
Derivative Time Constant, 1s to 99 min 59s and OFF
Bias added each control algorithm execution.
Adjustable 0 to 100% of output power (single primary control) or 100% to +100% of output power (dual primary & secondary control).
Overlap (+ve values) or Deadband (-ve values) between primary &
secondary proportional bands for Dual Control. Adjustable In display
units - limited to 20% of the combined proportional bands width.
ON/OFF switching differential 1 to 300 display units.
Selectable with “bumpless” transfer when switching between
Automatic and Manual control.
Selectable from 0.5 to 512 seconds in 0.1s steps.
Limited by Scaled Input Upper Limit and Setpoint Minimum.
Limited by Scaled Input Lower Limit and Setpoint Maximum.
Ramp rate selectable 1 to 9999 LSD’s (Least significant display
digits) per hour and OFF (infinite).
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
23.8 Alarms
Number of Alarms
Alarm Types
Duration & Start-up Inhibit
Alarm Hysteresis
Combination Alarm &
Events Outputs
Seven alarms are configurable for any supported type.
Process High; Process Low; PV-SP Deviation; Band; Control
Loop; Rate Of Signal Change per minute – all with optional
minimum duration and start-up inhibit.
Input Signal Break; % Recorder Memory Used, Control Power
High, Control Power Low.
Process High; Low; Deviation; Band; Loop; Rate Of Change alarms
have an optional start-up inhibit function and adjustable minimum
duration time from Off to 9999 seconds before activation.
CAUTION: If the duration is less than this time, the alarm will not
activate no matter what the value is.
Adjustable deadband from 1 LSD (Least significant display digit) to
full span (in display units) for Process, Band or Deviation Alarms.
Logically AND or OR any alarm or profile event (inc Profile running
or ended) to switch an output. The output can be set to switch on
when the condition is true, or when the condition is not true.
23.9 Profiler Option
Profile Limits
Segment Types
Time-base
Segment Time
Ramp Rate
Hold Segment Release
Profile Starting Point
Delayed Start
Profile End Action
Profile Abort Action
Power/signal Loss
Recovery Action
Auto-Hold
Profile Control
Profile Timing Accuracy
Profile Cycling
Sequence Repeats
Loop Back Segments
Segment Events
October 2014
Number of profiles = 64 maximum.
Total number of segments = 255 maximum (shared by all programs).
Ramp Up/Down over time, Ramp Rate Up/Down*, Step, Dwell, Hold,
Loop, Join A Profile, End or Repeat Sequence Then End.
*Ramp Rate is not available when profile controls two loops
All times are specified in hh:mm:ss (Hours, Minutes & Seconds).
Maximum segment time 99:59:59 hh:mm:ss. Use loop-back for
longer segments (e.g. 24:00:00 x 100 loops = 100 days).
Ramp Up or Down at 0.001 to 9999.9 display units per hour.
Release from menu key-press, At Time Of Day or via a Digital Input.
The first segment setpoint(s) begin from either the setpoint, or
current measured input value, of the controlled loop(s)
After 0 to 99:59 (hh:mm) time delay, or at specified day(s) & time.
Selectable from: Keep Last Profile Setpoint, Use Controller Setpoint
or Control Outputs Off.
Selectable from: Keep Last Profile Setpoint, Use Controller Setpoint
or Control Outputs Off.
Selectable from: Continue Profile, Restart Profile, Keep Last Profile
Setpoint, Use Controller Setpoint or Control Outputs Off.
Off or Hold if input >Band above and/or below SP for each segment.
Run, Manual Hold/Release, Abort or jump to next segment.
0.02% Basic Profile Timing Accuracy.
±<0.5 second per Loop, End or Join segment.
1 to 9999 or Infinite repeats per profile.
1 to 9999 or Infinite repeats of joined profile sequences.
1 to 9999 loops back to specified segment.
Events turn on for the duration of the segment. If events are set on
for End segments, the event states persist until another profile starts,
the user exits profiler mode, or the unit is powered down.
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
253
23.10 Data Recorder Option
Recording Memory
Recording Interval
Recording Capacity
1Mb non-volatile flash memory (data retained when power is off).
1; 2; 5; 10; 15; 30 seconds or 1; 2; 5; 10; 15; 30 minutes.
Dependant on sample rate and number of values recorded.
Example: 2 values can be recorded for 21 days at 30 second
intervals. More values or faster sample rates reduce the duration.
VARTA CR 1616 3V Lithium. Clock runs for >1 year without power.
Real Time Clock error <1second per day.
RTC Battery Type
RTC accuracy
23.11 Display
Display Type
160 x 80 pixel, monochrome graphic LCD with a dual color
(red/green) backlight.
66.54mm (W) x 37.42mm (H).
0 to 9, a to z, A to Z, plus @ ( ) ß ö - and _
Display Area
Display Characters
23.12 Operating Conditions
Location
Ambient Temperatures
Relative Humidity
Altitude
Supply Voltage & Power
(Mains versions)
Supply Voltage & Power
(Low voltage versions)
Front Panel Sealing
Intended for indoor use only.
0°C to 55°C (operating) and -20°C to 80°C (storage).
20% to 90% non-condensing.
Up to 2000m above sea level.
Mains Supply: 100 to 240V ±10% AC 50/60Hz. Consumption 20VA
Fuse rating: 1amp type-T / Slow-blow
AC Supply:
20 to 48V AC 50/60Hz. Consumption 5VA
DC Supply:
22 to 65V DC. Consumption 12W.
Fuse rating: 350milliamp type-T / Slow-blow
To IP66 (IP65 front USB connector). IP20 behind the panel.
(IP ratings are not tested for or approved by UL)
23.13 Conformance Norms
EMI
Safety Standards
CE: Complies with EN61326.
CE: Complies with EN61010-1 edition 3
UL, cUL to UL61010C-1. Pollution Degree 2, Installation Category II.
23.14 Dimensions
Front Bezel Size
Mounting
Panel & Cut-out Size
Depth Behind Panel
Ventilation
Weight
Terminals
254
1/4 DIN (96 x 96mm).
Plug-in with panel mounting fixing strap.
Panel must be rigid with Max thickness 6.0mm (0.25inch).
Cut-out 92mm x 92mm +0.5, -0.0mm.
117mm
20mm gap required above, below and behind.
0.65kg maximum.
Screw type (combination head).
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
24 Model Selection Guide
Instructions
- Select the desired Key Number. The arrow to the right marks the selection available.
- Make one selection each from Table I thru IX, using the column below the proper arrow.
- A dot ( ) denotes unrestricted availability. A letter denotes restricted availability.
Key Number
______ -
I
_
II
-
_
III
-
_
IV
-
_
KEY NUMBER Description
Controller Programmer
Controller Programmer with USB Port
Controller Programmer w/Recording
Controller Programmer w/Recording & USB Port
V
-
_
VI
-
_
VII
-
_
-
Selection
DCP251
DCP252
DCP253
DCP254
TABLE I - Power Supply
100 - 240 Vac
24 - 48 Vac or Vdc
0
2
TABLE II - Control Loops
One Control Loop
One Control Loop + Aux Input
Two Control Loops
1
A
2
TABLE III - Base Option 1
Relay Output
Relay Output + Linear DC Output
1
M
TABLE IV - Base Option 2
None
Relay Output + Linear DC Output
0
M
TABLE V - Output Slot 1
None
Relay
DC Drive for SSR
Linear DC Output
Triac Output
0
1
2
L
8
TABLE VI - Output Slot 2
None
Relay
DC Drive for SSR
Triac Output
Dual Relay Output
Dual SSR Driver Output
24Vdc Xmtr Power
0
1
2
8
9
Y
T
October 2014
VIII
IX
_
-
_
X
-
_
XI
-
_
Availability
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
255
Availability
DCP254
DCP253
DCP252
DCP251
TABLE VII - Output Slot 3
None
Relay
DC Drive for SSR
Triac Output
Dual Relay Output
Dual SSR Driver Output
Selection
0
1
2
8
9
Y
T
24Vdc Xmtr Power
TABLE VIII - Options A
Slot A Options
TABLE IX - Options C
Slot C
TABLE X
Manuals/Language
TABLE XI - Extended Warranty
Extended Warranty
No Selection
RS485 MODBUS RTU
Digital Input (Slot A)
Auxilary Input (Slot A)
Ethernet
0
1
3
4
5
No Selection
Multiple Digital Input
0
1
English Manual
French Manual
German Manual
Italian Manual
Spanish Manual
1
2
3
4
5
No Selection
Extended Warranty - 1 yr.
Extended Warranty - 2 yr.
0
1
2
Upgrade Kits/PC Software
Relay Module (Slot 1)
Relay Module (Slot 2 & 3)
10Vdc SSR Driver Module (Slot 1)
10Vdc SSR Driver Module (Slot 2 & 3)
Dual SSR Driver Module (Slot 2 & 3)
TRIAC Module (Slot 1)
TRIAC Module (Slot 2 & 3)
Linear (mA, Vdc) Module (Slot 1)
Dual Relay Module (Slot 2 & 3)
Dual SSR Output Module (Slot 2 & 3)
24V Transmitter Power Supply Module (slot 2 & 3)
RS485 Communication (Slot A)
Ethernet Communication (Slot A)
Digital Input Module (Slot A)
Basic Aux Input Module (RSP/Position) (Slot A)
Program Configuration/Profile Editing Software
256
Reference
51453391-517
51453391-518
51453391-502
51453391-507
51453391-519
51453391-503
51453391-508
51453391-504
51453391-510
51453391-519
51453391-511
51453391-512
51453391-521
51453391-513
51453391-515
51453391-522
DCP250 Controller Programmer Manual
October 2014
Sales and Service
For application assistance, current specifications, pricing, or name of the nearest Authorized Distributor, contact one
of the offices below.
ASIA PACIFIC
EMEA
AMERICAS
Honeywell Process Solutions,
(TAC) [email protected]
Honeywell Process Solutions,
Phone: + 80012026455 or
+44 (0)1344 656000
Honeywell Process Solutions,
Phone: (TAC) 1-800-423-9883 or
215/641-3610
(Sales) 1-800-343-0228
Australia
Honeywell Limited
Phone: +(61) 7-3846 1255
FAX: +(61) 7-3840 6481
Toll Free 1300-36-39-36
Toll Free Fax:
1300-36-04-70
Email: (Sales)
[email protected]
or
(TAC)
[email protected]
Email: (Sales)
[email protected]
or
(TAC)
[email protected]
China – PRC - Shanghai
Honeywell China Inc.
Phone: (86-21) 5257-4568
Fax: (86-21) 6237-2826
Singapore
Honeywell Pte Ltd.
Phone: +(65) 6580 3278
Fax: +(65) 6445-3033
South Korea
Honeywell Korea Co Ltd
Phone: +(822) 799 6114
Fax: +(822) 792 9015
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
For more information
To learn more about Panel mounted
Controllers and Programmers, visit
www.honeywellprocess.com
or contact your Honeywell Account Manager
Process Solutions
Honeywell
1250 W Sam Houston Pkwy S
Houston, TX 77042
Honeywell Control Systems Ltd
Honeywell House, Skimped Hill Lane
Bracknell, England, RG12 1EB
Shanghai City Centre, 100 Jungi Road
Shanghai, China 20061
www.honeywellprocess.com
57-77-25-18 Rev.1
October 2014
2014 Honeywell International Inc.